Category: General

  • Legal Awareness: Definition, Factors, Characteristics, and Examples in Society

    Definition of Legal Awareness – As a community living in a rule-of-law country, it is already a certainty for every member of the community to obey and comply with every applicable legal rule.

    The design of social interaction has a positive effect on society, although the will and interests differ from individual to individual. Everyone has different desires and interests. These differences in interests can lead to conflict in social life.

    This can affect environmental conditions that become dangerous. Therefore, to prevent conflicts or negative issues from occurring, it is necessary to have laws governing the development of attitudes towards legal awareness to create human relations in life. Instilling legal awareness in each individual increases compliance with applicable laws. Compliance and adherence to mandatory, regulatory and binding regulations or laws.

    The granting of rules to persons or individuals who are trained to enforce the rule of law. Compulsory use has a deterrent effect for violators. Because there are strict sanctions from the authorities to solve the problem.

    Legal awareness is needed by every community, from small children to adults. It aims to create order, peace, justice, and peace that can be realized in life or even interactions between communities. If you do not have legal awareness that has been embedded in every individual, then the desired goals will be difficult to achieve.

    For this reason, to provide education for you about the importance of legal awareness in social life, in this discussion we will summarize various related information about legal awareness that you can learn at home.

    You can see further discussion regarding legal awareness below!

    Definition of Legal Awareness

    Law is a rule of life created to achieve the values ​​desired by society. One of the values ​​sought by law is order. Order means obedience and obedience to behavior in carrying out what is prohibited and determined by law.

    Concretely, we can take a simple example of setting traffic rules. The purpose of the laws and regulations issued in the field of transportation is to regulate the operation of transportation. It also serves to protect the interests and rights of others.

    Promoting this type of legal knowledge is a challenge and a responsibility for all. A true culture of awareness and law abiding must be inculcated from an early age. Then the pedagogic element becomes the spearhead in introducing attitudes and habits to follow the rules that have been set.

    Educational institutions are the main social media that greatly influence a person’s character in the future. If law-abiding attitudes and behavior are ingrained from an early age, then the attitude of respecting and following the rules will take root and take root in society in the future. Of course, this is done by providing correct information about what not to do and what to do.

    The high level of legal awareness in the area creates a civilized society. Build legal awareness early on, you don’t have to wait until the violations and police action are over. Prevention is considered very important and can be started from the family as the smallest unit in society. We have to build this awareness in the family.

    With the awareness of this law, we do not witness violations to find an ideal life. Formal, non-formal and informal educational institutions must be united to develop legal awareness and intelligence from an early age.

    Legal education is not limited to formal schooling. But it can also be done outside of school. Children should be taught from an early age to study law. In time it gave them a sense of the need for the rule of law. Thus, legal awareness is formed from an early age.

    Legal Awareness can be interpreted as a person or group of people who are aware of applicable rules or laws. It serves to achieve order, peace, tranquility and justice in human relations. Without high legal knowledge, this goal is very difficult to achieve.

    This also happened to students, for example there were fights between students because students did not know the legal situation. As a result of weak legal awareness, people’s lives become restless and restless. Therefore we must develop a conscious approach to the law.

    Awareness of rights must be instilled early on in the family environment, namely so that each family member can practice understanding their rights and obligations towards the family, respecting the rights of other family members and fulfilling their obligations before demanding their rights. If possible, he is used to applying awareness that already exists in the wider environment, namely society and even the state.

    Definition of Legal Awareness According to Experts

    • Wignjosoebroto

    According to Wignjosoebroto, legal awareness is the will of the community to behave in accordance with existing laws. Legal awareness has two dimensions, namely cognitive and affective. Cognitive is knowledge of the laws that govern certain behaviors, both prohibited and prescribed according to predetermined laws. At the same time, effectiveness is a form of awareness that recognizes that laws must be obeyed.

    • Abdurrahman

    According to Abdurrahman, legal awareness is awareness of legal values ​​inherent in human life to submit and comply with applicable laws.

    • Soerjono Soekanto

    Meanwhile, according to Soerjono Soekanto, legal awareness follows law in various fields, including issues of knowledge, recognition and law enforcement. Legal awareness focuses on the existence of legal knowledge, from this legal knowledge arises recognition and respect for legal principles, then the law follows.

    Factors Triggering Legal Awareness

    • Legal Knowledge

    The first factor influencing legal awareness is knowledge of legal awareness. The rule of law must be widespread and legally enforceable. Then the recipe spread by itself and quickly became known to the public. People who violate do not necessarily break the law. This is because the public does not understand and know the laws and regulations that apply in the law itself. According to Ahmad Ubbe in Several Aspects of Legal Awareness of the Peusangan Society (Study on the Institutionalization of Marriage Law in 1974) (1988), knowledge of the existence of legal regulations is an indicator of minimal legal awareness.

    With legal knowledge, one knows what laws exist, what is prohibited and what is permitted. Law violations are often the result of a lack of legal knowledge. For example, there are people who hunt protected animals for their daily food. This happens because they do not know that these animals are rare animals that are prohibited by law from being hunted.

    • Legal Understanding

    The next factor affecting legal awareness is the public’s respect for the law. Thus, all the benefits of society depend on the provisions of the law itself. However, we also believe that compliance with the law stems from a fear of punishment or the consequences of breaking the law.

    Legal understanding is an indicator of legal awareness, which means not only knowing that the law exists, but also understanding its contents. If you understand the law, you can understand its content, purpose, benefits, and also the consequences of breaking it. The definition of law does not only refer to written law, but also unwritten law, such as the norms that apply in society.

    • Legal Attitude

    According to Soerjono Soekanto in the book Legal Awareness and Legal Compliance (1977), legal attitude is a tendency to accept the law because the law is deemed useful or useful if the law is obeyed. Legal attitudes result from individual and citizen assessments of applicable law.

    • Legal Conduct

    Legal behavior is the most important indicator of citizens’ legal awareness. The pattern of behavior of law-abiding citizens means that the law really applies and is effective in society. However, in the case of many violations, the law does not apply or has no effect on society. Thus, legal behavior becomes an indicator of legal awareness, which can be read from the degree of legal compliance of its citizens.

    • Strengthening Legal Awareness

    The purpose of raising awareness about legal issues is for people to understand the law according to their needs. Advocates who are in charge of raising awareness of legal issues in society are in direct contact with the community.

    Characteristics of Legal Awareness

    When the sense of justice in society is high, there will definitely be peace in society. The characteristics of high legal awareness in society are as follows:

    • Legal compliance or high legal compliance of all community groups.
    • Light violation of the law is guaranteed.
    • The community understands all their rights and obligations.
    • High level of trust in law enforcement
    • There is no discrimination in law enforcement.

     

    Ways To Increase Legal Awareness In Society

    All people need legal awareness, from small children to adults. This aims to create order, peace, justice and peace that can be realized in life or even in interactions between communities.

    Without legal awareness that exists in every individual, it becomes difficult to achieve the desired goals.

    The impact of weak legal awareness on people’s lives will be disorganized. Therefore, there are several ways to increase public legal awareness as follows:

    • Increase legal awareness from an early age

    The sense of justice must be realized since childhood, from the family environment. Each family member can educate himself to understand family rights and responsibilities.

    Able to perform tasks properly before demanding rights that must be received. As well as respecting the rights of other family members. If this is successful, it will create widespread legal awareness. Promote compliance with applicable laws.

    • Increasing legal awareness

    Community legal knowledge of various provisions that exist and apply in society is the most important thing in relation to the provisions of the rule of law. Indirectly it can affect the level of one’s knowledge of applicable laws.

    Regulations that are made and apply are automatically disseminated. Therefore, these rules can be quickly known by the public.

    However, there are several groups of people who are not aware of the applicable regulations. This often happens because people’s knowledge of laws and regulations is inadequate.

    • Increase legal understanding

    Legal understanding means that the person knows the content that comes from the regulations. To understand each law, it is not necessary to know its content and rules first. But can understand someone’s response to the rules that apply.

    • Conduct legal awareness dissemination

    Legal awareness is an important issue in the life of every person or social group. Therefore, the government must socialize the meaning of applicable law. So that people do not understand how important law is in life.

    • Increased legal compliance

    Public compliance with the law must be increased by ensuring that all activities do not violate applicable regulations. Obeying the law will lead to an orderly life and avoid negative things such as conflict.

    • Practicing legal actions

    Model of legal behavior is an important topic in growing legal awareness. This model indicates whether the set rules are executed correctly or not. Otherwise, as a law-abiding society, we must behave according to the rules.

    • Encouraging a legal attitude

    The legalistic attitude is the tendency of society to accept the law. Because the law is considered as something valuable and useful when the law is obeyed.

    • Improving public understanding The law protects the public

    Everyone definitely needs protection from others. Therefore, the duty of law is to protect common interests. A sense of protection can be achieved if people are able to comply with the law properly. So that people can avoid various threats that are around them.

    Various law violations in society are caused by several things. This often happens to certain groups of people who do not know or understand certain regulations.

    Many people do not understand legal language. This reduces public awareness of the law.

    When people know the content and purpose of legal norms, people know that the law exists. Community legal awareness is influenced by community legal knowledge of the applicable laws and regulations.

    Therefore, the government’s role is needed to increase legal awareness. Making people understand the importance of legal awareness.

    Example of Legal Awareness in Society

    Although not all law-abiding people have good legal awareness (sense of law), it is certain that people who understand the law always uphold law enforcement in Indonesia.

    Examples of good legal awareness behavior can be seen in the following examples:

    • There is a birth certificate.
    • Obey traffic rules.
    • Success in elementary school is mandatory.
    • Don’t do anything that violates the law.
    • Pay your taxes on time.
    • Maintain the good name of the nation and state
    • Comply and obey the rules set by the state, such as paying taxes and obeying traffic rules on the highway.
    • Mutual respect between citizens
    • Maintain a good name in society
    • Respect citizens
    • Follow and obey the rules of society
    • Act according to existing standards
    • Maintain public order, security and tranquility at all times.

    Conclusion

    This is a brief discussion of the definition of legal awareness. The discussion this time does not only discuss the definition of legal awareness, but also discusses further the triggering factors, their characteristics, and examples of legal awareness that Sinaumed’s can take a good look at.

    Understanding the meaning of legal awareness gives us additional knowledge about various regulations and applicable legal products that can have a good impact on ourselves and the surrounding environment to become obedient citizens and comply with applicable legal regulations.

    Thus a review of the notion of legal awareness. For Sinaumed’s who want to learn everything about the notion of legal awareness. And other law-related knowledge, you can visit sinaumedia.com to get related books.

    As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia always provides the best products, so you have the best and latest information for you. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

    Author: Pandu Akram

  • Legal Aid: Definition, History, Scope, Rights and Obligations

    Definition of Legal Aid – In the realm of law, a term is known to help someone who is exposed to legal problems free of charge without a penny as legal aid. Legal aid is given to anyone who has the right to receive legal aid with the aim of guaranteeing and fulfilling the rights of underprivileged people to get access and fair legal services without discrimination.

    In addition, legal aid is also provided to recipients of legal aid to realize every citizen’s constitutional rights to obtain equality before the law. The provision of legal assistance is also carried out so that the implementation of the law can be accepted evenly and ensures that all citizens have the right to implement legal justice throughout the territory of the Unitary Republic of Indonesia in an effective, efficient and accountable manner.

    For this reason, for the sake of realizing legal justice in Indonesia, there is a legal aid institution to realize all expectations of a fair law for all citizens and for friends of Sinaumed’s it is also important to know the presence of a legal aid agency if it is needed and requires legal assistance.

    In this discussion, we have also summarized various information related to the notion of legal aid that Sinaumed’s friends can use as additional insight in understanding the implementation of legal aid in Indonesia.

    You can see further discussion regarding the meaning of legal aid below!

    Definition of Legal Aid

    Legal aid is a guarantee of legal protection and equality before the law which is the constitutional right of every citizen. Because the constitution guarantees that every citizen has the right to equal treatment before the law, including the right to legal aid. Especially for people who have difficulty getting legal assistance, especially the poor.

    Based on Law no. 16 of 2011 Legal Aid Article 1(1) states that legal aid is free legal services provided by legal aid providers to legal aid recipients. Recipients of legal aid are individuals or groups of poor people who are unable to exercise their basic rights adequately and independently and face legal problems. Meanwhile, in SEMA Publication No. 10/2010, Article 27 of the Legal Aid Guideline stipulates that people who cannot afford the services of lawyers are entitled to legal aid services, especially women and children and people with disabilities to receive legal aid in accordance with applicable regulations.

    Legal aid is legal services provided free of charge by legal aid providers to legal aid recipients. Legal aid is organized with the aim of guaranteeing and realizing the rights of poor communities or groups of people to legal protection, so that the constitutional rights of every citizen are realized in accordance with the principle of equality before the law. The provision of legal aid is also intended to guarantee certainty in the implementation of legal aid evenly throughout the territory of the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia. and the implementation of an effective, efficient and accountable judiciary.

    History of Legal Aid

    If legal aid is defined as charity, legal aid has existed in Indonesia since the 16th century with the arrival of the Portuguese, Spanish, British and Dutch. The practice of legal aid can be seen from the practice of mutual cooperation in social life, where people who are faced with several problems ask for help from ordinary leaders to solve some of the problems. If law is interpreted broadly, customary assistance is also legal assistance.

    The history of legal aid shows that legal aid originally emerged from the generosity of the ecclesiastical elite to their followers. This generous relationship is also established between traditional leaders and local residents. Patron-client relationship model.

    History slowly developed the concept of legal aid. The basis of “generosity” began to be changed to “rights”. Any disenfranchised customer can get legal assistance. There is also a growing emphasis on the concept of legal aid. Legal aid is increasingly linked to political, economic and social rights. In the last century, legal aid began to be associated with social and political welfare. Legal aid has developed into a social movement.

    In daily practice, legal aid has also begun to spread its wings, not only in capitalist countries but also in socialist countries. Third world countries have also started to develop this legal aid. Conceptually, there is also a change from legal aid which was originally individual to legal aid of a structural nature (Lubis, 1986: 5-6).

    In Roman times, Patronus legal assistance was only motivated by the motivation to gain influence in society. In the Middle Ages, the issue of legal aid received a new impetus from the influence of Christianity, namely the desire of the people to fight over alms in the form of relief for the poor and at the same time civic values. The people’s appreciation of nobility and decency grew. From the French and American revolutions to today. The motive for providing legal aid is not only humanity for those who can’t afford it, but also political rights or civil liberties that originate from modern constitutions.

    • History of Legal Aid in Indonesia

    In Indonesian positive law, legal aid is regulated in Article 250 HIR. This article clearly regulates legal assistance for defendants in certain cases, namely cases that are punishable by death and/or life imprisonment, although in practice this article favors the Netherlands rather than Indonesia. And the appointed legal experts are obliged to provide legal assistance free of charge.

    Although limited, HIR can be interpreted as the beginning of the institutionalization of legal aid in Indonesian positive law. Prior to the procedural law, HIR regulations were still valid. In 1970, Law Number 14 of 1970 concerning Principles of Judicial Power was passed, Articles 35, 36 and 37 of which regulate legal aid.

    The Professor of Institutions founded the Rechts Hoge School in Jakarta in 1940 in the form of the Legal Aid Bureau or Legal Advisory Bureau. Zeylemaker. This office was established to provide legal advice to underprivileged communities and also to improve the operation of the Legal Clinic.

    In 1953, a kind of Office of Legal Counsel Sim Ming Hui or Tjandra naya was established at the Chinese school. This office was founded by Professor Ting Swan Tiong. Around 1962 Prof. Ting Swan Tiong proposed to the Faculty of Law, University of Indonesia that the Faculty of Law establish a Legal Advisory Office. This proposal was welcomed and a legal adviser’s office was established at the University of Indonesia. In 1968 the name was changed to the Consulting Institute and in 1974 to the Legal Consultation and Aid Institute.

    In other fields, Prof. Mochtar Kusumaatmadja spoke about the history of legal aid in Indonesia being inseparable from the role of two important figures, namely S. Tasrif, HH and Adnan Buyung Nasution, HH. poverty is part of the ideals of a rule of law state. To implement his idea, S. Tasrif asked the head of the court in Jakarta for a room that could later be used by lawyers for legal assistance. Adnan Buyung Nasution, HH In the 1969 Peradin III Congress, the idea of ​​the need to establish a Legal Aid Institute was put forward, which at the Congress finally approved the establishment of a Legal Aid Institute in Indonesia.

    This was followed by the establishment of LBH Jakarta, which was followed by the establishment of other LBHs throughout Indonesia. Not to mention, political organizations, trade unions and universities also participated in the formation of LBHs such as LBH Trisula, LBH MKGR, LBH Kosgoro etc. While LBHs existed throughout Indonesia, the Indonesian Legal Aid Foundation (YLBHI) was established with the aim of administering LBHs and functioning as its umbrella organization. YLBHI makes program guidelines that are carried out jointly in one coordination so that legal aid activities can develop nationally and even more concentrated in one coordination.

    • History Legal aid after the Second World War

    The Second World War caused important social changes in different societies, regardless of whether they were involved in the war or not. The war also led to the development of pre-war ideas.

    There have been changes in the field of law, especially legal aid. As a result, new policies emerged. When the state has an obligation to seek equal rights to legal and extrajudicial assistance. This policy was first implemented in England after the Second World War.

    Problems encountered during the war led to the consideration of new regulations to solve social problems faced by both civilians and the military.

    The military requested the creation of a Disputes Department, which became part of the Law Society. Where Lawyers Fund Divorce Proceedings. Sociologically, legal aid became a social problem after World War II when certain symptoms began to appear in society. These symptoms include:

    • When a new social group or class emerges in society that requires legal protection for its position.
    • When new laws are made, rights and obligations and agendas are created.
    • If social change is fast and widespread, the effect or consequence.

    Scope of Legal Aid

    Legal aid is given to recipients of legal aid for legal issues, both civil, criminal and state administration, both inside and outside the court. Provision of legal aid includes the use of lawyers, billing, representation, defense and/or the implementation of other legal actions that are in accordance with the legal interests of the legal aid recipient.

    Right to Legal Aid

    Based on Law no. 16 of 2011 Legal Aid Article 1(1) states that legal aid is free legal services provided by legal aid providers to legal aid recipients. Recipients of legal aid are individuals or groups of poor people who are unable to exercise their basic rights adequately and independently and face legal problems. Meanwhile, in SEMA Publication No. 10/2010, Article 27 of the Legal Aid Directive stipulates that people who cannot afford to pay for the services of a lawyer are entitled to legal aid services, especially women and children as well as persons with disabilities. applicable laws and regulations.

    Legal aid includes the use of power of attorney, collection, representation, defense and/or other legal actions that are in accordance with the legal interests of the legal aid recipient, the objectives of which are:

    • Guarantee and fulfill the rights of legal aid recipients to justice.
    • We exercise the constitutional rights of all citizens based on the principle of equality before the law.
    • It is ensured that the implementation of legal aid is carried out evenly throughout the territory of the country of Indonesia.
    • Building an effective, efficient and accountable judiciary.

    Article 25 SEMA No. 10 of 2010 states that legal aid services that can be provided by Legal Aid Institutions are information, advice and counseling as well as the provision of free attorney assistants to defend the interests of Legal Aid Institutions. the suspect/defendant if the defendant is unable to afford his own legal counsel.

    Rights and Obligations of Legal Aid Providers

    Legal aid providers are entitled to:

    • Recruitment of lawyers, assistants, lecturers and law faculty students;
    • Providing legal assistance;
    • Organizing legal advice, legal advice and other program activities related to the provision of legal aid;
    • namely obtaining a budget from the State for administering legal aid according to this Law;
    • Make statements or statements in court in accordance with statutory regulations to defend a matter that is his responsibility;
    • To obtain information and other information from the government or other authorities for the defense of cases; And
    • You are guaranteed legal protection, safety and protection when you provide legal assistance.

    In addition to rights, legal aid providers have obligations in the form of:

    • Report to the Minister about the Legal Aid Scheme;
    • Report every state budget used for legal aid provided under this Law;
    • Organizing legal aid training for advocates, advocates, lecturers,
    • Law Faculty students who have worked according to Article 9 letter a
    • Maintain the confidentiality of information, data and/or information obtained from legal aid recipients in relation to the case being examined, unless otherwise stipulated by law; And
    • Providing legal aid to recipients of legal aid according to the terms and procedures specified in this law until the case is finished, unless there is a strong reason for that.

    Legal aid providers cannot be prosecuted, both civilly and criminally, for providing legal assistance which is their responsibility in good faith, both inside and outside the courtroom, in accordance with Legal Aid Standards based on laws and regulations and/or the Advocate Code of Ethics.

    Recipients of legal aid

    Recipients of legal aid are individuals or groups of the poor. Recipients of legal aid are any person or group of poor people who are unable to adequately and independently fulfill their basic rights, namely the right to food, clothing, health care, education, employment and business and/or housing.

    Rights and obligations of recipients of legal aid

    Recipients of legal aid are entitled to:

    • Receiving legal assistance until the legal issue is resolved and/or the case is definitive, provided that the person receiving the legal aid does not cancel the power of attorney;
    • Obtain legal assistance in accordance with Legal Aid Standards and/or Code of Conduct;
    • Obtain information and documents related to the provision of legal aid in accordance with statutory regulations.

    Recipients of legal aid also have obligations in the form of:

    • Providing accurate evidence, information and/or cases to legal aid providers;
    • Helping smooth the provision of legal aid.

    Conclusion

    This is a brief discussion of the definition of legal aid. The discussion this time does not only discuss the definition of legal aid, but also discusses further the history, scope, rights and obligations of the givers and recipients of legal aid which Sinaumed’s can see carefully.

    Understanding the meaning of legal aid gives us additional knowledge about various legal processes that we can know and know that there are legal aid institutions that aim to realize equal rights in legal justice that is carried out in Indonesia.

    This is a review of the meaning of legal aid. For Sinaumed’s who want to learn everything about the meaning of legal aid. And other law-related knowledge, you can visit sinaumedia.com to get related books.

    As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia always provides the best products, so you have the best and latest information for you. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

    Author: Pandu Akram

     

  • Learning Subject Verb Agreement: Examples & Usage

    When learning English, of course you learn what is object, subject, verb, and so on. Of course, in learning English, many of us still have difficulty or are confused about changing verbs, especially if the sentences used are long. Verbs that change in English are certainly familiar to English learners. Verbs change because the subject of the sentence changes and the number of subjects in the sentence changes. This is what is known as the subject verb agreement , a verb that changes because the subject is singular or plural. See the full description below to further understand the subject verb agreement .

    Definition of the subject verb  

    Subject verb agreement is the adjustment of verb (verb) and subject (subject) of a sentence, whether it is singular or plural subject. Subjects can be nouns, pronouns, etc.

    The basic theory is that the singular verb will be used together with the singular subject . Consider the following examples:

     

    1. My cat always climbs the tree – singular subject and singular verb

    (My cat always climbs trees)

     

    2. These clothes are too big for me – plural subject and plural verb

    (These clothes are too big for me)

     

    3. She doesn’t like fruits – singular subject and singular verb

    (He doesn’t like fruits)

     

    Generally, singular verbs in the simple present tense will be in the basic form with an affix added at the end of -s or -es. However, in plural verbs , the affix -s or -es is not added, but only uses the basic form or the dictionary. This rule also applies to third-person subjects such as people’s names, or they (they), we (us), he she (he) and it (it). This does not apply to subjects I (me) and you (you).

    However, the subject of a single sentence is not added with the suffix -s or -es in the subject I (I) and yu (you) and follows the rules of plural verbs. Unlike the past tense, the form of a singular or plural verb in a sentence is all in the form of a verb two.

    Actually there are more points that can make you confused when faced with a subject verb agreement . For example, the subject used is a collective noun , plural form and indefinite pronoun . Collective nou n is a noun that is used when we want to express the name of a group or something that is more than one person.

    This noun can be singular or plural, of course this depends on the context of the sentence. Find various examples of verbs and their meanings in the Complete English-Indonesian-Indonesian Dictionary Accompanied by Tenses-Regular Verbs, Irregular Verbs below.

    Consider the following examples:

    1. The Basketball team is going on vacation now 

    (the members of the basketball team are on vacation together now)

     

    2. The Basketball team are going on vacation now 

    (the members of the basketball team are on their respective holidays now)

     

    From the example above, it can be seen that when members of a group act individually, the subject is plural with a plural verb as well, as can be seen in the second example. Meanwhile, when members of the basketball team do the same thing simultaneously, the noun above is a subject with a singular verb.

    Book of Recommendations Related to Subject Verb Agreement

    You can read this book to make it easier to understand the material in English. This book is also accompanied by interesting illustrations so that learning English can be more enjoyable.

     

    Hello! Easy English: English is Easy!

    English is a language that must be mastered by all human beings because it is widely used and taught formally in all educational institutions in this world.

    Of course, this makes the existence of supporting books in English an absolute must for those who are learning English. Of course this book includes all the grammar, vocabulary, phrases and conversations that will support our English speaking skills. This book is just a learning medium, but it all comes back to all readers.

    Those who are consistent and plan to master English, surely can!

    https://sinaumedia.com/products/hello-easy-english-language-english-itu-mudah

     

    The rules on the subject verb agreement

    The subject and verb must be related in the plural or singular. Here are some of the rules used in the subject verb agreement.

    A. If the subject used is singular

    If the subject used is singular, then the verb used must also be singular. But there are exceptions, if using the subject they (they), then use a plural verb. To better understand the explanation regarding subject verbs, Sinaumed’s must have an English foundation first which can be learned through the book 30 Minutes of Good English for Class 2 SD/MI.

    Example:

    1. He writes a letter every week. 

    In this sentence, ‘he’ acts as the subject and ‘writes’ acts as the verb.

     

    2. They are currently in a social media role at the organization 

    (they are currently in a social media role at the organization)

    In this sentence, ‘they’ acts as a subject and ‘are’ acts as a verb.

     

    If the subject is used in the plural

    If the subject is used in the plural, then the verb used is also in the plural.

    Example:

    1. They write a letter every week. 

    (They write letters every week)

    In this sentence, ‘they’ acts as a subject and ‘write’ acts as a verb.

     

    2. The students eat their lunch at the cafeteria. 

    (students eat their lunch in the cafeteria)

    In this sentence, ‘the students’ acts as a subject and ‘eat’ acts as a verb.

    Keep in mind again, in plural verbs (plural verbs) the verb does not add the affix -s or -es, but only uses the basic form or the dictionary. Therefore, in the example above, even though the subject is plural, the verb ‘write’ does not add -s after it.

    To make the process of learning English easier, you don’t always have to memorize formulas or patterns. In the book 30 Minutes of Being Proficient in English for Class XI High School / MA below, you can learn English with interesting and also fun exercises.

    C. If the subject of the sentence contains two or more nouns or pronouns

    If the subject of the sentence contains two or more nouns or pronouns connected by ‘and’, then use a plural verb.

    Example:

    1. The medical student and the economic student write a journal every year.

    (students majoring in medicine and students majoring in economics write journals every year)

    The subject in this sentence is ‘the medical student’ and ‘the economic student’.

     

    2. Michael and his dog run on the street every morning. 

    (Michael and his dog run down the street every morning)

    The subject of this sentence is ‘Michael’ and ‘his dog’.

     

    D. When there is only one subject and there is more than one verb

    When there is only one subject and there is more than one verb, the verb must follow the context of the sentence related to the subject.

    Example:

    1. Interviews are one way to collect data and allow the interviewer to gain a deeper understanding of the participants. 

    (Interview is one way to collect data and allows the interviewer to gain a deeper understanding of the participant)

    The verbs in this sentence are ‘are’ and ‘allow’.

     

    2. Jennie walk through the art gallery and admire the beauty of the painting 

    (Jennie walks through the art gallery and admires the beauty of the paintings)

    The verbs in this sentence are ‘walk’ and ‘admire’.

    E. When a phrase is between a subject and a verb

    When a phrase is between a subject and a verb, the verb must still match the subject, not the noun or pronoun in the phrase that follows the subject in the sentence.

    Example:

    1. The student, as well as student council members are excited. 

    (students, including the student council members, are very excited)

    In this sentence, ‘student’ acts as a subject and ‘is’ acts as a verb.

     

    2. The focus of the discussion was nine participants who were selected purposively.

    (The focus of the discussion this time is nine participants who were selected purposively)

    In this sentence, ‘the focus’ acts as the subject and ‘was’ acts as the verb.

     

    F. If there are two or more nouns or pronouns that are more than one

    If there are two or more nouns or pronouns that are more than one and connected with ‘or’ or ‘nor’ then use a singular verb. Find various examples of sentences in the form of conversations in the book Easy English Conversation: Everyone Can Speak English.

    Example:

    1. The leader or the manager approves my proposal before proceeding to the next step. 

    (Leader or manager approve my proposal before following up to the next step)

    In this sentence, ‘the leader or the manager’ acts as the subject and ‘approves’ acts as the verb.

     

    G.  If there is a compound subject that contains nouns or pronouns both singular and plural

    If there is a compound subject that contains both singular and plural nouns or pronouns joined by the word ‘or’ or ‘nor’, then the verb must correspond to the part of the subject closest to the verb. This rule is also known as the ‘rule of proximity’.

    Example:

    1. The student or student council members read a book every day. 

    (Students or student council members read books every day)

    In this sentence, ‘the student or student council’ acts as a subject and ‘read’ acts as a verb.

     

    2. The student council members or the student reads a book every day. 

    (The osis members or students read books every day)

    In this sentence, ‘The student council members or the student’ acts as the subject and ‘reads’ acts as a verb.

     

    H. A word or phrase

    Words or phrases ‘each’, ‘each one’, ‘everybody’, ‘everyone’, ‘somebody’, ‘someone’ and others include the singular subject and the verb used is also the singular form.

    Example:

    1. Everybody in this room was willing to be recorded 

    (Everyone in this room is willing to be recorded)

    In this sentence, ‘everybody’ acts as a subject and ‘was’ acts as a verb.

     

    2. Neither alternative proposals were approved. 

    (No alternative proposals approved)

    In this sentence, ‘neither’ acts as a subject and ‘were’ acts as a verb.

     

    3. I will offer a $10 gift card to everybody who participates in the survey.

    (I will be offering a $10 gift card to everyone who participates in the survey)

    In this sentence, ‘everybody’ acts as a subject and ‘participates’ acts as a verb.

     

    4. No one was available to accompany me at the graduation party.

    (No one can accompany me to the graduation party)

    In this sentence, ‘no one’ acts as a subject and ‘was’ acts as a verb.

     

    I. If there are nouns that include non-counts nouns

    If there are nouns that include non-counts nouns, you must use a singular verb. Non count nouns or uncountable nouns are nouns that cannot be counted, which are abstract quantities. Of course, none of these nouns have plural forms. Usually, these uncountable nouns appear more frequently in academia. Some examples of non-counts such as: diabetes (diabetes), Arabic (Arabic), English (English), swimming (swimming), dancing (dancing), water (air), ice (ice), fire (fire), work ( work), homework (homework), education (education), research (research), milk (milk), rice (rice), tennis (tennis), soccer (soccer).

     

    Example:

    1. Education is one of the keys to success.

    (education is one of the keys to success)

    In this sentence, ‘education’ acts as a subject and ‘is’ acts as a verb.

     

    2. Diabetes affects everyone in the world whether they are young or old.

    (diabetes affects everyone in the world whether young or old)

    In this sentence, ‘diabetes’ acts as the subject and ‘affects’ acts as the verb.

     

    3. The information I found in the magazine was important. 

    (The information I found in the magazine is important)

    In this sentence, ‘the information’ acts as a subject and ‘was’ acts as a verb

     

    J. If there are nouns that can be counted or called countable nouns

    If there are nouns that can be counted or are called countable nouns , then they are considered as a plural form and of course followed by a plural verb. Countable nouns can be separated into units that can be counted, so some of them have both singular and plural forms.

    However, most of the English nouns are countable nouns. For example, one book, two pens, one laptop, two laptops. There are also some countable nouns which only have the plural form. For example, earnings (income), goods (goods), surroundings (environment), contents (content), and valuables (valuable).

    Example:

    1. Locally produced goods have good quality and good price.

    (Locally produced goods are of good quality and good price)

    In this sentence, ‘locally produced goods’ acts as a subject and ‘have’ acts as a verb

     

    2. The earnings for the third quarter were less than expected.

    (Revenue for the third quarter fell short of expectations)

    In this sentence, ‘the earnings’ acts as a subject and ‘was’ acts as a verb

     

    K. If there is a sentence that begins with the word ‘there is’ or ‘there are’

    If a sentence begins with the word ‘there is’ or ‘there are’, then the subject must follow the verb. The thing to remember is that ‘there’ is not a subject, so the verb agrees with what follows the verb.

    Example:

    1. There are many factors that affect a child’s intelligence. 

    (There are many factors that affect a child’s intelligence)

    In this sentence, ‘are’ acts as a subject and ‘factors’ acts as a verb

     

    2. There is little financial assistance.

    (There is a little financial assistance)

    In this sentence, ‘is’ acts as a subject and ‘financial assistance’ acts as a verb.

    Find other examples of subject verbs in the Phrasal Verb Dictionary: English Phrasal Verb Dictionary, which is a master book as well as a guide that Sinaumed’s can use to better understand various verb variants.

    Example of subject verb Agreement

    To find out whether you understand enough about the subject verb agreement, you can do the questions below.

    1. His shirt __ torn during the movie. 

    (His clothes are torn during the film)

     

    2. Nami, together with her husband __ the guests of the party.

    (Nami, together with her husband greeting` the guests at the party)

     

    3. The judge __ not convinced. 

    (Judge not sure)

     

    4. The lies __ always hard to forget.

    (Lies are always hard to forget)

     

    5. To complain __ never the solution to any problems.

    (Complaining is never the solution to every problem)

     

    6. A pack of tigers __ approaching the camp.

    (a group of lions approaches the camp)

     

    7. Lying __ not always considered a bad thing.

    (lying is not always considered a bad thing)

     

    The answer to the subject verb agreement

     

    1. His shirts (were) torn during the movie. 

    (His clothes are torn during the film)

     

    2. Nami, together with her husband (greets) the guests of the party.

    (Nami, together with her husband greeting` the guests at the party)

     

    3. The judge (was) not convinced.

    (Judge not sure)

     

    4. The lies (are) always hard to forget.

    (Lies are always hard to forget)

     

    5. To complain (is) never the solution to any problems.

    (Complaining is never the solution to every problem)

     

    6. A pack of tigers (was) approaching the camp.

    (a group of lions approaches the camp)

     

    7. Lying (was) not always considered a bad thing.

    (lying is not always considered a bad thing)

    Articles Related to Subject Verb Agreement

  • Learn Regular Verbs & Examples of Regular Verbs

    Regular Verb – Learning a foreign language in today’s era is certainly a must. The entry of the world into the era of globalization has made it easier for people to interact and communicate with foreigners. Of course, we don’t want to be embarrassed when we speak a foreign language, do we? That is why it is important to hone foreign languages ​​from now on.

    Those of you who are just starting to learn English must first understand the use of verbs in English. For those of you who are learning about tenses or the basic forms of verbs and their language structure, then you will feel familiar with the terms Regular Verb and Irregular Verb.

    Before discussing more about Regular Verbs, it would be better if you were able to first understand the basic components of a Verb. Unlike in Indonesian where all verbs have the same form to express past and present conditions, in English there are basic differences in the verb forms to show present, past, and past which are still being done now.

    The division of verbs in English is divided into three, namely Infinitive (V1), Simple Past (V2), and Past Participle (V3). Infinitive is the basic word form of a verb (not bound by past or present tense). Simple Past is a verb form to describe past events. While the Past Participle is a verb to describe past events that have occurred and have actually been completed.

    The past participle can function as an adjective or as part of a verb. So, it’s clear about the differences in the forms of verbs in English? To understand it better, please refer to the following article which will discuss in depth and detail the meaning of Regular Verbs, the language structure of Regular Verbs, examples of Regular Verbs, as well as exercises (questions and discussion) regarding Regular Verbs.

    A. Definition of Regular Verbs

    Understanding Regular Verb is a regular verb form that has definite rules in forming the simple past tense and past participle of the verb. In English, the “definite” rule refers to adding “-ed” or “-d” to the verb base to make the past tense.

    Find other examples of verbs in the Phrasal Verb Dictionary: English Phrasal Verb Dictionary, which is a master book as well as a guide that Sinaumed’s can use to better understand various verb variants.

    B. Examples of Regular Verbs

    In this section you will learn and find out examples of Regular Verbs and their meanings:

    Base Form (V1) Simple Past

    (V2)

    Past Participle (V3) What is the meaning of the word
    Accept accepted Has Accepted Accept
    arrived arrived Has Arrived Arrive
    avoid avoided Has Avoided stay away
    Borrow Borrowed Has Borrowed Borrow
    call called Has Called Call
    deliver Delivered Has Delivered Deliver
    earn Earned Has Earned Get
    Gather Gathered Has Gathered Gather
    happened Happened Has Happened Happen
    improve Improved Has Improved Repair
    increase increased Has Increased Increase
    likes Liked Has Liked Like
    Listen Listened Has Listened Listen
    Miss Missed Has Missed Feeling lost/Missing
    open opened Has Opened Open
    pass passed Has Passed Pass
    Prepare prepared Has Prepared Prepare
    Reject rejected Has Rejected Reject
    Save Saved Has Saved Save / Save
    Wow Sewed Has Sewed Sew
    Treats treated Has Treated Treat
    Terrify Terrified Has Terrified Scare
    Travel traveled Has Traveled Travel / Sightseeing
    Vanish Vanished Has Vanished Eliminate / Eliminate
    Yawn Yawned Has Yawned Evaporate
    wonder Wondered Has Wondered Curious

     

    C. Rules (Formulas) for Making the Past Form of Regular Verbs

    In simple terms, Regular Verbs can be used to form a verb that expresses present or past events. Here’s a detailed explanation:

    1. If the Regular Verb is used to describe events that are taking place ” now

    If a Regular Verb is used to describe an event that is taking place ” now “, then only Verb 1 is used or the original verb without the affix “ed” or “d”. Or you can also use the affix “-ing” when referring to events that are being carried out at the time the sentence is stated.

    Example :

    “I am studying (V1+ing) Economy right now as my major in Oxford University”

    (I am currently studying economics as my field of study at Oxford University)

    “I run (V1) across that bridge every morning to make my body stay fit and healthy”

    (I run across that bridge every morning so my body is always fit and healthy)

    – If a Regular Verb is used to describe past or past events, then the verb used must be added with the ending “ed” or “d” to show that the sentence stated is past. A simple marker of a sentence that states the past is containing adverbs such as yesterday, last month, last night, this morning, seconds ago, and many more.

    Find various examples of verbs and their meanings in the Complete English-Indonesian-Indonesian Dictionary Accompanied by Tenses-Regular Verbs, Irregular Verbs below.

    Example:

    “I studied Math so hard last night because I’m so terrible at Math and I don’t want to fail the exam”

    (I studied math really hard last night because I’m really bad at math and I don’t want to fail the exam)

    In the example above, because the sentence contains a marker of the past tense, namely ” last night “, so in phrase 1 the sentence above (I studied Math so hard) the past form of the verb “study” is used, namely ” studied “. Only Phrase 1 in the sentence above has the verb changed to the past tense. Because Phrase 2 (I’m so terrible at Math) and Phrase 3 (I don’t want to fail the exam) are not affected by the presence of the past marker “last night” due to the presence of conjunctions or connecting words, namely ” becauseandand

    Then if you want to express past events using Regular Verbs, when should you add the affix “ed” or “d” to the verb? To find out, see the following explanation:

    2. Adding “ed” to most verbs:

    Example :

    – Jump > Jumped

    “She jumped into the pool this morning to save her beloved cat” – Past Tense

    (He jumped into the pool this morning to save his beloved cat)

    – Walk > Walked

    “Adam walked her home from the office last night ” – Past Tense

    (Adam drove him home from work last night)

    3. If the verb ends with [consonant-vowel-consonant], then double the last consonant and add “ed” :

    Example :

    – Chats > Chatted

    “I chatted Jim last night to let him know that language class is cancelled” – Past Tense

    (I messaged Jim last night to let him know the language class is out)

    – Stop > Stopped

    “Daria stopped someone to steal snacks at that supermarket this morning when we passed by on the way to college” – Past Tense

    (Daria stopped someone from stealing snacks at the supermarket this morning as we were passing by on our way to college)

    4. If the last consonant letter of the verb is “w”, “x”, or “y”, then immediately add “ed” without needing to double the last consonant:

    Example :

    – Sew > Sewed

    “Chika’s mother sewed a beautiful gown that she wears today” – Past Tense

    Chika’s mother sewed a beautiful dress for Chika to wear today

    – Play > Played

    “I played piano on Taylor Swift’s concert tour last year ” – Past Tense

    I played the piano on Taylor Swift’s concert tour last year

    – Fix > Fixed

    “Mr. Andrio fixed my broken car when I was trapped on the high road in the middle of the night 2 days ago ” – Past Tense

    (Mr. Andrio repaired my car which was damaged when I was stuck in the middle of the night on the highway two days ago)

    5. If the verb ends with the letter “e”, then add the suffix “d” to the verb:

    Example :

    – Introduced > Introduced

    “She introduced her brother to us yesterday ” – Past Tense

    (He already introduced his sister to us yesterday)

    – Dance > Danced

    “Anita danced gracefully in the audition of The Dance Icon Indonesia competition a week go ” – Past Tense

    (Anita danced gracefully when she auditioned for The Dance Icon Indonesia competition last week)

    6. If the verb ends with [consonant + “y”], then change the letter “y” to “i” and add “ed” :

    Example :

    – Cry > Cried

    “I cried all night after my brother’s funeral” – Past Tense

    (I cried all night after my sister’s funeral was over)

    – Marry > Married

    “Antonio told me last night that he wants to get a divorce after being married for two years with his wife” – Past Tense

    (Antonio told me last night that he wants a divorce after two years of marriage to his wife)

    7. If the verb ends with [vowel + “l”], then double the last consonant and add “ed” :

    Example :

    – Travel > Traveled

    “Harris traveled around Bali 3 days a go ” – Past Tense

    (Harris traveled around Bali 3 days ago)

    To make the process of learning English easier, you don’t always have to memorize formulas or patterns. In the book 30 Minutes of Being Proficient in English for Class XI High School / MA below, you can learn English with interesting and also fun exercises.

    D. Practice on regular verbs

    1. Last month I _____ all my Major in this college

    • Revise
    • Revises
    • Revised
    • Revised

    2. Karina _____ her teeth every morning

    • brushes
    • Brushed
    • brushes
    • Brushed

    3. She _____ by the croissants and pastries shop everyday before going to work

    • Stop
    • Stopes
    • stopped
    • Stopied

    4. Their assistants _____ their clothes every Monday?

    • cleaned
    • clean
    • cleans
    • cleans

    5. Students please _____ to me!

    • Listened
    • Listens
    • Listen
    • Listenies

    6. He usually _____ his flower shop at 7 AM

    • opened
    • Opens
    • Opens
    • open

    7. My father _____ his car outside just 10 minutes ago

    • parks
    • Park
    • parked
    • Parkes

    8. It _____ so hard last year

    • Rain
    • Rained
    • Rains
    • Raines

    9. Last night, my father helped my sister to _____ the cake for my Mom’s birthday

    • decorated
    • Decorated
    • Decorates
    • decorate

    10. Our family _____ Japan in 2010

    • visit
    • Visits
    • Visited
    • visited

    11. Carla _____ us his beautiful home last weekend

    1. shows
    2. Showed
    3. Showd
    4. Show

    12. I _____ very high in the High Jump Finals last week

    • Jumped
    • Jump
    • Jumps
    • jumps

    13. Daniel wants to _____ in Google since he graduated from college

    • Worked
    • Works
    • Work
    • Works

    14. My family _____ in Surabaya from 2002 to 2012

    • Lived
    • Lives
    • Lives
    • live

    15. All of the trainees _____ really hard to get chosen as the member of the new boyband

    • Practices
    • practice
    • Practiced
    • Practiced

    16. My brother _____ me to accompany him to go to the cinema last Saturday

    • Want
    • Wants
    • wanted
    • Wants

    17. The plane _____ in the airport 15 minutes ago

    • arrived
    • Arrives
    • arrived
    • arrived

    18. He _____ my Harry Potter’s book two weeks before we graduated

    • Borrowed
    • Borrows
    • Borrow
    • Borrowed

    19. Since he went to California last summer, I really _____ to talk to him by phone every night

    • Miss
    • Misses
    • Missed
    • Miss d

    20. On Saturdays, I usually _____ cakes with my mother

    • Baked
    • Bakes
    • Bake
    • Bakies

    E. Answers to regular verbs questions

    1. C. Revised

    Revise > Revised (using the second form of the verb (V2) to show the past because there is an adverb “last month” in the sentence).

    2. A. Brushes

    Because there is an adverb “every morning” which shows activities carried out routinely, the Regular Verb is used in the form:

    Infinitive (V1) + s / es (because the subject is singular: Karina).

    3. A. Stop

    Because there is an adverb “everyday” which shows a habit, the Regular Verb is used in the form:

    Infinitive (V1) + s / es (because the subject is singular : She)

    4. D. Cleans

    Because there is an adverb “every Monday” which indicates a habit that is done repeatedly, the Regular Verb is used in the form:

    Infinitive (V1) + s / es (because the subject is singular : Assistant).

    5. C. Listen

    Because the subject in the sentence is in the plural, namely “students” and in the sentence there is no adverb indicating the past tense, the  infinitive (V1) is used.

    6. B. Opens

    Because there is an adverb “usually” which indicates a repeated habit, the Regular Verb is used in the form:

    Infinitive (V1) + s / es (because the subject is singular: He).

    7. C. Parked

    Park > Parked (using the second form of the verb (V2) to show the past because there is an adverb “10 minutes ago” in the sentence).

    8. B. Rained

    Rain > Rained (using the second form of the verb (V2) to show the past because there is an adverb “last year” in the sentence).

    9. D. Decorate

    Even though the sentence contains an adverb that shows the past, namely “last night”, but because there is a “to” before the word “decorate” which shows a to-infinitive. The characteristic of to-infinitives is always followed by the first form of the verb (V1). The formula is:

    “to” + V1 (infinitive)

    10. D. Visited

    Visit > Visited (using the second form of the verb (V2) to show the past because there is an adverb “in 2010” in the sentence).

    11. B. Showed

    Show > Showed (using the second form of the verb (V2) to show the past because there is an adverb “last weekend” in the sentence).

    12. A. Jumped

    Jump > Jumped (using the second form of the verb (V2) to show the past because there is an adverb “last week” in the sentence).

    13. C. Work

    Using the first form of the Regular Verb (V1) because there is a “to” before the word “work” which indicates a to-infinitive. The characteristic of to-infinitives is always followed by the first form of the verb (V1).

    14. A. Lived

    Live > Lived (using the second form of the verb (V2) to show the past because there is an adverb “from 2002 to 2012” in the sentence).

    15. B. Practice

    Because the subject in the sentence is in the plural, namely “trainees” and in the sentence there is no adverb indicating the past tense, the  infinitive (V1) is used.

    16. C. Wanted

    Want > Wanted (using the second form of the verb (V2) to show the past because there is an adverb “last Saturday” in the sentence).

    17. A. Arrived

    Arrive > Arrived (using the second form of the verb (V2) to show the past because there is an adverb “15 minutes ago” in the sentence).

    18. A. Borrowed

    Borrow > Borrowed (using the second form of the verb (V2) to show the past because there is an adverb “two weeks before we graduated” in the sentence).

    19. A.Miss

    The first form of the verb (V1) is used, namely “miss” because “miss” here refers to the description of the time “every night”. The past adverb “last summer” shows the adverb of time for Phrase 1 which is separated by the conjunction “since”.

    20. C.Bake

    Because the subject of the sentence is “I” and there is no adverb indicating the past tense in the sentence,  the infinitive (V1) is used.

    So, that’s an explanation of regular verbs, starting from their meaning, forms, rules, and examples of questions and answers. Can Sinaumed’s use the correct regular verbs in English? Sinaumed’s really needs to practice a lot and get used to English so that it is easier to master it. Because learning languages ​​will be more effective if you are used to using and practicing them.

  • Learn Phrasal Verbs & Examples of Phrasal Verbs

    Those of you who are currently studying English certainly hope to master it soon so you can communicate fluently, right? So, have you ever heard of and know about Phrasal Verbs before?

    Phrasal verbs are an important part of English because they are often used in verbal or written conversations. Of course, you often come across when reading English novels or when watching English films, many sentences contain verbs with more than one word, such as “watch out”, “pull over”, “clean up”, and so on. Such verbs are called Phrasal Verbs .

    If you are still not familiar with the term Phrasal Verb, don’t worry because through this article you will find out in detail and comprehensively what a phrasal verb is, the types and characteristics of phrasal verbs, examples of phrasal verbs and their use in a sentence, as well as questions and discussion.

    1. Definition of Phrasal Verbs

    According to traditional English grammar, the definition of a phrasal verb is:

    a phrasal verb is a combination of two or three words from different grammatical categories – a verb and a particle, such as an adverb or a preposition – to form a single semantic unit on a lexical or syntactic level

     So, the practical definition of a phrasal verb is a verb consisting of two words, namely a combination of a verb and a preposition or a combination of a verb and an adverb (adverb) which forms a unique meaning. If two words in a phrasal verb are separated, they will have a different meaning compared to when the two words are merged into one in a phrasal verb.

    Well, very unique, isn’t it a phrasal verb? Therefore, it will be an advantage if you master phrasal verbs and apply them in everyday conversations to practice your English skills.

    To be able to distinguish between the various existing tenses, Sinaumed’s can also read the book Tenses & Vocabulary That’s Easy which is below.

    2. Examples of Phrasal Verbs

     

    • to break in

    (The main verb of the form above is ” to break “. ” in ” is a preposition. So a phrasal verb is formed, namely ” to break in “, which has a different meaning from ” to break ” which stands alone without the addition of ” in “)

    • To turn up – increase the sound volume
    • To turn down – lowers the volume
    • To blow up – to blow up
    • To put on – put on (clothes)
    • To cut back – reduce
    • To take off – take off
    • To wake up – to wake up
    • To drop off – to drop off
    • To drop in – stop by
    • To pick up – to pick up
    • To give up
    • To give in – give up
    • To get on – to enter a vehicle or to express curiosity
    • To go on with – continue
    • To face up to – to face
    • To look after – look after or care for
    • To make up – to make or repair
    • To find out – to find out
    • To clear up – clean up
    • To put off – put off
    • To stand up for – to support or defend
    • To turn (switch) on – to turn on an electric device
    • To turn (switch) off – turns off an electrical appliance
    • To look forward to – looking forward with enthusiasm

    Indeed, most Phrasal Verbs that are often used consist of two words, but many phrasal verbs are composed of three words , as in the following example:

    • To put up with – accept sincerely
    • To check up on – check
    • To cut down on – reduce

    Examples of Phrasal Verbs in a Sentence

    You need to know that Phrasal Verbs are also known as compound verbs. And in the example that will be presented, the verb which is a Phrasal Verb will be in bold.

    • Damn your principles! Stick to your party.” (Prime Minister Benjamin Disraeli)
    • “When people find out you are an actress, they Google you.” (Actress Laverne Cox)
    • “Do I exaggerate? Boy, do I, and I would do it more if I could get away with it.” (Comedian David Sedaries)
    • “Meditation helps me to calm down .” (Singer Lady Gaga)
    • “Madelaine car always breaks down at least twice a month. She really should buy a new one.”
    • Put off your shoes when you enter the garage. I have already swept the floor.”
    • “Here is the registration form. You have to fill it in .”

    It should be remembered again that Phrasal Verb consists of a verb and the word that accompanies it. The accompanying word (or words) are classified as prepositions or adverbs. The following is an example of a Phrasal Verb with accompanying words in the form of prepositions or adverbs:

    • “Did you walk along the street by yourself last night?”

    (In the example above, “walk along” is a Phrasal Verb where “walk” is the main verb, while “along” is a preposition. )

    • “Maria and I only went away to Philadelphia for two days. But, both of our parents got so mad at us.”

    (In the example above, the word “away” does not represent a prepositional phrase. So “away” is an adverb )

    • “Rebecca can stand in for me next month.”

    (In the example above, the word ” in ” is an adverb while the word ” for ” is a preposition because it denotes a prepositional phrase “for me”)

    3. Transitive and Intransitive Phrasal Verbs

    Some Phrasal Verbs are Transitive ( ie have an object ) and some are Intransitive (ie do not have an object ). The following presents examples of Phrasal Verbs which include Transitive and Intransitive. In this example, those that are Phrasal Verbs will be in bold while those that are objects will be italicized .

    Learn how to pronounce the various adverbs above to make it easier for you to read through the English Pocket Dictionary (2021), which is accompanied by thousands of entries, grammar, and much more.

    Examples of transitive phrasal verbs

    • Fill in this registration form thoroughly and correctly in order to pass the selection.”
    • “I want to go over these plans with you again.”
    • “I will look into your papers as fast as possible.”
    • “Andre felt compelled to hand the wallet in .”

    ( Note: Some Phrasal Verbs are written by separating the two words)

     

    Examples of Intransitive Phrasal Verbs

    • “The tree could fall down because of the rain.”
    • “Don’t give in .”
    • “The car is starting to drop back .”
    • “If you haven’t finished your homework yet, please stand up .”

    Some Phrasal Verbs can have both Transitive and Intransitive properties depending on their meaning and significance, for example:

    • Kania will show up soon – Intransitive Phrasal Verb

    (“Show up” in the sentence above means “appear” or appear)

    • Kania will show up her ex-boyfriend – Transitive Phrasal Verb

    (“Show up” in the sentence above means “embarrass” or humiliate)

    In using adverbs well, Sinaumed’s also has to practice English vocabulary well using the Smart Picture Dictionary of English.

    4. Separable and Inseparable Phrasal Verbs

    The meaning of Separable Phrasal Verb is that there is an object in the middle of the Phrasal Verb so that it separates the two words from the Phrasal Verb. Meanwhile, Inseparable Phrasal Verb means that the object of a sentence comes after the Phrasal Verb is written. In this example, those that are Phrasal Verbs will be in bold while those that are objects will be italicized .

    Examples of Separable Phrasal Verbs

    • “I will make you look like an actress tonight.”
    • “The salesman in the new store talked us into buying the cooking equipment.”
    • “I remember that I already handed the book over to you last night before the class was dismissed.”
    • “You should send the letter over quickly before he moves to another city.”

    Examples of Inseparable Phrasal Verbs

    • “You must stick to the plan at all costs.”
    • “USA stands for “United States of America” .”
    • “Dania really looks up to her mother .”

    There are also many Transitive Phrasal Verbs that can be used in Separable and Inseparable forms , for example:

    • “Janice looked my address up on the high school’s yearbook.”
    • “Janice looked up my address on the high school’s yearbook.”

    Note: If the object in a sentence is a ” pronoun ” (such as ” it) , then keep in mind that you cannot use the Inseparable Phrasal Verb form in the sentence. Here’s an example:

    • “Janice looked it up in the high school’s yearbook.” – WRONG
    • “Janice looked it up in the high school’s yearbook.” – RIGHT

    Sinaumed’s can also hone your English writing grammar by reading the Excellent Grammar Book which provides various words, important terms, and how to use them.

    Phrasal Verb Learning Book Recommendations

    Comprehensive English Situational Speaking

    In English, speaking is considered by some to be the most difficult compared to listening, reading, and writing. This difficulty increases if vocabulary mastery is still limited and you do not understand various kinds of expressions in the context of situational speaking. In fact, each conversation situation certainly provides a different context.

    This book is very useful in guiding you to speak English fluently in the context of a wide variety of situations. By reading this book, for example, you will understand what to say when you are in the gift shop. Or, ask others to show you the way when you get lost in other people’s lands.

    There are many examples of other conversations with the use of various expressions. This book is generally divided into the key to learning speaking as well as a variety of conversations both in simple contexts, based on places and situations. So, it is very appropriate if you make this book a medium for practicing speaking comprehensively!

    5. Tips on Learning Phrasal Verbs

    Phrasal Verb is a form of verb which is very important to learn because it is almost always used in verbal or written communication. However, the large number of phrasal verbs reaching hundreds makes it difficult for us to memorize everything. But don’t worry, because there are some tips to make it easier to learn Phrasal Verbs. Check out the explanation below:

    • Pay close attention when you find or see a phrasal verb that you just read or heard, then try to record and understand it.
    • Make your own example sentences using the new phrasal verbs you find.
    • Do exercises on Phrasal Verbs by working on questions online or in English textbooks.
    • Write a diary in English so that indirectly you will find new phrasal verbs that you did not know before.
    • Try to understand the context of sentences containing Phrasal Verbs. Look up a dictionary if you don’t know the meaning.
    • Also find out about the synonyms of each Phrasal Verb that you find to make it easier to understand its meaning and meaning.
    • Join a language community or club to have the right partner for learning English.

    6. Exercise on Phrasal Verbs

    1. Would you _____ my son for me this weekend? I have to go to Arizona due to my work.
    2. Look
    3. Look into
    4. Look up
    5. Look after
    1. Kimmie _____ money yesterday when she wanted to buy some eggs.
    2. Ran
    3. Ran out of
    4. Ran into
    5. Ran away with
    1. Daniel _____ his leg at the football league.
    2. Broke
    3. Broke down
    4. Broke off
    5. Broke in on
    1. My boss _____ our meeting with clients until next Monday.
    2. Put
    3. Put off
    4. Put down
    5. Put into
    1. Could you please _____ the music while I am studying?
    2. turn
    3. turn off
    4. Turn around
    5. Turn into
    1. Mia doesn’t _____ my new boyfriend because she thinks he is a liar.
    2. Get by
    3. Get over
    4. get on with
    5. Get ahead of
    1. Kania and I _____ meeting my new English teacher.
    2. Look after
    3. Look up to
    4. Look down on
    5. look forward to
    1. My car _____ on the highway in the middle of the night yesterday.
    2. Broke down
    3. Broke off
    4. Brokeaway
    5. Broke in on
    1. It will be easier for us to study and read if you can _____ the lights.
    2. Switches
    3. switch on
    4. Switch over
    5. switch up
    1. I have to _____ to the finish line and back.
    2. run
    3. run out of
    4. Run into
    5. Run away with
    1. The new song by Billie Ellish has already _____ $9 million.
    2. Made out
    3. Made up
    4. Made up for
    5. Made over
    1. Denis, you can _____ words in the online dictionary if you can’t understand what the word’s mean.
    2. Look after
    3. Look up
    4. Look up to
    5. Look back on
    1. Sorry sir, I’m late. I have to stop by the gas station because my car _____ petrol.
    2. Ran out
    3. Ran out of
    4. Ran out on
    5. Ran away with
    1. That red dress and the yellow one really _____.
    2. Stand up for
    3. Stand down
    4. stand out
    5. Stand up to
    1. I suggest you take the stairs. I heard from the officers at the front that this building’s lift has _____ again.
    2. Broken in on
    3. Broken up
    4. Broken in
    5. Broken down
    1. Kania is really good at _____ babies.
    2. Looking after
    3. Looking back on
    4. Look down on
    5. Looking forward to
    1. The public transportation was nearly full this morning. So it was difficult to _____.
    2. get in
    3. get on
    4. Get ahead of
    5. Get through with
    1. If the radio isn’t loud enough, turn it _____ a little.
    2. off
    3. Oops
    4. Down
    5. into
    1. My plane _____ twenty-five minutes late. So, I have to reschedule my meeting.
    2. Take off
    3. Take-up
    4. Take out
    5. Took over
    1. Let’s _____ that old shoes. We don’t need it anymore.
    2. Throw ups
    3. Throw-in
    4. Throw away
    5. Throw over
    1. How are you _____ at a new campus?
    2. getting on
    3. getting up
    4. getting on with
    5. Getting in

    Find various other English questions related to phrasal verbs along with other topics that can help you hone your English skills in the Super ITP TOEFL Tricks Score 600+ book below.

    7. Answers to the Phrasal Verbs Exercise    

    1.   D. Look after (caring for or looking after)
    2.   B. Ran out of
    3.   A. Broke (break)
    4.   B. Put off (put off)
    5.   B. Turn off
    6.   C. Get on with (declare a match)
    7.   D. Look forward to
    8.   A. Broke down (break down or damaged)
    9.   B. Switch on (turn on)
    10. A. Run (run)
    11. C. Made (make or produce)
    12. B. Look Up (looking for)
    13. B. Ran out of
    14. C. Stand out (protrude or attract the eye)
    15. D. Broken down (strike or damaged)
    16. A. Looking after (caring for or looking after)
    17. B. Get on (get into a vehicle)
    18. B. Up (“turn up” in the question sentence means to increase the volume)
    19. A. Take off (take off)
    20. C. Throw away (throw away something that is not used or not used)
    21. A. Getting on (asking news)

    Well, that’s an explanation of Phrasal Verbs along with their types, properties, examples and questions.

    Articles Related to Other Phrasal Verbs

  • Learn Map Reading Skills and Steps

    Get to Know the Skills and Steps to Read a Map – Map skills and understanding of the compass and how to use it are absolute and need to be learned. What is flat navigation? Navigation is one’s way of determining the direction and position of a trip, either on a map or even on the actual terrain. That’s why navigational knowledge such as maps and compasses and techniques for using them must be understood.

    This skill will come in handy in many ways, such as when visiting distant and unfamiliar places. In addition, knowledge of ground navigation is also very much needed in efforts to help victims of natural disasters, someone who gets lost in the mountains, and victims of plane crashes. Another example is for sports purposes such as orienteering competitions.

    A topographic map is a two-dimensional depiction (on a flat plane) of the whole or part of the earth’s surface projected with a certain ratio or scale. The longer the map develops, of course, adjusting to its use and needs. Topographic maps come from the Greek “topos” which means place and “graphien” which means to draw, generally these maps are used for land navigation purposes and have a scale of 1:24,000.

    In this map, places on the earth’s surface that have an altitude equal to sea level will be depicted in the form of contour lines, one contour line is interpreted to represent one height. Even though topographic maps map each particular elevation interval, various information is still included to help find out more about the area of ​​the earth’s surface referred to on the map. These descriptions are known as map legends.

    Map Reading Skills

    Apart from being used for military purposes, now maps are also widely used by civilians for fishing, camping, hiking, mountain climbing techniques, walking along roads, or other uses that are directed to a destination or place (navigation). In fact, as much as 80% of the existing work also involves georeferenced data that can be extracted on a map.

    1. Read the Contour Lines

    There are various functions of topographic maps, for example they are used when making thematic maps such as archaeological maps and tourist maps, and can be used as base maps or base maps (in Prihandito 1989: 17). According to archaeological surveys, topographical maps are very useful for obtaining an overview of an area being studied. For example, when the survey terrain conditions are tough, an existing map can be used to help plot the archaeological findings. This mapping, although only temporary, is very effective for storing and preserving archaeological data (Hascaryo and Sonjaya 2000: 1).

    • The ridge of the mountain, is a series of contour lines in the form of the letter U. The end of the letter U indicates a place or area that is shorter than the contour above it.
    • Valley or river, is a series of contour lines in the shape of n (the letter V is upside down) and with sharp ends.
    • Flat and steep sloping areas, flat or sloping areas are marked with sparse contour lines, while steep or steep areas are marked with dense contour lines.

     

    2. Calculate Contour Interval Prices

    An example in calculating contour intervals, on a 1:50,000 scale map, it is found that the contour interval is 25 meters. If you want to reach the contour interval, apply the X scale formula to the map. However, not all maps apply this formula, for example the map on Mount Merapi/1408-244/Jica Tokyo-1977/, the map legend shows that the contour interval is 10 meters, so the formula that applies is X map scale. So, there is no standard formula for calculating contour intervals. However, there are several ways you can do it, which are as follows:

    • Find two points of elevation that are different or close together. For example, point B with C, calculate the difference between the heights of the two
    • Count the number of contours between A and B
    • Divide the height difference between AB by the number of contours between AB and the result is the contour interval.

    3. North Map

    When viewing a topographic map, the first step to take is to find north of the map. Then look at the map title, usually the map title is always at the north and top of the map. Then look at the writing of the name of the village or mountain on the map column, the north of the map is the top of the writing. There are three directions of north that need to be understood before using a compass and a map, because they don’t line up. The three north directions are:

    • True North (True North/US/TN) is given the symbol * (star), namely north through the North Pole in the South of the Earth.
    • North of the map (Grid North/UP/GN) is given the symbol GN, namely North which is parallel to the vertical mesh line or Y axis. Only on the map.
    • Magnetic North (Magnetic North / UM) is given the symbol T (half of the pariah), namely North which is shown by a compass needle. Magnetic North always changes every year, from west to east or from east to west. This is due to the influence of the earth’s rotation. The three north directions are not on one line, so angular deviations will occur, including:
      • The angular deviation between US – UP to both West and East, is called Map Ikhtilaf (IP) or Merimion Convergence. True North (US) will be the benchmark.
      • The angular deviation between US – UM both to the West and to the East is called Magnetic Ikhtilaf (IM) or Declination. l True north (IS) will be the benchmark. The deviation between the UP angle and the UM angle will turn eastward or westward, it is referred to as Deviation or Ikhtilaf Utara Peta-North. The benchmark is North Pela f71′) and the corner diagram is drawn.

    4. Get to know the Medan Signs

    For orientation purposes, landscape forms that are conspicuous in the field must be used so that they are easily recognized on the map, these are referred to as terrain markings and are found in the map legend. There are several terrain signs contained in the beta that can be read before leaving for the field, namely:

    • Valley between two peaks
    • Steep valley
    • Crossroads or the end of the village
    • The intersection of the river with the footpath
    • Branches and river bends, waterfalls, and others
    • For flat areas can be used, crossroads and river forks, bridges and others.

    5. Read Coordinates

    Reading map coordinates, first understand geographic coordinates. Geographic coordinates themselves generally read map coordinates that are often used in Indonesia. Through these geographic coordinates, it will determine a point by relying on two lines, namely longitude and latitude.

    Because it is the foundation for mastering map reading to the fullest. There are two ways to express coordinates, namely Specifying coordinates. This is done on the map and not on the ground. The designation of these coordinates uses:

    • Six-digit system, for example: Coordinates of point A (374:622), point B (377:461)
    • The Eight Numbers Way, for example: coordinates point A (3740:6225), point B (3376:4614)
    • Geographic Coordinate Method, for Indonesia as a benchmark for calculations is Jakarta which is considered 0 or 106° 44′ 27.79″. So that in the territory of Indonesia the initial calculation is the city of Jakarta.

     

    6. Corner Map

    The way to calculate the angle of the map is from the north of the map towards the target line and clockwise. In this calculation, the azimuth system (0° – 360°) is used for angle readings. This system is a system that uses horizontal angles whose magnitude can be measured or calculated in a clockwise direction from a fixed line, namely north.

    Aims to determine directions on the terrain or on the map and to check the direction of travel, because the line that forms the compass angle is the direction of the path that connects the starting and ending points of the journey. Based on the compass angle, the angle calculation system will be divided into two.

    7. Map Arrangement

    Map composition is a medium for storing and presenting information about the appearance of the earth by presenting it at a certain scale. To make it easy to search and manage, map indexes are made in graphical or text form. Images of the elements of the earth at a certain scale cannot always be presented according to their size, because they are too small to be depicted.

    If these elements are deemed important and need to be presented, then the presentation will use certain image symbols. This is intended to make maps easy to read as well as easy to understand, so various kinds of map information on maps of a certain scale must be described or presented in certain ways.

    • Color: used to distinguish various objects, for example roads, rivers, rails and others.
    • A list of symbol collections on a map is called a map legend: used to distinguish or further detail the symbol of an object, for example the color of sandstone on a Geological Map is yellow, claystone is green and so on.
    • A collection of symbols and notations on a map are usually arranged in a group of map legends which are always presented on each map sheet.
    • Elements of a map legend are commonly used to facilitate the reading and interpretation of various maps by various users with various needs.
    • A map has high informational value if it contains elements, among which are; map scale, elevation (or contour) information, direction information (usually north of the map), coordinates, legend, map index, as well as other elements deemed necessary.

    8. Map coordinates

    In the maps that we commonly encounter, we get map coordinate values ​​in several systems such as Bessel coordinates, UTM coordinates and local coordinates. Geological maps or topographic maps that are often used in Indonesia mostly use the UTM coordinate system. However, when taking measurements directly in the field using a measuring device called a theodolite, the coordinates used are local coordinates.

    If you want to convert to UTM coordinates from local coordinates, then at the beginning of the measurement, during the polygon creation process, before the step must be linked to a fixed point or benchmark where the position of the UTM coordinates is known. If this has happened, then UTM coordinates can be done.

    9. Map Orientation

    Map orientation is to equate the map with the actual terrain. Before you start orienting the map, try to get to know the striking signs of the surrounding terrain and their position on the map. The trick is to match the names of rivers, villages, peaks, and so on. So at least you already know where it is. This orientation serves to estimate whether your position is correct.

    Try to find a place that has an open view, so that the orientation steps taken on the map show striking signs. First, prepare a map and compass, then place it on a flat surface. Then put the map based on the compass, then the map direction will match the actual terrain.

    Look for the most prominent terrain signs around you, and find them on the map. Do this for several terrain marks. remember the markings, their shape and place on the actual terrain.

     

    1o. Triangulation Point

    Apart from contour lines, you can also know the height of a place with the help of elevation points, which are called triangulation points, this point is a point or object that is a pillar or milestone. This point will show the absolute height of a place above sea level. Types of triangulation points:

    • Primary Point, 1′.14 goal height point. I, No. 14, 3120 meters above sea level. 3120
    • Secondary Point, S.45, high point of goal. II, No. 45, 2340 meters above sea level. 2340
    • Tertiary point, 7:15 , high point of goal.III No. 15, height 975 meters above sea level 975
    • Quarter Point, Q20 , high point.IV No. 20, height 875 masl 875
    • Intermediate Point, TP.23 , Antara altitude point, No.23, 670 meters above sea level 670
    • Cadastral Point, K.131, Kedaster altitude point, No.I 31, tg 1202 masl 7202
    • Quaternary Cadastral Point, KQ 1212, Quaternary Cadastral Point, No. 1212, height 1993 masl 1993

    11. Using Maps

    In planning a trip using a topographic map, of course the starting point and ending point will be plotted on the map. Before walking note the following:

    • Starting point coordinates (A)
    • Destination point coordinates (B)
    • Map angle between A – B
    • What field marks will be found along the A – B track
    • How long is the path between A – B and how much – the time it takes. What needs to be considered in carrying out an operation is that we must know the starting point of our departure, both on the ground and on the map.
    • Use clear terrain markings both on the terrain and on the map
    • Use a compass to see our direction, whether it is in accordance with the terrain marks that we use as a benchmark, or not
    • Estimate how far the track will be. For example, 5 km flat terrain takes 60 minutes and climbing terrain takes 10 minutes. Do orientation and resection, if circumstances allow
    • Always be alert and also pay attention if there are changes in travel directions and changes in terrain conditions, crossing the end of valleys, crossing rivers and so on.
    • The way to make the actual trajectory on the map is to line the road horizontally and vertically, adjusted to the map scale. Then draw the track on the map so that it shows the shape of the map and cross section, as well as the slope of the track. For the length of the track, how to measure it is by using the scale on the map, it will get the actual length of a track.

     

    12. Contour Lines

    Contour lines are one of the most important elements in a topographic map, contour lines are information about the height or elevation of a place against its reference. If you want to represent variations in the elevation of a place on a topographic map, the most common way is to use contour lines or contour lines .

    Contour lines are lines that serve to connect points with other points that have the same height. The +25 m contour line means that this contour line connects points that have the same height, namely +25 m to a certain height reference.

    Formation of contour lines can be done by making a vertical projection of the lines that become the intersection of the horizontal plane with the earth’s surface onto the horizontal plane on the map. Because maps are generally made at a certain scale, the shape of the contour lines will also be reduced according to the scale made for the map.

    Map Reading Technique

    • Starting point: We must know our starting point, be it in the city or in the field. Note the coordinates if you like plotting the point on the map.
    • Terrain Signs: Use clear terrain markings (continuous ridges, streams, cliffs, etc.) as guidelines or directions for travel. The way to recognize it is to interpret the map.
    • Compass Direction: Use a compass to see the direction of our journey. Is it in accordance with the direction of the mountains or rivers that we follow.
    • Estimating Distance: When walking, always try to estimate the distance and always pay attention to the direction of travel. We can look back and see the amount of time that has been used. Distance is calculated using the map scale, so we get an estimate of the distance on the map. It should be remembered that our estimate is not certain. 10′ x 10′ for maps at a scale of 1:50,000, 20′ x 20′ for maps at a scale of 1:100,000. A map that has a size of 20′ x 20′ is also called LBD, therefore at 20′ on a line along the equator (40.068) is the longest parallel. 40.068km: (360° : 20′) = 40.068 km: (360° : 1/3) = 40.068 km: (360° x 3) 40.068km : 1080 = 37.1 km So 20′ along the equator is 37 .1km. If a distance of 37.1 km is depicted on a 1: 50,000 scale map, it will have a distance of: 37.1 km = 3,710,000 cm. So that on the map: 3,710,000 : 50,000 will have a distance of: 37.1 km = 3,710,000 : 50,000 = 74.2 cm. Consequently 1 LBD map 20′ x 20′ scale 1:50,000 along the equator measuring 74.2 x 74.2 cm. It is impractical to use.
    • Map Sheet: Because the LBD is impractical to use, because it’s too wide. Then each LBD is divided into 4 parts with a size of 10′ x 10′ or 37.1 x 37.1 cm each. Each part is called a map sheet or sheet, and is given the letters A, B, C, D. If the scale of the map is 1:50,000, then the map has a size of 50,000 x 37.1 = 1,855,000 cm = 18.5 km .
    • The meridian (longitude) that passes through Jakarta is 106° 48′ 27.79″ East is used as the principal meridian for topographic map numbering in Indonesia. Jakarta as longitude 0.

    Recommended Books & Articles Regarding Map Reading Skills

    Source: from various sources

  • Learn linking verbs & examples of linking verbs

    Do you also feel that during a pandemic like now, you spend more time watching movies via Netflix or other streaming platforms?

    If so, then of course you have watched many films or series during this pandemic. So, the films and series that are currently in great demand are dominated by films and series that use English as the language of instruction.

    Of course this proves that English is the most popular and most familiar language to most people’s ears (of course besides the first language or native language of each person). Even though you may not be fluent in English at this time, of course you have often heard the term ” verb ” or verbs.

    In English, verbs are classified into 6 types, viz

    1. transitive ,
    2. intransitive ,
    3. linking ,
    4. auxiliary ,
    5. regular , and
    6. irregular verbs .

    Each of these types of verbs certainly has different characteristics, uniqueness, function, and structure. How to use it is also not the same. Therefore, through this article you will find out in detail and comprehensively what a linking verb is, the types of linking verbs, the structure of a linking verb, examples of linking verbs and their use in a sentence, as well as questions and discussion.

    Find other examples of verbs in the Phrasal Verb Dictionary: English Phrasal Verb Dictionary, which is a master book as well as a guide that Sinaumed’s can use to better understand various verb variants.

    1. Definition of linking verbs

    According to English traditional grammar and guide books , the definition of a linking verb is:

             A linking verb is a verb that describes the subject by connecting it to a predicate adjective or predicate noun (collectively known as the subject complements). Unlike the majority of verbs, they do not describe any direct action taken or controlled by the subject

    So what are linking verbs? Linking Verb is a verb that functions to connect words in an English sentence.

    The role of linking verbs in a sentence is to explain the subject in the sentence. The subject is connected by a linking verb with an information or explanation called the subject complement ( noun or noun, adjective or adjective, pronoun or pronoun, as well as other constructions that can explain a subject).

    Find various examples of verbs and their meanings in the Complete English-Indonesian-Indonesian Dictionary Accompanied by Tenses-Regular Verbs, Irregular Verbs below.

     

    2. Examples of linking verbs

  • Learn 6 Types of Promotions and Tips for Implementing Their Business Strategies

    Types of Promotion – What are the right promotional strategies to attract customers? In the current era of technological development, the types of promotions certainly develop according to the interest of the community which is also developing. That is why there are several types of promotions that also take advantage of technological updates.

    In practice, promotional strategies can also be carried out conventionally or traditionally as an additional alternative. In order to carry out this promotion strategy, Sinaumed’s needs to understand the types so that they can adapt to the business they are running. The more knowledge about the types of promotions, then you can try it.

    Definition of Promotion

    On the marketing side, advertising is definitely used to generate sales. Below is an explanation of several types of promotion in business and marketing. When you sell a product or service to potential customers, be it a product or a service, you must have a product that is promising, attractive and necessary.

    But to ensure that these products and services sell well, you also need to know what the sales strategy is like. Promotional strategies can also be implemented in different ways, because basically there are various types of promotions that can be carried out by sellers or owners of goods and services.

    Usually, when a seller is in the process of implementing an advertising and marketing strategy, they are confused about which promotion to choose. Therefore, the types of promotions are described in detail below. Before we talk about what promotion is, we’ll talk about everything from its meaning to its benefits.

    Advertising can win the hearts of potential customers with the aim of marketing their products through interesting communication and getting them interested in buying products compared to other competing products. In short, this advertisement is a market communication strategy.

    Advertising can also be interpreted as an activity carried out to facilitate the development of something. Like the brand, product, or the company itself. Advertisements are on TV, flyers, banners, social media and certain websites. The purpose of this promotion is to introduce the product to general buyers or potential buyers.

    Then encourage buyers to buy or choose products, and buy products offered to potential buyers. Hence, these ads have become very common for marketers. This promotion can be done in various ways and variations. Besides that, it can also be combined with several types of promotions such as promotions, discounts and others.

    According to experts, promotion has many definitions. Harper W. Boyd called it a way to convince others to accept an idea/product.

    Meanwhile, Philip Kotler said promotion is a marketing strategy. In short, promotion is an attempt to market a product through attractive communication.

    Finally, potential customers are more interested in buying your product than competing products. In general, Sinaumed’s may place advertisements in a variety of ways, including TV commercials, flyers, banners, social media and websites. So why do you need to promote business products? What is your purpose?

    The main purpose of promotion is to increase sales. However, of course the product must be open to the public. In addition, promotion needs to be focused on creating public interest in the products offered.

    There are various ways to do this promotion, namely using influencers, implementing events, etc. The media used are also different.

    Promotion Types

    Based on the definition of promotion above, it can be seen that promotion can be done with several strategies. That is why it produces various types of promotions with different strategies and media, as follows.

    1. Traditional Marketing

    Traditional promotions are types of promotions that have been around for a long time but are still used by many people. The way to facilitate this type of traditional marketing or promotion is to use print media such as newspapers, pamphlets and billboards.

    This traditional promotion can also be done through electronic media such as television and radio. Such promotions must be able to enter the market in various regions. Unfortunately, this type of advertising doesn’t come cheap. You have to pay relatively high costs to display business promotions or advertisements in this way.

    2.Digital Marketing

    The second advertising is digital promotion. As Sinaumed’s knows, we are currently entering a digital era where almost everyone uses social media and other sophisticated digital tools in their daily lives. As a result, now there are many business promotions through digital marketing.

    The advertising strategy that can be implemented with this digital promotion method is to utilize social media which is widely used today.

    For example, you will hold a promotional event to market our products in the digital world, such as YouTube, Instagram, Facebook, TikTok and Twitter.

    This form of promotion of goods and services through digital marketing has the potential to reach a more specific market. However, the market reach is still large and the associated costs are relatively affordable compared to traditional promotional strategies, where advertisements are placed on TV and billboards at a higher price.

     

    3. Direct Marketing

    Direct promotion or Direct Marketing may not be very promising. The advantage is that you can promote your business with salespeople who can talk directly to prospects.

    This activity is considered more effective because buyers and sellers interact directly. Therefore, this method is more convincing due to two-way communication. However, this type of advertising requires additional staff and costs more.

    4. Endorsements

    This type of endorsement promotion is very similar to digital marketing where the promotion uses social media to offer your business. The difference is, this endorsement promotion is in the form of recommendations from artists and influencers who are active on social media to promote the products and services that you offer.

    This means you have to pay influencers to promote your business. This method is very promising for the community because people are more confident because idols and influencers recommend it and can influence product reviews.

    5. Personal Selling

    This type of sales promotion is personal selling which is almost the same as Direct Marketing which meets and informs potential buyers directly. The difference is that personal selling is carried out directly by the owner of the goods or services, or by the entrepreneur himself.

    This type of personal selling promotion is carried out to provide direct benefits to consumers. The company seeks to maintain and develop its business more intensively with this promotion strategy.

    6. Publicity

    The last is a type of Publicity promotion that reaches out to the public to help people become more familiar with the products and services offered. This strategy can be applied in various ways. Publicity can be done by holding press conferences, product promotions, how-tos or public demonstrations.

     

    Promotion Benefits

    In implementing the types of promotions above, there are benefits in each type of strategy carried out. These benefits can be adapted to the business marketing needs that Sinaumed’s runs.

    1. Get Market Attention Quickly

    Where do you usually hear about new products? Yes, from the advertising program that they do. The nature of the activities carried out varied, but the good publicity was not ignored by the general public. You must have heard of online motorcycle taxi drivers who are lucky to get a luxury car for IDR 12,000.

    During last year’s Harbolnas, one of the markets held a product promotion worth IDR 12,000. Promotion managed to get public attention. This is because various products in the luxury category are only priced at IDR 12,000. What has happened? Millions of people are fighting for it.

    2. Maintaining Consumer Loyalty

    We certainly know that competitors will definitely win the hearts of their customers. However, if you are interested in promoting it with various attractive offers, consumers will remain loyal to your product. The reason is, the benefits they get from your product are more promising. As an entrepreneur, selling products to loyal customers is certainly easy. In fact, the chances of success are 60-70%.

    3. Increasing Brand Awareness

    Brand awareness is very important for online businesses. Brand awareness on an ongoing basis can strengthen the relationship between products and consumers. For example, if you want to buy bottled drinking water, some people call Aqua. There are still many other brands of mineral water that have a slight difference in quality.

    This is called brand awareness. If the promotion is successful and you can build strong branding, the product will stay in the minds of consumers. Brand awareness can be well built with measurable promotional power.

    4. Increase Product Sales Potential

    Frequent promotions can increase sales. For example, airline JetBlue is able to increase sales by hundreds of percent through promotions. JetBlue doesn’t make new products. The company takes a different approach from its competitors.

    They have developed an email automation program for promotional purposes for consumers who have not completed their ticket booking on their website.

     

     

    Tips for Implementing a Business Promotion Strategy

    Based on the benefits of the promotion above, here are tips for carrying out a promotional strategy so that it is successful according to the type of business you are doing.

    1. Maximizing Marketing with Social Media

    With the development of the Internet in the world including Indonesia, social media has been used by many people for advertising strategies. From looking for friends to promoting various types of businesses.

    Social media is the most effective way to market any product or service. The features available on various social media are very useful for marketing various businesses today.

    An example of social media that is often subscribed to in business is Instagram. This social media dedicated to uploading photos and videos is perfect for businesses.

    In addition, hashtags on Instagram can be used to attract new consumers. Social media makes product marketing easier, more effective, and cheaper.

    2. Websites

    Apart from using social media, building a website is a viable advertising strategy nowadays for marketing various businesses. The existence of this website makes the advertised business more feasible and professional. A simple example is someone who owns a wedding decoration business.

    To be more professional, business owners can use websites as well as social media. This is to make many people aware of the business they work for so that it can be searched by search engines like Google. In addition, creating a website as a promotional strategy is also easy and not too difficult.

    3. Marketplace Sales

    Not only is social media busy with the development of the Internet, but the emergence of various marketplaces is also an effect of the development of the Internet. Not only one website developed in Indonesia, but there are tens or hundreds of marketplaces. Each marketplace also has its own characteristics.

    Using a marketplace is the right promotion strategy because businesses that operate in certain categories can thrive in a marketplace.

    For example, there are people who buy and sell gamis and sell them on the marketplace in the gamis fashion category. Then marketing based on this category can easily find your product.

    4. Create a Promotional Video on Youtube

    When you hear the word Youtube, of course you think of a platform that contains lots of videos from various categories. For example the categories of games, horror, vlogs, etc. YouTube is a good tool not only as a content creation medium, but also as a company promotion strategy. This is because videos grab people’s attention more easily than text.

    You can also use various methods for promotional videos, including long animated promotional videos. The most important thing in marketing with this promotional video is how the videos you make can attract people’s attention.

    5. Marketing with Memes

    Marketing your business through social media is certainly very effective, but have you ever thought about selling products using memes? If your business targets young people, this meme might be more appropriate. This advertising strategy includes the latest advertising strategy and is easy for many people to remember.

    Given the large number of social media accounts that present memes to followers, product promotion through memes is also easier to spread. Companies that carry out advertising strategies through memes can spread to meme accounts on social media.

     

     

    6. Endorsement with Selebgram

    With the development of the Internet and Instagram, people with a large number of Instagram followers are attracting attention. The current term for such people is Celebgram or Instagram Celebrity. The presence of gram celebrities greatly facilitates product promotion strategies through approval.

    These celebrities can be contacted via Instagram or direct messages to inquire about promotional prices. Approval on Instagram also has another name: Paid Promotions or Paid Promotions. So, with approval, the product is promoted by a celebrity and the business that is running is getting recognized by more and more people.

    7. Attractive Banners and Brochures

    Of course on the road, we often come across interesting banners that can tickle or surprise someone. In addition, there are also many banners per meter on the street. This is an example of a unique but annoying advertising strategy. This method is like a double-edged sword, which can be useful and dangerous.

     

    8. Understand the Target Market

    Of course, before implementing the above advertising strategy, entrepreneurs need to understand which products are being advertised. For example, if young people are the target audience for your product, marketing through social media like Instagram is an option.

    9. Enter the Businessman Community

    Of course, you can’t be alone to run a business. At least business people need business partners. The presence of this business partner aims to share about the business being run, exchange promotional tips, and often start new businesses together.

    10. Expanding Relations with the Media

    Business people can not only build relationships with other business people, but business people can also build relationships with the media. Media marketing can also be a business solution that you run to attract many consumers.

    At present, many companies are run by many people, and many marketing strategies of various types of promotions are also carried out by them. For business people who are inexperienced, there’s nothing wrong with trying the promotional strategies above to attract consumers. Another thing, if the above method doesn’t really appeal to you, don’t give up. There is always a path to success.

    Thus a review of the types of promotions and some tips on running a promotion or business strategy. Sinaumed’s can get various books related to promotion, business, as well as marketing at sinaumedia.com . As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia always provides the best products for Sinaumed’s.

  • Law of Thermodynamics: Definition, Process, Formula, Formulation, and Its Application

    Law of Thermodynamics – Sinaumed’s must have known that heat energy can move from objects with high temperatures to objects with low temperatures. Well, the transfer process can be studied in the Science of Thermodynamics. In general, thermodynamics is a science that studies energy which specifically discusses the relationship between heat energy and its work processes. Even the technology that we often use today, call it AC ( Air Conditioner ) and rice cooker , is also a concrete form of applying the Laws of Thermodynamics.

    The existence of the Laws of Thermodynamics is an important part of physics and has three legal studies. Then, what is thermodynamics ? How does this law of thermodynamics sound? When it comes to physics, does the Law of Thermodynamics then have its own formula? How does the law of thermodynamics apply to rice cooker technology? So, so that Sinaumed’s understands these things, let’s look at the following review!

    Definition of Thermodynamics

    Basically, thermodynamics is a branch of physical science and engineering. If in the field of science, experts will try to study the basic behavior of the physical and chemical properties of a number of materials in a state of rest (at rest) by using this thermodynamic principle. While in engineering, experts (engineers) will usually use the principles of thermodynamics to study systems and their interactions with the environment. Then, what is the definition of thermodynamics so that its working principle can be used in two different branches of science?

    Thermodynamics is the science of energy, which specifically discusses the relationship between heat energy and how it works. This energy can change from one form to another, either naturally or through technological engineering. The workings of most technological systems can be explained by means of thermodynamics. In fact, it is often mentioned that thermodynamics is the main capital of an engineering graduate to design thermal pumps, rocket motors, rice cookers, air conditioners, to chemical distillers.

    In short, thermodynamics is a branch of theoretical physics concerned with the laws of the movement of heat and the transformation of heat into other forms of energy. The term thermodynamics comes from the Greek, namely ” Therme ” which means ‘ heat ‘ and ” dynamis ” which means ‘ force ‘. The existence of this thermodynamics will not be separated from heat.

    What Are Calories?

    Heat (Q) is energy that is transferred from one object to another due to a temperature difference. When it is related to the system and the environment, it can be said that heat is energy that is transferred from the system to the environment or energy that is transferred from the environment to the system due to a difference in temperature. If the system temperature is higher than the ambient temperature, then heat will flow from the system to the surroundings. Conversely, if the ambient temperature is higher than the system temperature, then heat will flow from the environment to the system.

    Well, if the existence of Heat (Q) is related to the transfer of energy due to differences in temperature, then Work (W) is related to the transfer of energy that occurs through mechanical means (mechanical related to motion). For example, if the system does work on the environment, energy will automatically move from the system to the environment. Conversely, if the environment does work on the system, energy will move from the environment to the system.

    Thermodynamic System

    In a thermodynamic system, it has certain terms, namely:

    • System Boundary is an imaginary line that limits the system to its environment.
    • A closed system is when the system and its environment do not exchange energy or mass, in other words, energy or mass does not cross the boundaries of the system.
    • Open system is when energy and mass can cross or pass the system boundaries. System with its environment there is interaction.

    What Are the Sounds of the Laws of Thermodynamics?

    The existence of this Law of Thermodynamics actually has three forms, all of which originate from the same foundation, namely the Initial Law or the Zeroth Law. In the Initial Law of Thermodynamics it states that: “If two systems are in thermal equilibrium with a third system, then they are in thermal equilibrium with each other”. Well, here is the explanation of the Laws of Thermodynamics I, II, and III.

    Law of Thermodynamics I

    The First Law of Thermodynamics states that “Energy cannot be created or destroyed, but can only be changed in form.” As it sounds, the energy provided by heat must be the same as the external work done, plus the internal energy gain due to an increase in temperature. Indirectly, the First Law of Thermodynamics is related to the conservation of energy.

    If heat is given to the system, then the volume and temperature of the system will certainly increase (shown by expanding and increasing the heat of the system). Conversely, if heat is taken from the system, the volume and temperature of the system will decrease (it can be seen that the system will shrink and feel colder). This principle is a natural law and the form of the law of the conservation of energy is in line with the First Law of Thermodynamics. A system that has undergone a change in volume will later do work. Meanwhile, a system that experiences a change in temperature will tend to experience a change in internal energy. So, the presence of heat given to the system can cause the system to do work and experience a change in internal energy.

    Processes in Thermodynamics I

    In the Law of Thermodynamics I will experience 4 processes, namely:

    1. Isothermal Process (Constant Temperature)

    A system can undergo a thermodynamic process, where changes occur within the system. A thermodynamic process that takes place mainly at constant temperature is called an isothermal process. Since the process takes place at a constant temperature, there is no change in internal energy. This isothermal process can be proven in everyday activities, for example popcorn in a pot.

    Well, if you refer to the Law of Thermodynamics I, then the heat supplied will be equal to the work done by the system (Q = W). Please note that this process can also be enforced by Boyle’s Law, namely:

    Well, since the temperature is constant, in this isothermal process there will be no change in energy ∆U=O. While the business can still be calculated from the area under the curve, with the formula:

    2. Isochoric Process (Constant Volume)

    When a gas carries out a thermodynamic process in a constant volume, it is in an isochoric process. This is because the gas is in a constant volume (∆ V=0), so the gas does not do work (W=0) and the heat supplied will also be equal to the change in energy inside. The heat in this process can be expressed as the heat of gas at constant volume Q V . This process has a formula in the form of:

    W = P dV = P.0 = 0

    While the graph of an isochoric process will form:

    3. Isobaric Process (Constant Pressure)

    When a gas undergoes a thermodynamic process to keep the pressure constant, the gas is undergoing an isobaric process. An example of applying this isobaric process is boiling water at constant pressure. This is because the gas is under constant pressure, while the gas is doing work (( W = pV ). The existence of heat in this process is expressed as the heat of the gas at constant pressure ( Q p ). Well, if this isobaric process, if it is based on the Laws of Thermodynamics I, then the formula will apply:

    While the gas work graph in an isobaric process can be expressed as:

    4. Adiabatic Process (Fixed Heat)

    An adiabatic process is a thermodynamic process in which pure gases work by changing their internal energy. No energy enters or leaves during this process. An example of applying this adiabatic process is the use of a motorcycle pump. If based on the Law of Thermodynamics I, it will be: the change in the internal energy of the gas (dU) is the amount of heat energy supplied (Q) minus the work done by the gas (P.dV). If Sinaumed’s is confused by this description, here is the formula in brief:

    dU = Q – P.dV = – P dV

    PV ƴ = K (constant)

    While the gas work graph in an adiabatic process can be expressed as:

    Formula of the Law of Thermodynamics I 

    Information:

    Q = heat/heat received/released (J)
    W = energy/work (J)
    ∆U = change in energy (J)

    Second Law of Thermodynamics

    In the Second Law of Thermodynamics it is related to entropy and the tendency over time, differences in temperature, pressure, and chemical potentials balance in isolated physical systems. Please note , Sinaumed’s , entropy is a thermodynamic balance, especially regarding energy changes whose law is called the Second Law of Thermodynamics. In the Law of Thermodynamics II it states that: “Heat flows spontaneously from high temperature objects to low temperature objects and does not flow spontaneously in the opposite direction.”

    In fact, the First Law of Thermodynamics is considered unable to explain whether a process may or may not occur. Therefore, the Second Law of Thermodynamics emerged which was compiled inseparable from efforts to find the nature or magnitude of the existing system.

    From the experimental results, the experts concluded that it is impossible to build a heat engine that converts heat entirely into work, namely a machine with 100% thermal efficiency. This impossibility is the basis of one statement of the second law of thermodynamics as follows:

    “It is impossible for any system to undergo a process in which the system absorbs heat from a reservoir at a single temperature and converts the heat entirely to mechanical work, with the system ending up in the same state as it started.”

    Formulation in the Law of Thermodynamics II

    In the Second Law of Thermodynamics there are two formulations that are useful for understanding the conversion of heat energy to mechanical energy, namely:

    1. Kelvin-Planck formulation

    This first formulation states that ” It is impossible to make a heat engine that works in a cycle that simply converts the heat energy obtained from a source at a certain temperature entirely into mechanical work”. In other words, this formulation reveals that there really is no way to extract thermal energy from the oceans. So it is better to use this energy to run electric generators without causing further effects, such as warming the atmosphere. Therefore, every tool or machine must have a certain efficiency value. This efficiency will state the comparison value of the mechanical effort that has been obtained with the heat energy from the highest temperature source.

    2. Clausius Formulation

    In this formulation it states that “It is impossible to make a heat engine that works in a cycle that solely transfers heat energy from a cold object to a hot object” . In other words, one cannot take energy from a cold source (which has a low temperature) and transfer it all to a hot source (which has a high temperature) without giving energy to the pump to do work.

    Law of Thermodynamics III

    In the Law of Thermodynamics III it relates to absolute zero temperature. This law also states that when a system reaches absolute zero temperature, all processes will stop and the entropy of the system will approach the minimum value”. 

    Application of the Laws of Thermodynamics in Rice Cookers

    The law of thermodynamics can be applied to technology that helps people with daily activities, one of which is the rice cooker. A rice cooker is a rice cooker which can also be used to boil vegetables, steam gravy, and so on. Of course rice cookers use electricity, starting from 300 watts, 500 watts, 800 watts, and so on. In a rice cooker, it has heating elements located on the bottom, sides and top.

    The working principle of a rice cooker is that when the switch is connected to the main heating element, the electric current will go directly to the main element and the lights on the rice cooker will turn on. When the heating temperature has reached its maximum and the rice is cooked, the trip thermostat will immediately move the lever so that the switch position changes to flow electricity to the rice heating element through the thermostat.

    In the warmer position, when the thermostat temperature is maximum, the current leading to the heating element will be cut off automatically. Likewise, when the temperature on the thermostat decreases, the current to the heating element will automatically be reconnected automatically. This process will take place continuously. If it is based on the Law of Thermodynamics, then how the rice cooker works will be in the form of:

    “Rice, which was originally rice and has a hard texture, when it is given water and heats it, the texture will turn soft and easy to eat. Well, a liquid will evaporate if the vapor pressure of the gas coming from the liquid is the same as the pressure from the liquid to the surroundings (P vapor = P liquid). So, the boiling point of a liquid can actually be manipulated by increasing the pressure outside the liquid (external pressure).

    In an ordinary rice cooker, water will boil with the usual external pressure, which is 101 kPa and boil at the normal boiling point, which is 100°C (373 K). Meanwhile, in a rice cooker that manipulates pressure ( pressure cooker , or electric pressure cooker ) if the steam vent lid is opened, the pressure cooker will work like a normal rice cooker, because the external pressure is the same as the outside air pressure.

    However, if the steam vent cover (usually a valve) is closed, there will be a change in the air pressure in the chamber inside the pressure cooker and the boiling point of the liquid will change. Unlike when the valve is closed, the condition of the system changes because the water vapor can only be in the pressure cooker chamber . Since there is additional mass, the pressure will be higher and the equilibrium point between the phases (in this case, between the liquid phase and the vapor phase) changes to a higher temperature, and a new boiling point is formed.

    The following are the components in a rice cooker:

    Book Recommendations & Related Articles

    Also Read!

    • Definition, Properties, and Dynamic Fluid Formulas
    • Definition and Hydrostatic Pressure Formula
    • Factors Affecting the Amount of Pressure
    • Examples of Problems on Kircoff’s Law and Ohm’s Law
    • Get to know Gauss’s Law and the Electric Field
    • History, Definition, and Problems of Dalton’s Law
    • Kepler’s 1st, 2nd, and 3rd Laws and their Relation to Newton’s Laws
    • History, Definition, and Coulomb’s Law Formulas
    • Definition, Characteristics, and Processes of Conduction
    • Electrical and Alternative Energy Sources Developed in Indonesia
    • Why Don’t Ships Sink?
    • Definition and Factors Affecting Air Density
    • Definition, Levels, and Theory of the Formation of the Multiverse
  • Law of Demand: Definition, Function, Formula, Demand Curve

    The law of demand – In economics, it cannot be separated from what is called demand and supply. These two things will always be related and cannot be separated. If we discuss the law of demand and supply in one article, it will take a very long time.

    Therefore, on this occasion, we will discuss the law of demand and the function of the law of demand. So, watch this review to the end, Sinaumed’s.

    Understanding the Law of Demand

    Demand usually occurs in terms of buying and selling or being in the market. For example, the demand for an item to be purchased by consumers. In general, demand is the number of items purchased or requested at a certain price and time.

    The law of demand is one of the most fundamental concepts in economics. The law of demand explains how a market economy allocates resources and determines the prices of goods and services.

    The law of demand states that the more people want to buy something while the supply is limited, the higher the bid price for that item. Likewise, the higher the price of an item, the lower the quantity of goods that will be purchased by consumers or in a way, the purchasing power of consumers becomes lower.

    Quoted from Investopedia , the law of demand is a basic principle of economics which states that at a higher price, consumers will demand a lower quantity of goods. In addition, the law of demand can be said as the amount purchased is inversely proportional to the price. If the price of an item falls, the demand for that item will increase. Conversely, if the price of an item increases, the demand for that item will decrease.

    In other terms, the law of demand is a rule that explains the negative relationship between the price level and the quantity of goods or services demanded. So, between the price of goods and demand has the nature of the relationship in the opposite direction (negative). This is very logical because if the price of an item rises, the buyer will look for other goods as a substitute whose price has not increased.

    Simply put, if the consumer’s nominal income remains constant, while the price of goods rises, then the consumer’s income will decrease. As a result, consumers will reduce the demand for these goods. Conversely, if the price of goods falls, consumers will reduce purchases of other goods and increase purchases of goods whose prices have decreased.

    Consumers will buy economic goods to meet their most pressing needs first. Only then use each additional unit of the item to serve a sequentially lower-valued purpose.

    Economics involves the study of how humans use limited means to satisfy unlimited wants. The law of demand focuses on that unlimited want. By nature, people prioritize the more urgent wants and needs over the less urgent in their economic behavior.

    This carries over into how people choose among the limited means available to them. For any economic good, the first unit of the good the consumer obtains will tend to be used to satisfy the most urgent need.

    Understanding the Law of Demand According to Experts

    The following are some legal definitions of requests according to experts, including:

    1. History and Markonah

    According to Riwayanti and Markonah (2008), the demand function is the relationship between commodity prices and the quantity demanded or purchased assuming other variables are constant (ceteris paribus).

    2. Gaspersz

    In his book, Gaspersz (2011) explains the law of demand reads if the quantity of a product demanded by consumers is inversely or negatively related to the price of the product. Usually, this occurs assuming all demand variables are held constant.

    The general understanding has been discussed above, starting from what is the law of demand and how is the relationship between demand and price. Then, to calculate quantitatively, a formula is needed to make it easier in existing calculations. That means, the law of demand cannot be calculated arbitrarily.

    Sounds of the Law of Demand

    As explained above, the sound of the law of demand is as follows:

    If the price of a product falls, the demand for that product will increase. Conversely, if the price of a product increases, the demand for that product will decrease.

    In other words, the lower the price level, the greater the quantity of goods available demanded. Vice versa, the higher the price level, the less the quantity of goods that are willing to be demanded.

    The law of demand says that if the price is lower, the demand or buyers will increase. And vice versa, if the price is more expensive then the supply will be less.

    This happens because all want to seek satisfaction (profit) as much as possible from the existing price. If the price is too high, then the buyer may buy a little because they have limited money.

    But for the seller, with a high price he will try to increase the number of goods sold or produced so that the profits will be even greater. High prices can also cause consumers or buyers to look for other products as substitutes for these expensive goods.

    Factors Influencing The Law of Demand

    The law of demand does not just happen, but is caused by several factors. Some of the factors that affect demand are as follows:
    Consumer tastes

    1. Consumer income
    2. Future price forecasts
    3. Availability and prices of like, substitute and complementary goods
    4. Number / intensity of consumer needs
    5. The amount of time
    6. Peak-of-peak demand .

    Demand Law Functions

    Together with the law of supply, the law of demand helps us understand why things are valued at that level. The law of demand is also used in identifying opportunities to buy products, assets or securities that are perceived to be undervalued (or overpriced).

    For example, a company may increase production in response to a price increase that has been driven by a surge in demand.

    The following formula is used:

    P = a-bQ
    Q = a-bP

    Information:

    P = price of goods
    Q = quantity demanded of goods
    a = constant
    b = slope or gradient

    1. Request Function Formula

    To find out the true value of the supply and demand functions, there is a formula that can be used as follows:

    P – P1 = Q – Q1
    _______________

    P2 – P = Q2 – Q1

    Information:

    P = price
    P1 = known price 1
    P2 = known price 2
    Q = demand
    Q1 = known demand 1
    Q2 = known demand 2

    2. Explanation of the Request Function Formula

    More simply, if we look back at the law of demand, this demand function shows that the price of goods and the quantity of goods demanded are inversely proportional.

    Legal example of request function request.

    For example, there is an online shop platform that is holding a flash sale plus free shipping, so buyers will order as many items as they can because they are cheap. To more clearly calculate the demand function, see the explanation and examples of demand law below:

    Goods A has a price of Rp. 500.00, the quantity demanded is 60 units.

    Meanwhile, if the price of the goods is Rp. 200.00, the number of requests will be 100 units. What is the function of the law of demand?

    P1 = 500
    P2 = 200
    Q1 = 60
    Q2 = 100

    Completion:

    Demand Curve

    A law of demand for a good will increase when its price falls. Therefore, the demand curve is a depiction of a statement that is poured into a picture to make it easier to understand. This demand curve has a gradient or slope or negative slope.

    That is, the slope of this curve decreases from the top left to the bottom right, thus indicating an inverse relationship between demand and price. The curve that decreases from the top left to the bottom right shows the ups and downs of a commodity.

    Features of the Demand Curve

    The main characteristics of the demand curve on the law of demand as follows:

    1. The curve is in the form of a straight line

    The first feature of the demand curve is its straight line.

    2. The Movement of the Demand Curve is Affected by the Amount of Demand for Goods or Services

    For example, if income increases, the curve will shift to the right because the quantity demanded increases. Conversely, the curve will shift to the left if public opinion or demand decreases.

    3. The price of goods with the number of goods is inversely proportional

    This means that if the price of goods increases, demand will decrease. Conversely, if the price of a good falls, the demand for it will increase.

    4. The Curve Has a Negative Slope

    Because the curve is drawn from the top left and then down. This shows that there is an inverse relationship between price and quantity demanded.

    5. Form of the Demand Curve Function

    The form of the demand curve function is Q = a-bP (‘Q’ is the quantity demanded, ‘a’ is a constant, ‘b’ is the slope or gradient, and ‘p’ is the price of the good).

    If the ceteris paribus factor changes , there will be a shift in the demand curve. When income increases, the demand curve shifts parallel to the right. If income decreases, the demand curve shifts to the left.

    So, the influence of each factor affects the demand for movement and shifting .

    Demand Elasticity

    In the law of demand, there is a price elasticity of demand (PED). The elasticity of demand is a measure of the change in the amount of demand for goods or the amount of goods that will be purchased by buyers against the price of goods. However, the degree of this change varies. The difference can be due to the existence of certain goods, a small increase in price will result in a drastic decrease in demand. As for other goods, buyers are still willing to buy them even though the price rises sharply.

    The difference in the law of demand is then measured as the elasticity of demand. More simply, the elasticity of demand shows the percentage change in quantity demanded, if there is a 1% increase in price and all other things being equal. Because the quantity demanded almost always falls when the price rises, the elasticity of demand is usually negative, although practitioners sometimes do not write a negative sign.

    The demand for an item is said to be elastic if its elasticity is greater than 1. This means that a 1% increase in price results in a greater than 1% decrease in demand. On the other hand, inelastic is demand with elasticity less than 1.

    In addition, there is a perfectly elastic demand classification with unitary elasticity ∞ (elasticity 1), perfectly inelastic (0), and perfectly elastic (∞).

    Some goods have positive elasticity, so they are anomaly of the law of demand, for example goods that are status symbol goods ” Veblen goods ” or Giffen goods .

    While a business cannot be 100% determined by how consumers react, the goal of every marketing team and product is to increase conversions, usage, and positive brand views. The existence of pricing, more specifically the pricing strategy of a business is one area that can be applied to marketing and products that still contain a lot of guesswork.

    Phenomenal marketing and product development can cause price increases while selling maintains the same conversion rate. However, setting prices and communicating developments should not be done haphazardly so as to deviate from the law of demand.

    Therefore, it requires optimization and price changes over a long period of time and should not be done in a hurry or instant. Fortunately, there are ways to guide this, namely with pricing strategies, microeconomics, and marketing/product basis which is the theory of price elasticity of demand or price elasticity which can increase demand by making product offers more inelastic or through marketing and product development.

    How Elasticity Works

    The law of demand will guide the relationship between price and quantity purchased. So the quantity purchased has an inverse relationship with the price. When the price goes up, there are fewer buyers. The elasticity of demand will then tell how much the quantity decreases as the price increases.

    If an item has elastic demand, it means that consumers will do a lot of comparison shopping. Consumers will do this when they are not desperate to have it or don’t need it every day. They will also compare with other stores when there are many similar choices.

    How to Calculate Elasticity of Demand

    There are three main types of price elasticity of demand:

    1. Elastic
    2. Unit elasticity
    3. Not elastic

    Before studying this, you must first understand the law of demand and the law of supply.

    To calculate the price elasticity of demand (PED), the following equation is used.

    % Price change (P) = (New price, old price) / average price

    PED is always given as an absolute value or a positive value, because we are interested in magnitude.

    Elastic Demand and Non-Elastic Demand

    The opposite of elastic demand to the law of demand is inelastic or inelastic demand. There is demand changing more than price with elastic demand. Price changes more than demand with inelastic demand. That is, consumers are willing to tolerate larger price changes before they change their behavior.

    The price of a product with inelastic demand may suddenly rise, but consumers are unlikely to consider alternatives or have no alternatives to consider. Usually, elastic demand is more often applied to luxuries. So that consumers have more choices in terms of luxury, including the choice not to buy anything.

    On the other hand, staple goods such as food usually have an inelastic demand. For example, if the price of fruit and vegetables suddenly increases, the law of demand that operates here means that whether they like it or not, consumers have to buy and cannot simply not eat fruits or vegetables. They end up being forced to buy at a higher price.

    Finally, there is unit elastic demand. Basically, the perfect middle ground between inelastic demand and elastic demand under the law of demand is that there is unit elastic demand. When demand changes by exactly the same amount as price, it is called unit elastic demand.

  • Law: Definition, Purpose, Function, Elements and Types

    Definition of Law – In social life, there are regulations in the form of norms and sanctions that are made by mutual agreement. Laws are made with the aim of regulating and maintaining order, justice so that chaos can be controlled or prevented.

    Every country has different legal regulations, including Indonesia. In accordance with article 1, paragraph 3, Indonesia is a constitutional state and every Indonesian citizen must obey the laws that apply in Indonesia.

    Laws in each country are regulations that are customary, officially considered binding and formalized by the state or government authorities. There are lots of laws in Indonesia, laws, government regulations, presidential decrees, to regional regulations.

    If there are Indonesian citizens who do not comply with these laws, they will be subject to sanctions, which can be in the form of imprisonment or paying fines. The following is a summary of the law, starting from its meaning, purpose, function, elements to its types.

    Definition of Law  

    One can also enter into legally binding contracts, including arbitration agreements that adopt alternative means of settling disputes to standard court litigation.

    The creation of law itself can be affected by the constitution, written or tacit, and the rights encoded in it. Law shapes politics, economics, history and society in various ways and functions as a mediator of human relations.

    Legal systems vary from country to country. In civil law jurisdictions, the legislature or other central body codifies and consolidates laws. Historically, religious laws influenced secular matters, and are still used in some religious communities.

    Sharia law based on Islamic principles is used as the primary legal system in several countries, including Iran and Saudi Arabia.

    The following is the definition of law according to some experts:

    1. Aristotle

    Aristotle is a philosopher who comes from Greece. Aristotle divides law into two, certain law and universal law.

    Certain laws are rules that define and prohibit certain actions. Universal laws are natural laws, they have their own rules and directives. 

    2. Ernst Utrecht 

    Ernst Utrecht is a legal expert originally from Indonesia. According to him, the definition of law is a set of guidelines for life, in the form of orders or prohibitions that aim to regulate order in society that must be obeyed by the community.

    If the community violates the rules that have been set, then the government or society must take action.

    3. Immanuel Kant

    Immanuel Kant was a famous philosopher from the 18th century. According to Immanuel, humans will be moved to act under the law, and that is an authoritative standard that is emotionally binding.

    Humans can act according to their own will but not contrary to the morals that apply in their environment. According to Immanuel, law is a requirement that as a whole has free will to be able to adjust and follow regulations. 

    4. Mochtar Kusumaatmadja 

    Mochtar Kusumaatmadja views law as a tool for all kinds of processes of change in society. In addition, according to him law is a tool to protect, maintain and discipline society.

    Law according to Mochtar law is a rule and principle that is useful in regulating public relations made with justice.

    5.Thomas Hobbes

    Thomas Hobbes was a British philosopher who thought that law was a formal adhesive device, useful in uniting a society that was initially disorganized.

    In his view, law is a rule that controls people’s lives either by force or by order and is made by those in power within that community.

    6. Hans Kelsen

    Hans Kelsen, an Austrian jurist and philosopher. He was a proponent that law is a pure legal theory. Hans argues that law is a norm that contains conditions and consequences for certain actions. The consequences of violating the law can be in the form of threats of sanctions from those in power within the community.

    The absence of a clear legal definition is actually an obstacle for those who wish to study law. Indeed, for ordinary people the meaning of law itself is not very important.

    According to the community, what is more important is how the law is enforced and the legal protection given to them. There are many fields of law, ranging from criminal law, civil law, procedures, constitutional law, international law, customary law, to environmental law.

    Legal Purposes 

    1. Legal rules have a goal to protect human interests from threatening dangers.
    2. Regulating relations between human beings in order to create order and is expected to prevent conflicts between humans.
    3. The law protects human interests both individually and in groups. Basically humans are creatures that also need protection of their interests so that their interests can be protected from threats around them.
    4. The law has a goal to realize the greatest happiness for everyone. Not only providing a living, but also providing abundant food, protection and achieving togetherness.
    5. Law is a means to maintain and guarantee order. 

    Legal Function 

    1. As a means of social control. a system that enforces rules regarding correct behavior.
    2. As a means to make changes in society.
    3. As a means of order and regularity of society.
    4. As a means of realizing social justice.
    5. As a means of development movement.
    6. As a critical function, conducting supervision both on the supervisory apparatus, implementing apparatus and law enforcement apparatus.
    7. As a tool to bind members in society so that the group’s existence becomes tighter.
    8. As a tool to rid the community of cases that disturb the community by imposing criminal, civil, administrative and community sanctions.
    9. As a tool to carry out the allocation of authority and decisions to government agencies.
    10. As a means of social stimulation. Law is not a tool that is only used to control society, but also lays legal foundations that can stimulate and facilitate interaction between people in an orderly and fair manner.

    Legal Elements 

    1. Law is a rule that regulates human behavior in an association in society.
    2. Regulations are made by regulatory bodies
    3. Regulations are coercive
    4. Sanctions for violations made are strict.

    Legal Fields 

    1. Criminal Law

    Criminal law is a rule that determines what actions may not be violated and are included in criminal acts. Criminal law also regulates what sanctions can be imposed if you violate criminal law.

    Criminal law is part of the law in force in a country. Criminal law does not establish its own norms, but already exists in other norms.

    Criminal law is based on written and unwritten laws. Indonesia does not yet have a Criminal Code. Therefore, Indonesia still applies criminal law which is a legacy from the colonial government.

    The systematics of the Criminal Code is Book I on general provisions, Book II on crimes, Book III on violations.

    Punishments that can be imposed on violators of criminal law are:

    a. death penalty

    The death penalty does not apply in countries that have abolished the death penalty, such as the Netherlands. Indonesia itself still applies the death penalty although there are still many pros and cons regarding this punishment.

    b. prison sentence

    Prison sentences are divided into life imprisonment and temporary imprisonment. Minimum imprisonment of 1 year and a maximum of 20 years. the convict must stay in prison for the duration of his sentence and is obliged to do the work that has been determined.

    c. fine penalty

    The convict may choose whether to pay a fine or replace it with a prison sentence. The prison sentence is not as severe as a prison sentence. Imprisonment is imposed if the offense committed is not too serious. maximum imprisonment of 6 months.

    d. cover penalty

    Closing sentences were imposed for political reasons on people who had committed crimes. This closing sentence is an additional criminal punishment.

    2. Civil Law 

    Civil law is a regulation that regulates the rights and obligations of a person with a legal entity. The term civil law was first recognized in Dutch, even from legal sources

    Dutch Civil Law is derived from French civil law. At that time it was considered a very perfect law. This private law applies in France and is contained in two codifications.

    When France ruled the Netherlands, the two codification laws were also enforced in the Netherlands, and were even still in use 24 years after Dutch independence. After that, the Netherlands began to compile a code of laws for civil law.

    The Civil Code is composed of chapters:

    1. concerning persons, this chapter prescribes laws concerning man himself and the family.
    2. regarding property, this chapter regulates all matters relating to the law of property and inheritance.
    3. Regarding engagement, this chapter regulates all rights and obligations between people, with legal entities and certain parties.
    4. Concerning evidence, this chapter regulates all means of evidence and their legal consequences.

    3. Constitutional Law 

    State constitutional law is the law of certain relations, which appears in the course of history and is governed by law which is called the state. So, constitutional law relates to the state.

    In international law, the state is a subject of international law. In private law, the state is a legal entity subject to law. A state that is independent in external relations, is governed by laws that legally govern relations with one another.

    Constitutional law is the primary law that establishes government offices, confers power, and regulates relations with citizens. This is a characteristic of constitutional law which regulates relations involving the government. Especially the relationship between various government agencies. Relations with citizens tend to be in the field of administrative law, unless we talk about the allocation of tools of power to citizens.

    Not all countries have a constitution. However, countries that do not have a constitution usually have a jus commune or what is known as the law of the motherland. The law of the homeland contains a number of imperative and consensus regulations. These regulations include customary law rules, conventions, magistrate law, and international norms.

    4. International Law 

    International law is the law that governs all activities on an international scale. International law was originally only interpreted as a rule in relations between countries.

    However, in its development, international relations are increasingly complex. In addition, international law also regulates the structure and behavior of international organizations, multinational companies and individuals. International law can be formulated as a body of laws consisting of rules that bind states.

    International law has several forms of manifestation and patterns of its development. There is regional international law, law that applies only to the area where it applies, such as American-Latin American international law.

    In addition, it also regulates the concept of protecting marine biological wealth. Meanwhile, special international law is a rule that applies specifically to certain countries, such as the European convention on human rights.

    International law is law based on the thoughts of the international community which consists of a number of countries that have sovereignty and independence. what is meant is a country that stands alone or is not under the rule of another country. International law has legal subjects which include states, international organizations and individuals.

    5. Customary Law 

    Customary law is unwritten law. This is because there is no legal regulation recorded. An example of customary law is a ministerial regulation, he no longer gets the trust of the majority of the DPR and must resign from his post.

    Such rules are not written in the law, but it is a general rule. There is no legal obligation for this minister to resign, however, this requirement is commonplace in national politics.

    The characteristic of customary law is that the rules are passed down orally from generation to generation, or hereditary. Customary law can cover a wide range of areas, for example, marital rights and obligations, inheritance, relations between communities, ownership, and so on. Some examples of customary laws that are enforced in several countries are neighbor rights and devolution.

    Juridically, customary law is a law or rule that is the result of traditional customary practices from time to time. Thus, it becomes a source of law. This is recognized by the court and can complement the law, provided that customary law does not conflict with other laws. 

    6. Environmental Law

    Environmental law is the law that regulates the pattern of the environment and all its devices, apart from that environmental law also regulates the conditions with humans who are under the influence of the environment.

    Environmental law is a scientific discipline covering aspects of environmental governance, environmental protection, environmental health, human health, spatial planning, regional autonomy, sectoral aspects, environmental internationalization and law enforcement.

    Environmental law in Indonesia is regulated in Law No. 32 of 2009. Law No. 32 also regulates preserving the environment and preventing environmental damage.

    Find other interesting things in www.sinaumedia.com . sinaumedia as #FriendsWithoutLimits will always present interesting articles and recommendations for the best books for Sinaumed’s.

    Book Recommendations & Related Articles

  • Lavoisier’s Law: Definition, Formulas, and Example Problems

    Laviosier’s law is – The law of conservation of mass in chemistry is often referred to as Lavoisier’s law. What is the law of conservation of mass? Check out the following meaning.

    Inventor of Lavoisier’s Law

    Before discussing further about Lavoisier’s law and examples of problems, it would be better if we got to know the “Father of Modern Chemistry” who created Lavoisier’s law first.

    The figure, whose full name is Antoine-Laurent Lavoisier, was a chemist originally from France and was born on August 26, 1743 and died at the age of 51 on May 8, 1794 .

    Do you know, You , even though Antoine-Laurent Lavoisier has a title as a chemist, he actually studied at College Mazarin majoring in Law, you know.

    His family belonged to the bourgeois social group, with his own father working as a lawyer. However, actually since he was young, Lavoisier was more interested in science.

    Therefore, after graduating from law school, Lavoisier chose to start doing research in science, then chose to join the Academy of Sciences (community of natural philosophers in Paris) in 1768.

    A book entitled Traité élémentaire de chimie , published in 1789, marked the beginning of a new era in chemical science which was accompanied by a historic event, namely the French Revolution.

    Through the book, Lavoisier explained his findings regarding the processes of respiration and combustion that occur due to chemical reactions with substances in the air. Lavoisier stated that oxygen has a big role in the combustion process.

    The results of this research are also the basis for the formation of the “Law of Conservation of Mass” or what is often referred to as “Lavoisier’s Law”.

    Understanding Laviosier’s Law and Its History

    As previously explained, the inventor of the Law of Conservation of Mass was a French chemist named Antoine Laurent Lavoisier (1743-1794). Lavoisier investigated between the weight (mass) of a substance before and after the reaction. He discovered the law of the conservation of mass in 1789.

    Because of these discoveries, Lavoisier is known as the father of modern chemistry. Previously, Mikhail Lomonosov (1748) had also proposed a similar idea and had proven it in an experiment. However, in this idea the conservation of mass is still difficult to understand because of the buoyancy conditions of the earth’s atmosphere.

    According to the research results of Lavoisier, the amount of substances before and after the reaction will always be the same as the mass of the substances after the reaction when in a closed system. Even so, material changes generally take place in an open system, so if a reaction product leaves the system or a substance from the bound environment, the mass of the substance before and after the reaction will be different.

    The conclusion drawn by Lavoisier that the law of conservation of mass viz

    “The mass of the substances before and after the reaction is the same” .

    Therefore, the notion of the law of conservation of mass or what is also known as Lavoisier’s law is a law which states that the mass of a closed system will be constant even though various processes occur in the system where it is in a closed system. The mass of the substance before and after the reaction is constant (fixed/same).

    Lavoisier’s Law of Conservation of Mass Experiment

    In Lavoisier’s law experiments, Antoine Laurent Lavoisier has conducted experiments by heating mercury oxide (HgO) to produce metallic mercury (Hg) and also oxygen gas (O2) with the following reaction or Lavoisier’s law formula:

    2HgO(l)+O2(g)→2Hg(s)+2O2(g)

    Furthermore, the two products are reacted again and form mercuric oxide. This shows that the mass of oxygen gas that has been produced in the mercury oxide combustion activity is the same as the mass of oxygen required to convert mercury metal into mercury oxide.

    Lavoisier’s Law of Burning Wood

    The law of conservation of mass applies in general. This means that all existing events obey the law of conservation of mass. However, the law of conservation of mass does not apply to wood burning events.

    Burning wood is said to not fulfill the law of conservation of mass because it produces charcoal and also light ash. The mass of charcoal and ash produced by burning is much less than the mass of wood that is burned.

    However, actually burning wood until it turns into charcoal and ash obeys the law of conservation of mass. Why doesn’t the law of conservation of mass seem to apply to the burning of wood?

    This is because burning wood is a chemical change that changes matter into another form. Thus, it is as if a mass of wood is crushed and all that is left is charcoal and light ashes.

    However, actually the mass of wood is not destroyed, but changed into other forms.

    Burning Wood Produces Water Vapor

    The mass of wood that undergoes the combustion process also changes form to water vapor. Adapted from Sciencing, water vapor is the most common substance released by wood when it is burned, especially young wood which still has a lot of water in its fibers. The water inside the wood evaporates due to the heat of combustion and is released into water vapor which is mixed in the combustion smoke.

    Wood Burning Produces Carbon Dioxide

    Adapted from Chemistry LibreTexts, when wood undergoes a burning process, the carbon in the wood reacts with oxygen and forms carbon dioxide gas. Carbon dioxide gas leaves burning wood by going through the form of smoke and leaving charcoal and ashes.

    In addition to carbon dioxide, burning wood also produces nitrogen oxides and volatile organic compounds.

    Wood Burning Produces Heat And Light

    Adapted from Scientific American, fire is the conversion of chemical energy into heat and electromagnetic energy from wood molecules and oxygen in the air. That is, some of the mass of wood will change shape into fire which produces heat energy and also light.

    Unlike ash and charcoal, it is difficult to know the mass of heat and light produced by combustion.

    Wood Burning Produces Small Particles

    Burning wood produces smoke which is formed from water vapor, carbon dioxide, and also small particles of ash. The mass of ash from burning is much different from the original mass of wood. This can happen because a lot of ash becomes smoke particles. Ash which has a very small size will blend with the smoke and be carried away by the wind.

    That is, charcoal and ash are only part of the results of burning wood. Thus, the mass is much lighter than the original wood and makes it appear as if burning wood does not fulfill the law of conservation of matter.

    Even though the burning wood material also turns into smoke which contains carbon dioxide gas, water vapor, small particles, nitrogen oxide gas and also volatile organic compounds. If all the products of combustion are totaled, the mass will be the same as the mass of wood before it is burned and also the oxygen used during combustion. From the previous explanation, it can be concluded that burning wood actually obeys the law of conservation of mass.

    Examples of Lavoisier’s Law Questions

    So, in order to understand more about Lavoisier’s law, Sinaumedia.com has prepared several examples of complete Lavoisier’s law questions accompanied by discussion, check them out below:

    Example Question 1

    There is magnesium 12 (Mg) which reacts with element 16 sulfur or sulfur (S), then how much Magnesium Sulfide (MgS) is produced? Write down the reaction equation.

    Answer:

    12gram Mg + 18gram S -> 28gram MgS.

    Example Problem 2

    There are 28 grams of calcium oxide (CaO) which reacts with 22 grams of Carbon Dioxide (CO2), what reaction will it produce?

    Answer:

    28 grams of calcium oxide reacts with 22 grams of carbon dioxide to produce 50 Calcium Carbonate (CaCO3).

    28 gr CaO + 22 gr CO2 -> 50 CaCO3

    Example Problem 3

    A total of 31.75 grams of copper (I) metal reacted with 8 grams of oxygen gas in a closed container to form copper (II) oxide 2 Cu(s) + O2 (g) -> 2 CuS (s), what is the mass of the substance generated?

    Answer:

    2 Cu(s) + O2 -> 2 CuS

    31.75 gr Cu(s) + 8 gr O2 –> 39.79 gr CuS

    Example Problem 4

    When burning magnesium in air, magnesium oxide is produced. If 0.098 grams of magnesium is burned it produces 0.162 grams of MgO (magnesium oxide). What mass of oxygen gas is used in the reaction?

    Answer:

    Mg(s) + O2 (g) -> MgO(s)

    0.098 gr + O2 (g) -> 0.162 gr

    O2 (g) = 0.162 gr – 0.098 gr

    O2 (g) = 0.064gr.

    Example Problem 5

    As much as 100 grams of limestone (CaCO3) was baked in the furnace, and it turned out that 56 grams of quicklime (CaO) and carbon dioxide gas were formed.

    Write down the equation for the reaction and determine how many grams of CO2 gas (carbon dioxide) that comes out of the furnace?

    Answer:

    CaCO3 -> CaO + CO2

    100 grams -> 56 grams + CO2

    100 grams – 56 grams -> CO2

    4 grams -> CO2.

    Example Problem 6

    It is known that a carbon burned with oxygen has a mass of 30 grams. At the end of the reaction, there is still carbon with a mass of 4 grams.

    The combustion results produce carbon monoxide with a mass of 58 grams. Calculate the mass of carbon initially?

    Discussion:

    a). The total mass of the products of the reaction = mass of carbon reaction + mass of oxygen

    58 grams = mass of reacted carbon + 30 grams

    Reaction carbon mass = 58 grams – 30 grams

    The mass of the reacted carbon = 28 grams.

    b). Initial mass of carbon = mass of reaction carbon + mass of residual carbon

    Initial mass of carbon = 28 grams + 4 grams

    The initial mass of carbon = 32 grams.

    So, the initial mass of carbon is 32 grams.

    Example Problem 7

    It is known that a reaction between nitrogen and hydrogen gas is as follows.

    Nitrogen gas which has a mass of 10 grams reacts perfectly with hydrogen gas with a mass of X. The reaction then produces ammonia which has a mass of 18 grams. What is the mass of hydrogen gas at the start of the reaction?

    Discussion:

    Mass + mass = mass

    10 grams + X = 18 grams

    X = 18 grams – 10 grams

    X = 8 grams.

    So, the total mass of hydrogen gas at the beginning of the reaction is 8 grams.

    Example Problem 8
    10 grams of sulfur is reacted with 10 grams of oxygen to form sulfur dioxide gas. If the reaction takes place perfectly, the mass of sulfur dioxide produced is………
    A. 10 grams
    B. 12 grams
    C. 15 grams
    D. 17 grams
    E. 20 grams

    Discussion :
    According to Lavoisier’s law, the mass of the substance before and after the reaction is the same. This can be proven by carrying out the reaction in a closed room.
    Based on Lavoisier’s law, we can make an equation for the reaction in this problem, which is as follows.

    Sulfur + oxygen gas ⇒ sulfur dioxide gas

    The mass of sulfur + the mass of oxygen = the mass of sulfur dioxide
    10 grams + 10 grams = the mass of sulfur dioxide
    the mass of sulfur dioxide = 20 grams

    Answer: E

    Example Problem 9

    Look at the reaction equation below
    SO2(g) + O2(g) ⇒ SO3(g)
    In order for the above reaction to comply with the law of conservation of mass, the coefficients of SO2 and SO3 respectively are ……..
    A. 1 and 2
    B. 2 and 1
    C. 2 and 2
    D. 1 and 3
    E. 3 and 2

    Discussion :
    According to the law of conservation of mass or Lavoisier’s law, in a reaction, no new substances are created and no substances are lost or destroyed. What happens is the formation of a new substance from the atoms that are the same as the reactants but have different properties.

    Therefore, in his atomic theory, Dalton concluded that chemical reactions are reactions of termination, rearrangement and recombination of atoms.

    In order for a reaction equation to comply with the law of conservation of mass, the equation of the reaction must be balanced. The point is that the number of atoms on the left must equal the number of atoms on the right.

    The following is the result of equalizing the above reaction.
    2SO2(g) + O2(g) ⇒ 2SO3(g)

    So it can be seen that the coefficients of SO2 and SO3 in the equivalent reactions are 2 and 2.

    Answer: C

    Example Problem 10

    Which of the following reactions does not conform to Lavoisier’s law?

    1. 2H2SO4(aq) ⇒ 2SO2(g) + 2H2O(l) + O2(g)
      B. 2Fe(s) + 3Cl2(aq) ⇒ 2FeCl3
      C. NH3(g) + HClO(aq) ⇒ NH3Cl(aq) + H2O (l)
      D. SiO2(s) + NaOH(l) ⇒ Na2SiO3(s) + H2O(l)
      E. 4NH3(aq) + 3O2(g) ⇒ 2Na(s) + 6H2O(l)

    Discussion :
    As explained in the previous problem, the reaction that fulfills Lavoisier’s law is the same or equivalent reaction.
    Because in question number 10 what is being asked is a reaction that is not in accordance with Lavoisier’s Law, so we are looking for a reaction that is not yet equal.

    Among the above reaction equations, reaction D is an unbalanced reaction. Supposedly, to balance the reaction, the NaOH coefficient is changed to 2.

    SiO2(s) + 2NaOH(l) ⇒ Na2SiO3(s) + H2O(l)

    Answer: D

    Thus a brief explanation of the law of conservation of mass or also known as Lavoisier’s law. Hopefully, the example of the law of the conservation of mass and its discussion can be easily understood by You . Thanks for reading and hopefully useful!

  • Latin and the Meaning of Surah Al-Ashr and Its Meanings!

    In the Al-Quran there are a lot of things that are full of meaning and can be used as a guide for life, one of the surahs of the Al-Quran which is full of meaning is Surah Al Asr. Then, what are the virtues of this letter and its interpretation? To find out, you can see this article, until it’s finished, Sinaumed’s.

    Latin Surah al-‘Ashr

    وَٱلْعَصْرِ

    wal-‘aṣr

    Meaning: “For the sake of time.”

    إِنَّ ٱلْإِنسَٰنَ لَفِى خُسْرٍ

    innal-insāna lafī khusr

    Meaning: “Verily, man is in loss.”

    Amen

    illallażīna āmanụ wa ‘amiluṣ-ṣāliḥāti wa tawāṣau bil-ḥaqqi wa tawāṣau biṣ-ṣabr

    Meaning: “Except for those who believe and do good deeds and advise advising them to obey the truth and advice advising them to remain patient.”

    Overview of the Qur’an Surah Al-Ashr

    Surah Al Asr or for the sake of time/time is the 103rd sura containing verses 1-3 in the Al-Quran. This letter contains an explanation of the nature of the advantages and disadvantages in life as well as a warning about the importance of the time that is lived by humans.

    Woe to humans who waste their time with things that are less useful. Except for people who have faith, always carry out good deeds instructing each other towards truth and patience.

    Surah Al Ashr has a special feature because it contains a warning about time and human safety. Then this Al Asr letter also teaches humans if they don’t use time for useful things then it will only lead them to losses. Conversely, if you interpret Surah Al Asr correctly, then you can make the best use of your time in the way of Allah SWT.

    Surah Al Ashr is one of the parts of juz amma which is included in the Makkiyah letter because it was revealed in the city of Mecca. Surah Al Asr consists of three verses so that it is included in the class of short letters in the Al Quran. Imam Syafi’i Rahimahullah said, “If Allah had not sent down a letter to His creatures, except for only Al Asr’s letter, it would have been sufficient for them.”

    The benefit of reading Surah Al-Ashr is that Surah Al-Ashr is included in Al-Mufashshal given to the Prophet Muhammad SAW. In addition, so that he has primacy and privileges compared to the previous prophets. Second, people who read it will later be resurrected on the Day of Resurrection with a radiant face, laughing and being happy until they enter heaven.

    Interpretation of the Qur’an Surah Al-Ashr

    There are several interpretations of Al Asr’s letter taken from the book of Tafsir Jalalain. Starting from the first verse Allah swears by mentioning the period. Time means time. Allah swears by his creatures, so that it becomes a signal for Rasulullah SAW and other believers.

    In other words, the first verse of Al Asr’s letter has the meaning that the Prophet and other believers pay full attention to the time they have. Do not waste time and good opportunities that come to us. Instead, fill the time with good deeds because time can never be repeated again.

    This practice is recommended based on a hadith narrated by At Tabrani which is listed in the book Al Mu’jam Al Ausath. This history was conveyed by Abu Medina Ad Darimi who belonged to the Companions. From Abi Madinah Ad-Darimi, he was a friend, he said, “There are two companions of Rasulullah SAW who when they meet they will not separate unless one of them reads to the other Surah Al Asr (Wal Ashri innal insana lafii khusrin), then one of them greets the other.”

    This history is the basis for recommending reading Surah Al Asr before leaving the assembly. The meaning contained in this letter is to remind each other not to become losers.

    Content of Surah Al-Asr

    Al-Ashr means the time of Asr (afternoon). It can also be interpreted as pressing something or blackmailing. Surat Al Asr teaches the importance of using time for positive things. How much time do we go through without any increase in faith and charity. This letter suggests that time is precious. So that it must be utilized as best as possible of course to worship Allah SWT.

    Khusrin can mean negative. Insan means forgetting and feeling happy, or human nature. Alladzina Amanu wa ‘amilus-sholihati watawa shau bil-haqqi wa tawashau bis-shabr (except those who believe and do good deeds and advise each other to truth and advise each other to patience).

    All humans will be wretched except for those who believe in Allah, Angels, books, Messengers, the last day, qada and qadar. Faith is an absolute requirement for a person to enter God’s heaven. Believers and do good deeds are the best human beings. The character of human faith is “Al-Imanu yazidu wa yanqush” (faith goes up and down).

    So, faith can rise depending on one’s obedience. In contrast to the faith of the angels who are always the same because they do not increase or decrease.

    While the faith of the Prophets continued to increase and never diminished even though they were given severe trials. Furthermore, in order to avoid losses, be people who always advise each other in truth and patience.

    It is not enough for us to just have faith and do good deeds, but we must advise each other to fight for the truth. We are also required to be patient. Patience is guarding the tongue, limbs and deeds from the wrath of God.

    The scholars say, there are 3 kinds of patience, namely patience in obedience (worship), patience in avoiding immorality and patience in facing Allah’s destiny.

    The Excellence of the Qur’an Surah Al-Ashr

    Although Surah Al-Ashr has very few verses, it contains virtues that are important for every Muslim to know. These virtues are related to faith based on knowledge, preaching in the way of Allah SWT and doing good deeds.

    Here are some of the virtues of Surah Al-Ashr that you need to know:

    • Practicing Knowledge Owned and Known

    One of the virtues of Surah Al-Ashr is to practice the knowledge that we have and know. Practicing means applying it in our daily lives and being able to give advice to others so that other people also hope to know and apply it in their daily lives because of Allah SWT.

    The point is that all of our lives are based on and because of Allah SWT. The verse in Surah Al-Ashr is also supported by the hadith of the Prophet which also explains the importance of practicing the knowledge one has. Like the following hadith:

    “A knowledgeable person will remain a fool until he can put his knowledge into practice. If he practices it, then he becomes a pious.”

    Not only that, there are other hadiths about practicing the knowledge possessed in the following hadith narrated by Ad Darimi:

    “A servant will not move from his place on the Day of Resurrection until he is asked about his knowledge, what he has practiced from that knowledge.”

     

    • Patience in Preaching

    The next virtue of Surah Al-Ashr is about being patient in preaching in the way of Allah SWT. Because behind that patience there is the help of Allah SWT who will be present to you. In preaching, of course, there are obstacles and obstacles, even a little.

    We are required to be patient to deal with it and of course all only because of Allah SWT. Sometimes there are those who ridicule and badmouth us in preaching, so you have to be patient. This is explained in Surah Al-An’am verse 34 as follows:

    وَلَقَدْكُذِّبَتْرُسُلٌمِّنْقَبْلِكَفَصَبَرُوْاعَلٰىمَاكُذِّبُوْاوَاُوْذُوْاحَتّٰٓىاَتٰىهُمْنَصْرُنَاۚوَلَامُبَدِّلَلِكَلِمٰتِاللّٰهِۚوَلَقَدْجَاۤءَكَمِنْنَّبَإِ۟ىالْمُرْسَلِيْنَ

    Meaning: “And indeed the messengers before you were belied, but they were patient with lies and persecution (which was done) against them, until Our help came to them. And nothing can change the sentences (statutes) of Allah. And verily, some of the message of the apostles has come to you.” (QS. Al-An’am: 34).

     

    • People who Do Good Deeds Are Not Losers

    People who have good deeds will not be included in the group of losers. Doing good deeds is doing good deeds. Besides that, it also practices everything that was ordered by Allah SWT and Sunnah by the Prophet Muhammad SAW.

    Benefits of Charity Sholeh

    Every human being likes to do good. Instinctively, the urge to do good or to share goodness is present in every human being, even those who are evil. On the other hand, because good deeds can also provide return benefits for the perpetrators.

    In Islam, good deeds are religious orders. Allah promises a multiplied reward for every good deed. People who are fond of doing good deeds are called pious people. Among Muslims, the title of pious is a dream for everyone.

    Etymologically, the word shaleh comes from the Arabic shāliḥ which means avoiding damage or evil. Good deeds mean charity/deeds that do not damage or contain elements of damage. So a pious person means a person who is protected from damage or things that are bad. In this case, of course, his behavior and personality, which includes words, attitudes, actions, even thoughts and feelings.

    Not only that, in the dictionary of al-Mu’jam al-Wasīth the word shaluḥa as the root word shāliḥ also means useful. By combining these two meanings, a pious person means a person whose behavior and personality is protected from destructive things, and on the other hand brings benefits to the surrounding environment. With these qualities, he became a figure of hope and role model for those around him.

    We live in this world is a charity field for the afterlife. Because we live in this world temporarily while the afterlife lasts forever. As an intelligent Muslim, we must be sure of this, that every good deed we do will be rewarded in the form of a reward from Allah SWT, no matter how small our deeds are, there will definitely be a reward from Allah SWT.

    Allah says in QS al-‘ashr/103:2-3. The verse emphasizes that in fact humans are in loss, except for those who do four things, namely:

    1. Have faith in Allah SWT.
    2. Do good deeds or good deeds
    3. Advise each other for the truth
    4. Advise each other for patience

    The word good deeds comes from the word “amilus”, which is all actions that are beneficial to oneself or others, and in accordance with rational reason, the Qur’an and as-Sunnah. Faith must be proven by good deeds and good deeds proven by true faith.

    The opposite of good deeds is sayyi’ah charity, namely charity that brings harm to both the perpetrator and other people. Every good or bad deed, even though it is very small, will still get a fair reward from Allah SWT.

    A good deed will be valid if it fulfills the following conditions:

    1. Good deeds are done by knowing the knowledge.
    2. Good deeds are done with sincere intentions because of Allah SWT.
    3. Good deeds should be done in accordance with the instructions of the Qur’an and Hadith.

    There are three kinds of good deeds, namely:

    1. Good deeds towards Allah SWT, namely carrying out the commands of Allah SWT. And leave His prohibition. Examples are prayer, zakat, fasting, reading the Koran and other worship.
    2. Good deeds towards humans, namely carrying out rights and obligations towards fellow human beings. Examples are giving a smile, being friendly, speaking polite words, and helping the poor.
    3. Good deeds towards the natural environment, namely preserving nature, for example, by disposing of garbage in its place, keeping it clean, recycling garbage and doing greenery. There is a good deed called charity jariyah.

    Charity is a good deed that is done sincerely by expecting the pleasure of Allah SWT. And bring reward for the culprit even though he has died.

    In addition, we also need to have a good attitude. Kindness or Husnudzon is a commendable behavior that a Muslim must have. the opposite of husnuzan is suudzon or prejudice. There are three kinds of good, namely:

    • Be kind to Allah SWT

    Of course we must be grateful to Allah SWT for giving gifts and pleasures that are priceless to humans. So humans should be grateful to Allah SWT. We also have to be patient for all the trials given by Allah SWT. does not aim to hurt His servant, but to test his obedience, faith, and patience.

     

    • Be kind to yourself

    Someone who is kind to himself will have a confident, optimistic, and hard-working attitude.

     

    • Be kind to others

    Being prejudiced against others will foster harmony in people’s lives.

    Being kind certainly provides many benefits to our lives. The following are the benefits of thinking well, namely:

    1. Life becomes calm and optimistic.
    2. Believe that there is wisdom behind all suffering and failure.
    3. Build a strong personality.
    4. Makes a person firm in his stance because it is not easy to accept bad influences from other people.
    5. Make someone creative.
    6. Causing someone not to despair easily.
    7. Friendship and brotherhood relations are getting better.
    8. Avoid regret in relationships with others.
    9. Always happy and happy for the happiness of others.

    Between faith and good deeds is a unity that cannot be separated. Someone who believes without being followed by good deeds, his faith is meaningless. And conversely, good deeds without being based on true faith have no value before Allah SWT.

    Closing

    From all the discussion above, it can be said that Muslims should not just waste time, so they must use the time to do various kinds of good things. That way, pious deeds will increase.

    In fact, by doing good deeds, you can also get good things from other people. Apart from that, pious practice can also increase friendship ties. So, never forget to do good deeds in the life we ​​live.

    Thus the discussion about the letter al Asr, I hope all the discussion above is useful for you. To find out more in-depth information about Surah Al-Ashr, you can get it by reading the books available at sinaumedia.com .

    As #FriendsWithoutLimits we always strive to provide better. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

    Author: Yufi Cantika Sukma Divine

  • KOL: Definition, Types, Benefits, and Differences with Influencers

    KOL is – Sinaumed’s, have you ever bought a book because you read a review on your favorite book blogger ? Or maybe you’ve read tips on choosing an original book on the blog? If so, congratulations, it means you have been influenced by a Key Opinion Leader (KOL).

    Using KOL services is commonplace now, even many digital marketing experts require it. The reason is, the profits earned by the company are proportional to the expenses. Especially in increasing brand awareness.

    Thanks to technological developments because they have helped change marketing patterns and systems. Now, billboards or posters posted on the streets have begun to be abandoned. Companies prefer to use KOL on social media as a marketing technique.

    Although indeed sometimes KOL does not always have an impact on increasing product sales. But still, the advantages cannot be forgotten. So, what exactly is a Key Opinion Leader? How important is its existence? Let’s discuss more together here.

    Meaning of COLL

    Key Opinion Leader aka KOL is someone who has skills, knowledge or ability in a certain field that has quite a big influence. Every opinion will be heard by the community. In short, KOL can also be referred to as an expert, professional, or specialist that many people trust.

    Generally, a KOL is trusted because of knowledge and experience in a particular field. For example, a book writer, fashion designer, pediatrician, psychologist, and so on.

    When people of that caliber mention or recommend a product, their opinion will be trusted by many people, including you, right? Because there is no doubt about its credibility. As written by Claire Diaz-Ortiz in her book entitled Social Media Success for Every Brand.

    The difference between KOL and Influencers

    Not a few people think that KOL is the same as influencer. The reasons are quite varied, but what is certain is that this assumption is wrong, Sinaumed’s. The problem is both are similar but not 100% the same.

    Key Opinion Leaders (KOL) are trusted by many people because of their expertise, experience, and professionalism. In addition, KOLs don’t have to always appear on social media, but they can use it as a medium to spread messages to their followers.

    Meanwhile, influencers build their own credibility by highlighting their persona on social media and the content they share. Therefore, influencers must always actively “greet” their followers on social media. Interestingly, they can be considered Key Opinion Leaders by their followers themselves.

    In short, not all Key Opinion Leaders can be called influencers and vice versa . This is because there are also many Key Opinion Leaders who are actually active on social media due to their busy lives in the real world. Some may consider it useless and a waste of time. After all, there is no demand to have social media with hundreds of thousands of followers for them.

    Like doctor Boyke, for example. Without the help of social media, we already know that he is someone who has knowledge and expertise in the fields of sexology, gynecology and human sexuality. Likewise professors or professors at universities.

    Even so, now there are quite a number of experts who use social media to educate the public. like dr. Jiemi Ardian who actively shares content about mental health on Instagram and Twitter.

    Because of his existence on social media, dr. Jiemi Ardian can also be considered as an influencer. As of October 2022, his Instagram account has been followed by 221 thousand people and 316 thousand on Twitter.

    You can see the activities of an influencer more fully in the book How to Win Instagram Tricks to Become an Instagram Influencer compiled by the Stiletto Book Team. This book describes the activities of successful celebrities in Indonesia such as Janine Intansari, Olivia Lazuardy, Ariana Octavia, Susan Emir and Ayudhya Ghita.

    Based on the Job

    One of the main differentiators between Key Opinion Leaders and influencers is the job. A professional usually spends more time on his main job, therefore if there is an offer to become a KOL it is a side job for him.

    Meanwhile, for the majority of influencers, their activity on social media is their main job. This means they spend their time creating content to upload to social media, write articles on blogs, or make YouTube videos.

    Influencers can plan one piece of content within three days or more, while KOL usually only plays social media in their spare time.

    You could say that influencers are like teachers at school. They have sufficient knowledge in their own field (niche) and they are also able to transfer this knowledge to their followers on social media.

    Market or Target Audience

    The next difference lies in the market or audience. Influencers usually build or find their own audience so that they are ready to be “used” at any time, while KOL is not. This often deceives companies that are about to use KOL or influencer services.

    For companies that are just about to get involved, they tend to think that the number of followers on social media owned by influencers or KOLs is very influential on the success of the campaign being run. They think, the more the number of followers, an influencer or KOL will be more influential.

    In the end, this assumption developed into a further stage, namely to deify followers. For them, the bigger the number in the “followers” column on social media, the bigger the profit they get.

    In fact, the marketing strategy with KOL and influencers is not always like that. There are many big brands that work with artists but are still inferior to small brands that use the services of nano-micro influencers. As explained by Philip Kotler, Hermawan Kartajaya, Iwan Setiawan in the book Marketing 4.0: Moving from Traditional to Digital.

    Usually, this happens to brands whose products are only promoted without being used in the daily life of the famous artist or influencer they choose as the “face” of their product.

    Besides that, famous artists or influencers who have busy schedules usually interact less and less on social media. In cases like this, the advertisements posted on their social media accounts are only advertisements. There is no interaction between KOL and followers that can improve the brand image .

    In contrast to nano-micro influencers who still frequently interact with their followers. The number of their followers is not too many, but the relationships they build with their followers are more natural and not artificial. In addition, they can also spend all day proving that the product being promoted is really being used so that they can demonstrate its benefits. This can affect public trust.

    Types of Key Opinion Leaders

    So, we have already discussed about nano-micro influencers, artists, and the number of followers. But what exactly is a nano or micro influencer and what does this have to do with the number of followers?

    You see, based on the number of followers KOL and influencers can be divided into five categories, namely Nano, Micro, Mid-tier, Macro, and Mega influencers (KOL). This is how the distribution looks like:

    Type Number of Followers
    Nano Influencers 1,000 to 10,000 followers
    Micro Influencers 10,000 to 50,000 followers
    Mid-tier Influencers 50,000 to 500,000 followers
    Macro Influencers 500,000 to 1,000,000 followers
    Mega-influencers >1,000,000 followers

    Believe it or not, according to the Influencer Marketing Hub page , most successful influencers come from the micro and mid-tier influencers category. Meanwhile, nano influencers are usually quite popular in the niche they choose.

    For influencers, gathering as many followers as possible is an obligation as well as a target that must be met. This is because this is a “selling point” and a measure of their credibility.

    But for experts, experts, or specialists, the way it works is not always like that. If their name is already well-known in the “offline” world, they can more easily gather followers when they go online. Not infrequently the number can reach the category of macro or mega.

    For example, like Chef Renata, whose number of Instagram followers reaches 2.5 million people or Chef Juna with 1.6 million followers. In short, if you want, experts or experts in their fields can become KOLs in a relatively short time.

    However, KOLs with a large number of followers sometimes have their rate cards not included in the company’s budget, if not to say they don’t make sense. For example, for one post on Instagram, companies must pay up to tens of millions. On the other hand, these fantastic prices are sometimes not followed by interactions with their followers. However, KOLs like this are super busy people, in fact, he might even pay an assistant to manage his own social media accounts.

    Benefits of Key Opinion Leaders

    After reading the description about the meaning and types of Key Opinion Leaders , you may be wondering about the benefits of these KOLs. Well, regardless of who and how many followers or fees, KOL is an important thing in the digital marketing era as it is now. The problem is they have several benefits, including:

    1. Assist with brand or product promotion activities

    Yup, a KOL can help promote a brand or product by uploading content on social media, blogs, to his personal YouTube.

    The number of followers they have can help the brand or product being promoted to become known to many people. A certain percentage of their followers may open a business account, search on Google, or buy the product if they are really interested.

    2. Increase brand credibility

    Remember, KOL is not a random person who suddenly goes viral and becomes known to many people. They have people who are experienced and experts in their respective fields. So when a brand uses KOL in its marketing strategy, the credibility of the brand can increase.

    Yes, who didn’t believe it when Chef Renata said that the stoves produced by Brand A were good, heated evenly, and so on? Even by using the right strategy, a brand’s image can be more positive after using KOL.

    In the end, not a few people have more faith in the brand mentioned by Chef Renata than its competitors, right?

    3. Increase followers and subscribers

    The third benefit is the next stage of the second benefit. That is, after the credibility of a brand increases because it uses KOL in its marketing, the number of followers and customers will increase.

    The reasons vary, it could be due to the influence of the KOL or it could also be from more traditional methods such as mouth-to-mouth marketing , aka one customer influencing the people around him to use the product or brand promoted by the KOL.

    Important Things to Have to Become a KOL

    Currently, you could say, the opportunity to become a Key Opinion Leader is quite wide open for anyone, including you. But the process can be more difficult than becoming Influencers.

    As mentioned above, KOL is someone who has a profession, experience or special knowledge in a field. In fact, you could say KOL is an expert in his own field.

    So if you want to become a KOL, you better show that you have strong experience and knowledge in the field you are in. For example, like Muhammad “Lemon” Ikhsan, whose name is famous after his mobile gaming skills are recognized by many gamers in Indonesia.

    With his skills, Lemon can become a Key Opinion Leader in the field of mobile games and help promote the games he plays. When he created the game review content, his personal opinion was much more trusted by the wider community.

    So, when compared between the games that work with Lemon and those that don’t, the games that Lemon plays will be mostly uploaded by Indonesian gamers.

    You can find other ways to become an influencer in the book The Magic Of Influencers: How to Value Yourself, written by Alam Bachtiar. This book clearly talks about what an influencer is and how one can become an influencer.

    Key Opinion Leaders Can Be “Born” Because of Help from Brands

    In recent years, the strategy of using micro influencers in product or brand marketing has been popular. Well, sometimes conditions like this can actually help the birth of newcomer KOL.

    Micro influencers, although the number of followers is not too many, the engagement rates they get are much better than mega influencers. Especially in a niche that he chose himself.

    Gradually, the popularity of these micro influencers will continue to increase along with their appearance on the various marketing channels of the brands they work with.

    When he starts to be seen by the public, it is very likely that people will ask for opinions, comments or suggestions from him in the same field as the brand he is promoting.

    For example, say, there is an influencer who often shares content about design and then he works with one of the well-known design software companies in Indonesia.

    During the collaboration, he often appears in YouTube videos, social media, and even fills in material in online webinars held by the company. Over time, people who see it will think that this influencer really has expertise in design. In the end, they started to believe what the influencer said. Some percent of them will probably take his services.

    There are also influencers who spread their wings to become celebrities who often appear on television shows. Like Keanu aka keanuagl who had played in a television program after his name became famous on Instagram and Twitter through his trademark “splice”.

    If you want, you can also learn how to influence others from the book How to Win Friends And Influence People In The Digital Age (Revised Edition) by Dale Carnegie & Associates.

    Well, Sinaumed’s, those are the sundry Key Opinion Leaders or KOLs that are widely used by brands and companies in their marketing strategies and sometimes tempt us to buy the products they are promoting. Hopefully the information in this article is useful, yes. See you in the next article!

    If you want to find various kinds of books about influencers, then you can find them at sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

  • Knowing the Strengths and Weaknesses of Regional Autonomy

    Advantages and Disadvantages of Regional Autonomy – In a country, it is certain that it
    has a government system, from the central government to regional governments.
    This also applies
    in Indonesia.
    In the Indonesian government system, the central government delegates some powers
    to regional governments to regulate their regions independently.
    This delegation of power from
    the central government to regional governments is commonly referred to as regional autonomy.

    Regional autonomy is a policy and authority given to regional governments to regulate their regions
    independently.
    In short, regional autonomy means a policy to manage its own region.
    The right of autonomy to the regions in Indonesia aims to create a more effective state
    system.

    To be clearer, there are several opinions from experts regarding the meaning of regional autonomy, including:

    1. Regional autonomy according to CJ Franseen

    Regional autonomy according to CJ Franseen is a right to regulate and manage all regional interests and adjust
    the regulations that have been made.

    2. Regional autonomy according to J Wajong

    Regional autonomy is J Wajong, namely the freedom to maintain, develop, and advance the special interests of a
    region by determining its own law, self-finance, and self-government.

    3. Ateng Syarifuddin

    Regional autonomy according to Ateng Syarifuddin is freedom or independence but it is different from
    independence.
    Freedom in regional autonomy is a manifestation of giving an opportunity to a
    region to be more responsible.

    4. Law Number 12 of 2008 and Law Number 32
    of 2004

    Regional autonomy based on Law Number 12 of 2008 and Law Number 32 of 2004 is the right, authority and obligation
    for an autonomous region to regulate and manage its own regional government affairs and the interests of its
    people in accordance with existing laws and regulations.

    From the several opinions related to regional autonomy above, it can be concluded that regional autonomy is the
    freedom of rights or authorities as well as the obligations and responsibilities of local governments to
    regulate and manage an area in accordance with the capabilities and potential possessed by each region.

    After the regional autonomy system was implemented and running for more than two decades.
    Regional autonomy has made many new autonomous regions emerge. Until 2019, there were
    542 autonomous regions consisting of 34 provinces, 415 regencies and 93 cities.
    This proves
    that regional autonomy has been running well and has provided many benefits to the regions.
    Autonomous regions are able to develop and at the same time discover their regional potential
    through a scheme of absorbing and involving the community.
    However, apart from these
    advantages, regional autonomy still has many shortcomings that must be corrected.

    Advantages of Regional Autonomy

    In carrying out regional autonomy, there are several advantages that a region can get if it can maximize
    this system.
    The following are four advantages of regional autonomy that we need to
    know:

    1. Provincial and district and city governments can see the basic needs of their territory to become development
    priorities.

    2. The implementation of regional autonomy has succeeded in making development in the regions more advanced,
    developing faster in regional development, improving services and social welfare.

    3. Regions can regulate their regional governance independently through Regional Regulations, provided that
    Regional Regulations do not conflict with regulations made by the central government.

    4. Regional governments together with regional communities can work together in developing their territories to
    become more advanced.

    The success of regional autonomy lies in the authority of regional heads to see and discover the
    fundamental problems that exist in their regions.
    Regional autonomy allows regions to be more
    advanced, develop and compete with other regions.

    Lack of Regional Autonomy

    It is a common fact that there is no perfect policy or system behind the success of regional autonomy.
    There are three drawbacks that were successfully summarized. Here are three drawbacks
    of the regional autonomy policy that you need to know about:

    1. The potential for national disintegration may arise if the central government does not have strong control.

    2. Regional autonomy has the potential for corruption, collusion and nepotism (KKN) as well as other problems
    which will greatly impact the central government if it does not supervise its autonomous regions.

    3. Regulations set by the central government are often interpreted differently in each region.
    This has the potential to harm regional governments and people in the regions if regulations cannot
    be implemented in the regions.

    The main drawback of this regional autonomy system is the lack of preparedness of the regions in managing
    their regions.
    The inequality of resources makes regional development uneven, some are
    successful but some are not.
    The central government is needed in carrying out supervision so
    that each region can maximize its potential effectively and maximally.

    Principles of Implementation of Regional Autonomy

    The implementation of regional autonomy in Indonesia was only able to be implemented after finding its momentum
    in the post-reform era in 1998. The demands for reform motivated the MPR to hold a Special Session in 1998.
    regulation, distribution, utilization of national resources in an equitable manner, as well as central and
    regional financial balances within the framework of the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia.

    Furthermore, the implementation of regional autonomy was truly more perfect when the government and DPR RI found
    an agreement to ratify Law Number 32 of 2004 concerning Regional Government and Law Number 33 of 2004 concerning
    Financial Balance between the Central and Regional Governments.

    After the enactment of the two laws, the implementation of regional autonomy was realized. In
    the implementation of regional autonomy, there are several principles that will affect its implementation.
    The following are five principles of implementing regional autonomy that you need to know,
    including:

    1. Autonomy as Wide as Possible

    The principle of implementing regional autonomy has the intention that the regions are given the authority and
    power to regulate all government affairs other than government affairs that have been stipulated in the law.

    2. Real Autonomy

    The principle of implementing regional autonomy in a real way means that autonomy is given to regional
    governments based on existing duties, powers and obligations.
    In addition, this principle gives
    responsibility to local governments to encourage regional potential and carry out development according to
    the potential of their respective regions.

    3. Responsible Autonomy

    The principle of implementing regional autonomy that is responsible has the intention that the implementation of
    autonomy must be in line with and in accordance with the objectives and delegation of authority and
    responsibility from the central government.

    Principles of Local Government Administration

    In addition to the principle of implementing regional autonomy, regional autonomy requires implementing
    principles so that regional governments can exercise their authority optimally.
    The following
    are five principles of local government administration that you need to know, including:

    1. The Principle of Unity

    Regional autonomy must support the aspirations of the people’s struggles. Regional autonomy is
    expected to further strengthen the unitary state and improve the welfare of local communities in every
    region in Indonesia.

    2. Real Principles and Responsibilities

    Real and responsible regional autonomy must be implemented for the benefit of the whole community.
    Local governments have a very important role in regulating the process of local government as well
    as regional development.

    3. The Principle of Deployment

    Regional autonomy basically must be in accordance with the principles of decentralization and
    deconcentration so that it can be beneficial to the community.
    The principle of dissemination
    is intended so that people can innovate in an effort to carry out development in their area.

    4. The principle of harmony

    Regional autonomy in its implementation must prioritize the principle of harmony as a goal in addition to aspects
    of democracy.

    5. Empowerment Principles

    Regional autonomy must be able to increase the usability and efficiency of government administration in the
    regions.
    Regional autonomy itself has the goal of improving services and developing human
    resources in an area.
    In addition, local regional governments can carry out increased
    development related to national unity and regional and state political stability.

    Purpose of Regional Autonomy

    The following are the objectives of implementing regional autonomy that you need to know, namely:

    1. Implementation of political education.
    2. Creating political stability.
    3. Realizing
    the democratization of the government system in the regions.

    4. Open opportunities for the
    community to participate in various political activities at the local level.

    5. The
    implementation of regional autonomy is expected to increase the ability of regional governments to pay
    attention to their people.

    6. Local government will know more about the problems faced by
    its people.

    In addition to the 6 objectives of implementing regional autonomy above, the following are the objectives of
    regional autonomy from the perspective of several fields, including:

    1. From the political field, the purpose of regional autonomy is as a process to open up space for the
    birth of regional government heads through democratic elections.
    Regional autonomy is very
    likely to provide space for responsive governance to take place.

    2. From the economic field, the aim of regional autonomy is to open up opportunities for regional
    governments to develop regional to local policies and regulations.
    Regional autonomy aims to
    enable regions to optimize their distinctive potential to make economic improvements and earn income for
    their regions.

    3. From the social field, the purpose of regional autonomy is to create and foster a responsive attitude from the
    community in dealing with the dynamics that occur in the area where they live.

    Legal Basis for Regional Autonomy in Indonesia

    The establishment of regional autonomy itself actually has three legal bases, namely the Basic Law (UUD),
    MPR-RI Decree and Law (UU).
    The following is an explanation of the legal basis for regional
    autonomy in Indonesia, including:

    1. Constitution

    The legal basis for regional autonomy is contained in Article 1945 of the 1945 Constitution. Referring to Article
    18 of the UUD paragraphs 1 and 2 it states that the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia is divided into
    provinces, regencies and cities which regulate and manage their own government affairs based on the principle of
    autonomy and co-administration.

    2. Decree of the MPR-RI

    As one of the legal foundations for regional autonomy in Indonesia, the Decree of the MPR-RI No.
    XV/MPR/1998 explains that the implementation of regional autonomy includes regulation, distribution
    and use of equitable national resources, as well as financial balance between the center and the regions
    within the framework of the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia.

    3. Law (UU)

    The legal basis for regional autonomy is contained in two laws, namely Law Number 12 of 2008 concerning the
    Second Amendment to Law Number 32 of 2004 concerning Regional Government.
    According to the
    principle, the administration of regional government prioritizes the implementation of the principle of
    decentralization.

    In Law Number 12 of 2008 is to encourage community empowerment, increase the role of the community, and foster
    initiative and creativity, as well as develop the role and function of the DPRD.

    Regional Autonomy Dimensions

    In the dimension of regional autonomy, there are two basic values ​​developed in the 1945 Constitution, which
    relate to the implementation of decentralization and regional autonomy in Indonesia, namely:

    1. Unitary Value

    This unitary value is embodied in the perspective that the Indonesian state does not have other
    governmental units within it which are state in nature (Eenheidstaat).
    Sovereignty is fully
    attached to the people, the nation, and the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia is not divided into
    government units.

    2. Basic values ​​of Territorial Decentralization

    The basic value of territorial decentralization is based on the content and soul contained in article 18 of the
    1945 Constitution of the Republic of Indonesia. The government has an obligation to carry out politics in a
    decentralized and deconcentrated manner in the field of state administration.

    a. Definition of Decentralization

    Decentralization is a word that comes from the Dutch language. Etymologically, the word
    decentralization is a combination of the word “De” which means free and the word “centerum” which means
    center.
    So, the notion of decentralization is something that is independent from the
    center.

    b. Definition of Deconcentration

    Deconcentration itself is an attempt to expedite work by handing over power from top to bottom in terms of
    staffing.
    This decentralization gives regional power to regulate the region in an environment
    to realize the principles of democracy.

    Meanwhile, deconcentration is an attempt to transfer authority from the central government to autonomous
    regions.
    This autonomous region becomes the representative of the central government within the
    framework of a unitary state.

    Regional Autonomy in the Context of the Unitary
    State

    Regional autonomy in a unitary state like Indonesia is very beneficial for the development of an area that
    has potential and characteristics.
    Not only that, regional autonomy is also very possible to
    improve the welfare of people in the region.

    The implementation of regional autonomy and the implementation of regional autonomy refer to the legal
    basis for empowered demands and needs in facing globalization.
    The success of developing a
    region can be determined based on the ability and willingness of the local government and its people.
    The central government has given trust in the form of authority to regional governments to regulate
    and manage their own regions independently.

  • Knowing What Connotations and Other Types of Meaning are

    Connotation Is – When reading a literary work, Sinaumed’s must have encountered several vocabulary words which unconsciously can give their own ‘sense of value’ regarding their meaning. Even as time goes by, the meaning of the vocabulary can change into negative or positive things, especially when spoken in everyday conversations. For example, the word “dog” which basically has a definition of ‘ a four-legged animal that likes to bark when a stranger approaches it.‘. But in this day and age, the word “dog” has become a harsh word that tends to be cursed by angry people. This is in line with one of the characteristics of language, which is dynamic. That is, language is following and adapting to the conditions of the people who use it.

    What’s more, in this era of globalization, Indonesian vocabulary has increased a lot due to the “creativity” of its users. Many vocabularies then change their ‘taste value’. That is the concept of connotative meaning. Usually, the meaning of this connotation is closely related to the meaning of denotation which is also the main discussion in the branch of semantics. So, what does this connotation mean? Is there a difference between connotation and denotation in Indonesian, both in spoken and written language? What are the types of meaning in the world of semantics? So, so that Sinaumed’s understands these things, let’s look at the following review!

    What is Connotation

    Basically, this connotation is usually referred to as a word that has a figurative meaning, aka an imprecise meaning. In ‘showing’ the meaning that is not true, the word will usually also contain emotional values ​​or certain values ​​that are currently in effect in society. Given the existence of that language will not be separated from members of the community as users. Well, words that have connotations are known as connotative meanings. A little trivia, the use of this connotation has now developed in the world of marketing, to be precise for advertising a product.

    This was also stated by Chaer (2013) stating that a word can be called a connotative meaning if the word does have a ‘taste value’, both positively and negatively (can also be in the form of subtle and gross nuances). Although there are also taste values ​​that are neutral or have no connotation at all. As previously explained, one of the characteristics of language is that it is dynamic, aka adapting to the conditions of the society, so the meaning of this connotation can also change from time to time.

    For example: the words “wife” and “bini” both show the meaning of ‘ a woman who has become a husband’s partner’ . However, in its use, the word “wife” is more directed to a positive sense of value and has subtle nuances. Meanwhile, the word “bini” tends to have a negative taste value and has a rough feel, especially when used in writing news texts or official conversations. Although in fact, the word “bini” in Betawi culture does not have a negative connotation.

    This is also in line with the statement of Waridah (2018) who argues that the connotative meaning is indeed based on one’s feelings or thoughts. In short, this connotation meaning will be based on social attitudes and even a certain perspective from an era. That is why, connotative meaning is also known as figurative meaning or contextual meaning. An example of a connotative meaning that shows a certain perspective from an era is the word “chair”. In ancient times, this word “chair” had a positive and subtle meaning, namely ‘a seat that is rather high and usually has four legs’. Meanwhile, nowadays, people’s perspective on the word “chair” is different, especially when it is related to political issues. Yep, the word “chair” will change to have a negative meaning and have a rough nuance, namely asdishonestly obtained ‘position’ or ‘position’ .

    Since this connotation is an untrue meaning, aka figurative meaning that ‘highlights’ the value of taste from the perspective of an era, it is not uncommon for its existence to change following the development of society. There are so many vocabularies that turn out to be “results” of connotative meanings. Although to determine the figurative meaning of a word, one must first look at its true meaning, alias denotation. That is why, the existence of connotative meaning and denotative meaning will be related to one another.

    Based on the book Introduction to Indonesian Semantics , the reason why these connotative and denotative meanings “exist” and apply in society is because society’s views are based on prevailing cultural values ​​or norms. Yep, words with connotative meanings get “additional meanings” which are not entirely different from the views of the community itself as language users. Not infrequently, the “additional meaning” that leads to negative or positive sense of value is related to historical events and social functions that occur in society.

    An example is the words “women” and “women”. Although these two words share the same denotation (true meaning) as ‘adult human beings, not men’ , in the perspective of society, their meanings have changed. The word “women” defines more ‘a figure who is more educated and modern in all respects (perspective, way of dressing, able to earn money for themselves)’ , even its use is often associated with modern life in the city center. Meanwhile, the word “women” defines more ‘ a person who is less educated, not modern in all respects, more motherly in feeling, and diligent in cooking in the kitchen’ , usually its use will be associated with ordinary life in a small town or village.

    Even between the words “women” and “women”, there is also the word “female” which is considered to have a negative feeling and rough nuance. Given the word “female” is more often used to refer to the sex of animals. Even though the word “female” is used to refer to a woman, later on it will connote a very rude and lowly person, namely ‘a stubborn and wild person, like a girl who is naughty’ .

    Unfortunately, nowadays there is often a word whose ‘taste value’ has declined due to the actions of members of the community, thus indirectly changing the perspective of that word. For example in the word “wisdom”, which denotatively (true meaning) is ‘a wise behavior or action in dealing with a problem’. Denotatively, the word “wisdom” gives a sense of positive and subtle nuances But nowadays, the word “wisdom” actually has a negative connotation and has a harsh nuance because of the irresponsible actions of some community members, thus changing the perspectives of other community members.

    For example, there was a vehicle driver who was arrested because he had been proven to have violated traffic rules. Then, the driver instead asked for “wisdom” from the police officer not to further prosecute his mistake. Meanwhile, the police officer, who was supposed to be “wise”, asked the driver to give him “wisdom” as well. In short, the word “wisdom” can degenerate into ‘an act of bribery’ which has a negative connotation. When in fact, the word “wisdom” has a neutral or even positive connotation.

    There is one more thing that needs to be considered about the meaning of this connotation, which is that it will be adapted to the way of life and the norms that apply in a group of people, usually in a religion. For example, the word “pig” if you look at the denotative meaning (true meaning) is ‘ a four-legged animal that likes to play in the mud and has a long snout’ . However, in a community group where the majority are Muslim, this animal has a negative connotation, because it is considered unclean and unclean. On the other hand, in a group of people where the majority are not Muslim, for example on the island of Bali, this animal does not have a negative connotation.

    Examples of Connotative Meaningful Words

    • Odd

    Denotation meaning: odd; not even (usually related to numbers)

    Connotation meaning: strange; not as usual; magical (usually related to someone’s behavior)

    • Prey

    Denotation meaning: animal meat used as food by wild animals (related to animal ecosystems in the forest)

    Connotative meaning: target for evil deeds (related to evil things, for example thieves)

    • Pole

    Denotation meaning: a long wooden pillar to support the roof of a house or bridge.

    Connotation meaning: something that becomes the staple of life.

    • Root

    Denotation meaning: the part of the plant that is embedded in the soil as a reinforcement and absorber of water.

    Connotative meaning: origin, cause of something.

    • Parasite

    Denotation meaning: plants that live on other plants by sucking their food.

    Connotation meaning: a person whose presence does not provide benefits and only lives on other people.

    The Difference between Connotation and Denotation

    Although the meaning of connotation and denotation are different in terms of definition, they are still related to each other. The thing that needs to be understood regarding the meaning of connotation and denotation is “every word which is a full word must have a denotative meaning, but not all of these words have a connotative meaning”. So, here is the difference between connotation and denotation.

    Connotation Meaning Denotation Meaning
    As an unreal meaning alias figurative meaning. As the true meaning based on the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI).
    There is a sense of value in its use. There is no sense value in its use.
    Also known as contextual meaning. Also known as conceptual meaning.
    In general, the meaning will change according to the perspective that develops in society. In general, in the form of an explanation as a meaning that really corresponds to the results of human observations. Starting from sight, smell, hearing, and the experience of the five human senses.

    Recognizing Other Types of Meaning

    The division of the types of meaning is not only connotative meaning and denotative meaning, but has a very broad discussion. In the book SEMANTIC: Theory and Analysis , revealed that there are at least 3 other types of meaning. Well, here’s an explanation!

    1. Lexical Meaning and Grammatical Meaning

    Does Sinaumed’s know if the smallest unit or semantic unit in that language is called a lexeme? The existence of this lexeme is the same as phonemes in the branch of phonology and morphemes in the branch of morphology, which are both abstract in nature. This lexeme forms the basis for the formation of a word. For example, the words buy, buy, buy, and purchase are both formed from the same lexeme, namely buy . The meaning of the word “buy” can be identified even without having to combine it with other elements. Well, that’s what is called lexical meaning.

    Meanwhile, in terms of grammatical meaning, it looks more at linguistic units that can only be identified after these units are joined or combined with other linguistic units. In short, this grammatical meaning occurs when the basic word has undergone a process of affixing, repeating, and compounding, according to the context of the existing sentence.

    2. Literal and Figurative Meanings

    The literal meaning is a straightforward meaning which refers to the referent literally. For example, the word “crocodile”, according to the referent, will have the meaning of ‘a compatriot of four-legged animals that live in swamps or rivers’.

    Meanwhile, the figurative meaning refers more to other referents which usually deviate with various ethical (moral), aesthetic (beauty), insulting (humiliation) goals, and others. For example, the word “to the back” can deviate into a bathroom, when applied to the sentence “…Because she couldn’t stand it, Alia immediately asked permission to go back.”

    3. Primary Meaning and Secondary Meaning

    Almost the same as the lexical meaning, denotative meaning, and literal meaning, this primary meaning is also the meaning of a word that can be known by language users even without the help of context. While the secondary meaning is tantamount to grammatical meaning, connotative meaning, and figurative meaning, namely as meaning that can only be identified by language users with the help of context.

    Well, that’s a review of what connotation is and examples, the difference with denotative meaning, and other types of meaning in the world of semantics. Can Sinaumed’s name another example of this connotative meaning?

    Source:

    Chaer, Abdul. (2013). Introduction to Indonesian Semantics . Jakarta: PT Rineka Cipta.

    Wijana, I Dewa Putu and Muhammad Rohmadi. (2008). SEMANTIC: Theory and Analysis . Surakarta: Yuma Pustaka.

  • Knowing the Process of Photosynthesis in Plants and the Factors Affecting It

    The process of photosynthesis – The word photosynthesis comes from the Greek. Photo means
    light and
    synthesis means combination. Photosynthesis is a biochemical
    process of forming carbohydrates from inorganic materials carried out by plants, especially plants that
    contain a green substance, namely chlorophyll.

    In addition to organisms that contain greening substances, there are also organisms that carry out
    photosynthesis, namely algae and several types of bacteria that use nutrients, carbon dioxide, water and need to
    use solar energy.

    Almost all living things depend on the energy produced during photosynthesis. As a result,
    photosynthesis is essential for life on earth.
    Photosynthesis is also credited with producing
    most of the oxygen in Earth’s atmosphere.
    Organisms that produce energy through photosynthesis
    (Photos means light) are called phototrophs.

    Photosynthesis is a means of assimilation of carbon because in photosynthesis the free carbon from CO2 is
    bound (fixed) to sugar as an energy storage molecule.
    Another way organisms use to assimilate
    carbon is through chemosynthesis, which is carried out by some sulfur bacteria.

    Photosynthesis lessons are usually given when someone enters junior high school (SMP).
    However, there is nothing wrong if this material is reviewed again because it is closely related to
    everyday life.
    Summarized from several sources, the following is an explanation of what
    photosynthesis is and how this natural process occurs in plants.
    So, read the explanation of
    photosynthesis until it’s finished,
    Sinaumed’s friends .

    Definition of Photosynthesis

    In KBBI, the definition of photosynthesis is the use of solar energy (artificial sunlight) by green leafy
    plants or bacteria to convert carbon dioxide and water into carbohydrates.
    Photosynthesis is a
    biochemical process that uses sunlight and occurs only in organisms that have chlorophyll.

    Examples are plants and phytoplankton. This condition is a combination of two compounds CO2
    (carbon dioxide) and H2O (water) to produce chemical energy using light energy and chlorophyll.
    From the various definitions above, we can conclude that photosynthesis is the process of producing
    food using carbon dioxide, water, sunlight and chlorophyll.

    However, photosynthesis is not only carried out by plants. Several species of bacteria,
    protozoa, and algae are also capable of photosynthesis.
    These organisms are able to carry out
    photosynthesis because they have color pigments that can absorb sunlight, ranging from purple to red.
    Color pigments are not only green, but also xanthophyll (orange) and carotene (yellow).
    Organisms that are capable of photosynthesis are called autotrophs.

    Photosynthesis Process

    In this chemical transformation process, it really needs these 4 things: water, carbon dioxide, chlorophyll
    and the last is sunlight.
    The following is the process of photosynthesis:

    1. Plants take water from the soil, then it is taken up by the roots, and from the roots
      it is metabolized by the transport system, namely xylem and phloem tissues.
      Distributed to
      all organs of the plant body, including leaves.
    2. Carbon dioxide is obtained from the air that enters through the stomata.
      Place the stomata on the underside of the leaf.
    3. Photosynthesis occurs when the chlorophyll in the leaves receives sunlight and then the light
      is used to convert water and carbon dioxide into sugar and oxygen.
    4. The sugar produced can be used directly by plants, or it can be stored in other plant organs,
      such as fruits.
    5. In addition to sugar, the oxygen that is formed passes through the stomata and then
      into the air.
      This oxygen is used by humans to breathe.
    6. Through polymerization, the glucose or sugar produced from this process will be
      converted into starch or starch.
      The essence or starch will be stored in the roots

    Types of Reactions in the Process of
    Photosynthesis

    Until now photosynthesis is still being studied because there are still several stages that have not been
    explained, although much is known about this important process.
    The process of photosynthesis
    is complex because it involves all the main branches of natural science, such as physics, chemistry and
    biology.

    In plants, the main organ where photosynthesis takes place is the leaf. But in general, all
    cells with chloroplasts are capable of this reaction.
    This organelle is where photosynthesis
    takes place, precisely in the buffer.
    The results of photosynthesis (known as photosynthesis)
    are usually delivered first to nearby tissues.

    Basically, the chain reaction of photosynthesis can be divided into two main parts:

    light reactions (because they need light) and dark reactions (which don’t need light but do need carbon
    dioxide).
    The light reactions occur in the grana (singular: particles), while the dark
    reactions occur in the stroma.
    In the light reactions, light energy is converted to chemical
    energy and produces oxygen (O2).

    Whereas in the dark reaction, a series of cyclic reactions occur which form sugar from the building blocks
    of CO2 and energy (ATP and NADPH).
    The energy used in this dark reaction is obtained from the
    light reaction.
    During the dark reaction, sunlight is not needed. Black reaction
    to convert compounds containing carbon atoms into sugar molecules.

    Light reaction

    The light reaction is the reaction that produces ATP and reduces NADPH2. This reaction
    requires water molecules and sunlight.
    The process begins with the capture of photons by
    pigments that act as antennas.

    The light reactions involve two optical systems operating together, namely photosystems I and II.
    Photosystem I (PS I) contains the P700 reaction center, meaning photosystem absorbs light optimally
    at 700 nm, whereas photosystem II (PS II) contains photosystem II (PS II). P680’s response and absorption of
    light is optimal at 680 nm.

    The light reaction mechanism begins with the stage where photosystem II absorbs sunlight so that the
    chlorophyll electrons in PS II are excited and cause the charge to become unstable.
    To
    stabilize again, PS II will take electrons from H2O molecules around it.
    Water molecules will
    be broken down by manganese ions (Mn) which act as enzymes.
    This will result in the release of
    H+ in the thylakoid lumen.

    By using electrons from water, then PS II will reduce plastoquinone (PQ) to form PQH2.
    Plastoquinone is a quinone molecule found in the lipid bilayer of the thylakoid membrane.
    This plastoquinone will send electrons from PS II to an H+ pump called the cytochrome b6-f complex.
    The overall reaction that occurs in PS II is:

    2H2O + 4 photons + 2PQ + 4H- → 4H+ + O2 + 2PQH2

    The cytochrome b6-f complex functions to carry electrons from PS II to PS I by oxidizing PQH2 and reducing
    a small, highly mobile, copper-containing protein called plastocyanin (PC).
    This event also
    causes an H+ pump from the stroma to the thylakoid membrane.
    The reactions that occur in the
    cytochrome b6-f complex are:

    2PQH2 + 4PC(Cu2+) → 2PQ + 4PC(Cu+) + 4H+ (lumen)

    Electrons from the cytochrome b6-f complex will be accepted by photosystem I. This photosystem absorbs
    light energy separately from PS II, but contains an integral core complex, which accepts electrons coming
    from H2O through the PS II core complex first.
    As a light-dependent system, PS I functions to
    oxidize reduced plastocyanin and transfer electrons to a soluble Fe-S protein called ferredoxin.
    The overall reaction on PS I is:

    Light + 4PC(Cu+) + 4Fd(Fe3+) → 4PC(Cu2+) + 4Fd(Fe2+)

    Furthermore, electrons from ferredoxin are used in the final stage of electron transport to reduce NADP+
    and form NADPH.[21]
    This reaction is catalyzed in the stroma by the enzyme ferredoxin-NADP+
    reductase.[21]
    The reaction is:

    4Fd (Fe2+) + 2NADP+ + 2H+ → 4Fd (Fe3+) + 2NADPH

    H+ ions that have been pumped into the thylakoid membrane will enter into the ATP synthase.[1]
    ATP synthase will couple the formation of ATP with the transport of electrons and H+ across the
    thylakoid membrane.
    The entry of H+ into ATP synthase will make ATP synthase work to convert
    ADP and inorganic phosphate (Pi) into ATP.
    The overall reaction that occurs in the light
    reaction is as follows:

    Rays + ADP + Pi + NADP+ + 2H2O → ATP + NADPH + 3H+ + O2

    Dark Reaction

    The dark reaction is known as the Calvin-Benson cycle. In the dark, the Calvin reaction or
    reaction does not require sunlight to produce sugar and oxygen.
    The dark reaction occurs after
    the light reaction.
    The dark reaction is the process by which ATP and NADPH are fertilized by
    CO2 and then converted into sugar.
    The substrate is where the dark reaction occurs.
    In the buffer immobilization, reduction and regeneration processes occur. These stages
    include: 4,444 CO2 bonds (bonding) – Reduction – Formation of RuBP (Ribulose Bisphosphate).

    The dark reaction is divided through several processes, namely:

    • Carbon dioxide is bound by RuBp to give rise to phosphoglycerate (PGA).
    • PGA is reduced giving birth to PGAL (phosphoglyceraldehyde).
    • PGAL will be regenerated into glucose and RuBp.

    Photosynthesis in Plants

    Plants are autotrophic organisms. Autotrophs mean that they can synthesize food directly from
    inorganic compounds.
    Plants use carbon dioxide and water to produce the sugars and oxygen they
    need for food.
    The energy to carry out this process comes from photosynthesis. The
    following is the equation for the photosynthesis reaction that produces glucose:

    6H2O + 6CO2 + light → C6H12O6 (glucose) + 6O2

    Glucose can be used to form other organic compounds such as cellulose and can also be used as a fuel.
    This process takes place through cellular respiration which occurs in animals and plants.
    In general, the reaction that occurs in cellular respiration is the opposite of the equation above.
    During respiration, sugar (glucose) and other compounds react with oxygen to produce carbon
    dioxide, water, and chemical energy.

    Plants capture light using a pigment called chlorophyll. This pigment gives plants their green
    color.
    Chlorophyll is found in organelles called chloroplasts. Chlorophyll absorbs
    light to be used in photosynthesis.

    Although all the green parts of the plant body contain chloroplasts, most of the energy is produced in the
    leaves.
    Inside the leaf is a layer of cells called the mesoderm which contains half a million
    chloroplasts per square millimeter.

    Light passes through a transparent, colorless cuticle to the dermis, where most photosynthesis takes place. The
    leaf surface is usually covered by a waxy impermeable cuticle to prevent absorption of sunlight or excessive
    evaporation of water.

    Photosynthesis in Algae and Bacteria

    Algae range from multicellular algae such as seaweed to microscopic algae consisting of a single cell.
    Although algae do not have the complex structures of land plants, photosynthesis in both species
    occurs in a similar way.

    Simply because algae have different types of pigments in their chloroplasts, the wavelengths of light they
    absorb also vary more.
    All algae produce oxygen and most are autotrophs. Only a
    minority are heterotrophs, meaning they depend on materials made by other organisms.

    Factors Affecting Photosynthesis

    The process of photosynthesis is influenced by several factors, namely those that can affect directly such
    as environmental conditions and factors that do not have a direct effect such as disruption of several
    organic functions that are important for photosynthesis.
    Photosynthesis is actually sensitive
    to a number of environmental conditions including the presence of sunlight, ambient temperature, and carbon
    dioxide (CO2) concentrations.
    These environmental factors are also known as limiting factors
    and have a direct effect on the rate of photosynthesis.

    This limiting factor can prevent the photosynthetic rate from reaching optimal conditions even when other
    photosynthetic conditions have improved, which is why this limiting factor affects the photosynthetic rate
    by controlling the optimal photosynthetic rate.
    In addition, factors such as carbohydrate
    translocation, leaf age, and nutrient availability affect the function of the important organs in
    photosynthesis and thus indirectly affect the photosynthetic rate.

    The success of plants and autotrophs in making food through photosynthesis is influenced and required by several

    factors, namely:

    1. Light

    Light is the main ingredient for good photosynthesis.

    A. Light intensity

    Every plant has different light requirements. C3 plants (beans, cotton, soybeans, potatoes,
    wheat) have low light tolerance, so when exposed to high light intensity photosynthesis does not increase.
    Meanwhile, the light tolerance of C4 plants (sugarcane, corn and sorghum) is high. At
    high light intensity will increase the intensity of photosynthesis.

    B. Wavelength of Light

    Each color spectrum has a different wavelength. However, chlorophyll can absorb more red and
    blue colors because the wavelength of light is very efficient.

    2. Temperature

    All plants require different temperatures. For C3 plants, the optimum temperature needed is
    around 20-26 ℃.
    Meanwhile for C4 plants, the optimum temperature required for photosynthesis is
    around 35-40 ℃.

    3. Plant Age

    When the plant is mature, the tissues will form more and more perfectly, this helps increase the effectiveness
    and rate of the photosynthesis process.

    4. Concentration of Carbon Dioxide (CO2) and
    Oxygen (O2)

    Carbon dioxide greatly affects photosynthesis. The higher the concentration of carbon dioxide
    in the air will increase the rate of photosynthesis.
    In contrast to carbon dioxide, the more O2
    concentration will make the photosynthetic intensity decrease.

    5. Water and Nutrient Content

    Photosynthesis will be disrupted if the plant lacks water. Likewise, abundant water also
    inhibits photosynthesis.
    Chlorophyll actually requires the elements Mg (magnesium) and Nitrogen
    n).
    If these two elements are lacking, then the rate of photosynthesis will decrease.

    Benefits of Photosynthesis

    1. Produces Oxygen for Living Things

    During photosynthesis, plants also release oxygen as a by-product. Oxygen is needed by living
    things to breathe.
    In addition, during this chemical change, plants will absorb carbon dioxide
    from pollution.
    When carbon dioxide is absorbed, the air around plants becomes cleaner and
    cooler.

    2. Forming Fruits and Tubers in Plants

    Fruits and tubers are food reserves produced by this chemical process. Fruits and tubers can
    also be used by humans and animals as a food source.
    Fruits and tubers contain many vitamins
    and compounds that are beneficial to the human body.

    3. Produce Glucose

    In addition to oxygen, fruit contains glucose. Glucose in plants is used as fuel to make other
    food substances.
    Like fat or protein. Both substances are equally important for
    animals and humans.
    Protein is very good for the body. Protein can repair cells
    and enhance human immunity.

    4. Humidify the Air in the Surrounding Environment

    10% natural humidity caused by vegetation. Increased air humidity has an impact on humans,
    namely helping sedation, overcoming fatigue and helping people sleep better.

    5. Produce Food Ingredients

    The main function of photosynthesis is to produce food. Examples are fruits, tubers and
    glucose.
    The nutritional composition of plants is very beneficial to humans and animals.
    This is why the ability of plants to convert solar energy into chemical energy (nutrients) is
    always a link in the food chain.

    Closing

    Based on all the explanations above, it can be concluded that photosynthesis is the process of compiling simple
    compounds into complex compounds, in plant parts which then contain chlorophyll.

    The photosynthesis process will also help produce the main product in the form of stored carbohydrates as
    food, including fruit.
    This process will also require the help of sunlight. When
    fruit is eaten by other organisms, there will be a transfer of energy.

    If you are looking for books about plants or water, you can get them at sinaumedia.com. Reading
    lots of books and articles won’t hurt you because Sinaumed’s will get #OtherWithReading information and
    knowledge.

  • Knowing the Impact of Forest Fires on Human Survival!

    The impact of forest fires – In the past, Indonesia was often considered the lungs of the
    world because it had a very large area of ​​forest.
    Forests are claimed to have a central role
    in producing oxygen for mankind.
    Unfortunately, the case of forest fires that hit Indonesia has
    made the forest area in Indonesia narrower and smaller.
    This of course brings fantastic losses
    to the country and also threatens public health.

    Broadly speaking, forest fires are caused by two primary factors. The first is natural factors
    and the second is human-made factors that are not controlled. Natural factors, such as the influence of the
    El-Nino effect, cause long dry spells so that the plants become very dry.

    Before discussing fire, of course, we must first know what the definition of fire is. In this
    case, of course, fire has a role as an igniter for a fire that occurs somewhere.
    A small fire
    can become big and start a fire.

    Fire is a chemical reaction formed from three elements, namely heat, oxygen and fuel which produce light
    and heat.
    These three elements combine and become an element, namely fire. That’s
    why the fire we see today can produce light as well as create a feeling of heat around it.

    Fire itself is an uncontrolled fire that can harm the safety and property around us. The
    nature of the fire before it starts is very important, usually igniting nearby objects for 3-10 minutes.
    I

    this is why if a fire occurs in a densely populated settlement, it will spread to neighboring houses.
    Especially if the fire occurs in the forest. All life in the forest, such as flora,
    animals, and even humans, can die as a result of the fires that occur.
    Now, on this occasion,
    sinaumedia will discuss the impact of forest fires and how to prevent them.
    For those of you who
    are curious about the impact of forest fires and how to prevent forest fires, see the following
    reviews!

    Forest fires

    Forest fires and land fires are surface fires where the fire burns fuel such as (debris, trees, bushes,
    etc.) above the surface.
    The fire then spreads abnormally below the surface (burning above
    ground), burning organic matter through the peat pit and bush/tree roots, the tops of which ignite.

    As it progressed, the flames spread both vertically and horizontally within the smoke pocket, burning only
    white smoke on the surface.
    The fire will be very difficult to extinguish because the fire
    starts underground and only smoke rises to the surface.

    Previously, Indonesia had experienced the largest forest fires, these fires occurred in 1982, 1983, 1991,
    1994, 1997, 1998, 2006 and 2015. The 2015 fires caused 80% of Sumatra to be covered in thick smoke due to
    the fires.
    The impact of forest fires is of course detrimental to all parties, starting from
    the economy, health and society, because the smoke and fires can also disturb neighboring countries.
    Therefore, it is necessary to take serious measures regarding this disaster and analyze the reasons
    for its failure.

    Climate change is increasing the frequency of forest fires and the resulting damage. This
    assertion does not come from wishful thinking, or from something that fell from the sky, but from
    science.

    In fact, there has been no shortage of efforts so far to recover from and prevent outbreaks of wildfires.
    In Indonesia, the United States, Australia, everywhere they have been affected for years.
    However, forest fires continue to occur with great damage. This does not include the
    dead and missing.

    In America, President Donald Trump, one of the people who do not believe in climate change, and he blames the bad
    management of forests by the authorities in California.

    In Indonesia, forest firers as well as individuals or companies are often targeted. It is very
    possible that there was negligence on the part of parties with an interest in the forest.
    But
    science, in general, blatantly dismisses such accusations: that forest fires are becoming more frequent,
    with all the consequences, because of climate change.

    Several studies have established a relationship between the two phenomena. For example, a 2014
    study has results published in the journal
    Advanced Earth and Space Sciences. Key
    findings: Rising temperatures and accompanying droughts are causing forest fires to break out in all
    parts of the world.
    Another 2015 study found that the number of fire days per year is
    increasing as global temperatures continue to rise.

    The following year’s study, published in the Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences, found
    that climate change will continue to ‘increase the likelihood’ of wildfires in the western United
    States.
    In addition, it was also found that increasing temperature and water vapor pressure
    in the forests of the Western United States over the past few decades have caused 75% of the forest area
    to be threatened by forest fires.

    What is indisputable: forest fires cause material losses. Research by San Diego State
    University in 2009 found the economic costs of forest fires were far greater than previously thought.
    For example, the consequences of the forest fires in 2003 were about $2 billion higher than
    estimates.
    In Indonesia, the World Bank estimates that the damage from forest fires in 2019
    will reach IDR 72.95 trillion.

    Researchers from the University of Oregon point to one possible really heavy effect on forest fires.
    Large-scale forest fires, he concluded, “generated instability in the labor market due to stronger
    seasonal variations in employment in subsequent years”.

    Science also confirms that human activities are increasing global temperatures, which in turn causes
    climate change.
    It is truly a hint of what can be done to prevent future forest fires, namely
    taking steps to reduce the impact of human activities on the climate.
    Of course, this requires
    a political decision.
    However, actors, especially companies actively choosing this path, must
    be supported.

    Impact of Forest Fires

    Following are some of the impacts of forest fires on human health, which need to be watched out for, summarized
    by sinaumedia.com from several sources.

    1. Lung and Respiratory Infections

    Smoke from forest fires can cause local/local irritation to the mucous membranes of the nose, mouth and
    throat which are in direct contact with fire smoke, as well as triggering allergic reactions, inflammation
    and possibly inflammation.
    , starting with ARI and if severe can reach pneumonia .

    The ability of the lungs and respiratory tract to deal with infection is also reduced, making infection
    more likely.
    Human) and bad environment (environment).

    2. Lowering Body Resistance

    In general, various chronic diseases in various organs of the body (heart, liver, kidneys) can also get
    worse.
    This is partly due to an indirect effect as the mist suppresses the immune system and
    also causes stress.
    It should be emphasized again that the elderly and children (as well as
    people with chronic diseases) with weak immune systems are more susceptible to health problems.

    3. Causing the Loss of Habitat of
    Living Creatures in the Forest

    Forest fires in Riau occur automatically which can damage local animal habitats. Creatures
    that live in the forest are expelled and stop surviving such as interacting, eating, breathing, etc.
    There are also rumors that a tiger has come out of the forest. He was looking for
    another place to live to replace what he had lost.
    In addition to losing their homes, creatures
    in the forest could die if they didn’t escape.

    Forest creatures seek and find new habitats that will disturb society. If this continues and
    no further action is taken, losses will occur.
    Humans will also lose their habitat as animals
    will lose their homes.

    4. Hard to Find Clean Water

    Forests are important water reservoirs for survival. If the forest continues to dry up, then
    there is nothing to hold back water, rainwater or mountain water.
    The existence of water and
    forests is directly proportional.
    When forests are thinned, there is nothing left to hold
    water, reducing groundwater (artesian) water supplies.

    If this continued, it would be difficult for sentient beings to obtain clean water. The damage
    caused by a lack of drinking water includes public health that will be disrupted, the water cycle will be
    disrupted, thus impacting climate change, such as prolonged drought and irregular rain cycles.

    5. Headache, Nausea, and Vomiting

    Another impact of forest fires on human health is that they can cause headaches, nausea, and vomiting.
    Exposure to carbon monoxide inhaled from forest fires can also cause headaches.

    Even with headaches, carbon monoxide poisoning causes nausea and vomiting due to reduced oxygen supply to
    the body.
    Migraine-like headaches are the type most often associated with the chemicals that
    cause fire fumes.

    6. Reflex cough due to mucus irritation

    As much as possible, people should limit outdoor activities to avoid exposure to high levels of smoke from
    forest and land fires.
    Otherwise, exposure to smoke can cause a person to cough.

    Indeed, the mucous membranes of the respiratory tract secrete more mucus when irritated. The
    increased production of mucus and the tightening of the airway muscles cause the cough reflex.

    7. Global Warming

    Due to the inclusion of chemicals such as carbon monoxide (CO) and aldehydes, the pollution caused by
    intentional forest fires is far more dangerous than natural fires.
    The downside of smoke
    pollution is that it is harmful to public health and inhibits plant photosynthesis.

    In addition, the harmful effects of ozone, nitrogen oxides, carbon dioxide and hydrocarbons.
    Different types of substances can travel long distances and be converted into other gases such as
    ozone or particles such as nitrate and organic oxygen during this transport.
    The ozone layer
    can also be destroyed by these chemicals.
    When the ozone layer is damaged, the earth’s surface
    temperature rises, global warming occurs and the polar ice caps melt.

    In addition, UV rays directly hit the earth (nothing gets in the way). It can also affect
    people’s health, including skin cancer caused by UV rays.
    The next drawback is the greenhouse
    effect it causes.
    Indeed, the resulting smoke prevents heat from being reflected back into the
    biosphere.
    As a result, heat radiates from the surface and is reflected back into the smoke
    above and cannot escape.
    If this continues, the greenhouse effect could melt the polar ice
    caps, and if this happens, the country could sink.

    The dynamics of the development of pollutants that enter the body of the environment are increasingly
    diverse in quality and quantity, which are influenced by various human activities on earth.
    The
    entry of pollutant into the environment will have a direct and indirect impact on the environment and the
    health of the population in the area.
    To anticipate this, an initial analysis of potential
    risks to ecosystems and society is carried out to control pollutant levels and prevention scenarios are also
    developed.

    8. Source of Dangerous Pollutants

    Pollutants in the smoke from forest fires that fall to the surface of the earth can also be a source of
    contamination in unprotected drinking water and catering facilities.
    If then the contaminated
    water and food are consumed by the public, it is not impossible that digestive disorders and other diseases
    will occur.

    9. Exacerbates Asthma

    Another effect of wildfires is that they exacerbate asthma and other chronic lung diseases, such as chronic
    bronchitis, COPD, and more.
    Smoke from forest fires will be inhaled into the lungs.
    The ability of the lungs to work is reduced, the patient gets tired easily and has difficulty
    breathing.

    10. Causes Eye and Skin Irritation

    The main impact of forest fires on human health is that they can cause eye and skin irritation. Eye and
    skin irritation can occur as a result of exposure to smoke.
    Fire smoke causes symptoms of
    severe itching, watery eyes, inflammation and infection.

    11. The Fall of a Big Tree

    A tree that should have lived many years fell by accident. The existence of what is happening
    will also be disrupted.
    If this continues, forest fires continue to occur and without
    commensurate repairs, we will lose large green open spaces that can produce oxygen and natural resources.
    Indeed, this time the results will not be small, but the losses will be much greater.

    The downside is that existing agricultural land is used for construction and settlement, whereas forests
    are inhabited by other organisms that are used to expand agricultural land.
    Later, our
    generation will only think that the forest is just a fairy tale because the past has passed, they cannot
    find the forest.
    The absence of forests would also cause a lot of damage. Such as
    floods, landslides, global warming and rising temperatures.

    12. The Economy is Disrupted

    This can happen because the smoke from pollution caused by forest fires is very thick, making it difficult
    for people to carry out economic transactions.
    This loss has an impact on residents because it
    can reduce the income of residents who work in the private sector.
    In addition, for regional
    agencies it also disrupts activities that rely on local governments in achieving regional
    development.

    How to Prevent Forest Fires

    Prevention of forest fires is not only the duty of forest rangers, but also the obligation of all
    Indonesian people.
    To reduce the potential for forest fires in Indonesia, the following methods
    can be applied.

    1. Analysis of Fire Prone Points

    To determine the flammability point in an area, we can use the Keetch Byram Index method .
    This method is done by assessing the danger of forest fires based on the index or degree of
    drought in an area.
    With proper analysis, the risk of land fires can be avoided and
    continuously managed.

    2. Conduct Routine Patrols

    Forest patrols are very important to protect forests, especially against potential forest fires and illegal
    logging.
    Endemic forest fires require more frequent and strict forest patrols and monitoring.
    Especially during the dry season, forest patrols and monitoring must be carried out more
    frequently.

    3. Detect forest or land fires as soon
    as possible

    Even when preventive measures have been taken through flash point analysis as well as strict patrols or
    surveillance, the forest is still at risk of burning.
    Therefore, rangers and the public must
    prepare for the worst.
    To make the most of forest fire prevention measures, to be careful and
    quick to detect hot spots.

    The following steps can be taken to detect forest fires quickly, including:

    • Establish a watchtower that has long visibility, complete with binoculars, detection and
      communication equipment.
    • Build guard posts in forest areas and border areas with residents or business land.
    • Analyzing data from flights, satellites and weather data in forest areas.

    4. Prepare Fire Fighting Equipment

    All active equipment for forest fire management must be loaded and available at all times.
    This is intended to speed up the extinguishing and evacuation process in the event of a forest or
    field fire.
    Quick and proper handling will help reduce excessive losses.

    It is also important to create water reservoirs in areas where there is a risk of explosion.
    This is an effective way because the proximity to water will speed up the extinguishing and
    evacuation process.

    In addition, it is also necessary to install an alarm bell to signal when a fire occurs. This
    alarm is intended to alert nearby rangers and volunteers to turn off immediately and evacuate early.
    So that forest and land fires do not spread or spread too far.

    5. Conducting Extension and Education

    Suggestions can also be given periodically so that people understand the dangers of forest fires, how to
    prevent them, and how to deal with them.
    These tips will increase public awareness about forest
    sustainability.
    In addition, the board can also be used as a means of education and practice on
    how to handle fires in the field.

    The following is some knowledge that can be given to the community, including:

    • It is not allowed to burn anything in forest areas that can cause fire to spread, such as dry
      grass or plastic and others.
    • Do not burn in areas prone to fire.
    • When you have finished burning something, make sure that the fire is completely extinguished
      so that there is no possibility of it reappearing, spreading and causing a forest fire.
    • If you see a source of fire or fire, report it immediately or communicate with the guard post
      or guard on patrol so that it can be dealt with quickly.
    • Provide an understanding of local regulations regarding permits and restrictions on
      burning prohibitions.
      This regulation was prepared by the Ministry of Forestry and Natural
      Resources.
      For example regarding the minimum distance of burning, permits and regulations
      for camping activities, regulations for workers in the forest, and so on.
  • Knowing the Functions, Objectives, and Benefits of HR Management in a Company

    Functions, Objectives and Benefits of HR Management – In business management, of course,
    you will often find a human resources (HR) department or human resources management.
    The human
    resource management function is generally responsible for recruiting and developing human resources in a
    company.

    Human Resource Management, abbreviated HRM, is the science of managing relationships and the role of resources
    owned by individuals effectively and efficiently and can be used optimally to achieve the common goals of the
    company, employees and society.

    Human resource management is human resource development which functions to carry out planning, implementation,
    recruitment, training, career development of employees or workers and taking initiatives to develop human
    resources for organizational development of an organization or company.

    Basically there is no business that doesn’t need to manage human resources or what we often know as Human
    Resources (HR). The Human Resources Department is responsible for supporting various
    needs related to business human resources (HR), including human resource management (HR) so that every
    activity or job runs smoothly and efficiently.

    In carrying out activities, both within an organization and within a company, competent human resources are
    needed in their respective fields.
    In carrying out activities in a company or organization,
    human resource management (HR) is also very important so that these activities can be carried out smoothly
    and to achieve the desired goals.

    The application of human resource management is one of the objectives of the means of communication between
    employees and the company.
    The process of implementing human resource management may include
    planning, leading, organizing, and controlling.

    The function of human resource management is also very complex in the sustainability of a company.
    For a better understanding, the following functions of human resource management in companies are
    cited from various sources.

    HR Management Function

    The function of human resource management (HRM) is to manage people as efficiently as possible to achieve
    mutually beneficial human resource units.
    Human Resource Management (HRM) is a subset of
    general management that focuses on human resources.

    HRM itself is a field of study that investigates how human roles and relationships exist to help achieve
    organizational and business goals.
    In the book Human Resource Management by Malayu SP Ce
    Hasibuan, the concept of HRM will be explained in a simple and structured way for
    Sinaumed’s friends.

    In principle, this human resource management function includes a number of activities that have a
    significant impact on all areas of the company’s work including planning, hiring and firing employees,
    employee compensation, performance appraisal, rewards and career development, training and development,
    occupational health and safety, leadership and productivity.
    The function of human resource
    management is as follows.

    1. Staffing and Performance Evaluation

    Staffing

    The first function of human resource management is staffing or membership. HR in the function
    of human resource management is a function of membership regulation.
    There are three main
    operations of this function including planning, drawing and selection.

    This human resource management function plays an important role in determining the quality of human
    resources in a company.
    The HR Department will carry out planning related to the recruitment
    and development of personnel as well as selection and elimination related to the individual quality of the
    HR

    Performance evaluation

    The human resource management function in a company will certainly evaluate the performance of the human
    resource department.
    The HR department is responsible for evaluating the performance of the HR
    department.
    This human resource management function can include evaluations and evaluations
    related to the performance given during a certain period.

    Through evaluation, the company can ensure that each employee fulfills their respective job
    responsibilities.
    HR management must also be developed in various forms such as training to
    improve HR performance.

    2. Compensation and Job Training

    Compensation

    The next human resource management function is compensation. This function will then take care
    of employee salaries which will also be linked to the satisfaction and benefits received by the company.
    Compensation can be in the form of basic salary, bonuses, incentives, health insurance, leave,
    retirement funds.

    The HR department should make a good salary structure, while the manager should provide salary.
    Both parties must have good coordination so that the compensation is in accordance with the joint
    decision and applicable law.

    Compensation aims to create an atmosphere of competition among company employees in a fair and consistent manner
    with applicable policies.

    Training and development

    To improve the quality of human resources, an important function of human resource management is training
    and development.
    The human resources department is responsible for helping managers create
    training programs for each class of employees to create a higher quality of effectiveness.

    The human resources manager must also be involved in training and development programs, assessing the needs
    of training and development programs, and evaluating the effectiveness of training and development programs.
    In addition to providing training, this function also allows human resources to be responsible for
    termination of employment in certain circumstances.

    Companies can train and develop their employees through formal and informal procedures. Formal
    procedures may be implemented with the introduction of new positions or as a means of keeping up with
    changing technology.
    Meanwhile, informal procedures can be carried out in the workplace and
    managed by senior staff.

    In this process, it means that the field of human resources can provide training, courses, seminars and
    coordination opportunities within the company with employee or staff career planning.
    This
    training and development includes activities such as the design and implementation of training programs and
    their assessment programs.

    3. Employee Relations , Personal
    Research and Work Safety

    Employee Relations

    Human resource management is management that deals directly with human resources in all industries.
    For companies with internal unions, the human resource management function should actively deal
    with all union issues and negotiations.

    The primary responsibility of the human resources department is to prevent unfair practices such as
    strikes.
    In non-union companies, the human resources department must be involved in employee
    relations.
    This function ensures that employees are treated fairly and if there is a clear and
    good way to deal with complaints that arise.

    Personal Research

    The next function of human resource management is to analyze individual and company problems and make
    changes accordingly.
    Human resource management will also act as a solution to individual
    problems or research.

    Issues that are commonly reviewed by human resources can include the causes of employee absences or tardiness,
    sound recruitment and selection processes, and causes of labor dissatisfaction movements.

    The human resources department is responsible for gathering and analyzing information regarding this case.
    The results are used to assess whether existing policies need to be changed.

    Occupational Health and Safety

    The main function of human resource management is to create good health and safety in the business
    environment.
    Occupational health and safety will affect the company’s reputation.

    The HR department is obliged to maintain the safety of its workers through the programs it manages.
    This is done to minimize unexpected events and create an atmosphere of safety and security in the
    work environment.

    The Human Resources Department is also responsible for specific training in occupational safety and the
    development of health programs for workers.
    In addition, the human resources department is
    required to report whenever an accident occurs.

    4. Human Resource Planning

    Mondy, Noe, and Premeaux state that human resource planning is a systematic process of assessing and
    reviewing human resource needs to ensure that a number of employees are needed and requirements are met.
    Skills are identified and made available when needed.
    The human resource planning (HR) function
    includes a number of activities, including:

    Analyze positions within a company to identify required tasks, objectives, skills, knowledge and
    capabilities.
    Plan and forecast the company’s workforce needs in the short and long
    term.

    Develop and implement plans to meet these two needs.

    Business planning for the quality and quantity of human resources (HR) is the most uncertain task of human
    resource management as a predictor of trends in the business environment that is constantly unfolding.

    In this regard, companies must be able to see trends in technological developments, such as those that can
    affect the quality and quantity of the company’s human resources in the future.
    Planning human
    resources (employees) effectively according to business needs to achieve business goals.

    5. Allowance Remuneration

    Employee salaries are said to be successful if they are based on justice and equality.

    • The balance between wages paid for different jobs in a company.
    • Pay fair and reasonable wages to employees or employees holding the same position in the same
      company.

    Wages basically cover all the rewards received by workers or employees as a result of their work.
    Mondy, Noe, and Premeaux state that rewards can take the form of one or a combination of wages,
    benefits, or non-monetary rewards.

    Wages can be in the form of money received by employees or employees for the results of their activities.
    Allowances as additional financial rewards on top of the basic salary (gapok) include leave pay,
    sick leave pay (THR), and health insurance.

    HR Management Objectives

    The goals of human resource management in every business are very diverse. According to Ulrich
    and Lake (1990), human resource management systems can be a source of corporate competence that enables
    companies to continuously learn and demonstrate new opportunities.

    Cushway argues that the purpose of human resource management is to take management into account in formulating
    human resource policies to ensure that the company has high performing employees or employees who are always
    available, willing to deal with change and fulfilling their obligations as legal workers.

    Not only that, the next goal is to implement and maintain all human resource policies and procedures that help
    the company achieve its goals.

    The role of HRM itself in a broad sense is to achieve business goals, including a human workforce that not
    only has the capacity and skills but also the will and determination to do work efficiently and effectively.
    The following are some of the objectives of HR management based on the opinion of economist
    Sunarto.

    • Obtaining and retaining the best employees, highly motivated, and can be trusted by the
      company.
    • Always improve the quality and ability of employees to work in the company so as to increase
      productivity.
    • Creating an optimal employee recruitment system.
    • Creating a good working environment between management and employees.
    • Balancing the needs of each stakeholder.
    • Reward employees based on the achievements they achieve. For this,
      companies can use employee performance appraisal applications for their data sources.
    • Improving employee welfare
    • Provide equal opportunity for all employees
    • Creating fairness and transparency among all employees.
    • Manage employees based on their individual needs and facilitate the delivery of their
      aspirations.

    Benefits of HR Management

    Human resource management (HR) plays a vital role in the growth of an organization or business and forms the
    backbone of any organization or business, small or large.

    Many organizations clearly state that employees are their greatest and most valuable asset, which means
    that effective human resource management is essential for the growth of any business or business.
    When done right, human resource management makes a huge difference in increasing employee
    productivity in the workplace.

    Here are 5 key benefits of human resource management to consider when managing human resources in your industry
    or organization for maximum productivity at every level.

    1. Recruitment and Training

    One of the main benefits of human resource management (HR) is recruiting and bringing the right people into
    their industry or organization and training them to do their job better.
    . They
    develop job descriptions that are more relevant to their position.

    2. Performance Management System

    Human resource management is responsible for improving the performance management system of employees so
    that they feel motivated and rewarded for their achievements.
    This will not only help them
    improve their skills but will also force them to look better than before.
    Always try to be open
    about their accomplishments.
    Performance Management An effective system that identifies and
    rewards individual performance.

    3. Building Culture and Values

    One of the most important benefits of a human resource management (HR) department is creating a healthy and
    comfortable workspace.
    helps bring out the best in an employee. Creating a good
    workspace is the main responsibility of the Human Resources (HR) department to ensure maximum
    productivity.

    4. Conflict Management

    Another very important benefit of a human resource management (HRM) department is the management and
    resolution of conflicts between employees and superiors in an industry or organization.
    Human
    resource management takes timely action to peacefully and elegantly resolve unpleasant conflicts before they
    get out of hand and mess things up.

    5. Increasing Employee Turnover

    One of the main benefits of human resource management (HRM) is the careful monitoring and management of
    employee turnover.
    High employee turnover is taking a toll on the industry. It
    costs more than twice the income of current employees to create and train new employees.
    The
    human resources (HR) department has to be very clear about hiring the right people from the start.

    When interviewing candidates, they should not only look at their skills but also check whether they are a
    good fit for the industry or organization.
    Human resource management (HR) departments usually
    look at employees when there is a problem but the reality is that they should go to them and ask them to
    reduce employee turnover.

    Closing

    The explanation above shows that Human Resource Management (HRM) includes the competence and potential of
    leaders and employees of a company.
    Employees must not be treated like machines and must
    realize that employees have potential and talents that can be continuously developed for business interests.
    Once developed, the leader must create a conducive atmosphere so that his abilities can be applied
    within the company.

  • Knowing the Function of a Thermos, History, and Parts of a Thermos

    The Function of a Thermos – Hello, Sinaumed’s friends , I’m sure you are already
    familiar with a kitchen tool called a thermos.
    The reason is, almost every household keeps
    these devices.
    You can see for yourself what the function of a thermos is in general, namely as
    a tubular container or bottle for storing hot water.

    Thermos is a household appliance that has many advantages. In the past, thermos flasks were
    only used to store hot water. Today, thermos flasks have been improved many times to make them more
    practical and can be carried anywhere.

    For example, mothers will often carry a small thermos of hot water with them to make milk for their babies.
    Unfortunately, very few people know the role and function of a thermos as a container for drinking
    water.

    Since this kitchen appliance keeps water hot, mothers can use it to make milk for their children on the
    move.
    But did you know that each part of this thermos has its own function?

    Thermos function

    1. The function of the outer glass wall

    The thermos has an outer glass wall, which functions to prevent radiant heat transfer. So the
    heat from outside that enters the thermos is reflected back, so that the cold water contained in the thermos
    is maintained at a temperature.

    2. The thermos lid function

    The thermos lid has a shape that is like a blockage and functions to prevent water and air from coming in
    and out of the thermos.
    In other words, the thermos lid can prevent heat transfer by convection
    and conduction.

    3. The function of the glass wall

    Can we also see the function of the flask from the inside of the glass? In addition to the
    outer glass wall, the flask also has an inner glass wall.
    The function of this section is to
    prevent heat transfer so that the wall is not absorbed.

    4. The function of the protective glass wall

    A protective glass wall is located on the outside of the tank. The function of this section is
    to isolate heat between the air around the flask and the glass tube on the appliance.
    Having an
    outer insulation layer prevents you from getting too hot when you want to pour hot water from the
    thermos.

    5. Function of the Cup Holder Rubber Part

    The next part of the thermos is the rubber cup holder, which has the function of keeping the bottle or
    glass in the bottle fixed and unchanged.
    This thermal rubber is the bottom of the thermos
    design.

    6. Vacuum or Vacuum Function

    The vacuum or vacuum inside the vessel prevents heat transfer from outside the vessel and inside the
    vessel, and isolates heat.
    The absence of a medium in this vacuum prevents heat transfer by
    conduction and convection.

    In short, if the function of the tank in the vacuum section is to limit the possibility of heat loss from
    inside or heat entering from outside into the tank.
    The vacuum is the center of the
    flask.

    The flask is actually made of double-glazed glass, with a vacuum between the walls or the middle.
    Then on one of the walls there is a layer of silver, which traps heat so that radiation does not
    occur and is not absorbed by the wall.

    7. The Outside of the Thermos

    The outside of the thermos has a tube shape made of plastic or stainless metal material that is sturdy and
    can protect the inside of the thermos.
    Now the outside of the thermos is available in various
    colors and patterns to give it an aesthetic impression.

    History of the Thermos

    The invention of the thermos has made significant changes since 1904. Steady technological advances and constant
    development of new products have helped keep the thermos at the forefront of the industry for almost a century.

    The flask was invented by Sir James Dewar in 1892, a scientist at the University of Oxford, the first “thermos”
    to be produced commercially in 1904, when a German two-glass blower founded GmbH Thermos, the public held a
    naming contest for “servant jar” (vacuum flask) , after which the Munich people named it “thermos” from
    the Greek word
    “Therme” which means “hot”.

    In 1907, Thermos GmbH sold the trademark rights to the bottle to three independent companies:

    The American Thermos Bottle Company of Brooklyn, NY; Thermos Limited from Tottenham, England;
    Canadian Thermos Company Limited of Montreal, Canada. Thermos became so popular and
    known after being brought by a number of famous expeditions, including:

    • Lieutenant. EH “Shackleton’s Journey to the South Pole”,
    • Robert E. Peary’s “Journey to the North Pole”,
    • Colonel Roosevelt “Expedition to Mombasa and into the heart of the African Congo” with
      Richard Harding Davis.
    • The Wright Brothers “Airplane and Zeppelin”

    This flask is praised worldwide for its revolutionary design. In 1909, this flask won the
    “Grand Prize” at the Alaska Yukon Pacific Show and was honored for seven other exhibitions around the
    world.

    In 1911, Thermos made a technological breakthrough by producing the first glass filling machine.
    So far, the thermos is famous for its vacuum glass technology in the world.

    The growth in the popularity of the flask was extended by the production of glass making machines.
    In 1923, the company introduced a 24 liter “blue jug” and a large rice flask called the “Jumbo
    Jug”.

    A new type of vacuum insulated double-walled Pyrex® glass tank was newly designed in 1928 and had a
    capacity of 24 gallons.
    It became very popular in 1928 and 1929 for ice cream and fish
    freezers, shortly before the advent of commercial refrigeration.

    When World War II broke out in Europe in 1939, almost all the herbs stored in Britain were limited due to
    use by soldiers for war.
    Meanwhile, in the US, the thermos company that played a role in
    supplying thermos for wartime needs was “The American Thermos”.

    At that time, more than 98% of the production of flasks was used for military purposes and atomic energy
    laboratories.
    Although the war ended in 1945, the flask’s popularity continued to grow.

    By 1957, the vacuum flask was almost universally recognized for use in food and beverage. In
    addition, thermos products are also very useful for the needs of the scientific, medical and industrial
    world.

    They have been used in a variety of instruments for measuring electrical power, aircraft climb rates,
    detecting oil deposits and recording weather conditions.
    And has been used to transport rare
    tropical fish, store and transport plasma, serum, bone, tissue and insulin.

    In 1966, the world’s first thermos with the name stainless steel vacuum was introduced.
    This product will change the way food or drink is kept cold or hot around the
    world.

    In 1971 thermos products were exported to more than 100 countries. 1985 was a successful year for thermos with
    the introduction of the coffee machine “The Coffee Butler” . This vacuum insulated
    glass carafe hit the market around this time and became one of the top household products in North
    America.

    Tips for Choosing a Good and Right Thermos

    Is the function of a thermos really useful in everyday life? Especially when traveling, you
    can still get drinks with temperatures that are still hot or still cold.
    This makes the thermos
    a popular household appliance and a must have, for example a portable stove.

    Due to the large number of thermos products on the market, you may feel confused about which thermos to
    choose.
    because there are thermos products that leak quickly, as a result the hot water storage
    process will be disrupted.

    So based on that, you have to apply some tips in choosing a thermos. The first thing is to pay
    attention to the material used to form the device earlier.
    In general, the thermos itself is
    made using various materials.

    Starting from glass, plastic, to stainless steel . Of course, it would be better if you
    choose a thermos made of glass or stainless steel, because materials like these tend to have a good
    ability to retain temperature.

    As there are many flasks in circulation, their sizes become more varied. some are mini sizes,
    for example 200 milliliters and some are up to three liters in size.
    Therefore, you need to
    adapt it to your daily needs.

    Also, don’t forget to consider the thermos function according to your needs. Because over
    time, thermos can not only be used to delay heat.
    But you can also use it to withstand cold
    temperatures.

    However, some of the flasks that were scattered turned out to have only one ability. For
    example, being able to withstand only heat or only being able to withstand cold temperatures.
    So according to that, you must adjust it according to your needs.

    It’s not uncommon for people to think that having a high price is good. Because the outer
    appearance of the thermos does not guarantee the quality of the thermos in maintaining the water
    temperature.

    In addition, sometimes brand flasks are counterfeited so that brands that are known for their good quality turn
    out to be bad.

    Quoted from Vacuum Flask.rangdong.com , there are three types of flasks, namely glass bottles,
    stainless steel bottles, and plastic bottles.
    Each type has its own advantages and
    disadvantages.

    Glass thermos is safe for health, keeps heat stable and preserves milk, coffee, tea without mixing odors.
    However, in general, glass flasks are expensive. Some glass bottles are not impact-resistant.
    For example, consider saving for a trip to Lebaran.

    If you need both, then choose a thermos that can be used at the same time to delay cold and hot
    temperatures so that the function of the thermos is much more flexible.
    Then don’t forget to
    pay attention to the size of the thermos you need.

    It is undeniable that today’s thermos is indeed one of the kitchen thermos that is needed by every
    household.
    Using a thermos, you can also use it and easily carry warm drinks or cold drinks on
    the go.

    • Smell Check

    Before buying, remember to smell the thermos, if there is a bad smell, it means that the material in the
    thermos is not good.
    So it’s better not to buy it.

    • Check the Weight of the Flask

    You might be tempted to buy a thermos because it’s lightweight so you don’t have to carry it around.
    However, a thermos that is too light is not made properly or the material is not good, besides that
    a thermos that is too light cannot retain heat for a long time or can only retain heat for about 1-2
    hours.

    • Endurance Test

    A good thermos can retain heat for a long time so that every component fits perfectly. The
    bottle cap must be tight and the cap rubber must be good silicone.

    Because the silicone material has few molecules, it mixes with the drink when pouring. In
    addition to not sealing, silicone bacteria can build up on the lid of the hot water tank and cause an
    unpleasant odor that is a potential health hazard.

    How a Thermos Works

    According to the exchange theory of Henry Prevost Babbage (1824 – 1918), a colder object always absorbs
    heat waves from the other until they are both at the same temperature.
    Based on this theory,
    hot or cold tea in a thermos will lose heat or absorb heat from its place.
    However, temos is
    designed to be able to block three paths of heat transfer: conduction, convection, and radiation.

    The flask is made of double glass, the space between the two walls and one of the walls is covered with a
    glossy coating (silver was used here).
    In this flask there are two glass walls, each of which
    is polished.
    The inside is polished so that hot water is not absorbed by the walls.
    While the outside of the glass wall is polished and coated with silver in order to prevent heat
    transfer by radiation.

    What do you do with a vacuum? Vacuum is used here to prevent heat transfer by convection.
    Does the lid have a function? Obviously, yes, the thermos lid here is made of
    insulating material, the goal is to avoid heat transfer by conduction. The operating principle of a thermos
    is actually very simple.

    This flask uses an adiabatic material. Ideally, this adiabatic material inhibits the
    interaction between the system and the environment.
    There is no displacement of the system on
    the ship with its environment.
    Hence no heat exchange. By using this adiabatic
    material, the thermos can maintain the temperature of the water it contains.

    Thermos Parts

    1. Close the Cork (Bottle Cap)

    This unit has the function of closing the bottle cap after the thermos is full of water. This
    cap has the effect of preventing heat transfer by conducting conduction.
    So the thermos lid can
    prevent water and air from escaping from the thermos.

    2. Glass Inner Wall

    We may not realize that a flask has an inner lining. This wall has the effect of preventing
    heat transfer of hot water so cold water is not absorbed.
    It is intended that heat is
    distributed unscathed and conducts heat to the outside.

    3. Exterior Glass

    This section serves to prevent heat transfer by radiation. The heat from the outer wall of the
    glass that enters the balloon is reflected to the outside of the balloon so that no heat enters.

    4. Vacuum Space (Vacuum)

    This section has the function of maintaining and limiting the possibility of losing heat contained in the
    thermos.
    According to the Encyclopedia Britannica , these voids prevent heat
    transfer from the interior and exterior walls leading to insulation.
    Therefore, this
    process becomes important in vacuum bottles.

    Therefore, the thermos is responsible for minimizing heat loss by conduction and convection, but not by
    radiation.
    The plug is made of a mixture of aluminum, glass, plastic and cork, so it conducts
    electricity fairly well.

    The inside of the thermos is made of aluminum covered with glass while the outer protective layer of the
    thermos is made of plastic and cork with the aim of keeping the temperature in the thermos constant and
    unchanged.
    Then the vacuum (vacuum) in the thermos acts as an insulator to maintain the water
    temperature.

    Application of Thermodynamics to Flasks

    Of course, there are still many applications of thermodynamics in our lives. Another example
    of the application of thermodynamics can be found in the flask. The application of the first law of
    thermodynamics is also found in the flask, which uses an adiabatic material, thus preventing the exchange of
    heat between the system and the surroundings and vice versa, so that there is no decrease in
    temperature.

    A thermos is also an example of an isolation system that is fairly easy to find. How heat
    works is put into a thermos and cannot get out because it is blocked by the shiny white glass.
    The reason why all of our bottles have glossy white glass inside is because compared to dark
    colors, white absorbs less heat.

    In addition to heat-resistant glass, heat is also prevented by an air gap between the tube and the glass,
    then an air gap between the tube and the wall is prevented, because air is a poor conductor of electricity.
    hot. Eventually, it gets blocked again by the outer layer of the plug or whatever we touch and see
    which is usually plastic or metal.

    By using this adiabatic material, the thermos is able to maintain the temperature of the water inside.
    Hot water that has entered the thermos does not cool quickly.

    Author: Ziaggi Fadhil Zahran

  • Knowing the Difference between Strategy and Tactics in the Business World

    The difference between strategy and tactics – The terms tactics and strategy are usually
    used in the business world.
    It is not uncommon for people to assume that both have the same
    definition.
    In fact, there is a very basic difference in strategy and tactics.
    Misunderstanding the two can lead to the failure of an organization or business.

    In a competitive industry, you will always come up with new and better products and services.
    The goal is to track the evolution of consumer demand. For example, Microsoft and
    Apple both make computer operating system products.
    They always do a tactical battle to win the
    hearts of consumers.

    While strategy and tactics originate from military terms, their usage has spread to planning in many areas
    of life.
    Strategy is a master plan or set of goals. Changing strategy such as
    trying to take down an aircraft carrier is possible, but not fast.

    Tactics are the specific actions or steps you take to achieve your strategy. For example, in
    times of war, a state’s strategy may be to win over the hearts and minds of opposing civilians.
    To achieve this, they can use tactics such as broadcasting or building a hospital.

    Your personal strategy may be about entering a particular career, while your tactics may include choosing
    an education, finding a mentor to help you, or setting yourself apart from the competition.
    We
    can have strategies for everything from gaining political power, to promoting, building relationships, and
    increasing blog readership.

    Whatever we try to do, we will do our best to understand how strategy and tactics work, and how they
    differ, and how we can adapt the two.
    Without a strategy, we risk wandering through life, a
    life of uncertainty and confusion if we move towards what we want.

    Without strategy, we must live in a dream or chronic dissatisfaction. As Lawrence Freedman
    wrote in Strategy: One story,
    “It is considered reckless to have no strategy, face
    problems or strive for any cause.
    Of course, no military campaign, corporate investment, or
    government initiative will receive support unless there is a strategy to measure it….
    There
    is a call for strategy whenever the path to a certain goal is not straightforward.”
    And without tactics, you become completely dependent on luck to execute your
    strategy.

    To achieve anything, we need micro and macro visions, forests and trees – and how the two perspectives
    mesh.
    Strategy and tactics complement each other. It doesn’t work well without the
    other.

    Sun Tzu realized this two and a half millennia ago when he said: “Strategy without tactics is the
    slowest path to victory.
    Tactics without strategy is the noise before the flop.
    We need to take a long-term view and think about the future, and choose short-term actions to
    take now for what we want later.”

    Sinaumed’s friends , so that you don’t misunderstand in applying the two, you should really
    understand what the difference between the two is.
    Check out the following reviews!

    What are Tactics?

    So what’s a tactic? Tactics are the specific things you will do to achieve the goals you have
    set yourself in the developed strategy.
    Tactics are specific plans and resources that you will
    use to achieve your goals.
    Business tactics include marketing and sales plans, which team will
    execute them, partners and any other resources you may need.

    The word “tactics” comes from the Ancient Greek word “taktikos” , loosely translated as “the art of
    organizing or directing”.
    We now use this term to refer to actions towards a goal.
    Tactics often focus on the efficient use of available resources, be it money, people, time,
    ammunition or materials.
    Tactics also tend to be short term and more specific than
    strategy.

    Many tactics are timeless and have been used for centuries, if not millennia. Military tactics
    such as ambushes, use of the weather, division and conquest have been around since humans fought wars.
    The same goes for tactics used by politicians and protesters.

    Effective tactics often include an “implementation intent” – specific triggers that signal when the tactic
    should be used.
    Just decide what to do. We need an “if this then that” plan to
    know where, when, and why.
    The short-term nature and flexibility of our tactics allows us to
    pivot as needed, choosing whichever tactic is right for the situation, to achieve our larger strategic
    goals.

    What is Strategy?

    Strategy comes from the Greek word “stratēgia” which means the art of directing troops, commands, positions
    or generals.
    Strategy can be defined as a general plan to achieve one or more goals set within
    a certain period of time.

    Strategy describes what your overall or long term goals are. Strategy is also a plan for what
    you want to achieve, as well as the problem you want to solve.
    Strategy is important because
    the resources available to achieve it are often limited.
    Strategy involves the process of
    setting goals, prioritizing, identifying actions to achieve goals, and mobilizing resources to implement the
    actions.

    The Difference between Strategy and Tactics

    From understanding the two things above, we can conclude a little what is the difference between strategy
    and tactics.
    Broadly speaking, strategy is a plan or blueprint that contains various tactics;
    Strategy has a wider scope than tactics.

    Differences in Strategy and Tactics in the
    Business World

    Both are two things that are used in different aspects of life. Governments, armies, and even
    wars require strategy and tactics.
    Anything related to goals or objectives requires strategies
    and tactics.

    Business is often known as the long game. Of course, there are also short term and long term
    goals.
    Surely you don’t want to do business in just 2 or 3 months, do you? The
    long game of business requires many different requirements to achieve the desired goals and objectives.
    When you have a goal, you need a detailed plan to achieve it.

    At this point, the plan becomes a strategy because of the need to make it happen. Therefore,
    the expected result of these actions is the achievement of long-term goals.

    Tactics, on the other hand, are actions that are structured in such a way as to achieve a set long-term
    goal.
    In some cases, there are tactics designed to deal with unexpected or expected changes or
    different situations.
    Not only in the business world, we can easily find the use of tactics in
    football matches.

    For example, the manager determines the strategy to win the game. To achieve this, they will
    use various tactics such as passing the ball to certain players.
    The player’s task is to pass
    the ball to create scoring opportunities.
    But in the game, maybe their defenders are much
    taller than the strikers to be able to handle the incoming crosses.

    Given conditions on the pitch, managers may decide to change tactics. For example, pushing
    wingers onto the field and playing behind defenders.
    This kind of tactical change can lead to
    victory so that the original strategy is always carried out.

    How to Use Strategy and Tactics in Business

    After understanding the difference between the two, let’s discuss further how the two can be applied to
    business.
    In the military field, just two people are also useless. But when the
    two are combined, they support each other.

    No matter how good your trading strategy is, all of this is useless without a strategy.
    Tactics are what you really need to do to make your business a success. Tactics are
    the building blocks of an execution plan that will turn your strategy into reality.

    Tactics are your roadmap, specifically your marketing plan, sales, product and who you choose to work with.
    Tactics are all the specific choices you make and the tasks you perform to execute your trading
    strategy.

    The Importance of Strategy and Tactics in the
    Business World

    The most important thing to remember is that tactics will support your strategy. Since tactics
    are steps or points for implementing strategy, they must match each other.
    For example, the
    strategy of an upscale restaurant is to create a high-quality, intimate experience for diners.
    A possible strategic support tactic is to provide a great customer experience, from improving the
    look inside, improving the quality of the flowers on the table to choosing the right menu.

    With these strategies and tactics, restaurants will stand out by providing delicious food and great
    experiences.
    In return, they will ask the customer to pay a higher price. If done,
    strategy and tactics will go hand in hand.
    A business selling handmade leather wallets, watches
    and other accessories with a target market of craft lovers needs to have the right strategy and tactics.
    For example, by creating campaigns or advertisements that inform about the origins of leather and
    the stories behind the craftsmen.

    When your tactics don’t align with your strategy, you will send a different message to your potential
    customers and it will confuse them.
    You might attract the wrong customers who won’t buy your
    product.

    • What are the key points to include in your trading strategy? Marketing
      channel.
      How will you sell your products and services? Online or
      offline?
    • Marketing plan. How do you reach potential customers? Are you
      going to use a traditional or digital brochure?
    • Team. Who are the people you will involve to achieve company goals?
    • Partners and Resources. A business sometimes needs to partner with other
      businesses to be successful.
      List all partners who are important to you.

    After understanding the difference between the two, let’s discuss further how the two can be applied to
    business.
    In the military field, just two people are also useless. But when the
    two are combined, they support each other.

    No matter how good your trading strategy is, all of this is useless without a strategy.
    Tactics are what you really need to do to make your business a success. Tactics are
    the building blocks of an execution plan that will turn your strategy into reality.

    Tactics are your roadmap, specifically your marketing plan, sales, product and who you choose to work with.
    Tactics are all the specific choices you make and the tasks you perform to execute your trading
    strategy.

    The Relationship between Strategy and Tactics

    Every time we decide on a goal and invest resources to achieve it, we create a strategy.
    Freeman wrote:

    “A popular contemporary definition describes it as seeking a balance between ends, means, and means;
    on goal setting; and the resources and methods available to achieve those goals.
    This balance requires not only finding ways to achieve desired goals, but also aligning goals so
    that realistic ways of achieving them can be found with the available means.”

    In The Grand Strategy of the Roman Empire , Edward N. Luttwak writes that strategy “is not about
    moving troops across geographic areas, as in a board game.
    It encompasses the entire
    struggle of opposing forces, which need not have any dimensions at all….
    When you think
    about winning a war, what does victory mean?
    History is replete with examples of wars being
    “won” on paper, only to be restarted as soon as the enemies have had time to regroup.

    So, determining your goals, to fully cover what you want to achieve, you need to develop a good strategy.
    Success is not instant success but long term success. This is the difference between
    the end of World War I and World War II.
    World War I was to win this war. World
    War II was about never having a war like this again.

    In Good Strategy, Bad Strategy , Richard Rumelt writes: “The most basic idea of ​​strategy is to apply
    strengths against weaknesses, or if you prefer, strengths are applied to the most promising opportunities… A
    good strategy is not just about using existing strengths but generating strengths. .

    Rumelt’s definition of strategy as creating strength is extremely important. You will not burn
    out while executing your strategy.
    You choose a consolidation strategy and increase your
    strength as you do so.
    Back to winning hearts and minds – tactics require upfront costs.
    But over time, and as strategies were deployed, additional strength and support was gained by
    winning the support of the local population.
    A good strategy makes you stronger.

    Traits of a Good Strategy

    1. Decisions that utilize data

    A good strategy is carefully thought out and planned and very well documented. If you want to
    build a solid long-term strategy, you need to gather information and data from past experiences to influence
    future data-driven decision-making.

    For example, some industries experience seasons in their business. Knowing how to use the
    seasons to your advantage is an example of good strategic thinking and using historical data to your
    advantage.

    2. Clearly defined goals

    The best strategy is based on clear objectives. Building a good strategy is much easier if you
    know exactly what to achieve.
    Having clear goals is an important part of long-term strategic
    planning.
    Many people plan strategy and business goals together, which can simplify the
    process.
    But, without an end goal, trying to strategize is like trying to run without knowing
    the route.

    3. Backup plan

    The success of the strategy depends on the expected results. But what happens when strategy
    gets in the way?
    This is where a backup plan comes in. If you include contingency
    plans in your strategy, you can anticipate bottlenecks.
    The team will know what to do to
    overcome obstacles so the project doesn’t completely stall.

    Traits of a Good Tactic

    1. Tactics are short term

    While strategy is a long term plan, tactics are short term steps that help achieve smaller goals.
    Tactical planning involves breaking down strategic plans into short-term actions.

    2. Tactics are closely related to strategy

    If you are trying to understand how a particular tactic contributes to your strategy, it may not be the
    best tactic for your strategy.
    The work you do must make a positive contribution to the goals
    you want to achieve.

    The OKR goal-setting framework is a good example of the relationship between short-term tactics and
    long-term vision.
    There are main goals and main results set to achieve the main goal.
    The tactics that people apply regularly contribute to the development of key results.

    3. Tactics are actionable and timed

    Tactics are best executed within a limited amount of time. As with most goal setting
    strategies, setting a time limit ensures the tactic is completed within the deadline.
    When in
    doubt about how to create actionable tactics, there’s a time limit.

  • Knowing the Bandung Lautan Api Incident and Its Background

    The Bandung Lautan Api incident – ​​Every country has its own history, like Indonesia.
    One of the historical events in Indonesia is the Bandung Lautan Api incident. At that
    time, the condition of the city of Bandung was quite turbulent and burning occurred in many places.

    However, not everyone knows what the Bandung Sea of ​​Fire incident is. In this article, we
    will learn together about the Bandung Sea of ​​Fire event and its background.
    So, see the
    reviews in this article until they run out, Sinaumed’s.

    Description of the Bandung Sea of ​​Fire Event

    Before we discuss the struggle of Bandung Lautan Api, it’s better if we discuss the description of the city
    of Bandung, West Java.
    Bandung is the capital city of the province of West Java, Indonesia and
    is the third largest city in Indonesia after Jakarta and Surabaya.
    In terms of density, this
    city is the second most densely populated city in Indonesia after Jakarta with a density of
    15,051/km2.

    The city of flowers is another name for this city, because in ancient times this city was considered very
    beautiful with the many trees and flowers that grew there.
    In addition, Bandung was formerly
    known as
    “Paris Van Java” because of its beauty.

    In fact, the city of Bandung is also known as a shopping city with malls and factory outlets that are
    widely spread in this city, and currently the city of Bandung is also gradually becoming a culinary tourism
    city.
    In 2007, the consumption of several international NGOs made the city of Bandung the
    pilot project of the most creative city in East Asia. Currently, the city of
    Bandung is one of the main destinations for tourism and education.

    Back again, to the Bandung Lautan Api incident which occurred on March 23, 1946. One of the important
    points in the history of Indonesian independence was marked by the emptying and burning of Bandung by the
    people and the army so that it would not be used as the headquarters of the allied forces and NICA (Dutch).
    The scorched-earth action in Bandung was seen as the most ideal tactic in the current situation
    because the strength of the Republic of Indonesia’s troops was not comparable to that of the allies and
    NICA.

    Bandung Lautan Api became one of the most heroic events in the history of defending Indonesia’s independence and
    is immortalized in various forms of artwork, such as songs or films.

    Background and Causes of the Bandung
    Lautan Api Event

    Djoened Poesponegoro and friends in National History of Indonesia VI (2008) explain that the Bandung Sea of
    ​​Fire incident began with the arrival of the Allied/British troops on October 12, 1945. Not only that, the
    arrival time of the allied troops was also only a matter of days from the formation of the TKR.

    People’s Security Army (TKR)

    Previously, Indonesia was uniting the revolutionary struggle of youth through the People’s Security Agency (BKR)
    since August 22, 1945. The People’s Security Agency then changed its name to TKR as of October 5, 1945. The
    People’s Security Army (TKR) was the name of the first armed forces established by the government Indonesia.

    TKR was founded on October 5, 1945, a few weeks after the proclamation of Indonesian independence.
    TKR was formed from several military ranks including the Dutch East Indies Colonial Army (KNIL),
    Voluntary Defenders of the Homeland Army (PETA).
    The formation of TKR aims to overcome a
    situation that is starting to become unsafe, because allied troops are returning to Indonesia.

    On October 5, 1945, the government issued a decree containing the establishment of a national army.
    Moh. Hatta then summoned a former KNIL officer, Urip Sumoharjo to organize the army.
    October 6, 1946, the government appointed Supriyadi, a leader of PETA, an organization made in
    Japan in Blitar, to become the Minister of People’s Security.

    The Central Indonesian National Committee (KNIP) on 9 October 1945 called for TKR mobilization, namely for
    all Indonesian youths to register as TKR members, whether or not they had received military training.
    TKR’s highest headquarters was originally set in Purwokerto, but after receiving various
    suggestions and strategic considerations from Urip, the highest headquarters was moved to Yogyakarta.
    Currently, the headquarters has become the Dharma Wanita Wiratama Museum.

    TKR SEA

    After TKR was formed on October 5, 1945, followed by the formation of TKR Laut which was ratified on
    November 15, 1945. The TKR Laut headquarters is also in Yogyakarta.
    To create uniformity in the
    TKR organization, negotiations were held between the TKR Laut leaders, namely Mas Pardi, Nazir, Sumarno.
    RE Martadinata and R Suardi.

    The negotiations were carried out together with Urip Sumoharjo as TKR’s Chief of General Staff.
    The results obtained from these negotiations were that it was decided to form a Sea TKR division
    consisting of:

    1. Division I West Java headquarters in Cirebon
    2. Division II Central Java headquarters in Purworejo
    3. Division III East Java at headquarters in Surabaya

    TKR ON THE FLIGHT

    On October 5, 1945, Decree Number 6 was issued which required TKR to be responsible for all security on
    land, sea and air.
    Therefore, responsibility and authority over all air bases is under TKR’s
    control.

    On December 12, 1945, TKR’s highest headquarters declared the establishment of an aviation section as part
    of the General Headquarters.
    The TKR leaders for aviation were Soerjadi Soerjadarma as chairman
    and Martokoesoemo as Deputy Head of TKR.

    Based on Government Decree

    No. 4/SD in 1946, the name TKR was officially changed to the Indonesian Republican Army (TRI).
    TRI was inaugurated on January 26, 1946. This change of name was based on the many fighting
    soldiers and armed forces formed by the Indonesian people in their respective regions.

    For this reason, the Government of Indonesia wants to emphasize that the only military organization in the
    Republic of Indonesia is TRI . However, TRI also did not last long, on
    June 3, 1947, President Soekarno again changed the name of TRI to the Indonesian National Armed Forces
    (TNI).
    TNI itself is the result of the amalgamation of various paramilitary troops and
    armed forces of the TRI.

    MAP

    PETA stands for Defenders of the Homeland. Peta is a voluntary paramilitary unit formed by the
    Japanese during the Dai Nippon colonial period in Indonesia, on October 3, 1943 to be exact. The history of
    Peta is inseparable from the needs of the Japanese military in World War II.

    PETA members are Indonesian youths and were formed with the aim of defending the homeland from the threat
    of the allies in the Greater East Asia War which was part of World War II which was being faced by Japan.
    Later, the soldiers who graduated from Peta became one of the main pillars for the formation of the
    People’s Security Army (TKR) after Indonesia’s independence.

    TKR is the forerunner of the Indonesian National Armed Forces (TNI). Bombarding the United
    States military base in Pearl Harbor, Hawaii on December 8, 1941 made Japan in control of areas in Asia, one
    of which was Indonesia which at that time was part of World War II which Japan was facing.
    Later, the soldiers who graduated from PETA became one of the main pillars of the formation of the
    People’s Security Army (TKR) after Indonesia’s independence.

    TKR was the forerunner of the Indonesian National Armed Forces (TNI), which at that time was occupied by
    the Dutch.
    On January 11, 1942, Japanese troops landed in Indonesian territory.
    Precisely in Tarakan, North Borneo near the Malaysian border. In no time, the
    Netherlands had to hand over the occupation of Indonesia to Japan.
    Officially, the transfer of
    power between Japan and the Netherlands was based on the Kalijati Agreement which was held in Subang, West
    Java.

    Suhartono in the History of the National Movement: 1908-1945 (2001), states that the
    negotiations in Kalijati on March 8, 1942 agreed that the Dutch armed forces surrendered unconditionally
    to the Japanese.
    The reason for the formation of PETA at that time, Japan was still facing
    allied forces in World War II.
    Therefore, his occupation in Indonesia was used to meet the
    needs of war.

    One of them is the use of Indonesian youths as additional Japanese troops in World War II.
    Quoted from ABRI Leadership in a Historical Perspective (1997) by Suyatno Kartodirdjo, the mobility
    of the population by the Japanese government accelerated the process of absorption and knowledge of Japan’s
    military.

    Basically, there are different reasons regarding the formation of PETA from the two parties.
    Indonesia has always yearned for military training as a provision to fight colonialism and pursue
    the ideals of independence.
    Meanwhile, Japan formed the Map because it needed additional troops
    trained in the military field as an anticipatory measure to face allies if they attacked Indonesian
    territory.

    Ahmad Mansur Suryanegara in Fire History Volume II (2006) wrote that the desire to
    form PETA from the Indonesian side was then strengthened by a letter from Gatot Mangkoepradja to
    Gunseikan, the highest leader of the Japanese military government based in Jakarta.
    Gatot
    Mangkoepradja was one of the founding figures of the Indonesian National Party (PNI) on 4 July 1927 in
    Bandung.

    Together with Sukarno and a number of other figures, he was arrested by Dutch East Indies officials in
    Yogyakarta, then thrown into prison in Bandung, which culminated in the ” Indonesia Sues

    moment
    in 1929. In his letter, Gatot Mangkoepradja requested that Japan form a line of
    Indonesian youths to defend the homeland from Allied threats in the Greater East Asia War.
    “…the
    Indonesian people not only stayed behind and strengthened the rear, but also joined the battlefield,
    participated in fighting and undermining British, American and allied power,” he wrote quoted from the
    Gatot Mangkoepradja Letter presented before Padoeka Jang, Moelja Gunseikan at Jakarta (1943).

    Nugroho Notosusanto in the Peta Army during the Japanese occupation of Indonesia
    (1979) stated that the initiative to form additional troops consisting of local people had to come from
    an Indonesian leader.
    PETA’s tasks and objectives are quoted from Nezia Anisa’s article
    entitled
    “What is a Map” (2016) which was published on the
    University of Malahayati’s website. The purpose of creating a map can be viewed from two sides.

    Viewed from the Japanese side, the establishment of PETA was a Japanese effort to attract sympathy so that
    the Indonesian people would provide assistance in the Greater East Asia War.
    Based on the
    background of its formation, Peta’s task was to assist Japanese troops in the Greater East Asia War.
    In addition, the task of the PETA troop, as its name implies, is to defend Indonesia’s homeland
    from Western threats.
    The formation of PETA for Indonesia is an effort to raise the fighting
    spirit of Indonesian youths so that young people are trained in the military field.

    The existence of PETA is also an initial form of preparing military forces if at any time Indonesia becomes
    independent.
    Therefore, PETA was also involved by the nation’s leaders at that time to prepare
    for independence.
    PETA figures, such as Gatot Mangkoepradja, Soekarno, Mohammad Hatta, Ki Ageng
    Suryomentaram, Ki Hajar Dewantara, KH.
    Mas Mansoer and other figures played a role in the
    formation and development of PETA before the independence of the Republic of Indonesia.

    Later, PETA emerged from figures who played a major role in the struggle to defend Indonesia’s independence
    and laid the foundation for the formation of the Indonesian armed forces, or what later became the TNI.
    Indonesian military figures who are PETA graduates include: Soedirman, Suharto, Ahmad Yani,
    Supriyadi, Basuki Rahmat, Sarwo Edhie Wibowo, Umar Wirahadikusumah, Soemitro, Poniman, Latief Hendraningrat,
    Kemal Idris, Suparjo Rustam, GPh djatikoesoemo and others.

    Army Assistant (Heiho) and former youth ranks (Seinendan). A few weeks after the Proclamation
    of Indonesian Independence, Allied troops belonging to AFNEI (Allied Forces Netherlands East Indies) came to
    Indonesia after winning World War II against Japan.

    Mohammad Ully Purwasatriya in his research entitled “The Role of Sukanda Bratamanggala and Sewaka in North
    Bandung in Defending Independence in 1945-1948 (2014), said that initially their arrival was only to free Allied
    soldiers from Japanese custody.

    However, it turned out that the Dutch or NICA were piggybacking on the allied forces and wanted to control
    Indonesia again.
    Turmoiled resistance from soldiers and the people of Indonesia for the
    presence of the Netherlands.

    The Bandung Sea of ​​Fire incident

    The allied forces began to launch propaganda. The Indonesian people were warned to lay down
    their weapons and hand them over to the allies.
    The Indonesian side did not heed the ultimatum.
    The Indonesian military responded by attacking allied bases in northern Bandung, including the
    Homan Hotel and the Preanger Hotel which were the allied headquarters, on the night of November 24,
    1945.

    On November 27, 1945, Colonel MacDonald as the allied warlord once again delivered an ultimatum to the
    Governor of West Java, Mr. Datuk Djamin, that the people and soldiers immediately vacate the North Bandung
    area.
    Warning valid until November 29, 1945 at 12.00 must be complied with. If
    not, then the allies will act tough.

    The second ultimatum was not taken into account at all. Several battles took place in North
    Bandung.
    Allied posts in Bandung became the target of the raid. On March 17, 1946
    the Supreme Commander of AFNEI in Jakarta, Lieutenant General Montagu Stopford warned Sutan Syahrir as Prime
    Minister of the Republic of Indonesia that the Indonesian military should immediately leave South Bandung to
    a radius of 11 kilometers from the city center.
    Only the civilian government, police and
    civilians are allowed to stay.
    Following up on the ultimatum, on March 24, 1946 at
    10.00.

    The Republic of Indonesia Army (TRO) under the command of Colonel AH Nasution decided to burn Bandung to
    the ground.
    People began to be evacuated. Most of it goes south of the railroad in
    a southerly direction for 11 kilometers.
    The wave of refugees grew bigger after sunset.
    Scorched Bandung to the ground began. Residents who want to leave the house burn it
    first.
    The TRI troops have even bigger plans.

    TRI planned to burn the total on March 24, 1945 at 24.00, but this plan did not go smoothly because at
    20.00 the first dynamite exploded in the Inside Restaurant Building.
    Because it didn’t go
    according to plan, the TRI troops continued their action by blowing up buildings and burning people’s houses
    in North Bandung.
    That night, Bandung caught fire and the event became known as “Bandung Sea of
    ​​Fire”.

    Figures in the Bandung sea of ​​fire incident from Indonesia, namely: Mohammad Endang Karmas, Moeljono,
    Datuk Djamin, Soetan Sjahrir, Colonel AH Nasution.
    Meanwhile, the figures in the Bandung sea of
    ​​fire incident were from the Netherlands, namely: MacDonald Brigade, Lieutenant General Montagu
    Stopford.

    Bandung, which is currently a beautiful place, cannot be separated from its past history.
    Sinaumed’s can find out more about Bandung by reading books available at
    sinaumedia.com . Thus the discussion about the
    Bandung Lautan Api incident
    , I hope all the discussion above can be useful for
    Sinaumed’s.

    As #FriendsWithoutLimits we always try to give the best. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight,
    sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

  • Knowing Scrotal Function and Risk of Health Problems!

    Scrotum Function – The male reproductive system is different from the female.
    In men, there are organs called the scrotum, testicles, urethra, penis, and vas deferens.

    The male reproductive function is to maintain and transport sperm and produce sex hormones.
    One part of the male reproductive system that must be kept healthy is the scrotum.

    The scrotum (scrotum) is a pouch of skin that hangs outside the body, located just below the base of
    the penis. The function of the scrotum, or testicles, is to enclose the testicles.
    The
    testicles, also known as testicles, are oval-shaped glands which are responsible for the production and
    storage of sperm.

    In addition to the production and storage of sperm, the function of the testes is to produce a number of
    hormones, including testosterone, otherwise known as the male sex hormone.

    The scrotum is located on the outside of the body because it has to maintain a slightly lower temperature
    (about 2 degrees Celsius) than the rest of the body.
    Lower or cooler temperatures are intended
    to help maintain sperm production.
    Now, let’s explore the function of the scrotum in men and a
    list of diseases that can affect this important organ!

    Scrotum Function

    The main function of the scrotum is to cover the reproductive organs, namely the testicles and other
    components in them.
    This organ is also responsible for maintaining the temperature of the
    testicles for smooth hormone production and sperm maturation.

    The temperature in the testicular area must be slightly below body temperature for normal sperm production.
    To maintain temperature, special muscles in the scrotum wall contract and relax. The
    goal is to bring the testicles closer to the body to warm up or away from the body to cool down.

    The male reproductive system consists of internal (inside the body) and external (outside the body) parts.
    These organs help the body to urinate and have sex. Another part of the male
    reproductive system that also plays an important role is the scrotum.
    Here are some important
    functions of the scrotum that you need to know:

    1. Maintain and Protect the Testicles

    According to medical science expert Johns Hopkins, the scrotum is a pouch of skin that hangs down at the
    back of the penis.
    Its function is to support and help protect both testicles. The
    function of the testicles is to produce sperm.

    2. Testicular thermoregulation

    In terms of temperature, the testes themselves are usually cooler than the inside of the body.
    This is why the scrotum is located outside the body. The scrotum contains many nerves
    and blood vessels, as well as the temperature-regulating organs of the testes.

    Special muscles in the scrotal wall can contract (tighten) and relax, bringing the testes closer to the body to
    maintain a constant temperature.

    3. Affects Sexual Function

    Common triggers for scrotal spasms include sexual arousal, cold temperatures and sports activities.
    The relatively cool temperature of the scrotum is thought to be important for sperm
    production.

    The wall of the scrotum is a thin layer of skin covered with smooth muscle tissue (dartos fascia).
    The skin here contains more pigment than the surrounding area and has more sebaceous
    (oil-producing) and sweat glands.

    In addition to sperm, the testes also produce male hormones called androgens. Androgens control the development
    of the male reproductive system and play a role in male puberty, especially by regulating the antennae and vocal
    cords.

    Testosterone is the most common form of androgen in the scrotum. It is responsible for the
    development of the male sex organs and sperm production.
    Released by Live
    Sciences , the testes in a healthy male can produce around 6 milligrams of testosterone per day.
    However, this is not always the case.

    “The testicles produce an average of 200,000 sperm per minute.” said dr. Philip Werthmann,
    urologist and director of
    the Center for Male Reproductive Medicine and Vasectomy in Los
    Angeles, California.

    Various Kinds of Health Problems in the Scrotum

    There are several types of health problems that are common in the scrotum. If this happens,
    the function of the scrotum to support male sex can be disrupted.
    Here are some abnormalities
    and possibilities that can occur in the scrotum:

    1. Epididymitis

    The first disease risk, namely epididymitis. Released by Sciencedirect ,
    epididymitis is inflammation or infection of the epididymis.
    This is a long tube that runs
    the length of the testicle.

    Epididymitis can be caused by sexually transmitted diseases, trauma, side effects of the vas deferens, and
    other problems.
    Symptoms of epididymitis include pain (mild to severe), swelling of the
    testicles or scrotum, nausea and vomiting, and fever.

    2. Hydrocele

    Hydrocele is the accumulation of fluid around the testicles and is a risk factor for diseases related to
    the scrotum.
    It can affect one or both testicles, possibly causing swelling in the scrotum and
    groin.

    Hydroceles are usually not painful or dangerous and may not require treatment. However, any
    swelling of the scrotum should be treated by a doctor.
    Quoting from the Mayo
    Clinic , sometimes a hydrocele can cause symptoms other than swelling, mild pain, tenderness, or redness
    of the scrotum.

    Hydrocele is more common in babies with a hole between the stomach and scrotum. However, when
    men experience hydrocele, it is usually due to trauma, inflammation, or infection of the testicles or
    epididymis.

    3. Varicocele

    In Urology, a varicocele is an enlarged or dilated vein in the scrotum. Usually this condition
    is painless and harmless.
    However, this can lead to reduced sperm production and reduced sperm
    quality.
    Thus causing infertility in men.

    Occasionally, a varicocele can cause symptoms such as pain and swelling. Although most
    varicoceles do not require treatment, some require surgical treatment.

    4. Testicle Pain

    Testicular and scrotal pain can cause pain around the male genitalia. According to
    Emedicine Health, this disease can be caused by kidney stones, infections and inguinal
    hernias.
    It can also cause pain in or around the testicles and scrotum. If you
    experience sudden testicular pain, go to the hospital immediately to avoid testicular
    torsion.

    5. Orchitis

    Orchitis is inflammation of one or both testicles. Often it is caused by a bacterial or viral
    infection.
    Mumps is a common cause of orchitis. Sexually transmitted diseases,
    such as gonorrhea and chlamydia, can cause orchitis which causes pain in the scrotum.
    Signs and
    symptoms of orchitis include testicular and scrotal pain as well as pain and infertility.
    Often
    this can be treated with home remedies.

    6. Sperm Cyst

    At the Cleveland Clinic, a sperm cyst, also known as a spermatocele, is a disease risk in which a fluid-filled
    cyst forms in the epididymis.

    Small cysts are usually painless. Large cysts can cause pain or heaviness in the testicles,
    affected scrotum, and swelling above and behind the testicles.

    If you have large seminiferous tubules and are experiencing pain or other symptoms, surgery may be an option.

    7. Testicular torsion

    Another risk of disease related to the scrotum is testicular torsion. This occurs when the
    testicle changes direction in the scrotum, cutting off its blood supply.
    Symptoms of testicular
    torsion include scrotal pain and swelling, and this requires immediate medical attention.
    However, testicular torsion is rare and is usually corrected by healing the testicle.

    8. Constipation and Kidney Stones

    Nerves to the testicles originate mainly from many places in the abdomen, including the kidneys and
    digestive tract.
    If you are constipated and cannot have a bowel movement, the pressure from the
    trapped stool can put pressure on the nerves and cause testicular pain.

    The same thing happens if you have kidney stones. The nerves in this area can become inflamed,
    causing testicular pain and other symptoms such as lower back pain, cloudy and smelly urine, frequent
    urination, nausea and vomiting.

    9. Inguinal hernia

    An inguinal hernia is a condition in which the contents of the abdominal cavity (fat, intestines, etc.)
    descend into the groin (inguinal) area.
    This condition is often referred to as “it will be
    fine”.

    While generally harmless, inguinal hernias can be uncomfortable and possibly painful, especially in the
    testicles.
    Health problems due to weakening of the inguinal canal must also be treated
    medically.

    10. Testicular tumors

    Testicular tumors are another cause of testicular pain that you should be aware of and aware of.
    This occurs when the testicles develop abnormal cells for which the exact cause is unknown,
    regardless of risk factors such as genetics (heredity) and age.

    Apart from testicular pain, the presence of a tumor is characterized by other symptoms such as swollen
    testicles and fluid in them.
    This condition must be treated immediately with medical attention
    so that the tumor cells do not turn into cancer.

    Causes of Itchy Scrotum

    1. Fungal Infection

    Mold thrives in warm, humid temperatures. Where else but in folds of skin, under underpants
    and dirty skin?
    When your scrotum feels itchy, this can be one of the reasons your scrotum has
    a fungal infection.
    The fungus most often found in the scrotum is Trichophyton
    rubrum , which usually affects the groin, testicles, inner thighs, and anus.

    The characteristics of the limbs affected by the fungus are unpleasant itching, redness, blisters (due to
    scratching) and causing irritation.
    This is why the skin on the back of the scrotum is an ideal
    habitat for yeast to grow.
    A yeast infection that develops will cause itching and
    discomfort.

    2. Yeast Infection

    If the scrotum itches, this is sometimes also caused by a yeast infection with Candida Albicans .
    Usually this yeast resides in a woman’s vagina. However, it is not uncommon for
    the male scrotum to be affected.
    Why do men get infected? That’s because sex
    transmits the fungus from the vagina to the male genitalia.

    3. Inflammation of the Genital Skin

    An itchy scrotum and redness around the groin can be a sign that you are suffering from testicular
    dermatitis or what is commonly called inflammation.
    Dermatitis can also be caused by allergies.
    Possible allergies include allergies to chemicals that stick to the skin, namely: perfumes,
    clothing dyes, plants, and even other things that can cause dermatitis.

    4. Get pubic hair lice

    Actually head lice not only grow on the hair on the head, but also on the pubic hair. These
    lice find their way into pubic hair and feed on it by sucking blood around the genitals.
    If
    your scrotum itches, you may have pubic lice.
    Usually, pubic lice are transmitted through
    blankets, towels, and clothing.

    How to Treat Pain in the Scrotum

    There are several ways to treat a painful scrotum. Here are some ways you can try to treat
    scrotum pain.

    1. Ice Compress

    Scrotal pain can be treated by applying ice to the testicles. By applying an ice pack, pain in
    the testicles can be reduced.
    To do this, take ice and apply it to the scrotum for 30 minutes.
    Repeat every two hours. As a side note, apply ice only after wrapping it in a towel or
    cloth.
    Do not apply directly to the skin as it can cause dermatitis.

    2. Hot Shower

    The next way to treat scrotal pain is to take a hot bath. Hot baths can actually relieve pain
    and speed up blood flow to the scrotum.

    3. Lifting

    It is also possible to lie in bed and elevate the scrotum to relieve scrotal pain. Roll up the
    handkerchief and place it under the scrotum.
    Doing this exercise will reduce pain in the
    scrotum.

    4. Wearing Athletic Support Underpants

    The last way to treat pain in the scrotum is to wear sports underwear. The use of these pants
    is to avoid further damage to the testicles.
    Wearing these pants will also help relieve
    discomfort from scrotal pain.

    In addition to the method above, by taking reliever drugs. Scrotal pain due to inflammation
    can often be improved by taking pain relievers, such as ibuprofen or paracetamol.

    In addition, the doctor will also prescribe other drugs, such as antibiotics, if an infection is found
    caused by a testicular infection.
    However, in some cases, the doctor will also recommend
    surgery to remove the fluid or remove the tumor.

    In an emergency, such as testicular torsion or a twisted testicle, this condition requires surgery to restore
    blood flow to the testicle to prevent permanent testicular damage that can lead to infertility.

    In addition to knowing the different causes and treatments for testicular pain, you should also have your
    testicles checked regularly.
    Routine check-ups can help detect diseases that cause testicular
    pain early.

    Here are some good ways to check your scrotum that you can do yourself:

    • Stand in front of a mirror and hold and lift your penis to see if there are any unusual lumps
      on the skin of the scrotum.
    • Touch both testicles with your fingertips. Look and feel for any lumps,
      differences in size, or differences in shape between the testicles.
      Also check the top and
      back of each testicle for the epididymis.
    • If during the self-examination you notice any deformity or abnormality, such as a lump in the
      testicle, seek medical attention to be examined and determined the cause.

    Not only that, if you experience testicular pain that recurs or doesn’t improve even though you have taken
    medication, immediately consult a doctor to get the right treatment and medication.

    How to deal with an itchy scrotum

    Scratching the scrotum will only spread the infection and possibly even cause another new infection.
    Better yet, consult a trusted dermatologist, that’s how you will get there. Here are
    some things you can do to prevent itching on your scrotum:

    • Clean the genital area and groin every day. Use antiseptic soap to prevent
      lice and fungus.
    • Do not let the genitals get wet, always dry them after contact with the genitals with a clean
      towel or tissue.
    • Use clean underwear, change at least 2 to 3 times a day.
    • Wear cotton clothes to absorb sweat and avoid irritation around it.
    • Avoid having sex with the opposite sex if you still feel itchy (avoid itching caused by newly
      introduced bacteria).
    • Use clothing cleaners that are safe from chemicals so that the irritation doesn’t get worse.
    • If itching persists, it’s better to consult a doctor or buy a prescription for genital
      itching at the nearest pharmacy.
  • Knowing 13 Characteristics of Open Ideology in Indonesia

    Characteristics of open ideology – It is important for every individual and every group to
    know these things.
    Ideology is an idea that contains a certain thought, culture, and way of
    life.
    Ideology is used as a lens through which to view the world and develop a logical system
    of ideas.

    In general, the types of ideology are divided into two, namely open ideology and closed ideology, the
    characteristics of open ideology are certainly different from closed ideologies.
    An open mind
    is a view of life that is flexible or not rigid.
    While closed ideology is a teaching that
    contains goals and standards that need to be accepted and obeyed in everyday life.

    Basically, the existence of a system of thought in a country can help the people of that country see
    various kinds of problems and their solutions.
    Even experts say that if there is no ideological
    system in a country, reality will prevent that country from determining the right direction, especially when
    facing big problems, including social problems.
    Thus, systems of thought are divided into open
    ideologies and closed ideologies.

    So what exactly is open ideology? What are the characteristics of an open ideology?
    What is the difference between open ideology and closed ideology? Why is Pancasila
    also known as an open ideology?
    So, so that Sinaumed’s isn’t confused by these
    questions, let’s look at the following reviews!

    Definition of Ideology

    Ideology is a term of Greek origin. Consists of two words, idea and logic. Idea
    means to see (idea), and logic comes from the word logos which means knowledge or theory.
    Thus
    it can be interpreted that ideology is the result of discovery in the mind in the form of knowledge or
    theory.
    Ideology can also be interpreted as a collection of systemic concepts that are used as
    principles, opinions (events) that provide direction for survival.

    Ideology is always synonymous with the state system. An expert named GS Padmo Wahyono argues
    that ideology gives meaning as a nation’s vision of life, a nation’s philosophy of life as a set of values
    ​​that are desired and need to be realized in social life.
    This ideology will of course bring
    stability in direction, especially in social life, as well as encouragement towards what one wants.

    So, from this it can be formulated that ideology is a set of ideas that form beliefs and understandings to
    realize human ideals.
    If drawn based on the interests of a country, then ideology is a
    collection of basic ideas, ideas, beliefs, and beliefs that are systematic in accordance with the directions
    and goals to be achieved in the life of the nation and state.

    Definition of Open Ideology

    An open ideology is a way of life that is not rigid, dynamic and flexible. This means that an
    open ideology is one that can develop and grow over time.

    An open ideology is an ideology that is not absolute. It can also be interpreted that its
    values ​​and ideals are not imposed from the outside, but are explored and taken from the spiritual, moral
    and cultural wealth of the people themselves.
    An open ideology is an ideology that can interact
    with the times and with internal dynamics.

    Openness itself is also known as an open-minded system. Therefore, Pancasila as the ideology
    of the Indonesian nation is considered an open ideology because it has values ​​and ideals that are not
    imposed from outside.

    In Indonesia, Pancasila as an open ideology has a value dimension, namely ideal value and practical value.
    These two values ​​are the basis of the ideology of the Indonesian nation which always accepts
    natural influences and Pancasila will go with the times.

    The Difference between Open and Closed Ideology

    The difference between open and closed ideology can be seen from the characteristics of both and the relationship
    between the people and their rulers.

    In an open ideology, what characterizes it are the values ​​and ideals extracted from the richness of the
    customs, culture, and religion of the people.
    Open-minded ideologies also tend to embrace
    reform.
    In the relationship between the people and their rulers, according to an open ideology,
    the rulers are responsible to the community as representatives of the people to whom the people’s rights are
    granted.

    Examples of countries that adhere to the ideology of openness are Indonesia, South Korea and the United States.

    Meanwhile, in a closed ideology, values ​​and ideals are usually created from the thoughts of individuals
    or groups in power.
    In this case, society must sacrifice itself in the name of these values
    ​​and ideals.

    Closed ideologies also tend to resist reform and do not accept other worldviews or values. In
    the relationship between the people and their rulers, the people uncompromisingly adhere to the ideology
    built by their rulers, and the rulers tend to be authoritarian.

    Examples of countries with closed ideologies are North Korea, China and Saudi Arabia.

    Characteristics of Open Ideology

    There are two kinds of ideology in this world, open ideology and closed ideology. Indonesia
    itself also adheres to an open ideological system with Pancasila as the basis of our country.
    Actually what is the meaning and characteristics of open ideology so that it can be applied in
    Indonesia?

    Ideology is an idea or opinion that is dynamic, flexible and not rigid so that it continues to develop
    according to the demands of the times.
    This kind of ideology was born because people’s values
    ​​can achieve their goals but remain in line with developments or the demands of the times.

    Even though an open ideology is synonymous with flexibility and progress over time, it actually has a
    broader nature.
    In fact, the characteristics of open ideology are always related to the social
    conditions of society.
    What are the characteristics?

    1. In accordance with Community Culture

    Indonesia has a diverse culture in its society. The foundation of our country, namely
    Pancasila, reflects the characteristics of this first open ideology seen from its precepts.

    The culture that exists in Indonesian society is treated in such a way that shared ideas emerge as a
    unitary unit of diversity in Indonesia.
    Ideologies such as Pancasila exist to justify the
    different beliefs, values ​​and norms of this society.

    2. Is Dynamic

    The third characteristic is dynamism, because Indonesian society will always be dynamic following the
    times.
    Indonesians at the time of independence did not necessarily have the same mindset as
    today’s society.

    They experience psychological and cultural development and change. Uniquely, Pancasila is
    still relevant and alive today even though it was born on June 1, 1945. These are the unique characteristics
    of Pancasila with an open-minded ideology.

    3. There is Freedom of Opinion

    An open ideology always gives its people the opportunity to speak and act to express their opinions.
    The fourth precept of Pancasila fulfills the characteristics of this open ideology.

    Furthermore, freedom of speech and expression is everyone’s right. However, this freedom must
    be accompanied by responsibility and respect for applicable standards.

    4. Upholding Pluralism

    Indonesia’s diversity must be maintained with the value of pluralism that belongs to all people.
    Pluralism is an act that promotes diversity, multiculturalism and religious tolerance.

    Indonesian society cannot be separated from its differences, but pluralism means accepting all these
    differences.
    Furthermore, pluralism means eliminating thoughts or feelings that can hinder the
    development of social intolerance.

    5. Derived from the Community

    Open-mindedness is born and comes from society and is present in every group that creates it.
    All these noble ideas or notions about the environment gave rise to state ideology.
    This ideology will then be used in the management of social systems, such as politics, economics,
    and social structures.

    6. Prioritizing Consensus Deliberations

    Deliberations should prioritize the words and results of consensus of all participants after careful
    deliberation.
    Pancasila as an open ideology was also born from deliberation and consensus among
    the founding fathers of our nation.
    In the process of deliberation, our logic and reason are
    formed so that we can make decisions together.
    This decision must benefit society.

    7. Human Rights (HAM) Must Be Respected

    An open ideology also demands human rights so that all the needs of citizens are met. If the
    state guarantees the survival, freedom, equality and security of its citizens, they will be protected from
    unwanted actions.
    Citizens can also adopt the openness ideology adopted by the state.

    8. Open Government System

    An open government system is a government in which citizens have the right to know about government processes to
    create effective public oversight.

    The concepts commonly associated with open government are transparency and accountability. Transparency is a
    feature of open ideology because the public can know what information the government has about its regulatory
    processes.

    9. Reflecting the Philosophy of Society

    On the second point, ideology comes from society. Therefore, Pancasila as an open ideology is
    also identified with the philosophy or values ​​of life owned by the community.

    10. Adequate Legal System

    Finally, having a full legal system means that no citizen is exempt from the law. If you
    commit a crime, there is no difference in legal treatment of citizens of a particular country.

    11. Reality

    Open ideology is realistic, reflecting the reality of life which is always developing in a society where
    ideology is born and develops.
    This characteristic prevents a fixed dogmatic connotation of an
    ideology, leading to a contextual meaning.

    12. Are Idealistic

    Open ideology is idealistic. The goal of idealism is a concept that is able to provide hope,
    optimism and encourage followers to apply it in everyday life so that they can achieve the desired goals.
    The quality of this idealism will come into play if the values ​​contained in the ideology are
    still actual and in accordance with human reason.

    13. Is Flexible

    Open ideology is flexible, that is, it can always adapt to the development of the situation.
    An open ideology can provide guidance through consistent and consistent interpretations.
    It is this characteristic that allows each generation to maintain its own status and maintain the
    direction or ideals that were conceived as the goal from the start.

    The Excellence of Pancasila as an Open Ideology

    The existence of the Pancasila ideology which is owned by the Indonesian nation certainly has many
    advantages compared to the ideological system adopted by most countries in the world.
    Following
    are the advantages of Pancasila as an open ideology.

    1. The First Precepts of Pancasila

    From the early precepts of Pancasila, it was considered superior, especially to atheism of communism, which
    was based on the master teachings of dialectical materialism and historical materialism of Marxism.
    This first principle will in fact enliven other precepts, such as Humanity, Unity, Democracy, and
    Social Justice.

    2. The Second Precept of Pancasila

    The Second Precept of Pancasila contains the content of “Justice and civilized humanity…” indirectly
    indicating that the concept of “Human” is more balanced and wise, compared to the Master of
    Liberalism-Capitalism.
    In both of these conceptions, he actually regards humans as
    “self-determining agents of free action”.

    Thus, the human concept of Pancasila is considered more complete, comprehensive and balanced in its views and
    treatment of the people.

    3. The Third Precept of Pancasila

    The Third Precept of Pancasila, “Indonesian unity” is considered superior to the concept of racial unity
    (NAZI) and the unity of chauvinistic (fascist) countries.
    In a chauvinistic union of races and
    nations, there are elements of self-improvement (for example, superiority of the Aryan race in India) and
    humiliation (inferiority of others).
    ).

    Meanwhile, the unity of the Volksgemeinschaft model initiated by the Nazis actually contained the will to
    power and expansion of power (through expansion) as well as the desire to maintain the purity of the Nazi
    foundation and homeland from elements considered foreign.
    For example, components that are
    considered foreign are Jews, gypsies, homosexuals and others.

    Now, based on the principle of Indonesian unity, this version of Pancasila is based on a greater respect for
    differences and diversity.

    4. The Fourth Precept of Pancasila

    The fourth precept of Pancasila is considered superior to the popular understanding promoted by socialism
    and fascism.
    In Soekarno’s speech at the BPUPKI meeting on June 1, 1945, he said that “The
    basis is the basis for deliberation, the basis for representation, the basis for deliberation.
    if the collective is rich But we are the founders

    So it is clear that the populist principles of Pancasila are superior to the universalist principles of socialism
    Socialism and Marxism which respect “social solidarity” with a focus on class struggle and antagonism.

    5. The Fifth Precept of Pancasila

    The Fifth Precept of Pancasila has implications for the concept of social welfare and economic democracy.
    This, of course, goes beyond the free market concept promoted by libertarian capitalism, especially
    in its new form, neoliberalism.

    According to Sri Edi Swasono, Indonesia’s economic system is centered on ideas that are always associated
    with the fifth precept of Pancasila.
    Therefore, its economic activities will use the principle
    of equity for the welfare of society, not only for individual welfare.
    This is also seen in the
    cooperative concept.

    Factors Causing the Disclosure of Pancasila
    Ideology

    Sinaumed’s must have thought, why does Indonesia adhere to Pancasila as an open ideology? Of
    course, various factors favored this evolution.
    This driving factor came from the Indonesians
    themselves and some from outside.
    So, here are some factors that explain why Pancasila is
    considered an open ideology and is well accepted by the people of Indonesia.

    1. Dynamics of a Rapidly Developing Society

    The global community will always grow rapidly, both in terms of information technology and culture.
    Therefore, the changes or dynamics of Indonesian society will also develop rapidly.
    Therefore, it is hoped that this dynamic ideology of Pancasila can open up and accept goodness from
    outside and release deviations from the noble values ​​of Pancasila.

    2. Closed Ideology Is Incompatible
    with Indonesian Ideology

    Basically closed ideology has never been in accordance with Indonesian ideology, especially the noble
    values ​​of Pancasila which are recognized as the way of life of this nation.
    In fact, many
    countries in the world that adhere to a closed-minded system have even gone through a recession until they
    collapse.

    3. Raise Awareness of the
    Enduring Values ​​of Pancasila

    Because Indonesia has made Pancasila an open ideology, the next generation must realize that the existence
    of Pancasila values ​​is eternal.
    . However, Pancasila values ​​can be adapted to
    current developments, as long as they do not take negative externalities.
    By being open to
    outside influences, he will reinforce the perception that Pancasila values ​​are truly timeless.

    The Open Ideology Dimension

    Pancasila can be an open-minded ideology because it is rooted in politics and the Indonesian people’s
    philosophy of life.
    In addition, Pancasila can also adapt to the dynamic development of the
    times.
    This makes Pancasila an open ideology that reflects the reality that lives, grows and is
    internalized by the people.

    Meanwhile, there are three dimensions of open ideology, namely the dimension of reality, the dimension of
    flexibility, and the dimension of idealism.
    The dimension of reality itself is an ideology that
    is able to reflect the reality of life that develops and is inhabited by society.
    While the
    dimension of flexibility is flexibility including current and future challenges.

    The dimension of idealism is openness to accept a better age according to idealistic values.
    In other words, the ideology of openness will move and develop through the manifestations and
    experiences of everyday life.

  • Know Who is Eligible to Receive Zakat Fitrah

    Those Who Are Eligible to Receive Zakat Al-Fitr – The month of Ramadan is the most eagerly awaited month for Muslims. All good activities this month will get double the reward, MashaAllah. Apart from fasting, zakat fitrah is also one of the obligatory activities in every month of Ramadan. So what exactly is zakat fitrah? And who is entitled to get zakat fitrah? Here’s an explanation.

    Definition of Zakat Fitrah

    Zakat is personal property that is issued to be given to those who are entitled to receive it. Zakat is the 4th pillar of Islam.

    Zakat fitrah is zakat that is obligatory on oneself for every individual, both male and female Muslims who have the ability according to the conditions set. Zakat fitrah is issued in the form of daily staple foods, such as rice and corn. Zakat fitrah is issued by each individual in the month of Ramadan ahead of Eid al-Fitr.

    The definition of zakat fitrah can be interpreted as a form of concern for Muslims towards people who are less fortunate. For this reason, basically zakat fitrah is giving food to the poor. The law of zakat fitrah itself is mandatory for free people, both children and adults from among the Muslims.

    The purpose of issuing zakat fitrah is as a cleanser for those who issue it, and fasting from useless practices during the month of Ramadan. Not only that, by issuing zakat fitrah as a means to help each other to less fortunate people, so that they also get proper food during Eid al-Fitr. So all people can feel happy because they can enjoy food like other people every Eid.

    Zakat fitrah is issued no later than before people finish performing the Eid prayer. And if the time for giving zakat exceeds the limit, then what is given is not included in the category of zakat but ordinary charity.

     

    Conditions for Issuing Zakat

    Zakat issued by Muslims is given to people who are more deserving of receiving it according to the provisions. Not all assets are required to pay taxes. There are basic requirements for the issuance of zakat, namely:

    1. Muslim and independent
    2. Of course zakat is something that must be carried out for Muslims, especially during the month of Ramadan. In addition to being Muslim, people who issue zakat must be free, meaning they are not being oppressed or become slaves like in the Jahiliyya era.
    3. Meet two times, namely between the months of Ramadan and Shawwal even if only for a moment.
    4. Has more wealth than his daily needs for himself and people under dependents on the feast day and night. That is, for those who issue zakat must have enough wealth for themselves and their families or are not hungry and very distressed.

    According to the National Amil Zakat Agency or BAZNAS, the conditions for the imposition of zakat on assets are:

    • Assets are lawful goods and are obtained in a lawful manner as well. Assets issued purely from the way of work that is lawful. Not or not the result of cheating, gambling and others. Property must be clean.
    • The property is fully owned by the owner. The assets that are owned do not belong to other people that are entrusted to him, nor are they borrowed.
    • This property is a growing property. That is, the assets issued are not the only assets.
    • The assets reach the nishab according to the type of property. Because in issuing zakat there are rules or its own measure. So for people who will issue zakat, the assets owned must match the type of wealth.
    • The treasure passes through the haul. Property owned must be taken into account, not forced and not burdensome.
    • The owner of the property has no short-term debt to pay off. That is, the assets to be issued are assets that are not the only assets owned in paying debts.

    However, the obligatory zakat will fall if:

    • People who died before sunset at the end of Ramadan.
    • Children born after sunset at the end of Ramadan.
    • People who have just embraced Islam after the sun sets at the end of Ramadan.
    • Dependents of newly married wives after sunset at the end of Ramadan.

    Zakat Issued Calculation

    According to the National Amil Zakat Agency or BAZNAS and the Ministry of Religion, zakat comes from the form of the word “zaka” which means holy, good, blessing, growing and developing. The meaning of growth in the sense shows that issuing zakat is a cause for growth and also the development of assets for the implementation of zakat resulting in a large number of rewards. And the holy meaning shows that zakat is to purify the soul from ugliness, evil and purification from sins.

    Zakat is a certain part of the assets that must be issued by every Muslim with conditions that have met the conditions set. People who are entitled to receive zakat are called mustahik, while people who issue zakat are called zakki. According to Minister of Religion Regulation No. 52 of 2014, Zakat is property that must be issued by a Muslim or a business entity owned by a Muslim to be given to those who are entitled to receive it in accordance with Islamic law.

    According to the scholars, the amount of zakat issued is in accordance with the interpretation of the hadith, which is equal to one sha’ (1 sha’=4 mud, 1 mud=675 gr) or roughly equivalent to 3.1 liters or 2.5 kg of staple food (flour). , dates, wheat, aqith) or what is commonly consumed in the area concerned.

    There is also a time for paying zakat fitrah. The following details the payment time:

    1. From the beginning to the end of the month of Ramadan
    2. It is obligatory to pay off when the sun has set at the end of the month of Ramadan
    3. The afdhal time is the dawn prayer on the last day of the month of Ramadan until before the Eid prayer
    4. Makruh perform Eid prayers before sunset
    5. Haraam time is the zakat that you do after sunset on Eid al-Fitr

    Who is Eligible to Receive Zakat Fitrah?

    There is wisdom in the law from zakat fitrah, namely:

    1. Zakat fitrah is a personal zakat, in which Allah gives long life for him so that he survives with His favors.
    2. Zakat al-Fitr is also a form of assistance to Muslims, both rich and poor, so that they can fully concentrate on worshiping Allah Ta’ala and rejoice with all of His blessings.
    3. His greatest wisdom is a sign of the gratitude of the fasting person to Allah for the pleasure of fasting.

    In principle, every Muslim is obliged to pay zakat fitrah for himself, his family and other people who are dependents and other people who are dependents, both adults, small children, men and women. Zakat recipients are generally defined in 8 categories. The following groups or people are entitled to receive zakat.

    1. Fakir

    The first person who is entitled to receive zakat is the fakir. Fakirs are people who have very little wealth. They have no income and have almost nothing, so they are unable to meet the basic needs of life.

    2. Poor

    Furthermore, people who are entitled to receive zakat are poor. In terms of wealth, the poor are above the poor. They are people who have wealth but also very little. So that they cannot or are able to meet their needs even though they have worked all the time.

    3. Amyl

    Third, people who are entitled to receive zakat are amil. Amil are those or all parties who act, work, collect, store, guard, record and distribute zakat to people in need.

    4. Converts

    A convert is a term for a non-Muslim person who has hopes of converting to Islam or someone who has just converted to Islam. Converts are people who are entitled to receive zakat.

    As explained in Surah At-Taubah Verse 60 it is stated that converts are among those who are entitled to receive zakat. People who have just converted to Islam or converts are also groups that are entitled to receive zakat. The goal is for people to become more firmly convinced of Islam as their religion, Allah as god and Muhammad

    5. Riqab

    People who are also entitled to receive zakat are riqab. Riqab is a slave or slave who wants to free himself. Riqab has the right to receive zakat, if he is Mutabtab then it is to help pay what he has to pay to his employer and if he is not Mutab it is so that he can redeem himself from his employer so that he becomes an independent person.

    6. Gharim

    Gharim in Arabic means people who have debts. Gharim are those who are in debt for the necessities of life in maintaining their soul and izzah. However, people who are in debt for immoral interests such as gambling and are in debt to start a business and then go bankrupt, their right to receive zakat will be void.

    People who owe for personal gain, with the following conditions:

    1. Debt does not arise because of disobedience
    2. The debt is wrapped around the culprit
    3. The debtor is no longer able to pay off the debt
    4. The debt is due, or must be paid off when zakat is given to the debtor
    5. People who owe for social purposes, such as those who owe to reconcile between warring parties by bearing diyat fees (criminal fines) or the cost of damaged goods.
    6. People like this are entitled to receive zakat, even if they are rich people who can pay off their debts.
    7. People who are in debt because they guarantee other people’s debts, where the guarantor and the guaranteed are both in a state of financial difficulty.
    8. People who owe for the payment of diyat (fine) due to accidental murder, if their family (aqilah) really cannot afford to pay the fine, so does the state treasury.

    7. Fi Sabilillah

    The person who is entitled to receive zakat is fisabilillah. Fisabilillah are those or people who fight in the way of Allah in forms such as da’wah activities, rejecting slander, jihad and so on. For example, education developers, preaching, health, orphanages, Islamic madrasas and many more.

    The zakat quota for this group is distributed to the mujahideen, volunteer preachers, as well as other parties who take part in managing jihad and da’wah activities, such as in the form of various kinds of war equipment and da’wah tools along with all the expenses needed by the mujahid and preachers.

    There are criteria for receiving zakat fisabilillah, namely:

    1. Funding the military movement that struggles to raise the banner of Islam and counter attacks launched against Islamic countries.
    2. Helping various activities and businesses, both carried out by individuals and congregations that aim to apply Islamic law in various countries.
    3. Funding Islamic da’wah centers managed by sincere and honest Islamic leaders in various non-Muslim countries with the aim of spreading Islam in various legal ways in accordance with the demands of the times. For example, mosques built in non-Muslim countries that function as a basis for Islamic da’wah.
    4. Funding serious efforts to strengthen the position of Muslim minorities in countries controlled by non-Muslims who are facing plans to undermine their faith.

    8. Ibn Sabil

    Eighth for people who are entitled to receive zakat is ibn sabil. Ibn sabil are those who run out of expenses on the way in obedience to Allah. In addition, Ibn Sabil is also known as a traveler or people who are traveling long distances, including workers and students in overseas lands.

    There are conditions for zakat in this group, namely:

    1. Is on a trip outside the country where he lives. If it is still in the environment of the country where he is in need, then he is considered as poor or poor.
    2. This trip does not conflict with Islamic law, so giving zakat does not become an aid to commit immorality.
    3. At that time he did not have the cost to return to his country, even in his country as a rich man. If he has debts that are not yet due, or to other people whose whereabouts are unknown, or to someone who is in financial difficulty, or to someone who has reneged on his debt, then all of that does not prevent him from being entitled to receive zakat.

    The intention of Zakat Fitrah

    In the payment of zakat fitrah can be represented by parents or siblings, this is what causes the intention to be different or depending on who the zakat is intended for. The following are various intentions or readings when going to do zakat fitrah:

    Intentions of Zakat Fitrah for Yourself

    نَوَيْتُ أَنْ أُخْرِجَ زَكاَةَ اْلفطر عَنْ نَفْسِيْ فَرْضًالِلهِ تَعَالَى

    “Nawaitu an ukhrija zakatal-fitri ‘an nafsi fardhan lillahi ta’ala.”

    Meaning: “I intend to issue zakat fitrah for myself fardhu because of Allah Ta’ala.”

    The intention of Zakat Fitrah for all family members, including yourself

    ﻧَﻮَﻳْﺖُ ﺃَﻥْ ﺃُﺧْﺮِﺝَ ﺯَﻛَﺎﺓَ ﺍﻟْﻔِﻄْﺮِ ﻋَنِّيْ ﻭَﻋَﻦْ ﺟَﻤ ْﻊِ ﻣَﺎْﺰَﻣُنِيْ ﻧَﻔَﻘَ said 

    “Nawaitu an ukhrija zakaatal-fitri anni wa an jami’il ma yalzamuni nafaqat uhum syar’an fardhan lillahi ta’ala.”

    Meaning: “I intend to issue zakat fitrah for myself and all people whose living is my fardhu’s responsibility because of Allah Ta’ala.”

    Intentions of Zakat Fitrah for Wives

    ﻧَﻮَﻳْﺖُ ﺃَﻥْ ﺃُﺧْﺮِﺝَ ﺯَﻛَﺎﺓَ ﺍﻟْﻔِﻄْﺮِﻋَﻦْ ﺯَﻭْﺟَﺘِﻲْ ﻓَﺮْﺿ knob 

    “Nawaitu an ukhrija zakaatal-fithri ‘an zaujati fardhan lillahi ta’ala.”

    Meaning: “I intend to issue zakat fitrah for my wife fardhu because of Allah Ta’ala.” The intention of Zakat Fitrah for Boys.”

    Intentions of Zakat Fitrah for Girls

    ﻧَﻮَﻳْﺖُ ﺃَﻥْ ﺃُﺧْﺮِﺝَ ﺯَﻛَﺎﺓَ ﺍﻟْﻔِﻄْﺮِﻋَﻦْ ﺑِﻨْﺘِﻲْ … ﻓَﺮْﺿ Rent

    “Nawaytu an ukhrija zakaata al-fitri ‘an bint (…..) fardhan lillahi ta’ala.”

    Meaning: “I intend to issue zakat fitrah for my daughter… (mention name), fardhu because of Allah Ta’ala.”

    Intentions of Zakat Fitrah for Boys

    ﻧَﻮَﻳْﺖُ ﺃَﻥْ ﺃُﺧْﺮِﺝَ ﺯَﻛَﺎﺓَ ﺍﻟْﻔِﻄْﺮِ ﻋَﻦْ ﻭَﻟَﺪِﻱْ … ﻓَﺮْﺿًﺎ certainly ﺗَﻌَﺎﻟَﻰ

    “Nawaytu an ukhrija zakaata al-fitri ‘an waladi (…..) fardhan lillahi ta’ala.”

    Meaning: “I intend to issue zakat fitrah for my son… (mention the name), fardhu because of Allah Ta’ala.”

    The intention of Zakat Fitrah for other people who are represented

    ﻧَﻮَﻳْﺖُ ﺃَﻥْ ﺃُﺧْﺮِﺝَ ﺯَﻛَﺎﺓَ ﺍﻟْﻔِﻄْﺮِ ﻋَﻦْ (…) ﻓَﺮْﺿpair certainly ﺗَﻌَﺎﻟَﻰ 

    “Nawaitu an ukhrija zakaatal-fithri ‘an (……) fardhan lillahi ta’ala.”

    Meaning: “I intend to issue zakat fitrah for … (mention the specific name), fardhu because of Allah Ta’ala.”

    The month of Ramadan does have its specialties, be it traditions, obligations and even other things. All Muslims are certainly looking forward to the arrival of the holy month of Ramadan and the rewards that accompany it.

    If Sinaumed’s wants to understand more about zakat fitrah, you can get his book at www.sinaumedia.com . As #FriendsWithoutLimits, we always try to provide the best and most complete information!

    Author: Yufi Cantika Sukma Divine

  • Know What is the Lysogenic Cycle: Concept and Stages

    In life, we are not always healthy. There are times when you get sick and need one or two medicines as well as adequate rest. The causes are various, such as bacteria, viruses, and so on. Some viruses that settle in the human body require special and intensive treatment.

    Some others just need enough rest and simple care. Viruses in the human body develop in several ways, such as the lytic cycle, lysogenic cycle, and so on.

    In this paper will be discussed in more detail about the lysogenic cycle. Sinaumed’s can listen as well as get book recommendations to help study biology.

    Virus Concept and Characteristics

    Viruses are the smallest organisms in the world. It can infect living things such as humans, plants, animals, fungi and bacteria. Viral infections can cause both mild and severe disease in humans.

    In the book Dunia: Science 3A for Grade 3 SD by Drs. H. Oanut, et al, viruses are living things that are not included in the group of animals or plants. It can cause various diseases in humans, animals and plants.

    A virus can also be defined as an organism capable of multiplying or spreading itself with the mission of infecting other organisms. Then, it will have an impact on the lives of other organisms. The organism will potentially experience a disease.

    It lives and reproduces itself by riding on other organisms. If the virus enters the host cell. It then inserts some kind of genetic material into the host cell and takes over the function of the host cell.

    To better understand viruses, Sinaumed’s can listen to some of the characteristics of viruses which are summarized from the Sehatq.com page. Here are the details.

    • Have only RNA or DNA genetic material.
    • Do not have cells or are acellular.
    • Smaller than bacteria.
    • Has a variety of shapes.
    • Can only be seen using an electron microscope.
    • Can be crystallized.
    • Requires nucleic acid to reproduce.
    • Has no cytoplasm.
    • No metabolic activity.

    Virus Structure and Grouping

    The virus consists of several parts as follows.

    1. Head

    The head of the virus contains DNA or RNA which is the genetic material for life. The head of the virus contains nucleic acid. For viruses with a bacteriophage structure, the nucleic acid is DNA. Its function is to control the virus.

    2. Capsid

    The capsid is the part of the viral head which is covered by protein. It is composed of protein units called capsomeres. Its main function is to provide shape while protecting the virus from environmental conditions that are detrimental to the virus.

    3. Contents of the Body or Virion

    The body contents of viruses are genetic material in the form of DNA or RNA nucleic acids. The type of nucleic acid in the virion will influence the body shape of the virus. Virions can be cuboidal, spherical, or polyhedral-like RNA that viruses usually have.

    4. Tail

    Viruses have tails which serve as a place to attach themselves to host cells or other cells of the organisms they host. The tail consists of the tail sheath, tail fibers and base plate. At each end of the tail fiber there is a receptor that functions as a stimulus receiver.

    Viruses come in many forms and variations. However, whatever the form and variation, it can still infect humans and other living things. Launching from the Sehatq.com page, the following is a grouping of viruses based on their shape.

    • Helix or spiral staircase shape. An example of a helix-shaped virus is the tobacco mosaic virus.
    • Icosahedral, or nearly circular shape.
    • Envelope , which is a virus surrounded by a lipid membrane. It includes viruses with this envelope, namely HIV and influenza viruses.
    • Other forms, for example viruses with a combination of helices and icosahedrals.

     

     

    Difference between Virus and Bacteria      

    Viruses and bacteria have a number of differences as follows.

    1. Size

    Viruses have sizes ranging from 20-300 nm. Body size is smaller than bacteria which are generally larger than 1,000 nm. Not only that, viruses can only be seen with an electron microscope (ME). Meanwhile, bacteria can be seen with a light microscope.

    2. Chemical composition

    Bacteria have a chemical composition consisting of RNA, DNA, and proteins. Meanwhile, the chemical composition of the virus consists of a single core in the form of only one RNA or DNA molecule. Generally, in bacteria there are enzymes for exchange or metabolism while viruses do not have them.

    3. Living Place

    Bacteria are organisms that can live in living or dead cells or tissues. Meanwhile, viruses are only able to live in living cells or tissues (hosts) such as animals or humans.

    Bacteria can live inside cells (intracellular) or outside cells (extracellular) however, viruses can only live intracellularly.

    4. Mutation

    Bacteria do not have the power of mutation or what is commonly referred to as the power to change the nature of their antigens. On the other hand, the virus has the ability to mutate spontaneously. For example when irradiated or treated with certain chemicals.

    5. How to Breed

    Bacteria reproduce by splitting pairs ( binary fission ). Meanwhile, viruses reproduce through a series of stages, namely infection, viroexis, pinocytosis, and the eclipse phase. If the host cell dies, the virus will die too. Meanwhile, bacteria are able to live as saprophytes even though the host cell has died.

    Lysogenic Cycle Concept

    The lysogenic cycle is a viral reproduction cycle that involves the integration of viral nucleic acid into the host cell genome to create prophage . The working system of this virus does not destroy cells in the lysogenic cycle.

    It will continue to live and reproduce normally. Meanwhile, the genetic material in the prophage will be transmitted to the origin of the daughter bacteria.

    In summary, the lysogenic cycle has almost the same stages as the lytic cycle. The difference lies in the way it inserts itself. it does not destroy the host cell, but integrates with the host DNA. If the host cell divides the nucleic acid, the virus will also divide and insert into the host’s DNA.

    The lysogenic cycle was discovered by Andre Lwoff in 1950. The virus that uses the lysogenic cycle is the HIV virus which causes Acquired Immunodeficiency Syndrome (AIDS).

    Stages of the Lysogenic Cycle

    The lysogenic cycle consists of several stages as follows.

    1. Adsorption and Penetration

    In the adsorption and penetration stages, the virus will attach to the surface of the host cell with a specific protein receptor. Then it will destroy the cell membrane with the enzyme lysozyme.

    The virus will penetrate the host cell. You do this by injecting the genetic material contained in the nucleic acid into the cell.

    2. Merger Stage

    Viral DNA enters the bacterial body and a merger occurs between the bacterial DNA and the viral DNA. The DNA is in the form of a necklace that has no end. Then, the viral DNA will insert between the disconnected bacterial DNA. Then, a complete DNA sequence is formed that has been infected or inserted by viral DNA.

    3. Cleavage Stage

    Viral DNA that has been connected to bacterial DNA makes viral DNA unable to move. This state is called prophage. When the bacterial DNA replicates directly in the cell, the prophage will also replicate. This is because viral DNA combines with bacterial DNA.

    Likewise, when a bacterial cell undergoes division. Directly, the two daughter cells of the bacteria that contain the prophage also undergo division. Thus, the number of prophage equals the number of bacteria in the host cell.

    4. Synthesis Stage

    Under certain environmental conditions, prophage becomes active. Profags can separate themselves from the bacterial DNA and damage the bacterial DNA. Then, replacing the role of bacterial DNA with viral DNA for protein synthesis which functions as a capsid for new viruses and DNA replication.

    5. Assembly Stage

    At the assembly stage, the viral capsids are intact as the viral envelope. After the viral capsid is intact, it will be filled with replicated DNA. Then, created new viruses.

    6. Lysis Stage

    In the lytic stage, the bacterial wall will break and the virus will scatter out. Then it will attack other bacteria.

    The Concept and Stages of the Lytic Cycle        

    The lytic cycle is a viral reproduction process that is carried out by multiplying or replicating within the host’s body. Then, destroying the host’s body. Viruses that reproduce by the lytic cycle will penetrate the host.

    When in the host’s body, the virus will multiply itself. Then, exit the host. After that, the host cell will experience lysis or rupture.

    The lytic cycle occurs after going through the following stages.

    1. Adsorption

    Adsorption is the attachment stage of the virus particle or virion to a suitable host cell.

    2. Penetration

    Penetration is the stage of injection of viral nucleic acid into the host cell. The virus will perforate the host cell plasma membrane (and cell wall, if present) using enzymes such as lysozyme on bacteriophages.

    3. Replication

    At the replication stage, duplication occurs or the virus reproduces itself by using the nucleic acids in its body.

    4. Assembly

    At the assembly stage, the viruses will form their bodies. At this stage, the capsid that has been formed in the synthesis stage will begin to be filled with replicated nucleic acids so that it becomes a complete virus.

    5. Lysis

    During the lysis stage, mature virus particles are released.

     

    Difference between Lysogenic Cycle and Lytic Cycle

    The lytic and lysogenic cycles have several differences, apart from how they ride on the host. Here are some of the differences reported from the Sehatq.com page.

    • Viral DNA is not integrated in the lytic cycle, while in the lysogenic cycle integration of viral DNA into the host cell DNA occurs.
    • The host DNA in the lytic cycle is hydrolyzed, while the host DNA in the lysogenic cycle is not hydrolyzed.
    • The difference between the lytic and lysogenic cycles can also be seen from the absence of a prophage stage in the lytic cycle, while the lysogenic cycle does.
    • Viral DNA replication in the lytic cycle occurs independently, while in lysogenic it occurs with the host DNA.
    • The lytic cycle occurs in a short time, while the lysogenic cycle can take a longer time.
    • The cellular mechanisms are taken over by the viral genome in the lytic cycle, while the host cell’s cellular mechanisms are disrupted by the viral genome in the lysogenic cycle.

    How to Prevent and Overcome Virus Infections

    We as humans can prevent contracting certain viruses as well as overcome if the virus has already infected the body. Here are some ways to prevent and deal with virus infections which are summarized from the Sehatq.com page.

    1. Maximizing the Immune System

    The body will respond to a virus attack by being detected first by the immune system. Then the immune system will help the body to survive and recover. This resistance process is called RNA interference or DNA interference. The goal is to break down the genetic material of the virus.

    When this process occurs, the immune system will produce special antibodies that are able to bind to viruses. So, hopefully, the virus is not contagious. The T cells from the body will also try to destroy the virus.

    However, various types of viruses can avoid this resistance, such as HIV and neurotropic viruses. Neurotropic viruses are viruses that attack nerve cells and affect the structure of the central nervous system. Some diseases caused by neurotropic viruses are rabies, polio, mumps, and measles.

    2. Vaccines

    Vaccines are the most effective and easy way to prevent viral infections. Vaccines can be done by the following methods.

    • Viral proteins are called antigens. The antigen stimulates the body to form antibodies that will fight future infections with the same virus.
    • Live attenuated virus is like immunization for polio.

    3. Take Antiviral Medication

    If the infection is caused by bacteria, it can be treated with antibiotics. While viral infections are treated with antiviral drugs. It works by inhibiting the virus’ ability to reproduce. Such as HIV infection, influenza, hepatitis B and C can be treated with antiviral drugs.

    4. Living a Healthy Lifestyle

    Lifestyle has an influence on the body. It is able to prevent viruses that attack the body. A stable body metabolism can reduce the risk of developing chronic disease or dying at a young age. Here are some steps to a healthy lifestyle that can be taken to prevent the virus.

    • Watch your food intake
    • Reduce alcohol consumption
    • Do not smoke
    • Exercise regularly
    • Do activities you like
  • Know the Various Types of Ancient Currency from Various Ages

    Knowing the Various Types of Ancient Currency from Various Ages – Some time ago, precisely
    at the moment of Indonesia’s independence yesterday which fell on August 17, 2022, all elements of society
    participated in celebrating the independence party with wisdom.
    Both from government officials
    and local communities in various parts of our beloved country, Indonesia.
    But apart from the
    moment of independence which brought joy to urban and regional communities who also enlivened the moment by
    participating in various competitions, there was one other interesting moment that caught the attention of
    the Indonesian people, namely the Government through Bank Indonesia officially issued a new edition of
    currency that could be used as a transaction tool. official cash in Indonesia.

    Quoting the news released by the mass media, ” Today, 18 August 2022, I am Perry Warjiyo, the
    Governor of Bank Indonesia, together with the Minister of Finance Sri Mulyani Indrawati, officially
    issuing Rupiah banknotes which are divided into seven denominations in 2022 in the form of tender
    contracts, statutory regulations invitations throughout Indonesia.
    the territory of the
    Republic of Indonesia,
    ” said the Governor of Bank Indonesia Perry Warjiyo in his
    statement.

    Perry explained that as a symbol of state sovereignty and national unity, his party invited all levels of
    society to appreciate, be proud of, and understand the rupiah “Come on.
    kindle the optimism of
    the national spirit and commitment to a faster recovery and a stronger awakening towards an advanced
    Indonesia,” said Perry.

    On the same occasion, the Minister of Finance (Menkeu) Sri Mulyani Indrawati said that the Rupiah is not only a
    currency, but also a currency that describes the journey of the nation and the unitary state of the Republic of
    Indonesia.

    “On October 30, 1946, ORI or Oeang Republik Indonesia was born and ratified and came into force at that
    time it was proclaimed by Vice President Mohammad Hatta, and this marked a new chapter for the Republic of
    Indonesia.
    Indonesia. Indonesia is newly independent,” said the
    Ministry of Finance.
    And, on this day a new currency was launched signifying a new face of
    Indonesia.

    Seeing the development of today’s society, it is actually rare to use cash as a means of transaction
    anymore because it has begun to be replaced with digital currency which is more practical to use, but the
    existence of cash is still important as an official means of transaction because some places that still use
    traditional methods still use cash. as a transaction tool.
    But did you know that currency also
    always evolves from time to time following developments and is also influenced by cultural aspects as the
    design motive for making it.

    Departing from there, in this discussion we will try to discuss various kinds of ancient money originating from
    various eras which will be explained further below.

  • Know the Types of Work

    Type of work – Everyone has a job to make ends meet. Starting from light work, to work that requires a lot of physical and mental strength. Work is an activity carried out to get payment rewards. In this world there are many types of work. Starting from freelance work, permanent work and contract work.

    Sometimes someone does their job not according to what they want. However, there are also many people who have chosen jobs according to their interests. Even though they don’t like and feel compelled to do work, they still do it because of the demands of circumstances. For example, a father who is forced to take two jobs in order to provide for his family. Here is a further description of the job.

    Definition of work

    Work is an activity carried out by humans properly and correctly, the process has a specific purpose. Work must be done to maintain and meet the needs of human life. It’s not easy for most people to find a dream job. The ideal job is a job that matches your interests and personality.

    On average, people who work according to their passions are more successful in their careers. This is because they love and are happy in completing their work. If the person loves his job, then he will be happy and will create a feeling of wanting to work even harder.

    This book by Hasis Purwanto will answer questions about how to get the job you dream of. This book also explains how to prepare job applications, negotiate salaries, and prepare written tests to interviews.

    Choosing a job that suits your interests can be started by dissecting whether you tend to be a person who is more inclined towards ideas, people, or things. People who are always curious, creative and like to explore new ideas, then jobs in writing, science, artistic are right for you. Some of these professions are authors, writers, zoologists, medical assistants, paramedical practitioners, physicists and performing artists or works of art.

    If you are more socially inclined, prefer to meet new people, are adaptable and have a high social spirit, then a job that deals with a computer screen for hours on end is not suitable for you.

    If you are that kind of person, you are better suited to work in marketing, consulting, and public relations . Some of these professions are sales, marketing managers , public relations experts and public relations and advertising managers.

    If you are a person who prefers to see things in order, tidy and do a job with a plan, but don’t really like meeting lots of new people, then a suitable job is a job that requires high precision, for example administration, finance, clerk. Some examples of these professions are secretaries, office clerks, administrative experts, financial analysts, and government officials.

    Life and work are two things that are interrelated. If we want to lead a happy life, we should make our work a happy activity.

    This book written by Chris Barez Brown can help you feel truly in love with your job. You will be reminded that you are a great person and have many abilities. You will also feel formed to make your job a way out for a bright future.

    Tips for learning to love work

    There are actually several ways to change your perspective on your work. By doing the tips below, it can help you turn a boring job into a job that you like. Here are some tips you can do.

    1. Make a list of things you want to improve

    Make a list of aspects of your job that you would like to improve. This can help you to solve the problem, so you have to define it first.

    Take time and clear your mind of negativity. Grab a writing utensil and jot down all the things you don’t like about work maybe. Make a list of things you don’t like as specifically as possible.

    For example, you can write, co-worker A often closes the ideas you put forward. Colleague B can also sometimes make you not focus at work. If you already know the problem you are facing, you can discuss it with your boss, for example asking to be moved to his work space, or maybe your boss can help find a partner who is more compatible with you.

    2. Find anything you like

    First of all, think about your job and some of the things that make you like something. Think of a dream job, and imagine if you could actually do that dream job.

    Consider talking about this with your boss. If there are no obstacles, you can see opportunities to do the things you love related to your job.

    3. Don’t hesitate to ask for help

    If you’re feeling overwhelmed with your work, or you’re struggling with a certain task, don’t hesitate to seek advice from someone else. Start consulting with colleagues, seniors in your office or manager.

    From there you can see if they can help you solve the problem you’re working on. So, you can make a schedule of which jobs are more prioritized, and your workload will be more balanced.

    4. Expand the network

    Even though it seems that the challenges you face in your field of work are very specific, it is possible that there are other people who are also experiencing the same thing. Try to expand your network by attending industry meetings or conferences related to your field of work. This can help you to build a support system that you can consult or just get sympathy when you are in a difficult time.

    Expanding the network does not always apply to getting to know people outside your company. You can even benefit greatly by establishing close relationships with co-workers in your company.

    5. Recall why you decided to take this job

    Try to go back a little, think back on the job offer you are currently in and why you accepted it. Maybe because the pay is great, or because this job serves a good purpose.

    Maybe make your time flexible and other good things. Remembering things like this can help you lead to the next step, whether you will continue your work or even make you want to find a new job.

    Tips for finding a job

    Searching for a job involves more than just looking for open vacancies and sending a resume or cover letter to the employer. You also need to make sure whether you are suitable for the job and attract the attention of the company. Here are tips on finding a job.

    1. Know your career goals

    first of all, first identify the type of career you want. This section is especially important for people who are entering the workforce for the first time, or people who are looking to change career paths. You can look for recommendations from your family, professors or even former colleagues.

    Make sure the goals you have are clear and realistic. After that determine how you make a plan to achieve it and note what makes you qualified for that career. These steps can help you to narrow down the jobs and positions that you like.

    2. Create a plan or schedule

    Prepare yourself and make a regular schedule to search for jobs more efficiently. Decide how many hours a day or maybe a week you can dedicate to your job search.

    Make sure your resume and cover letter are kept up to date. If you need help updating your resume and cover letter, you can look for samples and templates, which are now widely available online.

    Also, update your profile on professional networking websites like LinkedIn. You can also create tables to record what jobs you’ve applied for and interviews you’ve accepted. You can also separate your personal and professional emails so that they are more organized.

    3. Make a resume and cover letter

    When you are confused about how to make a resume or cover letter, you can ask a friend, family, co-worker and even a professional career counselor to proofread your resume and cover letter.

    Tailor your resume to the job you are applying for. Study the job description to determine why you are the perfect fit for the position. Then, add skills, experience and achievements that are relevant to the position you are applying for.

    4. Use all sources of job seekers

    Take advantage of all the job search options. You can attend job fairs, search for them on social media such as Twitter, LinkedIn, or you can search through web portals, which are currently numerous and available online.

    5. Find out about the company

    When you are looking for a job, you may forget to find out about the reputation of the company. This is actually very important because it can provide information about the culture of the company, how the range of salaries and benefits and services provided, as well as their work environment. The research you do will give you a decision whether you want to work for the company or not.

    This book by Ridwan Raharjo can guide you in the process of finding a job. Finding a job is certainly a long process. From this book you can master interview techniques, find out common mistakes in making applications to break mental blocks that are always annoying.

    Apart from Ridwan Raharjo’s book, there is also a book by Suryono Ekotama which explores the secrets of how to get a job easily. This book contains practical tips that you can practice to improve your quality so that you can deserve the job you want.

    Types of work

    In this world there are many fields of work that humans are involved in. Starting from jobs that do not require too much physical strength, jobs that have flexible time and others. Here are some types of work.

    1. Teacher or Lecturer

    Teachers and lecturers are people who teach knowledge, provide guidance and also evaluate the knowledge they give to their students or students. Teachers and lecturers have similar jobs, except that lecturers are professional educators who educate in lectures or higher education levels. A lecturer also continues to conduct research according to his field and publish scientific papers.

    2. Army and Police

    Soldiers are citizens who are trained and armed to serve in defending the country in the face of armed or military threats. The army is usually divided into three groups namely Army Ground Forces, Navy Soldiers, and Air Force Soldiers.

    Meanwhile, the police is a government agency whose job is to maintain order in society and enforce the law in accordance with the law.

    3. Pilots

    The person who flies the plane is the pilot. The pilot usually flies the plane with a partner who is called the co-pilot. A pilot has demands that are experts in driving the plane.

    They previously took official training and exams which were usually held at flight schools or flying certifications. The pilot has a great responsibility for the safety of the crew and passengers.

    4. Stewardess

    A flight attendant is a staff of public transportation both on land, sea and air. The flight attendants are on duty to serve passengers so that passengers can feel safe and comfortable during the trip.

    They are also tasked with giving safety instructions, providing first aid and controlling safety and security equipment. Flight attendants are usually also given training so they can serve passengers well.

    5. Doctor

    Doctors are experts in the field of health. The doctor is a person or the first point of contact with a patient to solve health problems and diseases suffered by patients.

    Doctor’s companion is called a nurse. To become a doctor, you have to study for at least 5 years. In addition, to become a specialist doctor, you have to take at least two years of education.

    6. Fisherman

    Fisherman is a profession in which people work daily to catch fish, both traditional and modern. The fishermen usually move in the sea and water areas.

    A fisherman must be able to operate a boat, prepare equipment for finding and catching fish. The marine catch obtained later is usually sold to the market for consumption by the community.

    7. Lawyer

    Lawyers are a field of work in which a person will provide legal services and services. Usually lawyers will give advice and defend their clients from lawsuits.

    Apart from providing legal consultations, lawyers are also tasked with accompanying clients during court hearings, helping uphold justice and conducting legal audits.

    8. Programmers

    Programmers are people who have special expertise in designing a program, both an application and developing a website. They will use programming languages ​​such as Java, C++, python and others.

    Programmers are also tasked with testing the programs they make, coding programs, and designing program requirements. In addition, they are also in charge of developing the application programs they make.

    9. Farmer

    Farmers are people who cultivate land so that they can grow crops which are usually sold to the community so that they can also fulfill their daily needs. Farmers are also tasked with harvesting their crops and determining the selling price in the market.

    10. Traders

    Traders are people who sell a product. These products can be produced by themselves or the results of other people. They are tasked with ensuring the merchandise sold is in good condition and promoting or offering their merchandise.

  • Know the Types of Human Muscles and Their Functions

    Types of Human Muscles – Talking about humans feels very complex, starting from the things that are in their bodies to their behavior. In the human body itself there are many organs that work. There are even organs that play an important role when humans carry out their daily activities or you could say when humans move.

    One characteristic of living things (humans) is movement. By moving, we will be able to do various kinds of activities that we want to do. In this case, moving is not just what is seen by ourselves or others, but also what is seen by us, such as the movement that occurs in the heart when it pumps blood throughout the body.

    Every human being who moves is due to the presence of muscles and bones. The two organs of the body work together with each other, so that humans can move according to their wishes. As for movements that are always related to bones and muscles, such as bending the elbows, throwing the ball, kicking the ball, bending the body, and so on.

    Bones and muscles cannot be separated from the movements made by humans, but generally muscles have a more important role in moving the organs of the body. This can happen because when humans move, it will definitely create contractions in the muscles. In other words, muscles are organs that humans rely on when moving.

    Although bones and muscles are organs that can play a role in human movement, on this occasion, we will discuss the types of muscles. Not only the types of muscles, but this article will also discuss the meaning of muscles, muscle function, and muscle fuel. So, read this article to the end, Sinaumed’s.

    Understanding Muscles

    Before discussing the types of muscles, we will discuss the meaning of muscles first, so that it will be easier to understand the types of muscles later. The muscles that exist in humans can move because of orders from the brain which then the brain gives orders, so that when the brain is still functioning properly, the movement of the muscles is still functioning properly too.

    In the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) muscle is a springy tissue in the body of humans and animals that functions to move the body. From the definition of muscles based on KBBI, it can be said that they play an important role in the movements carried out by humans.

    This tissue-shaped muscle will look like bundles of fibers attached to bones or other organs. When the muscles carry out their duties, especially when moving the body, the muscles will not push. In other words, muscles will contract when moving bones or other organs.

    As previously explained that muscles play an important role in human movements, so muscles can be said to be one of the organs of the human body as an active means of movement. Therefore, when someone has a muscle injury, the movement will be less than optimal.

    In the human body itself there are muscle tissues which, if calculated, are approximately 35-40 percent of the mass of the human body. In other words, almost half of the mass of the human body is muscle tissue. In addition, the size of this muscle can be reduced or enlarged depending on the movements performed by the human.

    So, it can be said that when a muscle contracts or moves a body organ, that part of the body will look bigger. Meanwhile, when the muscles relax or do not move other organs, they will appear smaller.

    It would be nice, we determine the right time when to move the muscles and when to rest the muscles. By doing so, the injury to the muscles can be properly minimized.

    After discussing the meaning of muscles, what will be discussed next is the types of muscles in humans.

    Types of Muscles and Their Characteristics 

    Basically, there are a lot of muscles in the human body. However, usually the muscles in humans are divided into 3 types, including:

    1. Smooth Muscle

    Smooth muscle is a type of muscle in the human body which contracts in an unconscious or involuntary way . Therefore, this smooth muscle can move even when humans are asleep. Even so, smooth muscle can move regularly. Not only regular, regular, smooth muscles also don’t tire quickly when they contract.

    This type of muscle can indeed work tirelessly, so this muscle can work continuously. However, smooth muscles do not require so much energy even though they have to move continuously and tirelessly, why is that? This can happen because the power released by smooth muscles is not so much.

    Smooth muscle is not only located in one organ of the human body, but is located in many organs of the human body. As for the location of this smooth muscle, such as in the digestive tract, in the blood vessels, in the eyes, in the uterus or bladder, and so on.

    Each location of smooth muscle has a different function. For example, smooth muscle in the digestive tract functions to maintain every peristaltic movement, while smooth muscle in the eye functions to move the size of the pupil. In the bladder, smooth muscle functions to excrete urine, and in the blood vessels, smooth muscle functions to regulate blood pressure.

    Every muscle in humans certainly consists of many cells, as well as the type of smooth muscle which consists of many cells. The cells in smooth muscle can be described as spindles which are quite large in the middle and tapered at both ends of the smooth muscle.

    Smooth muscle consists of two types of smooth muscle single unit smooth muscle and double unit smooth muscle, so what are the differences between the two types of smooth muscle? The difference between the two types of smooth muscle lies in the way the muscle cells work. Single unit smooth muscle cells work in a collective manner. Meanwhile, double unit smooth muscle cells work individually or work independently.

    To understand more about smooth muscle, you can get to know its characteristics below.

    Characteristics of Smooth Muscles

    1. Smooth muscles work tirelessly.
    2. Smooth muscle can work unconsciously and can work while sleeping.
    3. Smooth muscle is more elastic than striated muscle.
    4. The length of smooth muscle is about 20 to 30 micrometers.
    5. Can do contractions in a fairly long period of time.
    6. It is located in almost all parts of the body.
    7. When working, smooth muscles are very dependent on the nervous system and hormones.
    8. It has a round shape in the middle and is tapered at the ends.
    9. Has a thickness that can reach about 5 micrometers.

    That’s a discussion of smooth muscle and its characteristics, the next discussion is the type of cardiac muscle.

    2. Cardiac Muscles

    As the name implies, the heart muscle is located in the organ part of the heart. Cardiac muscle is a type of muscle that is located as a constituent of the heart wall and has a function to pump blood from all over the body to the heart or from the heart to the rest of the body. Therefore, when this heart muscle cannot function properly, the blood flow to be pumped by the heart becomes less than optimal, which can cause several diseases that are quite dangerous, such as difficulty breathing.

    Cardiac muscle consists of many cells which are generally elongated in shape. In addition, the heart muscle also has many cell nuclei which are located in the center of the heart muscle. Because of its location which is only in the organs of the heart, the heart muscle is often known as a special muscle. What’s more, the role of the heart muscle is very important because it can affect all organs in the body.

    As with smooth muscle, this heart muscle can also move unconsciously, so it will work continuously without tired. That way, the heart muscle can work even though the brain is not ordering it or when we are asleep.

    As for how the heart muscle works, that is when it contracts, the heart muscle pumps blood out of the heart throughout the body. Meanwhile, when the heart muscle relaxes, it indicates that blood from all over the body will return to the heart. Simply put, the heart muscle functions to carry out blood circulation in the human body.

    In addition, the heart muscle also functions to control the contraction of the heart. This can happen because in the heart muscle there is a special cell which is often called a pacemaker or more precisely a pacemaker . With these cells, the heart rate can be accelerated and slowed down to match the contractions.

    The heart is a very important organ of the human body because it can affect other organs of the body. Therefore, it is the same with the heart muscle which has a very important role, especially in maintaining blood circulation and pumping blood.

    Characteristics of Cardiac Muscles

    The characteristics of the cardiac muscle as follows.

    1. It has a cylindrical and branched shape.
    2. It is located on the heart wall and as a constituent of the heart wall.
    3. Can work at any time without having to be ordered by the brain (can be when sleeping).
    4. Have a cell nucleus that is located in the middle or center of the heart muscle.

    3. Striated Muscles 

    Striated muscle is a type of muscle that is attached to the framework of the organs of the human body, so this type of muscle functions to make movements in the body. Therefore, striated muscles are also often known as skeletal muscles. With this muscle, a human can move his body according to the commands of the brain.

    As the name implies, this type of muscle also has a striated or cloth-like appearance. The color of this muscle is dark or actin and light or myosin. Of the two colors, it then forms an alternating pattern and its shape resembles a cylinder. In addition, the length of striated muscle is about 2.5 cm with a diameter of about 50 micrometers

    The number of cell nuclei in striated muscles is very large, which are located on the edges, so that this type of muscle can work hard. Even though it can work hard, these striated muscles need rest so they don’t get tired or even cause an injury. Therefore, we should not force ourselves to do something too much when we feel tired.

    This striated muscle is different from cardiac muscle or smooth muscle, where is the difference? The difference lies in the way it moves, striated muscles must be moved according to instructions from the brain, while smooth and cardiac muscles can work without a command from the brain. Therefore, when we sleep, the striated muscles cannot work optimally.

    Not only is it often referred to as skeletal muscle, but striated muscle is also often referred to as skeletal muscle with its pigment which is the color myoglobin. This type of muscle is often found in almost all parts of humans. In fact, this type of striated muscle can also be found in animals.

    For those of you who want to see striated muscles, there are biceps and triceps. The location of these two muscles is on the upper arm of the hand. The amount of striated muscle is about 40 percent of the mass or weight of the human body. This striated muscle also has several parts, such as sarcoplasm, sarcolemma, myofilaments, and myofibrils.

    This striated muscle works by contracting and relaxing. The function of relaxing striated muscles is to restore strength to the muscles after heavy movements.

    Characteristics of Striated Muscles

    Following are the characteristics of skeletal muscles.

    1. The striated muscles have a large number of cell nuclei that are located on the edges
    2. The color of the striated muscles is like cloth where the dark and light colors form alternating patterns.
    3. Striated muscles can work according to orders from the brain or move consciously.
    4. Has a length of about 2.5 cm with a diameter of 50 micrometers.
    5. Easy to contract and when contracting the muscles will become constricted.
    6. Consists of thousands of fibers that form a muscle tissue.

    Movement Organ Thematic Book Recommendations

     

     

     

     

    Muscle Function

    After discussing the types of muscles in the human body, overall these muscles have several functions including:

    1. Helps the respiratory system.
    2. Helping the process of the human circulatory system, so that it can move optimally.
    3. Helps the human digestive tract.
    4. Maintain balance between the organs of the human body.
    5. Move the part of the body you want to move.
    6. Maintain posture
    7. Protects the vital organs of the body.

    Muscle Fuel

    From the explanation above, there are types of muscles that work according to orders from the brain and there are also those that can work without awareness. However, when the muscles work, they definitely need fuel, so that the role of each type of muscle can run optimally. The fuel for muscles is oxygen.

    Of that oxygen, then distributed throughout the body through the blood. Therefore, when doing a movement that is quite heavy, we will need more oxygen so that blood can be delivered to the muscles of the body that we want to move.

  • Know the Types of Forests in Indonesia and Their Characteristics

    Forest Types – Forests in Latin are called sylva, sylvi or sylvo. Sylva, sylvi or sylvo which means a very wide place. An area is considered forest if it has an area of ​​more than 1/4 ha and a number of trees grow there, as well as the presence of interdependent biotic and abiotic factors.

    In general, the concept of a forest is a place inhabited by dense trees. Such as shrubs, grasses, mushrooms, ferns, trees and other plants on a large scale. In Indonesia, forests have different names depending on their respective regions, such as utan in Jakarta, leuweung in Sundanese, alas or wana in Java, etc.

    According to the law of numbers. 41 of 1999, forest is an ecosystem unit in the form of expanses of land containing biological natural resources because trees dominate the natural environment and their relationship with one another cannot be separated.

    Furthermore, the largest area of ​​forest land is in Papua with an area of ​​32.36 million hectares. The second order belongs to Kalimantan with an area of ​​28.23 million hectares, then Sumatra with an area of ​​14.65 million hectares, Sulawesi with an area of ​​8.87 million hectares, Maluku and North Maluku with an area of ​​4.02 million hectares. Forests in Java with an area of ​​3.09 million hectares, Bali and Nusa Tenggara with an area of ​​2.7 million hectares.

    Forests are habitats for plant and animal species, where carbon dioxide is recycled into oxygen, where hydrological flows are regulated, where water and soil are conserved, and forests are of great environmental importance. Sinaumed’s friends need to know the types of forests in Indonesia and their benefits. Moreover, most of the large islands of Indonesia have vast forests. No wonder Indonesia is often referred to as the lungs of the world.

    But lately there have been many forest fires that have caused various damages. Community and government efforts to protect forests are of course very much needed to maintain forest sustainability. Moreover, there are many types of forests in Indonesia.

    The types of forests in Indonesia and their benefits are important for Sinaumed’s to study. When people know the importance of forests for life, people will certainly care more about the surrounding environment. In addition, forests also play an important role as a place to provide oxygen for human respiration.

    For more details, here we have to study the definition of forest first, before discussing the types of forests in Indonesia and their functions.

    Definition of Forest

    Forest is land dominated by trees. Hundreds of definitions of forest are used worldwide, incorporating factors such as tree density, tree height, land use, legal status, and ecological function.

    The United Nations Food and Agriculture Organization defines forest as a land area extending over 0.5 hectares with trees higher than 5 meters and a canopy cover of more than 10% or trees capable of reaching these thresholds on the spot.

    This does not include land that is predominantly agricultural or urban use. Using this definition, the 2020 FRA found that forests covered 4.06 billion hectares, or about 31% of global land area in 2020.

    Forests are the dominant terrestrial ecosystems on Earth and are distributed throughout the world. More than half of the world’s forests are found in only 5 countries (Brazil, Canada, China, the Russian Federation and the United States). The largest share of forest (45 percent) is found in the tropics (rain forest), followed by temperate and subtropical boreal regions.

    Forests account for 75% of the total primary production of the Earth’s biosphere and contain 80% of the Earth’s vegetative biomass. Net primary production is estimated at 21.9 gigatons of carbon per year for tropical forests, 8.1 for temperate forests and 2.6 for boreal forests.

    Forests at different latitudes and altitudes with varying amounts of rainfall and transpiration form very different biomes, namely:

    boreal forests around the Arctic, tropical rainforests and dry forests around the equator, and temperate forests in the mid-latitudes.

    Areas at higher altitudes tend to support forests similar to areas at higher latitudes and rainfall also affects forest composition.

    Almost half of the forest area (49 percent) is relatively intact, while 9 percent is fragmented with little or no connectivity. Tropical rainforest and boreal coniferous forest are the least fragmented while subtropical dry forest and oceanic temperate forest are among the most fragmented.

    About 80 percent of the world’s forests are located on more than 1 million hectares of forest, the remaining 20% ​​are located on more than 34 million parcels of land worldwide, most of which are less than 1,000 hectares.

    Humans and forests influence each other positively and negatively. Forests provide ecosystem services for humans and can also become tourist attractions. Forests can also affect human health. Human activities, including the unsustainable use of forest resources, can have a negative impact on forest ecosystems.

    In Indonesia, according to Forestry Law No. 41 of 1999, forest is an ecosystem unit in the form of a stretch of land that contains biological natural resources because trees dominate the natural environment and cannot be separated together.

    Forest Types in Indonesia

    In order to understand clearly, the following types of forests in Indonesia have been summarized by sinaumedia.com from various sources:

    Forest Types Based on Biogeography

    The Archipelago is a natural relief formed from the confluence of three land plates. Even today, the three plates of the earth are still approaching. As a result, among other things, earthquakes often occur in this island nation.

    The history of the formation of islands in the equatorial belt has formed three main biogeographical regions, namely: the Sunda Shelf, Wallacea and the Sahul Shelf. Each biogeographic region reflects the distribution of life forms based on differences in the physical surface of the earth.

    • Sunda Shelf (in the western part)

    The Sunda Plateau is a strip of land that extends from the east (mainland Asia) and lies west of the Wallace Line. Wallace’s line is an imaginary dividing line between the flora and fauna of the Sunda Plateau and the easternmost part of Indonesia. This route is from north to south between Kalimantan and Sulawesi, and between Bali and Lombok. This lineage is named after the biologist Alfred Russel Wallace who in 1858 showed that the distribution of flora and fauna in Sumatra, Kalimantan, Java and Bali was closer to mainland Asia.

    • Sahul Shelf Area (in the eastern part)

    The Sahul Shelf is a strip of land that has shifted from the Australesian territory and lies east of the Weber Line. The Weber line is an imaginary dividing line between flora and fauna between the Sahul Shelf and the westernmost part of Indonesia. The line runs from north to south between the Maluku Islands and New Guinea and between East Nusa Tenggara and Australia. This lineage is named after the biologist Max Weber, who around 1902 showed that the distribution of flora and fauna in this area was closer to mainland Australia.

    • Wallace Region / Deep Sea (in the middle)

    The earth plate on the outskirts of East Asia moves between the Wallace and Weber lines. This area includes Sulawesi, the Lesser Sunda Islands (Nusa Tenggara), and the Maluku Islands. Most of the flora and fauna in this area are endemic (found only in the area concerned and not found anywhere else in the world). However, the region also has elements of the Eastern Sector and the Australasia Region. Wallace suggested that the sea was covered with ice during the Ice Age so that plants and animals from Asia and Australia could interbreed and congregate on the islands. Although Asian flora and fauna are still more abundant in the western part and Australian flora and fauna in the eastern part, this is because the Wallace area used to be a very deep sea trench, so that the flora and fauna of plants were difficult to pass and stopped spreading.

    Forest Types Based on Climate

    Because of its location at latitude, Indonesia actually has a tropical climate. However, its location between two continents and between two oceans makes the climate of this archipelago even more diverse.

    Based on a comparison of the number of dry months with the number of wet months per year, Indonesia has three climate zones, namely:

    • Climate type A (very humid) , where the peak of the rainy season falls from October to January, sometimes until February, this region covers the island of Sumatra; Borneo; the western and central parts of the island of Java; west of the island of Sulawesi.
    • Climate Type B (wet) has a peak rainy season between May and July and August or September being the driest months. This area covers the eastern part of Sulawesi Island; Moluccas; most of Papua.
    • Climate type C (slightly dry) has less rainfall, while dry months last longer. This area includes East Java; part of Madura Island; Bali Island; Nusa Tenggara; the southern tip of Papua.

    Based on the existing climate differences, Indonesia has peat forests, tropical rain forests, and monsoon forests.

    1. Tropical Rain Forest

    The earliest forest type in Indonesia is tropical rain forest. Tropical rainforests are widely recognized as a type of forest in Indonesia because the Indonesian archipelago receives a lot of sunlight, has high rainfall, and high average temperatures.

    The characteristics of tropical rain forests in general:

    • Plants that live in tropical rain forests are generally classified as plants with large, tall and dense leaves that grow tightly.
    • The animals that live in tropical rain forests are very diverse because they are divided into 3 areas, each forest is home to different animals. For example, in tropical forests in the western region, animals that develop are mainly large-bodied animals such as tigers, elephants, giraffes and others. This is because the tropical rain forests in the eastern region are dominated by small animals and various types of birds typical of Papua. Meanwhile, for the tropical rain forest in the transition zone, there are many unique animals such as anoa, wild boar and several medium-sized mammals.
    • In addition, another feature of tropical rain forests is the relatively high rainfall, which makes mixed soils very fertile.

    The benefits of tropical rain forests can be as a breeding ground for rare plant and animal species as well as as a water reservoir during the dry season.

    2. Monsoon Forest or Seasonal Forest

    Monsoon forests grow in areas with climate categories C or D, namely in Central Java, Yogyakarta, East Java, Bali, NTB, parts of NTT, southeastern Maluku and parts of the southern coast of Irian Jaya. Tree species in this forest include teak (Tectona grandis) , walikukun ( Actinophora fragrans) , eucalyptus (Eucalyptus alba) , sandalwood (Santalum album) and eucalyptus (Melaleuca leucadendron) .

    It is called seasonal forest or monsoon forest because it has quite clear differences in conditions between the rainy season and the dry season. Plants in the dry season forest often wither, and during the rainy season grow back massively. Here are some characteristics of monsoon forests or monsoon forests:

    • Can be found in the highlands and lowlands. – The distance between trees in seasonal forests tends not to be tight, in fact they are very neatly spaced with a certain distance.
    • The height of the trees that fill the forest this season is not too high. Not like a rainforest.
    • Animals that live in the forest this season are not as numerous and as aggressive as those that live in tropical rain forests. The average animals that can be found are insects, snakes, birds and several types of mammalian rodents.

    The benefits of seasonal forest are as a production forest and as a tool for climate and seasonal indicators

    3. Peat Forest

    Peat forests are in climate category A or B, namely on the east coast of Sumatra, along the coast and major rivers in Kalimantan and in most of the south coast of Papua.

    Peat forests are tropical hardwood forests where the wetlands prevent the leaves and wood from completely decomposing. Over time, an acidic layer of peat forms. Peat forests are often surrounded by moist forest on non-flooded land and surrounded by mangroves in brackish water.

    Exploitation of peat forests carried out by the Indonesian government in Kalimantan’s peat forests for agricultural purposes has caused many fires to occur in peat forests.

    Major fires occurred in 1997-1998 and 2002-2003. A study by the European Space Agency shows that peat forests have the ability to sequester the planet’s carbon. The 1997-1998 fires released up to 2.5 billion tons of carbon and the 2002-2003 fires released between 200 million and 1 billion tons of carbon into the Earth’s atmosphere.

    Oil palm plantations in Kalimantan play an important role in draining peat forests which causes the release of carbon from peatlands. Conserving peat forests is known to prevent the release of more carbon per unit area than preventing deforestation and lowers costs. Indonesia has 50% peat forest in the tropics and 10% peat forest in the world.

    Forest Types Based on Soil Characteristics

    Based on the nature of the soil, forest types in Indonesia include coastal forests, mangrove forests and swamp forests.

    1. Beach Forest

    Coastal forest or more precisely called coastal vegetation or sandy beach vegetation (English: vegetation beach) is a ground cover that grows and thrives on sandy beaches above the highest tide line in the tropics. Traditionally, experts distinguished two and sometimes three plants that formed in the area.

    Although it is quite rich in fauna diversity, only certain types of animals are unique to this type of ecosystem. Most of these animals also live in other types of ecosystems, or even only come to coastal forests for short periods of time.

    2. Swamp Forest

    The next type of forest in Indonesia is swamp forest. Swamp forest is a type of forest in Indonesia. Swamp forests cover forest areas with various plants such as beluntas, pandanus and ketapang. This type of forest is mostly found on the east coast of Sumatra, West Kalimantan and Central Kalimantan. The characteristics of peat swamp forests in Indonesia are:

    • The land is always flooded to form swamps
    • Peat swamp forest also has a layer of soil in the form of peat soil.
    • Plants that can live in peat swamp forests are often small in stature and have less strong roots than those that grow in dense soil.

    3. Mangrove Forest

    The next type of forest in Indonesia is mangrove. Mangroves grow on steep, muddy beaches which are always exposed to sea tides. Mangroves are home to many species of fish and shrimp. So, this mangrove forest is very important for the environment. Here are some of the benefits of mangroves as a type of forest in Indonesia:

    • As a breakwater and restraint.
    • As a natural habitat for small fish.
    • As an anti-abrasion caused by sea water.

    Forest Types Based on Tree Types

    The types of forests in Indonesia and their benefits can also be seen based on the type of tree, as follows:

    1. Heterogeneous Forest

    Heterogeneous forest is a forest where many types of trees grow, for example wilderness. Usually in tropical areas with high rainfall such as Central and South America, Africa, Southeast Asia and Northeastern Australia, the trees are tall and broadleaf. In Indonesia, heterogeneous forests are found on the islands of Java, Sumatra, Kalimantan and Papua.

     

    2. Homogeneous Forest

    Homogeneous forest is a forest where only one type of tree grows. In general, homogeneous forests are created for specific purposes, such as for reforestation, afforestation or industrial expansion. Examples of homogeneous forests include teak and pine forests.

    Author: Ziaggi Fadhil Zahran

  • Know the Types of Angles

    Types of angles – In math lessons someone must explain angles. Lessons or material about angles will usually appear at every level of education. This is because angles are always present in everyday life. In fact, the houses we live in are built using good and correct angles, so they look beautiful and sturdy.

    However, for some people they only know what an angle is and don’t know the types of angles and how to measure angles. Sinaumed’s, the article will discuss the meaning of angles, types of angles, and how to measure angles. So, read this article until it’s finished.

     

    Definition of Angle

    Any building that has not yet been built will definitely be drafted first. If you pay attention to the design of this building, it is an interconnected line, thus forming a single unit. The interconnected lines will form an angle that can strengthen the building and beautify the building.

    Apart from building, angles can also be found in the world of sports, one of which is soccer. In football there is such a thing as a “corner kick”. Why is it called a “corner kick”? Because the ball to be kicked is in the corner of the field or the meeting point between the horizontal and vertical lines.

    Apart from “corner kicks”, corners in soccer can be found at the goal or more precisely at the top right and top left of the goal.

    Therefore, in everyday life almost every object that we see must have an angle. However, do you know what an angle is? An angle is a shape resulting from two lines meeting each other. Meanwhile, an angle can be said to be a space between two straight lines that intersect each other if they are in a two-dimensional shape with regular sizes.

    Meanwhile, in the Big Indonesian Dictionary, an angle is a shape made by two intersecting lines around the point of intersection. Therefore, in simple terms, an angle is a shape formed by the existence of two intersecting straight lines that meet at the same point.

     

    Coat, Emblem Name, and Angle Name

    Sinaumed’s, do you know the shape and name of the angle symbol? Angles have a symbol like this “?”. While the angle symbol is usually referred to as “alpha” or “theta”. The angle symbol will usually be placed before giving the angle name. You can see an example of an angle below.

    From this angular example, the correct angular names are ?ABC and ?CBA, why is that? Because the letter “B” is the meeting point of the CB and AB lines. While writing the wrong corner names such as ?ACB and ?CAB. The name of the angle is incorrect because the letters “A” and “B” are not intersection lines or lines that intersect.

    How about Sinaumed’s, how to write angular names is very easy right? The thing that needs to be underlined in writing from angular names is not to misplace the letters. If you put the letters wrong, then the angle you read will be wrong too.

     

    Types of Angles Based on the Big Angle 

    The types of angles are divided into two parts, namely based on the size of the angle and based on its position. The types of angles based on the size of the angle consist of 7 types of angles, namely acute angle, right angle, angle, obtuse, straight angle, reflex angle, zero degree angle, and full angle.

    1. Sharp angle

    An acute angle is an angle that has an angle that is not more than 90 degrees or more precisely, the size of an acute angle is between 0 degrees and less than 90 degrees. The magnitude of the acute angle is practically smaller when compared to the right angle. If using mathematical symbols can be seen below

    0 degrees < x < 90 degrees (x is the measured angle)

    The acute angle has another name in English in the form of an acute angle . Any triangle that has an angle less than 90 degrees has an acute angle. Acute angles are usually found in triangles, parallelogram trapezoids, etc.

    You can find sharp angles in everyday life, such as slices of pizza, a clock that shows 11 o’clock, clothespins, the tip of an iron, and the letter A.

    2. Right angle

    A right angle is an angle that has a very precise angle of 90 degrees. This right angle results from two straight lines that intersect or meet, thus producing lines that are perpendicular to each other. A right angle can be said to be larger than an acute angle and smaller than an obtuse angle.

    Right angles in English are usually known as tight angles . If a triangle has angles of exactly 90 degrees, then the triangle is called a right triangle.

    Meanwhile, we can find right angles in everyday life, such as all the walls of houses, cupboards, clocks that strike three o’clock, photo frames, windows, books, and ceramics.

    3. Obtuse angle

    An obtuse angle is an angle that has an angle of more than 90 degrees or more precisely above 90 degrees and below 180 degrees. An obtuse angle can be said to be an angle whose measure is above a right angle and an acute angle. If using mathematical symbols can be seen below.

    90 degrees < x < 180 degrees (x is the measured angle).

    An obtuse angle in English is usually known as an obtuse angle . A triangle whose one of the angles has angles greater than 90 degrees, then the triangle is called an obtuse triangle. Triangles that have obtuse angles are isosceles triangles and areosceles triangles.

    Obtuse angles can be found in everyday life, such as boomerangs, clocks that strike 7 o’clock, rooftops, beach chairs, rocking chairs, and hockey sticks.

    4. Straight angle

    A straight angle is an angle that has a measure of 180 degrees. At a glance, a straight angle is like a straight line with a horizontal shape and looks like it has two arms.

    Although straight angles are like straight lines, they are very different from angles with 0 degrees. A straight angle in English has another name, namely a straight angle .

    In everyday life, you can find straight angles, such as walls, table bases, clocks that show 6 o’clock.

    5. Reflex angle

    A reflex angle is an angle that has an angle ranging from 180 degrees to less than 360 degrees. With the size of the angle that is owned by the reflex angle, it can be said that the magnitude of this angle is greater than obtuse angles, right angles, and acute angles. It is called a reflex angle because this angle is a reflection of an obtuse angle. If using mathematical symbols can be seen below.

    180 degrees < x < 360 degrees (x is the angle to be measured)

    The reflex angle in English is called the reflex angle . The size of the angle that is owned by the reflex angle, this angle has more than one straight angle, but does not reach full rotation.

    6. Zero degree angle

    A zero degree angle is an angle whose angle measure is only zero degrees. A zero degree angle is an angle formed by two lines that coincide with each other, but do not form an angular area. At first glance it looks like two straight lines, but in fact the two lines are coincident. Therefore, this angle is very difficult to imagine the shape.

    In English, the zero degree angle is commonly referred to as zero degree . In everyday life it is very difficult to find a zero degree angle because almost every item that exists must have an angle.

    7. Full angle

    A complete angle is an angle that has an angle of 360 degrees. Therefore, full angles usually have a tendency to form a circle. A straight line that is at full angle will usually fulfill one rotation which results in a 360 degree angle or succeeding to its initial position requires a rotation.

    In English, this full angle is often referred to as the complete angle. It can be called the complete angle because this angle can fulfill one full rotation. In addition, a full angle can be said to be an angle that can rotate in the opposite direction to the other line until it reaches the other line.

     

    Types of Angles Based on Position

    The types of angles based on the position consist of four types of angles, namely adjacent angles, vertical angles, complementary angles, and supplementary angles.

    1. Adjacent angles

    The picture above explains that adjacent angles have three lines. Therefore, adjacent angles are the angles resulting from three lines connected by a single vertex. A vertex point is a point that meets three or more lines at an angle.

    2. Vertical Angle

    The picture above explains that the vertical angle has two angles. So, a vertical angle is an angle that results from two opposite angles meeting each other, thus forming an intersection of two lines. Therefore, the vertical angle can also be called the opposite angle.

    3. Complementary Angles

    The picture above explains that in the middle of a right angle there is a line that forms two angles. Complementary angles are angles formed by meeting two adjacent angles with an angle measure of exactly 90 degrees.

    4. Supplementary Angle

    The picture above explains that in the middle of a straight angle there is a line that creates two angles. A supplementary angle is an angle formed by the meeting of two adjacent angles with a measure of exactly 180 degrees.

     

    How to Measure Angles

    Sinaumed’s, do you know the name of the tool for measuring angles? Yes, that’s right, the name of the tool for measuring angles is a protractor. Therefore, the arc is often dubbed as a protractor (a unit commonly used for angles). So how do you use a protractor? Take it easy, below we will explain more about how to measure angles with a protractor.

    1. Put the bow at point A

    2. Adjust well until the base line of the bow is in the right position (coincides) on one corner of the corner leg. For example line AB.

    3. Then measure the angle starting from 0 degrees which is located on the AB line until it reaches the CA angle.

    4. The picture above shows that the CA line is at 60 degrees (using the internal scale).

    5. So, the angle measured is 60 degrees, so it can be said that the angle above is included in the acute angle.

    How to measure angles with a protractor, very easy right? Sinaumed’s, you can practice how to measure at school or at home.

    How to Draw Angles

    It feels incomplete if you only discuss how to measure angles, but don’t discuss how to draw angles. Below will explain how to draw angles.

    1. First make a horizontal line AB

    2. Then place the center of the arc at point A or at 0 degrees.

    3. Decide what angle to draw.

    4. Determine the size of the angle according to the angle you want to draw.

    5. After determining the angle, then put a mark at point C.

    6. If so, it will form the desired angle. Like the example of the angle above.

    Angles and their Relationships

    For some people, they may only know that the unit for angles is only degrees, but actually there are four angle units, namely degrees, radians, the sexagesimal system, and the centesimal system.

    1. Degrees

    The degree unit of angle commonly used to form a flat plane shape. The units of degrees are divided into 360 degrees or it can be said that one full rotation has 360 degrees. Therefore, an arc that shows one degree is a sign that one sector of the circle is divided into 360 wedges of the same magnitude.

    2. Radians

    Radian is a unit of angle in a plane. The symbol for a radian is “rad” and 1 radian or 1 rad is a central angle that has an arc length equal to the radius of the circle. 1 radian or 1 rad equals 57.2960 which, when rounded, becomes 57.30. Meanwhile, one degree equals phi divided by 180

    3. Sexagesimal System

    The sexagesimal system is a number system based on 60. This number system has existed since 2000 BC and originates from the Sumerians. Until now, the sexagesimal number system is still used to measure various things, such as angles, time, and geographic coordinates. In this system, there are two angular units, namely minutes (‘) and seconds (“”).

    If read 1 degree is equal to 60 minutes. Therefore, if you want to convert degrees to minutes, just multiply it by 60. If you want to convert minutes to degrees, just divide by 60. If formulated, like

    4. Centesimal System

    In the centesimal system, the units used are called grads . 1 right angle is equal to 100 grad.

    Conclusion

    Angle is one of the important math lessons to learn, especially for those of you who want to aspire to be an architect. Angles that we often know are usually types of angles based on the size of the angle, because we can see it in everyday life. Angle units consist of four kinds, namely degrees, radians, sexagesima system, and centesimal system. However, the unit of angle that is often used by most people is the degree.

  • Know the Structure of Animal Cells and Their Functions and Characteristics

    Structure of Animal Cells – Both plants and animals are composed of cells that have
    differences.
    One of the differences between the two can be seen from their size, namely animal
    cells are smaller than plant cells.
    Animal cell is the general name for the eukaryotic cells
    that make up animal tissues.

    The structure of animal cells differs from other eukaryotic cells, such as plant cells, in that they lack a
    cell wall, and chloroplasts, and they usually have smaller, if not none, vacuoles.
    Lacking a
    hard cell wall, animal cells vary in shape.
    The human cell itself is a type of animal
    cell.

    The structure of animal cells consists of mitochondria, centrioles, nucleus, nucleolus, chromatin,
    ribosomes, endoplasmic reticulum, microtubules, plasma membrane, vacuoles, cytosol, nuclear envelope, golgi
    bodies, cytoskeleton, lysosomes, and peroxisomes.
    To understand in more detail about animal
    cells including the definition, characteristics, structure of animal cells, functions and so on, here is an
    explanation that we can learn.

    Definition of Animal Cell

    Animal cells are the smallest organelles with a thin membrane in which there is a colloidal solution
    containing chemical compounds.
    This cell has a number of advantages, one of which is being able
    to duplicate itself independently through the process of division.

    Inside the cell there are compounds that are important for the process of division and also photosynthesis,
    namely carbohydrates and lipids.
    It is known, carbohydrates are very useful in the process of
    photosynthesis.
    While lipids function as food reserves, such as fats and oils. In
    addition, there are also proteins that play a role in the metabolic processes of animal and plant bodies, as
    well as nucleic acids which are compounds with quite an important role in the process of protein
    synthesis.

    Functions, Parts, and Structure of Animal Cells

    Broadly speaking, animal cells and plant cells are the same. Both based on animal cell
    structure, enzyme type, and also genetic material.
    In fact, both have diverse cell
    types.

    So, here are some of the functions and structures of animal cells that we need to know, including:

    1. Cell membranes

    The cell membrane is a semipermeable membrane in a cell that surrounds and encloses the contents of the
    cytoplasm and nucleoplasm.
    The cell membrane separates the cell from the interstitial fluid
    (the main component of extracellular fluid) around it.
    The formation of cell membranes is
    carried out with the basic ingredients in the form of lipoproteins which are formed by fats and proteins.
    This membrane is composed of a lipid bilayer, including cholesterol (a component of the lipid)
    which is sandwiched between phospholipids to maintain fluidity at various temperatures.

    The cell membrane also contains membrane proteins, including integral membrane-crossing proteins (serving
    as membrane transporters) and peripheral proteins loosely attached to the outer (peripheral) side of the
    cell membrane, which act as enzymes that shape the cell.
    The cell membrane controls the
    movement of substances in and out of cells and organelles.
    In this way, it is selectively
    permeable to ions and organic molecules.

    In addition, the cell membrane is involved in various cellular processes such as cell adhesion, ionic
    conductivity, and cell signaling, and serves as a surface on which several extracellular structures attach,
    including the cell wall, a carbohydrate layer called the glycocalyx, and an intracellular network of protein
    fibers called the cytoskeleton. .
    In the field of synthetic biology, cell membranes can be
    reassembled artificially.

    The cell membrane is the outer covering of the cell and is composed of proteins (lipoproteins), fats
    (lipids), and also cholesterol.
    This section has a fairly important role in regulating minerals
    and nutrients that are inside or outside the cell.

    2. Cytoplasm

    The cytoplasm is the part of the cell that is enclosed by the plasma membrane. The cytoplasm
    consists of water, proteins, carbohydrates, fats, minerals and vitamins.
    The cytoplasm serves
    as a storage area for cell chemicals that are important for cell metabolism, such as enzymes, ions, sugars,
    fats and proteins.
    In eukaryotic cells, the cytoplasm is the non-nuclear part of the
    protoplasm.
    In the cytoplasm there is a cytoskeleton, various organelles and vesicles, as well
    as a cytosol which is a liquid in which organelles float around in it.

    The cytosol fills the cell space that is not occupied by organelles and vesicles and is the site for many
    biochemical reactions as well as an intermediary for the transfer of materials from outside the cell to
    organelles or the cell nucleus.
    The cytoplasm is colloidal. The dissolved particle
    size is 0.001-0.1 micron and is transparent.
    The cytoplasm is inside the cell but outside the
    nucleus and other cell organelles.

    Please note, the cytoplasm is the liquid part of the cell in the form of a gel. This organelle
    has two form phase processes, namely the sol phase (solid) and the gel phase (liquid).
    Cytoplasmic fluid can be found in the nucleus and is called the nucleoplasm.

    This cytoplasm is a complex colloid which means it is not liquid, but also not solid.
    Cytoplasm can change shape depending on the concentration of water contained in it.
    Basically, when the water concentration is low, the cytoplasm will turn into a mushy solid.
    Meanwhile, when it contains water with a high concentration, the gel will turn out to be more
    dilute, so it is called sol.
    Cytoplasmic organelles serve as a source of cell chemicals and
    also the place where animal cell metabolism takes place.

    3. Endoplasmic Reticulum

    Next is the endoplasmic reticulum which is a thread-shaped organelle in the cell nucleus. The
    endoplasmic reticulum is an organelle that can be found in all eukaryotic cells.
    The
    endoplasmic reticulum is part of the endomembrane system.
    The endoplasmic reticulum is such a
    large membranous labyrinth that it comprises more than half of the total membrane in eukaryotic
    cells.

    The endoplasmic reticulum consists of a network of tubules and membranous sacs called
    cisternae ( Latin cisterna , meaning “box” or
    “chest”).
    The endoplasmic reticulum membrane separates the internal spaces, namely the
    sternal space and the cytosol.
    This membrane is in direct contact with the nuclear envelope
    or nuclear envelope, so that the space between the two envelope membranes is connected to the
    endoplasmic reticulum sternal space.

    The endoplasmic reticulum is divided into two, namely rough endoplasmic reticulum and smooth endoplasmic
    reticulum.
    The rough endoplasmic reticulum has the ability to attach to ribosomes, while the
    smooth endoplasmic reticulum is not attached to ribosomes.

    The function of the endoplasmic reticulum organelles is as a protein synthesis and also as a transport site
    for the synthesis of steroids and fats.
    In addition, the endoplasmic reticulum also plays a
    role in helping detoxify harmful cells in cells and as a place to store phospholipids, steroids, and
    glycolipids.

    4. Mitochondria

    The next part of animal cells is the mitochondria which is the largest organelle as a machine in cells.
    This organelle has two layers of indented membranes called cristae. Inside the
    mitochondria, glucose and oxygen work together to form the energy needed.

    Of course, this process is part of the body’s metabolic processes and cellular activities so that mitochondria
    are also referred to as The Power House . Single mitochondria are called mitochondrions
    which are capable of converting chemical energy into other forms of energy.
    In conclusion,
    these mitochondria function as a means of cellular respiration and produce energy in the form of
    Adenosine Triphosphate (ATP).

    5. Microfilaments

    Microfilaments or actin filaments are part of the cell framework (cytoskeleton) in the form of solid rods
    about 7 nm in diameter and composed of actin protein, which is a globular protein.
    Microfilaments are present in eukaryotic cells. In contrast to the stress-resisting
    (compressive) role of microtubules, the structural role of microfilaments in the cytoskeleton is to resist
    tension (tensile forces).

    By joining with other proteins, microfilaments often form three-dimensional strands just inside the plasma
    membrane, which help support the shape of the cell.
    These strands give the cortex (outer
    cytoplasmic layer) of the cell its semisolid, gel-like consistency, as opposed to the more fluid state of
    the inner cytoplasm (sol).

    In animal cells specialized for transporting materials across the plasma membrane, bundles of
    microfilaments form the core of microvilli, fine projections that increase the surface area of ​​the cell.
    Microfilaments are well known for their role in cell movement, especially as part of the muscle
    cell contraction apparatus.
    Thousands of actin filaments arranged parallel to each other
    throughout the muscle cell are interspersed with thicker filaments made of a protein called myosin.
    Muscle contraction occurs due to microfilaments and myosin sliding past each other, which shortens
    the cell.

    Microfilament activity causes movements such as cytoplasmic flow and ameboid movement (movement of single cells
    of protists, fungi, and animals that use their protoplasm flowing out of the cell to form a kind of pseudopod or
    pseudopod, then the remaining part of the cell advances towards the pseudopod to produce cell movement in the a
    surface).

    Microfilaments are visualized under fluorescence microscopy with the aid of antiactin antibodies (obtained from
    actin opponents in animals) or with the fluorescent analogue falotoxin (derived from the fungus Amanita
    phalloides ), which typically binds to the actin molecule (or actin-like).

    Microfilaments are cell organelles made up of actin and myosin proteins. Microfilaments are
    almost similar to microtubules, but have differences in texture and size.
    Microfilaments have a
    softer texture with a smaller diameter.
    Its function is as cell movement, exotic, and
    endocytosis.

    6. Lysosomes

    Lysosomes are membrane bound sacs containing hydrolytic enzymes. Lysosomes are located in
    eukaryotic cells, this section is useful for controlling intracellular digestion under any conditions.
    Lysosomes function to control intracellular digestion, digest material using phagocytosis, destroy
    damaged cell organelles, and enter macromolecules from the outside into the cell through the mechanism of
    endocytosis.

    7. Peroxisomes

    Peroxisomes, also known as micro bodies, are small sac organelles that contain the catalase enzyme.
    Its function is to decompose peroxide (H2O2) or metabolism which is toxic and converts fat into
    carbohydrates.
    Peroxisome organelles can be found in the liver and kidney cells.

    8. Ribosomes

    Ribosomes are cell organelles that have a dense texture with a small size, which is about 20 nm in
    diameter.
    This organelle consists of 65% ribosomal RNA and 35% ribosomal protein or
    ribonucleoprotein.
    Ribosomes in animal cells translate RNA to form polypeptide chains or
    proteins using amino acids during the translation process.
    Ribosomes are attached to the rough
    endoplasmic reticulum or the cell nucleus membrane which serves as the site for the process of protein
    synthesis.

    9. Centrioles

    Centrioles are tube-shaped organelle structures in eukaryotic cells. These organelles play an
    important role in the process of cell division by forming spindle threads and forming cilia and flagella.
    Not only that, a pair of centrioles can also form a combined structure called a centrosome.

    10. Microtubules

    The next cell organelle is the microtubule which is located in the cytoplasm. Microtubules can
    also be found in eukaryotic cells which are long hollow cylinders.
    This organelle has a
    diameter of about 12 nm and an outer diameter of about 25 nm.

    Microtubules are made up of several spherical globular protein molecules called tubulin. In an
    unconscious position, these organelles are able to combine to form hollow cylinders under certain
    conditions.
    Not only that, microtubules are also rigid which cannot be changed in shape.

    Based on this definition, microtubules function to protect cells, give cells shape, and form cilia, flagella, and
    centrioles.

    11. Golgi apparatus

    The Golgi apparatus, also known as the Golgi apparatus, is an organelle related to the excretory function
    of animal cells.
    Its position is right on eukaryotic cells that play a role in the excretion
    process, such as the kidneys.
    It looks like a flat bag of varying sizes and is bound by a
    membrane.
    Each animal cell has around 10-20 golgi bodies.

    The structure of the Golgi apparatus consists of bundles of disc-shaped sacs which branch into a series of
    very small vessels at the ends.
    Because of its close relationship with the cell’s excretory
    function, vessels collect and package carbohydrates and other substances for transport to the cell
    surface.

    The vessels also contribute materials for the formation of the cell wall. The Golgi body is
    built by a membrane which is shaped like tubules and also vesicles.
    From the tubules are
    released small sacs that contain the necessary materials such as enzymes that form the cell wall.

    12. Nucleus

    The nucleus is the smallest organelle that regulates and controls the activities of animal cells.
    This process starts from metabolism to cell division. The nucleus contains genetic
    material in the form of long linear DNA forming chromosomes.
    This organelle can be found in
    eukaryotic cells which consists of several parts, such as the nuclear membrane, nucleoplasm, chromosomes,
    and nucleus.

    13. Nucleolus

    The nucleolus (plural nucleoli , Latin: nucleolus , also known as the daughter cell
    nucleus) is a non-membrane bound structure consisting of proteins and nucleic acids in the cell nucleus
    (nucleus).
    Ribosomal RNA (rRNA) is transcribed and assembled in the nucleolus.
    The ultrastructure of the nucleolus can be visualized via electron microscopy, while the
    organization and dynamics can be studied through tagging of fluorescent proteins and fluorescent
    recovery after photobleaching (FRAP).

    The nucleolus is an organelle present in the cell nucleus or nucleus. Its function is to form
    proteins using RNA or ribonucleic acid.
    Nucleolar damage can be the cause for several human
    diseases.
    Required up to about 25% of nuclear volume.

    14. Nucleoplasm

    Nucleoplasm has a dense texture inside the cell nucleus or nucleus. It contains dense
    chromatin fibers and forms chromosomes.
    Moreover, the nucleoplasm is responsible for carrying
    the genetic information.

    15. Nuclear Membrane

    The nuclear membrane is the main structural element of the nucleus that encloses all the organelles of the
    animal cell.
    In addition, this organelle acts as a separator between the cytoplasm and the
    nuclear region.
    The nuclear membrane is non-permeable or cannot be passed by all substances,
    whether solid or liquid, so that most of the molecules that make up the nucleus require the presence of a
    core pore.

    Well, that’s a brief explanation of the meaning, parts, functions, and structure of animal cells.
    Sinaumed’s can visit sinaumedia’s book collection at www.sinaumedia.com to get references about other
    animals.
    The following is a recommendation for sinaumedia books that Sinaumed’s can read to learn
    about the most dangerous animals in the world so they can fully understand them.
    Happy
    reading.

    Find other interesting things at www.sinaumedia.com . sinaumedia as
    #FriendsWithoutLimits will always present interesting articles and recommendations for the best books
    for Sinaumed’s.

    • Characteristics of Animals and Their Habitats to Get Closer to Nature
    • Examples of Invertebrates: Definition, General Characteristics, Classification, and Their Names
    • Oviparous Animals: Definition, Types, and Examples
    • Ovoviviparous Animals: Definition, Characteristics, and Examples
    • Definition, Characteristics, and Examples of Carnivores (Meat Eaters)
    • Definition of Reptiles: Characteristics and Examples
  • Know the Rules for Using the Correct Word

    Correct Use of the Word To – Most people when writing would often use the word to.
    However, not a few also feel confused about how to use the word ke which is good and right.
    The word ke is basically a type of preposition or also known as a preposition.

    Apart from the use of the word ke-, there are several other prepositions that often cause confusion, for
    example the words from, in, to or even.
    Many people get confused on the part of connecting or
    separating with the next word.

    So, for those of you who often write scientific papers or for the need to fulfill college assignments or
    other matters, this article provides various explanations about how to use the word ke according to
    Indonesian language rules.
    Let’s see more!

    A. Getting to Know the Third Word

    As previously stated, the word ke is included in one type of preposition or it can also be called a
    proposition.
    These prepositions or prepositions themselves must be in accordance with the rules
    of the Indonesian language that are currently in effect, namely the General Guidelines for Indonesian
    Spelling or can be abbreviated as PUEBI or EBI.

    Prepositions can basically be understood as a word that is in front of another word or the next word.
    The preposition itself is often written or paired before the use of verbs, nouns, and even other
    adverbs.
    Therefore, the actual use of prepositions must be adapted to the rules that apply.
    This is done so as not to change the meaning of the word.

    In addition, the addition of prepositions or prepositions before a sentence is used to clarify the meaning
    of a word.
    This of course will be very useful to clarify the meaning of a sentence.
    However, not all nouns, verbs, and other adverbs can or are suitable for prepositions.
    However, prepositions can function as affixes and as pointers.

    B. How to Use the Word Ke- Correctly

    After knowing the meaning of the use of the word ke, in this section we will discuss four ways to use the word ke
    in accordance with applicable Indonesian language rules.

    However, before that, so that you can more easily understand how to use the correct word.
    There are two important things that need to be considered first, including the following:

    1. What is the word that
    precedes (the word in front of the preposition – preposition)

    The first important thing to note is knowing the form of the word that is in front of the preposition or
    preposition to be added.
    If the word has the property to show a name, place or time.
    Then the added to word can be used separately. However, if the word before the
    preposition does not indicate a place or time, then the word added must be continued.

    2. What is the meaning of the marked

    The second thing that is no less important is knowing which preposition is used to mark which word.
    For example, the word ke is used to mark the position or whereabouts of something or someone.
    Then the word ke can be used in a sentence by being separated.

    C. The Function of Using the Word

    In this section, of course you have started to understand how to use the word ke correctly according to
    Indonesian language rules or Indonesian spelling.
    Basically, the use of the word to be
    separated or connected can be adapted to its function in a word or sentence.
    So, here are three
    functions that you need to pay attention to when using the word in a sentence, including:

    1. As a Prefix

    The function of using the first word is as a prefix or affix. This function is known according
    to the type of affixed preposition, which has a form that can be used as an affix to other words.
    Therefore, writing the preposition to as a prefix or affix can be used by connecting.

    In addition, there are several forms of words that do not only use affixes in the form of the prefix to-,
    but also add endings, such as the word -an.
    This finally forms the word getting the affix.
    There are many forms of words that can get these affixes and endings by writing in
    conjunction.

    There are many examples of words that have prefixes and endings -an, for example, togetherness, ability, beauty,
    beauty, and so on.

    The following are some examples of using the word in a sentence as a prefix, namely:

    • The beauty of Mount Semeru never fades with time.
    • Everyone has the ability to survive, so the test will be easy to pass.
    • Togetherness in the family is the most important.

    2. As a Preposition or Preposition

    The function of using the second word is as a preposition or preposition. If the preposition
    in a sentence has a preposition function, then automatically the use of the word to must be separated.
    The preposition itself is included in the basic word category so that it can be used separately
    from the word in front of it.

    As a word that has the function of a preposition or preposition, the word ke is often used before or before
    an adverb of place.
    Every word ke- becomes a preposition of a word that has a function as an
    adverb of place, so writing the word ke can be used separately.

    For example, like, forwards, backwards, to Jakarta, to Bandung, to Singapore, and so on. You
    only need to understand and remember one function as a preposition, then you can write the word well and
    correctly.
    This is because besides having a function as a placeholder description, the writing
    is continued.

    The following are some examples of using the word ke in a sentence separately, including:

    • Deciding to have a vacation to Bali, Andin chose to book plane tickets from now on.
    • Yesterday my brother went to the city by motorbike.
    • Next Tuesday, my younger brother and father are asked to come to school to pick up a report card.

    3. As a Number or Sequence Pointer

    The following function differs from the previous two functions, in this function the word ke can be used as
    a pointer to a number or sequence.
    You must have come across the word ke followed by a number
    or used as a numbering sequence.
    This provision itself is ultimately divided into two,
    namely:

    a. Numbers are letters, that is, each word can be accompanied by a number, but only in
    letters.
    When you find a form of writing a word with numbers, you can use it connected.
    For example, the word second, third, fourth, fifth, and so on. Basically, numbers or
    number sequences written in letters can be written in a connected way.

    b. It is a number, i.e. every word followed by an Arabic numeral in a sentence.
    Then the word ke can be written using a dash (-) before writing the Arabic numeral.
    For example, namely the word 7th, 3rd, 10th, and so on.

    The following are some examples of writing the word ke as a pointer to a number or sequence in a sentence,
    including:

    • Mr. Joko Widodo is the 7th President of Indonesia.
    • In the 14th century Islamic teachings began to enter Indonesia.

    However, there is one more thing that you need to pay attention to when using the word to. If
    a word is followed by a number with a letter that has the meaning of two things, three things, three places,
    and so on.
    So, the number that is located in front of the word no longer has a function as a
    sequence, but as a word that has a real number meaning.

    Examples of the use of the word to a word that has an actual number meaning, namely:

    • Brother went to two places at once today.
    • Dad visited three hospitals a week on his assignment.

    D. Types of Prepositions

    These types of prepositions are basically very diverse, ranging from very complex additions to complete the
    form of a word and sentence.
    Broadly speaking, the following are several types of prepositions
    that you need to pay attention to, including:

    1. Basic Words

    The first type of preposition or preposition is the base word. The basic word itself can be
    understood as a type of preposition which has a very basic form and can stand alone.
    Known root
    words do not need to be used as an affix that blends with other words.
    Some basic words,
    including: from, in, with, to, by, on, since, like, as well as, and so on.

    2. Affixed Words

    The second type of prepositions or prepositions are affixes. This affixed word can be
    interpreted as a word that has a function as an affix of other types of words.
    Affixed words
    can also be affixes to verbs that form sentences, both active and passive sentences.
    Prepositions that have a role as affixes can be combined with the word in front of them.

    The use of affixed prepositions is then always put together. This makes each word have a clear
    meaning so that it is easily understood by anyone.
    Several forms of prepositions that fall into
    the category of affixed prepositions include during, throughout, towards, regarding, together with, towards,
    aimed at, and so on.

    3. Compound Words

    The third type of prepositions are compound words or commonly known as compound prepositions.
    The compound word itself is a type of preposition which is used in combination with other
    prepositions.
    The first preposition will usually be separated by clauses and continued with the
    next preposition.

    Therefore, in one sentence you will find two prepositions at once. In addition, these two
    prepositions have the same meaning or reinforce each other.
    Some examples of prepositions that
    are included in compound words include, therefore, because of that, between…with, since…up to, to, and so
    on.

    The three types of prepositions above have very varied writing rules. Variations of this rule
    include writing that is combined or connected with the word before it.
    Meanwhile, writing that
    needs or must be separated by the word in front of it.

  • Know the Risks of Eating Food with Plastic Wrap

    There are still many people who don’t really care about food packaging. Whereas packaging plays an important role in determining whether the food consumed is safe or not, especially processed food. If food is packaged with plastic or materials that contain poison, it is not impossible that the toxin content can contaminate the food and then enter your body. This is because all types of plastic are made from petroleum with a mixture of various toxic chemicals. For example, Bisphenol A (BPA) which causes body disorders such as infertility or decreased fertility, Polystyrene (PS) which is carcinogenic and triggers cancer.

    In addition there are also other materials such as PVC (Poly Vinyl Chlorida) which is very harmful to the health of the body. Therefore, when plastic is exposed to high temperatures, the substances contained in the plastic can release various chemicals. BPA will also damage the function of hormones in the body, especially the hormone estrogen, impaired immune system, accelerated puberty, obesity, is a risk factor for diabetes, and hyperactive behavior.

    If consumed, the chemical content will then enter the body’s tissues. The factor that causes the easy transfer of these chemicals is due to the weak bonding of the plastic structure, which is the result of residual plastic monomers. The migration of remaining plastic monomers is greater if the packaged food contains high temperatures, such as meatball sauce, fried foods, high-fat foods, or foods that contain high levels of acid. In addition, the transfer of chemicals into food is also affected by the duration of food contact with plastic. So, when food with high temperatures is left in the plastic for too long, the contact with the remaining plastic monomers also increases.

    Phthalates, like BPA, can also interfere with hormone function, in this case, the hormone testosterone. In experiments conducted using test animals, certain amounts of phthalates are thought to inhibit the function of testosterone in the body, thereby affecting the male reproductive organs and other organs. High levels of phthalates in the body have even been linked to lower sperm production and quality in adult men. The effect of this component can also be seen in pregnant women. Phthalates increase the risk of minor reproductive organ disorders in boys. Apart from these two materials, you also need to be careful with other materials such as polyvinyl chloride (PVC). In certain amounts, PVC is believed to increase the risk of cancer, birth defects, digestive disorders to impaired liver function.

    Wrapping Hot Food Using Plastic Can Trigger Breast Cancer. Quoted from World of Buzz, according to Oriental Daily, the Ministry of Health and Welfare in Taiwan said in 2014, breast cancer is a disease that has the highest number of patients. There are more than 10,000 breast cancer patients in one year alone. Zheng, director of the breast cancer center at Memorial Shin Kong Wu Ho-Su Hospital, said Taiwanese generally suffer from breast cancer after menopause or before the age of 40. For those who have had breast cancer before the age of 40, one reason may be the habit of buying hot food to go in plastic bags or thin containers.

    The heat from the food in the plastic bag can cause the release of harmful chemicals which are absorbed by the food and consumed by them. One of the chemicals present in plastic and harmful to the body is Bisphenol A (BPA) with a weak synthetic estrogen which can interfere with the body’s hormones and make breast cancer cells develop and grow at certain levels of exposure. In the West, breast cancer usually occurs after menopause but in Taiwan, women aged under 35 years, about 6-9 percent are breast cancer patients. Based on the explanation described above, that’s why it’s very important to minimize the use of plastic in everyday life. Here’s a way that you can apply at You’ house:

    ALWAYS LOOK AT THE LABEL SIGNS ON THE PLASTIC

    Avoid using plastic containers labeled with numbers 3, 6 and 7. Number 3 indicates PVC material which stimulates the growth of cancer cells (carcinogens). Code or number 3 releases poison in food and drink. The risk will be higher if the packaging is washed, heated, or cooled. While the number 6 is plastic packaging made from PS, or commonly known as styrofoam. This packaging will release poison when heated. Third Plastic packaging numbered 7 (Other). Found in baby bottles, drinking water bottles and other packaging. Number 7 contains Bisphenol A. This substance has an effect on changes in nerve performance and behavior, as well as puberty that occurs earlier. Also understand the contents of the following other types of plastic, You:

    • Type 1: Polyethylene teraphthalate (PET): These plastic containers are usually marked with the symbol PET, which means they can only be used once. Although it does not contain BPA or phthalates, this type contains antimony which may be carcinogenic (cancer-causing) in humans. This type of plastic container is usually found in juice bottles or jam jars.
    • Type 2: High-density polyethylene (HDPE) These plastic containers, usually given the symbol HDPE, are safe and contain high-density polyethylene which makes for a relatively stiff plastic. This type of plastic container is usually found in milk bottles.
    • Type 3: Polyvinyl chloride (V) These plastic containers, usually marked with the symbol V, contain phthalates. Usually found in fruit juice bottles, cooking oil bottles and food packaging that looks clear, flexible and relatively stiff.
    • Type 4: Low density polyethylene (LDPE) These plastic containers are usually marked with the symbol LDPE and are commonly found on food or seasoning containers that are easy to squeeze and resistant to solvents.
    • Type 5: Polypropylene (PP) These plastic containers are usually given the symbol PP and are commonly found on yogurt, beverage bottles, and ketchup containers because polypropylene does not leach its chemicals into food or liquids.
    • Type 7: Polycarbonate (PC) This plastic container is usually marked with the symbol PC or Other and is found in gallon bottles of water. This plastic container contains BPA, avoid using this container repeatedly You.

    KNOW SAFE PLASTIC PACKAGING

    Factors that affect the amount of migration from packaging to food include the concentration of migrants; bond strength or mobility of chemicals in the packaging; packaging thickness; the nature of the food in contact with the packaging (dry, watery, fatty, sour, alcoholic); solubility of chemicals in food; contact time and temperature. Several types of plastic that are relatively safe to use as food packaging are PP, HDPE, LDPE, and PET. Packaging security can be recognized by the logo or writing on it, for example, the words ‘safe for food’ or for food use or food grade. In general, plastic packaging should not be used for food that is acidic, contains fat or oil, especially when it is hot. (Ir Ingrid S Surono, MSc, PhD).

    CHANGE PLASTIC AND OTHER MATERIALS

    When buying food from somewhere, it’s best to bring your own glass or metal container. Especially for soup or soup, use a basket. If using plastic containers, you should avoid those that contain hazardous materials such as BPA. Apart from reducing plastic waste, this is also useful for avoiding the dangers of using plastic in hot food. If not, make sure that the plastic packaging used by the restaurant is heat-resistant and safe for food use. Also pay attention to the expiration date of the food and do not consume it if the expiration date has passed the limit, as well as if there are irregularities in taste or aroma and appearance in food or drink even though the expiration date has not been passed. If you want to heat food in a microwave oven, use solid containers. If you want to choose flexible (flexible) plastic for food cover, choose one that says polyethylene on the label. Containers or packages for cold food or drinks, for example for ice cream, and the like, should not be used for hot food or drinks. Because these plastic containers are only suitable for cold (low temperature) food and drinks. Also, do not heat food, for example steaming vegetables, using a plastic container in You.

    HEAT FOOD PROPERLY

    Avoid covering food with plastic made of PVC or PS when heating in the microwave, use a type of food grade packaging specifically used for microwave ovens. Instead, you can use a paper towel. You are also advised not to store fatty foods in plastic containers. Transfer food onto a glass plate before reheating. Besides plastic, be careful about melamine as a type of resin—which is a type of hard plastic that is usually used to make bowls, plates, glasses and cutlery for children. Melamine is indeed a substance that is toxic to the human body, especially to the kidneys. Do you still remember the case of powdered milk in China which was mixed with melamine to increase the “protein” content in the milk? The case claimed the lives of 6 babies and 50 thousand other babies had to be hospitalized. If melamine containers are used to heat food with a microwave, it is feared that the melamine components can come out and contaminate the food that you will eat, You. Avoid heating these foods in the Microwave:

    • Potatoes: Can cause poisoning if heated in the microwave and left at room temperature, because it will grow the botulism bacteria that causes botulism.
    • Chicken: After cooking the chicken to perfection, it’s actually fine to reheat the chicken in the microwave. But it is not recommended to cook chicken in the microwave, because it will only cook on the outside, the inside is not guaranteed to be perfectly cooked. Chicken that is not perfectly cooked can harbor bacteria, such as salmonella bacteria.
    • Rice: According to the Food Standards Agency, reheating rice can cause food poisoning, due to the presence of a rogue bacteria called Bacillus cereus. Heat can kill these bacteria, but it can leave spores that are toxic to the body. What’s worse, these spores are heat resistant, aka they can’t be killed even if they’ve been heated in a microwave
    • Mushrooms: A type of vegetable that should not be heated, because it can cause stomach upset. Bacteria can also grow if left at room temperature. So mushrooms should be eaten immediately after serving You.
    • Greasy Foods: All oils can withstand various levels of heat. But if the heat level continues to increase, toxins and harmful substances called free radicals can form. According to Live Strong, these free radicals can trigger cancer. So avoid heating greasy food in the microwave, because the oil can get too hot and form free radicals.
    • Green Vegetables If you want to warm celery, kale, or spinach, it’s best to warm it on a normal stove, not the microwave. When green vegetables are heated in the microwave, natural nitrates will turn into nitrosamines, which are carcinogenic and very harmful to the body.

    AVOID PLASTIC WRAPPED FOOD CONSUMPTION

    Now you can find many food vendors using plastic as a wrapper, such as lontong which no longer uses banana leaves or coconut leaves. Even though the majority of circulating plastics are not safe for wrapping hot food, let alone used for cooking or processing food. Moreover, using plastic to cook food such as rice cake, where the boiling process uses high temperatures. The plastic used to wrap high-temperature or oily food can contaminate food with dioxins and toxic substances from the addictive ingredients that form plastic.

    Plastic lon also contains polymer chemicals. This polymer can enter the human body because it is soluble, so if it accumulates in the body it will cause cancer. Apart from cancer, the polymer content in lontong wrapped in plastic can potentially reduce reproductive fertility, and can even cause infertility. Also be careful with food wrapped in plastic, according to health experts, if the plastic is exposed to high temperatures, then it is feared that there will be compounds that decompose and eventually mix in the vegetables or side dishes that we buy. The problem is, often the plastic material used to wrap food is not of the food grade type, but ordinary plastic which may contain dangerous chemical compounds such as phthalate, bisphenol A (BPA), and adipate.

    In a study, it was stated that the chemicals in plastic could actually trigger damage to various internal organs such as the liver, kidneys, lungs, or even the body’s reproductive system. Meanwhile, the phthalate content is said to be able to make men experience infertility disorders. Anyone is vulnerable to the adverse effects of exposure to the chemicals in this plastic, it’s just that, for children and pregnant women, the impact will be much more pronounced. Seeing this fact, it would be better if we ask food vendors to wrap cooked vegetables or side dishes with food wrapping paper or we can bring our own food containers which are classified as food grade or safe to use.

    BRING YOUR OWN CONTAINER

    Basically there are only two types of plastic that are safe for use in cooking food, namely polypropylene (PP) which is resistant to high temperatures up to 150°C, and nylon or polyamide (PA) type plastic which is resistant to high temperatures and is good for packaging materials. cooked in packs. On average, plastic is not safe to use as food wrapper, nor can it be used haphazardly for food, especially those that are oily and have hot temperatures.

  • Know the Properties of Organic and Inorganic Chemical Compounds

    Compound is a chemical substance. Where compounds can be formed due to natural processes.
    But there are also those that are deliberately made for the benefit of humans. A
    compound is a single substance that can be broken down into several elements.
    In general,
    compounds have various kinds of elements chemically combined with each other.
    Thus, the symbol
    for a compound consists of several symbol elements.

    In addition, a compound is a substance consisting of two or more elements, where these elements are
    chemically combined to form a new substance whose properties are different from the constituent elements.
    These elements will lose their properties and appear with their new properties according to the
    properties of the compounds formed.

    A compound will be denoted by a chemical formula. Where the chemical formula in a compound
    will state the composition, number, and also the types of atoms in a compound.
    Examples of
    compounds are water (H2O), table salt (NaCl), carbon dioxide (CO2), potassium hydroxide (KOH), and barium
    hydroxide (Ba(OH)2).

    Definition of Compound

    A compound is a single substance that can be broken down into two or more elements. In
    addition, compounds also have several elements that are chemically combined with each other.
    So
    generally the symbol of a compound will be drawn from several symbols of elements.
    An analysis
    that finds the constituent elements of a compound is generally referred to as qualitative analysis.
    Meanwhile, if the analysis finds a comparison of each number of elements present in the compound,
    it is called quantitative analysis.

    Compound Features

    The following are some of the characteristics of chemical compounds, including:

    a. Formed from two or more elements arranged using ordinary chemical
    reactions.

    b. Has a fixed composition
    ratio.

    c. Loses the properties of the original substance when
    it becomes a compound.

    d. Can be broken down chemically, but
    not physically.

    Compound Properties

    Each compound has different properties from its constituent elements. Compounds can only be
    broken down into their constituent elements by a chemical reaction.
    Under the same conditions,
    compounds can have different forms from their constituent elements.

    Physical properties and also chemical compounds are two things that are different from the elements that
    form them.
    For example, the chemical reaction of two hydrogen atoms (2H) and one oxygen atom
    (O) can form a water molecule (H2O).
    In simple terms, compounds have five properties that we
    can distinguish between one compound and another.
    Among them are:

    a. Compounds can be formed through chemical reaction processes
    b.
    The constituent components in the compound have a certain ratio that has a fixed
    nature

    c. The compound itself cannot be separated from its
    constituent components again by using a chemical reaction

    d.
    Compounds can be categorized as single substance compounds

    e.
    Compounds have certain properties that differ from the elements that make them up

    Various Compounds

    Based on its origin, compounds are divided into two, namely organic compounds and inorganic compounds.
    Here is a full explanation:

    1. Organic Compounds

    An organic compound is defined as a compound composed of the element carbon as its main framework, which
    binds non-metallic elements such as oxygen, hydrogen and nitrogen.
    These compounds usually come
    from living things or are formed from living organisms.
    This one compound is very easy to find,
    such as urea or urea in urine or urine.
    Then the sugar or sucrose in the cane and also the
    alcohol is the result of fermentation of the sugar solution.

    Another definition of an organic compound is a compound containing carbon and hydrogen along with other
    elements such as nitrogen and oxygen.
    CO, CO2 and O2 are not organic compounds, because they do
    not contain hydrogen atoms.

    Hydrocarbons are organic compounds that contain only carbon and hydrogen. Where we encounter
    many hydrocarbon compounds in nature and also in living things.
    Starting from fuel to molecules
    that originate and are found in living things such as proteins, carbohydrates, fats, amino acids, and so
    on.

    a. Alkane Compounds

    Alkanes are the simplest hydrocarbons because they only contain single bonds between carbons and are also
    the least reactive.
    Even so, commercially alkanes are needed. This is because
    alkanes are compounds that are present in lubricants and gasoline.

    The main characteristic that exists in alkanes and distinguishes them from other carbon-hydrogen compounds
    is that alkanes are saturated.
    Because it has saturated properties, alkane compounds do not
    contain double bonds between carbon atoms.
    Compounds that have double bonds will usually be
    very reactive.

    For the energy that is in the carbon-carbon bonds and also in the carbon-hydrogen bonds in alkanes is quite
    large.
    When alkanes are burned, the compound will release a large amount of heat, especially in
    the form of fire.
    Where the simplest alkane is methane.

    Examples of Alkanes

    The following are two examples of alkane compounds that need to be understood:

    1. Methane

    Methane or CH4 is the simplest hydrocarbon. Where this one alkane compound is in the form of a
    gas at standard temperature and pressure conditions or STP.

    2. Ethane

    Two single bonded carbon atoms are usually supplemented by six hydrogens which is called ethane.
    Ethane is the second simplest hydrocarbon molecule. Methane itself can be thought of
    as two methane molecules bonded to each other, but with a halved hydrogen atom.

    b. Alkenes and Alkynes

    The nomenclature of alkenes and alkynes is actually almost the same as alkanes, but only changing the
    ending -ane to -ene.
    The following are examples of alkenes:

    C2H4 is called ethylene.
    C3H6 is called propene.

    While alkyne compounds use the ending -una. The following are examples of alkyne
    compounds:

    C2H2 is ethyne.
    C3H4 is a propane.

    As for the nomenclature of compounds containing more carbon atoms such as alkenes and alkynes, it is
    necessary to understand the position of the double bond.
    The position of the alkene and alkyne
    double bonds is in the carbon atom with the smallest serial number.

    Describe Alkanes

    When writing alkane structures, you can use different writing models according to your needs.
    The general formula for alkanes is CnH2n+2. Here are four different examples of
    writing pentane:

    2. Inorganic Compounds

    Inorganic compounds are compounds that are not composed of carbon atoms. Usually these
    compounds are found in nature.
    Some examples of this compound are table salt or sodium chloride
    with the symbol NaCI, aluminum hydroxide, which is usually found in ulcer medicines, has the symbol AI(OH)3.
    Likewise with the gases that are in the respiration process, namely oxygen gas with the symbol O2
    and also carbon dioxide gas with the symbol CO2.
    Acid is also one of the inorganic compounds
    that we are easily familiar with, for example nitric acid (HNO3), hydrochloric acid (HCl), and so on.

    Inorganic compounds are compounds composed primarily of metal atoms, which is what we see in many
    non-living substances.
    For example, rocks, soil, water, and so forth. Meanwhile,
    inorganic compounds can be classified as acid-base oxide compounds and also salt forms, the following is a
    chart that describes the compounds:

    Oxide compounds are compounds formed by oxygen atoms with other atoms. The presence of oxygen
    atoms as a characteristic of oxide compounds.
    If based on the elements that form oxide
    compounds, these compounds can be divided into two types, namely metal oxide compounds and non-metallic
    oxide compounds.
    The classification can be simplified in the following chart:

    Broadly speaking, the main reasons for separating the fields of study of organic compounds and inorganic
    compounds are:

    a. The number of organic compounds is more than the inorganic
    compounds.

    b. All organic compounds contain carbon atoms which are unique
    in terms of their ability to form chains with fellow carbon atoms and have distinctive
    properties.

    Differences between Organic Compounds and
    Inorganic Compounds

    a. Organic Compounds

    – The majority comes from living things and some comes from synthesis
    – Organic compounds are more
    flammable

    – The structure of organic compounds is more complicated
    – All
    organic compounds contain the element carbon

    – Can only dissolve in organic
    solvents

    – CH4, C2H5OH, C2H6 and so on

    b. Inorganic Compounds

    – Derived from mineral natural resources, not living things
    – Non-flammable
    – Inorganic
    compounds have a simple structure

    – Not all inorganic compounds have the element
    carbon

    – Can dissolve in water or organic solvents
    – NaF, NaCl, NaBr, NaI
    and so on

    isometry

    The molecular formula is a substance that only shows the number and types of atoms present.
    While the structural formula will explain how the atoms are arranged. For example, H2O
    is the molecular formula for water.
    Where each water molecule is composed of two hydrogen atoms
    and also one oxygen atom.

    The structural formula is H – O – H

    The origin of the term isomer is from the Latin “isos” which means the same and “methos” means part.
    Thus, structural isomers are compounds that have the same molecular formula but different
    structural formulas.

    For example: For the formula C2H6O

    Structural Formula:

    In the first formula, the two carbons are linked by a single covalent bond. While in the
    second formula, carbon is associated with oxygen.
    To understand which arrangement belongs to a
    liquid and which is a gas, that is by means of a simple chemical test.
    Where liquid C2H6O or
    ethyl alcohol/ethanol reacts with sodium metal to produce hydrogen gas and a new compound C2H5Ona.
    Meanwhile C2H6O gas or dimethyl ether will not react with sodium metal. Both are
    structural isomers which have the same structural formula but differ in structure.

    The Role of Organic Chemistry in Everyday
    Life

    Organic chemistry has many roles in everyday life through other branches of science. Almost
    the same as reactions in living bodies involving organic substances and also the main ingredients of these
    bodies, namely carbohydrates, proteins, lipids, nucleic acids, cell membranes, enzymes, and hormones are
    organic compounds.

    Organic compounds that we can see in everyday life are gasoline, wood furniture, clothing, paper for books,
    medicines, plastic packages, film for photographs, carpets, perfumes, and so on.
    Often, we also
    hear news such as epoxy, polyethylene, styrofoam, unsaturated fats, nicotine, cholesterol, and octane
    number.
    Those are examples of organic compounds that have quite an important role in everyday
    life.

    Where the compounds mentioned above have meaning in meeting human needs and also as one of the real
    evidence of the existing compound forms.
    The following are some forms of organic
    compounds:

    a. methanol

    Methanol can be converted to methanol which is used to make polymers or plastics as a solvent to make organic
    compounds.

    b. Ethanol

    Ethanol is an ordinary alcohol which belongs to the most important alcohols. At room
    temperature, ethanol is a clear liquid, evaporates easily and has a characteristic odor.

    Writing Structural Formulas

    In writing the structural formula, to learn more about organic chemistry can be done in several ways, for
    example, with the molecular formula C5H12

    a. Formula Chain (CCCCC)

    Straight chains usually use one valence for each carbon at the end to the next carbon in the middle of the
    chain.
    Therefore, every carbon that has a trivalent side serves to bond hydrogen.

    Structural Formula Abbreviation

    To make it easier for us to write the structural formula, it can be done in an abbreviated way without
    reducing the meaning of the formula itself.
    For example, the structural formulas for ethyl
    alcohol, where each formula clearly distinguishes ethyl alcohol from dimethyl ether, can be represented by
    one of the following structures:

  • Know the Physical Characteristics of the Planet Venus in the Solar System

    Physical Characteristics of the Planet Venus – Venus is the second closest planet to the Sun after Mercury. This planet orbits the Sun for 224.7 Earth days. Venus has no natural satellites and is named after the Roman goddess of love and beauty. After the Moon, it is the brightest natural object in the night sky, with an apparent magnitude of −4.6 which is bright enough to cast shadows.

    Venus is an inferior planet with an elongation angle of 47.8°. The maximum brightness of this planet can be seen immediately before sunrise or after sunset, so it is called the Morning Star or Evening Star.

    Venus is a terrestrial planet and is sometimes called Earth’s “sister planet” because of its similar size, gravity, and composition (Venus is the closest planet to Earth and the planet closest in size to Earth). However, in other respects this planet is very different from Earth.

    This planet has the densest atmosphere of the four terrestrial planets consisting of 96% carbon dioxide. Venus’s surface atmospheric pressure is 92 times greater than Earth’s. With an average surface temperature of 735 K (462 °C; 863 °F), Venus is the hottest planet in the Solar System. The planet has no carbon cycle that traps carbon in rocks and surface features, and no organic life that can sequester carbon in the form of biomass.

    Venus is shrouded in an opaque layer of highly reflective clouds of sulfuric acid, so its surface cannot be seen from space. Venus may have had oceans, but those oceans are evaporating due to increasing temperatures caused by the continuous greenhouse effect. Much of the water may have been photodissociated, and the solar wind may have allowed free hydrogen to escape into space as a result of the lack of an internal magnetic field on Venus. The surface of Venus itself is deserted, dry, and punctuated by rock that is periodically renewed by volcanic activity.

    Physical Characteristics of the Planet Venus

    Venus is one of the four terrestrial planets in the Solar System, which means that it is a rocky planet like Earth. Its size and mass are similar to Earth, so this planet is often referred to as Earth’s “sister” or “twin”.

    The diameter of Venus is recorded at 12,092 km (only 650 km smaller than Earth) and its mass is approximately 81.5% of Earth’s mass. However, conditions on the surface of Venus are very different from those on Earth, and this is due to Venus’ thick atmosphere which is composed of 96.5% carbon dioxide and 3.5% nitrogen.

    The following are the physical characteristics of the planet Venus that distinguish it from other planets.

    1. Topography

    There has been much speculation about the surface of Venus before it was discovered by space probes in the 20th century. The planet was mapped in detail by Project Magellan in 1990-1991. On the surface there is evidence of volcanic activity, and sulfur in the atmosphere indicates that a volcanic eruption has occurred.

    The first physical characteristics of Venus, namely that about 80% of the surface of Venus consists of volcanic land, with 70% is land with wrinkled ridges and 10% is land that is smooth and indented. The remaining 20% ​​are the two upland “continents”; one of the continents is located in the northern hemisphere of Venus, while the other is south of the equator.

    The northern continent was called Ishtar Terra, named after Ishtar, the Babylonian goddess of love, and about the size of Australia. The highest mountain on Venus (namely Maxwell Montes) is located on Ishtar Terra. It is approximately 11 km above the average surface elevation of Venus. Meanwhile, the southern continent is nicknamed Aphrodite Terra, after the goddess of love in Greek mythology, and this continent is larger with a size more or less comparable to South America. This continent is filled with a series of faults and faults.

    The absence of lava flows in the caldera is still a puzzle. The planet does not have many impact impact craters, indicating that the surface is relatively young, approximately 300–600 million years old. In addition to impact craters, mountains and valleys, Venus also has a unique surface feature. One of them is a volcanic appearance with a flat top, which is called “farra”. They are similar in shape to a pancake and vary in width from 20–50 km, while their height is usually in the 100–1,000 m range.

    There are also series of star-shaped radial fractures called “novae”, concentric radial fractures that resemble cobwebs called “arachnoids”, and rings of fractures which are sometimes surrounded by depressions called “coronae”. These features are formed volcanically.

    Most of the surface features on Venus are named after women in mythology and history, except for Maxwell Montes which is named after James Clerk Maxwell and the upland regions Alpha Regio, Beta Regio, and Ovda Regio which were named before the current system was adopted by the International Astronomical Union.

    The longitudes of surface features on Venus are expressed relative to the prime meridian. The prime meridian initially passes through the bright spot in the center of the Eve feature which is south of the Alpha Region. After Venera’s mission was completed, the prime meridian was determined to pass through the peak in the center of the Ariadne crater.

    2. Surface Geology

    A second feature of Venus is that most of its surface appears to have been formed through volcanic activity. There are more volcanoes on Venus than Earth, with 167 large volcanoes that can be up to 100 km wide. The only volcanic complex on Earth this size is the Big Island of Hawaii. That doesn’t mean that Venus is more volcanically active than Earth; it is caused by Venus’ older crust.

    In comparison, the surface of Venus is estimated to be 300–600 million years old, while on Earth, oceanic crust is continuously recycled through subduction processes at boundaries between tectonic plates, so the average age is around 100 million years. Some evidence points to ongoing volcanic activity on Venus. During the course of the Venera program launched by the Soviet Union, the Venera 11 and Venera 12 probes encountered lightning, and Venera 12 recorded the thunder as it landed.

    Venus Express launched by the European Space Agency also found lightning in the atmosphere. While lightning on Earth is caused by rain, there is no rain on the planet Venus (although sulfuric acid descends from the atmosphere, and then evaporates at an altitude of 25 km above the surface). It is possible that the lightning was produced by ash from a volcanic eruption.

    Other evidence comes from measurements of sulfur dioxide levels in the atmosphere, which decreased tenfold between 1978 and 1986. This suggests that the initial sulfur dioxide levels were boosted by large volcanic eruptions. Nearly a thousand impact craters are evenly distributed across the surface of Venus. On other cratered celestial bodies, such as the Earth and Moon, the craters appear to be degraded. On the Moon, degradation is caused by subsequent impacts, while on Earth the process is driven by erosion by wind and rain. On Venus, 85% of craters are still in an undegraded state.

    The number of craters and their undegraded state indicate that the planet underwent a global resurfacing event approximately 300–600 million years ago, which was followed by reduced volcanism. While the Earth’s crust is constantly moving, Venus’ crust is thought to be unable to support this process.

    Without the existence of plate tectonics to reduce the temperature of the mantle, Venus experienced a cyclical process that caused the temperature of the mantle to increase, eventually weakening the crust. Then, over about 100 million years, large-scale subduction occurred which recycled Venus’ crust.

    The diameter of the craters on Venus varies from 3 km to 280 km. There are no craters smaller than 3 km in diameter due to the effect the dense atmosphere has on foreign bodies entering Venus. Objects with a kinetic energy less than a certain number will be slowed down by the atmosphere so they don’t produce an impact crater. Objects smaller than 50 meters in diameter will break up and burn up in the atmosphere before reaching the surface.

    3. Deep Structure

    Without seismic data or data regarding the moment of inertia, little is known about Venus’ internal structure and geochemistry. The similarity in size and density of Venus to Earth suggests that they may have a similar internal structure consisting of a core, mantle and crust. Like Earth, Venus’ core is partially molten because the two planets are cooling at the same rate.

    Venus’ slightly smaller size means that the pressure inside Venus is much lower than on Earth. However, the main physical difference between the two planets is the absence of plate tectonics on Venus, which is probably due to Venus’ crust being too strong without the presence of water to reduce its viscosity.

    As a result, the amount of heat lost on Venus is lower, thereby inhibiting planetary cooling and possibly explaining why Venus has no internal magnetic field. Venus may instead be losing its internal heat in the process of periodic resurfacing.

    4. Atmosphere and Climate

    The next physical characteristics of Venus, which has a very dense atmosphere, which consists of 96.5% carbon dioxide and 3.5% nitrogen. The mass of its atmosphere is 93 times greater than that of Earth’s, while the pressure on the surface of the planet Venus is 92 times greater than on the surface of the Earth—a pressure roughly comparable to that of an ocean 1 kilometer deep on Earth.

    The density on the surface of Venus is recorded at 65 kg/m³ or 6.5% of the density of water. The CO2-rich atmosphere and thick sulfur dioxide clouds produce the most intense greenhouse effect in the Solar System, resulting in an average surface temperature of Venus of 462 °C (864 °F). As a result, the surface of Venus is hotter than that of Mercury, which has a minimum surface temperature of −220 °C (−364.0 °F) and a maximum surface temperature of 420 °C (788 °F), even though Venus is farther from the Sun and as a result only gains 25% of the irradiance that Mercury receives. The surface of Venus is often described as hellish. The temperature on Venus is also higher than the temperature for sterilization.

    Research suggests that billions of years ago, Venus’ atmosphere was much closer to Earth’s than it is today, and there may have been water on the surface. However, over a period of 600 million to several billion years, a sustained greenhouse effect is caused by the evaporation of water which creates greenhouse gases in the atmosphere. Although the surface of Venus cannot support life the way it does on Earth, the possibility of habitable niches in the lower and middle early layers cannot be discounted.

    Thermal inertia and heat transfer by winds in the lower atmosphere mean that the surface temperature of Venus does not vary much between the light and dark sides, even though the planet’s rotation is very slow. Surface winds are slow at a few kilometers per hour. However, due to the high atmospheric density on the surface of Venus, these winds are quite significant and are able to move dust and small rocks on the surface. In addition, the wind can also make it difficult for pedestrians even if heat, pressure, and lack of oxygen are not a problem.

    Above the CO2 layer are thick clouds consisting of sulfur dioxide and sulfuric acid. The precipitate reflects and scatters about 90% of the sun’s light, hindering observations of Venus’ surface. As a result of this permanent initial layer, even though Venus is much closer to the Sun than Earth, its surface is not as bright as Earth’s.

    Winds as high as 300 km/h (190 mph) over the clouds circle Venus every four to five earth days. The wind speed of Venus is 60 times faster than the rotation of Venus, while the speed of the fastest winds on Earth is only 10–20% of the speed of Earth’s rotation.

    The surface of Venus is isothermal; the planet has a constant temperature not only between day and night, but also between the equator and the poles. Venus’ axis tilt of less than 3° also minimizes seasonal temperature variations.

    The only appreciable temperature variation is due to altitude. In 1995, the Magellan probe managed to image a highly reflective substance on the top of the tallest mountain that looks a lot like snow on Earth. This substance was likely formed by the same processes as snow, albeit at a much higher temperature. This snow is too volatile on the surface, so it rises to colder elevations in a gaseous form, and then precipitates. The identity of this substance is still not known with certainty, but there are various speculations such as tellurium and lead sulfide (galena).

    Venus’ clouds are capable of producing lightning like clouds on Earth. The existence of lightning has been controversial since its first discovery by the Venera spacecraft. In 2006-2007, Venus Express discovered electromagnetic electron waves, which are signs of lightning. Their intermittent occurrence suggests patterns related to weather activity.

    In 2007, the Venus Express probe discovered an atmospheric vortex at Venus’ south pole. In addition, in 2011, this spacecraft also managed to find the ozone layer in the upper atmosphere of Venus. Furthermore, on January 29, 2013 scientists from the European Space Agency reported that the ionosphere on the planet Venus appears to have a tail like the ions that follow from a comet.

    5. Magnetic Field and Core

    The final physical characteristics of Venus, namely its magnetic field is weaker than that of Earth. In 1967, Venera 4 discovered that this magnetic field results from interactions between the ionosphere and the solar wind, and not from a dynamo in the core as it does on Earth. Venus’ magnetosphere provides protection from insignificant cosmic radiation. The radiation may produce cloud-to-cloud lightning.

    The absence of an internal magnetic field on Venus is surprising because Venus was once thought to have a dynamo as a result of its size being not much different from Earth. Dynamo requires three things, namely conductive liquid, rotation, and convection. Venus’ core is thought to be electrically conductive. In addition, even though it is considered too slow, according to simulations of Venus’ rotation it can still produce a dynamo.

    The absence of a dynamo on Venus is due to the absence of convection in the Venusian core. On Earth, convection takes place in the liquid outer layers of the core because the bottom is much hotter than the outside. On Venus, global resurfacing events may have halted plate tectonics and consequently reduced heat flux in the crust. As a result, the temperature of the mantle increases, thereby reducing the heat flux from the core. This is why there is no internal geodynamo capable of generating a magnetic field, instead the thermal energy from the core is used to reheat the crust.

    Another possibility is that there is no solid core on Venus, or that the Venusian core is not currently cooling, so that all of the liquid portion exists at roughly the same temperature. It’s also possible that Venus’ core has completely solidified. The shape of Venus’ core is highly dependent on the concentration of sulfur, which is currently unknown.

    Due to the weak magnetosphere, the solar wind interacts directly with Venus’ outer atmosphere, which produces hydrogen and oxygen ions by dissociating neutral molecules from ultraviolet radiation. Energy from the solar wind then causes some of the ions to experience release from Venus’ gravitational field.

    As a result of this erosion process, low mass hydrogen, helium and oxygen ions are released, while high mass molecules such as carbon dioxide are more able to survive. Atmospheric erosion may also have contributed to the loss of water during the first billion after formation. In addition, erosion increases the ratio of high-mass deuterium to low-mass hydrogen (D/H ratio) in the upper atmosphere.

    Those are the 5 characteristics of Venus that you can learn. It was concluded that the hottest planet in the solar system is Planet Venus.

  • Know the Parts of the Keyboard (Piano)

    Keyboard parts (piano) – Keyboards include a wide variety of modern musical instruments from around the world. In this modern era, the use of keyboards has been widely found in several groups of music games in several countries, especially in Indonesia. Keyboard games are of interest to everyone who loves music and musical instruments.

    At this time, the keyboard became part of the entertainment for the general public, for young to old, for small children, teenagers, to adults. The existence of the keyboard really gives a color that really captivates the listeners. This is because the playing style and techniques presented from the keyboard game vary.

    This keyboard instrument has various tempos, rhythms, and musical sounds that are presented differently. In general, the keyboard is programmed, so the keyboard player can play it by simply pressing the buttons that have been set to produce the rhythm, tempo, or whatever sound you want.

    According to Soewito (1996) the keyboard is part of various musical instruments and components of musical instruments which are designed with a row of scales or commonly called white or black keys and also parts of other musical instruments called pianos and organs.

    In playing a keyboard instrument, it is necessary to understand the parts of the keyboard first. It aims to make it easy for keyboard players to learn various techniques for playing keyboard musical instruments. Come on Sinaumed’s! Let’s understand first, what’s in the keyboard instrument before we learn how to play it.

    Keyboard Parts 

    1. Power button on or off

    The power on or off button is the button that will be used the first time. The power button is used to turn on the keyboard after the keyboard has been connected to the power supply. In addition, the power button is also used to turn off the keyboard when it is finished using. When the power on button is pressed and the keyboard is automatically turned on, it is certain that when pressing the keys a piano sound will appear.

    In general, the power on or off button on a piano uses a symbol shaped like the letter “I” and the letter “O”. Usually the power on or off button has been engraved with a perpendicular line like the letter “I” inside sticking out a bit or above a circle shape like the letter “O”.

    2. Volumes

    Volume on a keyboard instrument is something related to sound. The volume is defined as the level of strength or height of the sound that is issued. When the volume is increased, the sound produced or issued will be even louder. Conversely, when the volume is lowered, the sound produced will be smaller.

    The volume buttons on the keyboard are part of the function to increase and decrease the sound. Keyboard users can set the big and small or the overall high and low sound that will come out on the keyboard after the keyboard is turned on.

    The use of the volume buttons is not only on the keyboard (piano), but on smartphones, TVs, speakers, and others. Unlike the use of the volume button besides increasing and decreasing the sound on a smartphone, it also functions to take photos, screen captures, and others. However, the volume buttons on the keyboard (piano) can only function to increase and decrease the sound.

    The volume buttons on the keyboard are given symbols in the form of a plus (+) or a plus sign and the minus button (-) or a minus sign. The (+) shaped symbol on the keyboard is used to magnify or amplify the sound. While the symbol in the form (-) is used to reduce or lower the voice.

    3. Start or stop

    The start on a keyboard instrument is intended as a sign that the musical rhythm that will be issued on the keyboard has started. Meanwhile, stop means that the rhythm of the music coming out of the keyboard stops.

    The start or stop button on a keyboard instrument is used to start or stop a musical rhythm which is commonly called a rhythm. When a keyboard player wants to use a rhythm, he can press the start button, where the rhythm on the keyboard that will come out first is in the form of a drum sound. If the player wants to stop the rhythm, they can press the Stop Back button a second time, so the music rhythm will stop automatically.

    In general, the start and stop buttons are designed to unite into a single unit on a keyboard instrument. Therefore, players can easily start a musical rhythm or rhythm by pressing the start button once. In addition, you can also easily stop the rhythm of the music or rhythm by pressing the stop button once if previously the rhythm was on.

    4.Sync

    Sync itself is defined as synchronization. So that sync on a keyboard instrument means that there is synchronization in keyboard play, between the rhythm of the music and the melody of the song being played according to what the player wants.

    The sync button located on a keyboard instrument is usually used by keyboard players to adjust the music melody so that it can be played together with the rhythm of the music or rhythm. The sync button can set how to harmonize with the desired song melody.

    When the keyboard instrument player presses the sync button to activate it, then if the keys on the keyboard on the left are touched by something, then immediately the drums along with the musical accompaniment will run simultaneously.

    5. Rhythm 

    Rhythm itself is defined as a musical rhythm related to tempo. Rhythm is part of the melody of a song as one of the basic and important elements in producing music. Rhythm comes from a combination of sounds with beats in long and short levels and long and short beats of these sounds so as to create a pattern.

    The Rhythm button on a keyboard instrument is generally used by keyboard players in selecting various types of musical rhythms to be played. The choice of musical rhythms, including: waltz, bossanova, rhumba, and so on. The rhythm button on the keyboard instrument of some people or players also sometimes call it the style button.

    6. ACMP

    In playing keyboard instruments, basically ACMP is an accompaniment or so-called accompaniment. The ACMP button on a keyboard is generally used to hide sounds originating from various types of musical rhythms when the rhythm button or style button is pressed or turned on.

    If the rhythm button or style button and the ACMP button are pressed, they will automatically turn on so that the keys on the left side of the keyboard instrument will function as chord accompaniment.

    In addition, the ACMP key used in playing keyboard instruments is also intended to synchronize chords with the style chosen by the player. This makes the drum set along with other instruments will also sound according to the chords.

    7. Voices

    The voice button found in voice musical instruments is the same as the tone button or timbre button. Tone itself is an effect in sound settings that can allow setting the timbre or quality of sound according to what the keyboard instrument player wants or wants. Timbre is known as tone color or tone quality which is the quality of sound that will be felt by listeners or music connoisseurs that come from musical notes, sounds or tones.

    The function of the voice button is used to select various sounds of existing musical instruments according to the wishes of the players. Examples of the sound of musical instruments, namely: organ, guitar, trumpet, flute, violin, cello, saxophone, drums, and many more.

    In general, Voice or tone is divided into 3 (three) buttons, including: Main voice or right 1, layer voice or right 2, and left voice. Main voice or right 1 is a program that can activate the work function of one sound found on a keyboard instrument with various voice choices.

    Layer voice or right 2 is a program on a keyboard instrument that can activate the work function of two sounds, but it can also produce two different sounds by pressing just one key bar. Meanwhile, the left voice is a program that is found on a keyboard instrument that can activate the voice work function on the part of the keyboard instrument on the left with a certain range limit.

    8. Tempo

    The Tempo button in a keyboard instrument game is used to adjust the speed or slowness of the beats of the music rhythm or what is commonly called rhythm according to what the player wants. The Tempo button can function if the start button on the keyboard has been pressed or turned on.

    With regard to tempo, there is also a metronome on a keyboard instrument which has a function to assist keyboard players in stabilizing the beat of the song being played so that it is not too fast or not too slow.

    9. Sustain

    The sustain button on a keyboard instrument is used to make the sound that comes out of the keyboard not be interrupted immediately when the key is pressed. It is also intended that the sustain button is used to extend the sound of the instrument coming out of the keyboard instrument.

    10.Transpose

    Transpose is a feature found in playing keyboard instruments that is used to adjust the tone without moving the position of the fingers when playing it. This feature is able to change the basic tone of a keyboard instrument by raising or lowering the tone according to the player’s needs or desires.

    If the player wants to raise half the pitch from the initial note, then the player needs to press the (+) button once. Conversely, if the player wants to lower the pitch halfway from the initial note, then the player needs to press the (-) button once.

    11. Intro/ending button

    Intro has a function to start a song by using the existing intro arrangements for each rhythm in playing keyboard instruments. While the ending has a function to end a song by using the existing arrangements for each rhythm in playing a keyboard musical instrument.

    In playing keyboard instruments, the intro or ending button is used by pressing the button to start playing the keyboard and pressing the Back button a second time as the button to close the song.

    songs

    In a keyboard instrument there is a program called song. The program is especially useful for keyboard players, as it can be used to record or play back songs or instruments. The song demos are already available on keyboard instruments, so that players can use them directly.

    In general, the keyboard instrument already provides several songs that can be played directly by the player, but the keyboard player can also easily play the song he wants through a midi file or mp3. To turn it on, players only need to press the play song button as desired.

    12. Fill in

    The Fill in button on a keyboard musical instrument has a function to reproduce or add variations in beats and drum variations. Fill in is divided into 2, namely Fill in to variation and Fill in to original. Fill in to variation functions to produce variations on the beat before entering the chorus of the song being played. Meanwhile, Fill in to original has a function to produce variations on the beat after the song chorus has been played.

    13. Breaks

    Breaks in playing keyboard instruments function in variations of drum playing style or rhythm. This break has a bit of the same function as fill in. The variation in break is quite monotonous compared to fill in.

    14. Main Variations

    Main Variation is a selection of various musical variants for style. This Main Variation aims to make the style of playing keyboard instruments played by players look complete and full.

    15. One Touch Settings

    One Touch Setting in playing a keyboard instrument is a program that can maximize the work of the keyboard instrument in its ability to store data. The program is a program that can make it easy for keyboard instrument players to choose the style they want automatically that has been presented.

    If the keyboard instrument player has chosen the style he wants, then the program will store it in memory and can be played automatically by simply pressing the button.

    16. Music Finder

    In playing keyboard instruments, Music Finder is a program found on keyboard instruments that has a function to automatically provide settings for a song being played by the player. Music Finder is not only intended for sound management. The program is able to adjust the style, tempo, effects, and others.

    17. Registration Memory

    The existence of registration memory in playing keyboard musical instruments is related to everything related to data storage on the keyboard musical instrument. The intended data is, the selection of styles, voices, and others. In general, a keyboard instrument consists of 8 (eight) data storage areas, which are written in numerical order.

    Registration memory has another function, which is to make it easier for keyboard instrument players to change styles and voices without pressing the button. This is because the registration memory program has stored the settings needed by the player.

    Well, above are the various parts found on a keyboard musical instrument along with an explanation. You already know, right? It turns out that there are lots of parts on a keyboard instrument that many people don’t understand. If you already understand it, Sinaumed’s can easily learn how to play the keyboard until you are proficient. Sinaumed’s can get various ways of playing keyboards at sinaumedia.com .

    Thus the discussion about the parts of the keyboard, I hope all the discussion above can make you interested in learning the keyboard and piano. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

    Author: Nabila Frithania

    Reference source

    Biantoro, AS, Raharja, B., and Taryadi, R. Keyboard Acompaniment Learning at the Yogyakarta Etnictro Music Education Course Institute. 1-15.

    Meirawati, RN (2014). Learning Methods for Keyboard Musical Instruments for Blind Children in Yaketunis, Yogyakarta. Department of Music Arts Education Faculty of Languages ​​and Arts (Thesis): Yogyakarta State University.

    Yeni Indra. (2018). Children’s Song Accompaniment Technique: Using the Keyboard as a Rhythmic Instrument. Jakarta: Prenadamedia Group

    Haspalian, MA (2016). Forms and Functions of Keyboard Games in Ciledut Traditional Music in Sakra Village, East Lombok . Department of Music Arts Education Faculty of Languages ​​and Arts (Thesis): Yogyakarta State University.

    Septian, DA, Suhaya, and Septian, DD (2022). John Thompson’s Method of Piano Learning at Unity Music School Serang. Journal of Music Dance Theater & Visual (1): 1, 48-62.

    Sihombing, LB The Role of Keyboard Instruments in the Traditional Music of the Karo Society .

    Kidjing, J. (2016). Proficient in playing the keyboard . Depok: Genesis Learning

    Hakim, T. (2005). The fastest technique to learn to play the keyboard . South Jakarta: Publisher PT Kawan Pustaka.

    Fahri, MZ (2015). Secrets of being good at the keyboard self-taught without a teacher: especially for beginners . Indonesian Literature Sheet.

    Erzha, E. (2014). Instant Tricks to Play Keyboard Skilled Self-taught . Indonesian Sky Sheet.

    Sudibyo, P. Practical Techniques for Playing the Organ and Single Keyboard . Depok: Puspa Swara, Member of Ikapi.

    Hakim, T. Collection of Legendary Group Songs in Keyboard Games . Library Friend.

    Taher, D. (2012). Smooth Playing Keyboard from Zero to Advanced . Yogyakarta: Jogja Rises Publishers (Ikapi Member).

  • Know the Origins and Customs of the 5 Biggest Tribes on the Island of Sumatra

    Origins and Customs of the 5 Largest Tribes on the Island of Sumatra – Sumatra Island is the sixth largest island in the world with an area of ​​473,481 km². The population of the island is approximately 57,940,351 (2018 census). This island is also known by other names, namely Percha Island , Andalas , or Suwarnadwipa (Sanskrit, meaning “golden island”).

    When it was a trade route in the past, the island of Sumatra had many names, from Samoterra, Samotra, Sumotra, Zamatra and Zamatora. Dutch and English records, since Jan Huygen van Linschoten and Sir Francis Drake in the 16th century, have always been consistent in Sumatran writing. This form became the standard and was later adapted to the Indonesian tongue: Sumatra.

    Sumatra Island is located in the western part of the archipelago archipelago. It is bounded on the north by the Bay of Bengal, on the east by the Malacca Strait, on the south by the Sunda Strait, and on the west by the Indian Ocean.

    The eastern part of the island is often found in swamps which are drained by large rivers that flow there, including Asahan (North Sumatra), Siak River (Riau), Kampar, Inderagiri (West Sumatra and Riau), Batang Hari (West Sumatra and Jambi). ), Musi, Ogan, Lematang, Komering (South Sumatra), Way Sekampung, Way Tulangbawang, Way Seputih and Way Mesuji (Lampung). Meanwhile, several rivers that flow into the west coast of the island of Sumatra include Batang Tarusan (West Sumatra) and Ketahun (Bengkulu).

    As for the western part of the island, the Bukit Barisan mountains stretch from the northwest to the southeast with a length of + 1500 km. Along the hill range there are dozens of mountains, both inactive and active volcanoes, such as Geureudong (Aceh), Sinabung (North Sumatra), Marapi and Talang (West Sumatra), Mount Dempo (South Sumatra), Mount Kaba (Bengkulu ), and Kerinci (West Sumatra and Jambi).

    The island of Sumatra also has several lakes, including Lake Laut Tawar (Aceh), Lake Toba (North Sumatra), Lake Singkarak, Lake Maninjau, Lake Diatas, Lake Di Bawah, Lake Talang (West Sumatra), Lake Kerinci (Jambi), and Lake Ranau (Lampung and South Sumatra).

    In general, the island of Sumatra is inhabited by the Malay people, who are divided into several tribes or sub-tribes. Major tribes other than Malay are Batak, Minangkabau, Aceh, Lampung, Karo, Nias, Rejang, Komering, Gayo, and so on.

    The east coast of Sumatra and in several big cities such as Medan, Batam, Palembang, Pekanbaru and Bandar Lampung, are mostly inhabited by ethnic Chinese and Indians. The livelihoods of the people of Sumatra are mostly as farmers, fishermen and traders.

    The majority of the population of Sumatra is Muslim and a small proportion are adherents of Protestant Christianity, especially in the Tapanuli and Toba-Samosir regions, North Sumatra. Meanwhile, in urban areas, such as Medan, Pekanbaru, Batam, Pangkal Pinang, Palembang and Bandar Lampung, several Buddhists were found.

    In order to better understand the large tribes that inhabit the island of Sumatra, let’s look at the following descriptions and explanations together.

    1. Malays

    A Riau Malay couple playing a traditional gambus instrument, against the background of the tricolor Malay flag.

    The Malay people are an Austronesian ethnic group who inhabit the Malay Peninsula, the east coast of the island of Sumatra (Bangka Belitung, Jambi, Riau, Riau Islands, South Sumatra and North Sumatra), the southern part of Thailand, the south coast of Burma, the island of Singapore, the coast of Borneo, the Philippines. the southern part, and the smaller islands located around this location—collectively known as the “Malay World”. This location is now part of the modern countries of Malaysia, Indonesia, Singapore, Brunei Darussalam, Thailand and the Philippines.

    The name “Malay” comes from the Malay Kingdom that once existed in the Sungai Batang Hari area, Jambi. During its development, the Malay Kingdom eventually succumbed and became subordinate to the Sriwijaya Kingdom. The use of the term Malay also extended beyond Sumatra, following the territory of the Srivijaya empire which expanded to Java, Kalimantan and the Malay Peninsula.

    Almost all of the Archipelago is directly influenced by the Malays. The Malay language, which has developed and is used by many people in the archipelago, was finally chosen as the national language in Indonesia, Malaysia and Brunei Darussalam.

    In terms of race or national family, Malays in Indonesia are divided into two groups, namely Proto Malay or Proto Malayan and Deutero Malay or Duetro Malayan.

    Proto Malayan is an Old Malay family that came for the first time around +1500 BC. This family includes the Dayak, Toraja, Sasak, Nias, Batak, Anak Dalam, Enggano, and so on who live on the islands of Kalimantan, Sulawesi, Nias, Lombok, and Sumatra.

    The Deutro Malays are the Young Malays who came after the Proto Malays in the Metal Age around + 500 BC. The group that entered the second wave included ethnic Malays, Acehnese, Lampung and Minangkabau living on the islands of Sumatra, Java, Bali, Madura and Sulawesi.

    Another group that does not belong to the Malay family, but still belongs to the nation in Indonesia is the Melanesian people who live in the eastern part of Indonesia. Even so, the term Malay used in Indonesia refers more to the meaning of a more specific ethnic group, so that the existing Malay does not belong to the Javanese ethnic group.

    According to the 2010 census, the Malay ethnic group in Indonesia consists of Tamiang Malay, Palembang Malay, Bangka Malay, Deli Malay, Asahan Malay, Coastal Malay, Riau Malay, Archipelago Malay, Jambi Malay, Bengkulu Malay, Merangin Malay, Lematang Malay, Inner Malay, Malay Rokan, Siak Malay, Kampar Malay, Rawas Malay, Musi Malay, Kuantan Malay, Belitung Malay, Pontianak Malay, Sanggau Malay, Sintang Malay, Kotawaringin Malay, Lahat Malay, Sambas Malay, Lembak Malay, Kaur Malay, Besemah Malay, Ogan Malay, Langkat Malay, Lintang Malay, Serawai Malay, Kerinci Malay, Berau Malay, Loloan Malay and Bulungan Malay.

    The related/closest Malay ethnic groups in Sumatra consist of the Minangkabau, Lampung, Komering-Lampung, Aneuk Jamee, Acehnese, Mukomuko, Rejang, Mandailing, Pekal, Talang Mamak, Gayo, Singkil, the Alas, the Kluet, the Devayan/Simeulue, and the Haloban.

    The related/closest Malay ethnic groups in Kalimantan consist of the Banjar, Kutai, Tidung, Suluk, Maranao, Paser, Moro, and Meratus Dayak tribes. The related/closest Malay ethnic groups on the island of Sulawesi are the Bugis, while the related/closest ethnic groups on the island of Java are the Betawi and Loloan tribes.

    2. The Acehnese

    Acehnese women in their traditional clothes.

    The Acehnese or in the Acehnese language are called Ureuëng Acèh is the name of an indigenous tribe that inhabits the coastal areas and parts of the interior of Aceh Province. The majority of the Acehnese people are Muslim. The tribe has several other names, namely Lam Muri, Lambri, Akhir, Achin, Asji, A-tse and Atse.

    The language spoken by this tribe is Acehnese, which is part of the West Malayo-Polynesian language family and is closely related to the Cham language spoken in Vietnam and Cambodia. The Acehnese language belongs to the Aceh-Chamik language group, a branch of the Malayo-Polynesian language family.

    The languages ​​that are most closely related to the Acehnese language are Cham, Roglai, Jarai, Rhade, Chru, Utset and other languages ​​in the Chamic language family, which are spoken in Cambodia, Vietnam and Hainan.

    Acehnese legend says that the first inhabitants of Aceh came from the Mante and Lhan tribes. The Mante tribe is a local ethnic group that is part of the Alas and Karo tribes, while the Lhan tribe is thought to be related to the Semang tribe who migrated from the Malay Peninsula or the Back Indies (Champa and Burma).

    The Mante tribe initially inhabited the Aceh Besar area and then spread to other places. There are also ethnological assumptions about the relationship between the Mante tribe and the Phoenicians in Babylon or the Dravidians who were in the valley of the Indus and Ganges rivers. However, this has not been confirmed by experts.

    3. Minangkabau tribe

    Minangkabau Cultural Festival 2016.

    The Minang people are part of the Deutro Malays (Young Malays) who migrated from mainland China south to the island of Sumatra around 2,500–2,000 years ago. It is estimated that this community group entered from the east of the island of Sumatra, along the Kampar river to a plateau called the darek and became the homeland of the Minangkabau people.

    Some of these darek areas then formed a kind of confederation known as luhak , hereinafter also referred to as Luhak Nan Tigo , consisting of Luhak Limo Puluah , Luhak Agam , and Luhak Tanah Data . During the reign of the Dutch East Indies, the luhak area became a territorial government area called afdeling and was headed by a resident (the Minangkabau people called him Tuan Luhak).

    Along with the growth and development of the population, the Minangkabau people spread to other darek areas, as well as forming certain areas into rantau areas . This concept for the Minangkabau people is an area that is the entrance to Minangkabau nature.

    Rantau also functions as a place to find life, a trade area. Rantau in Minangkabau is known as Rantau Nan Duo which is divided into Rantau in Hilia (east coast area) and Rantau in Mudiak (west coast area).

    At first, the mention of the Minangkabau people was not distinguished from the Malays. However, since the 19th century, the mention of it began to be distinguished because it saw the matrilineal culture that persisted in Minangkabau society in contrast to the patrilineal culture adopted by the Malay community in general.

    Today’s Minangkabau people are adherents of Islam. If there are people who leave the Islamic religion, those directly concerned are also considered to have left the Minangkabau community. This is in accordance with the term “thrown away along custom”.

    According to Tambo, the Minangkabau customary system was first coined by two brothers, namely Datuk Ketumanggungan and Datuk Perpatih Nan Sebatang. Datuk Ketumanggungan inherited the aristocratic Koto Piliang customary system, while Datuk Perpatih inherited the egalitarian Bodi Caniago customary system. In its journey, the two customary systems known as kelarasan complement each other and form the Minangkabau community system.

    There are three pillars that build and maintain the integrity of the culture and customs of the Minangkabau people. They are religious scholars, intellectuals, and ninik mamak, known as the Tigo Sajarangan Furnace . All three complement each other and work hand in hand in the same high position. All community affairs are discussed by these three elements.

    4. Batak tribe

    Batak tribe.

    The Batak people are speakers of Austronesian languages, but it is not certain when the ancestors of the Batak people first settled in Tapanuli and East Sumatra. Language and archaeological evidence show that Austronesian-speaking people from Taiwan moved to the Philippines and Indonesia around 2,500 years ago, during the New Stone Age (Neolithic).

    However, because until now no Neolithic artifacts (Young Stone Age) have been found in the Batak region, it can be assumed that the Batak ancestors only migrated to North Sumatra during the metal age.

    Batak identity became popular in modern Indonesian history after the founding and joining of young people from Angkola, Mandailing, Karo, Toba, Simalungun, and Pakpak in an organization called Jong Batak in 1926, regardless of religion in one accord.

    Before the Batak tribe embraced Christianity and Islam, they had a belief system and religion towards Mulajadi na Bolon who had power over the sky and the radiance of his power was manifested in the Natolu Debata .

    The Toba Batak people recognize three concepts, including:

    • Tendi/tondi is a person’s soul or spirit which is a force. Tondi gave life to humans. Tondi is obtained since a person is in the womb. If tondi leaves someone’s body, that person will get sick or die. This is what caused the mangalap ceremony (to pick up) the tondi from the sombaon that captivated him;
    • Sahala is the soul or spirit of a person’s power. Everyone has tondi , but not everyone has sahala . Sahala is the same as sumanta , luck or supernatural powers possessed by kings or hula-hula (wife clan group);
    • Begu is the tondi of people who have died, whose behavior is the same as that of humans, but only appears at night.

    5. Mentawai tribe

    Making Mentawai Tattoos.

    The Mentawai tribe is the original inhabitants of the Mentawai Islands. Like the Nias and Enggano tribes, they are part of the Proto Malays who settled in the western Archipelago. Apart from Mentawai, their residential areas are on North Pagai Island and South Pagai Island.

    The distinctive tradition of this tribe is the use of tattoos all over the body (in the local language it is called titi ), which is related to the user’s role and social status. Not just any tattoo, every motif depicted on their bodies has a certain philosophy.

    Before getting to know Christianity, the Mentawai tribe followed their belief which was called Sabulungan. Currently, almost all Mentawai people have embraced religion, especially Christianity, both Protestant and Catholic, as well as some Islam, although some of them still adhere to the old Sabulungan beliefs.

    One of the local churches established for the Mentawai tribe is the Mentawai Christian Protestant Church (GKPM), which was founded on July 6, 1916 and has a congregation of around 35,000 people.

    So, that’s a brief explanation of the Origins and Customs of the 5 Largest Customary Tribes on the Island of Sumatra . The following are book recommendations from sinaumedia that Sinaumed’s can read to learn about tribes in Indonesia so they can fully understand them. Happy reading.

    Find other interesting things at www.sinaumedia.com. sinaumedia as #FriendsWithoutLimits will always present interesting articles and recommendations for the best books for Sinaumed’s.

  • Know the Origins and Customs of the 5 Biggest Tribes in Java

    Getting to Know the Origins and Customs of the 5 Biggest Tribes in Java – Indonesia is a wealthy country. Wealth refers not only to natural products, but also to various ethnic groups, languages, religions, beliefs and customs. For ethnic wealth, Indonesia has hundreds of tribal names, even thousands if broken down to sub-tribes.

    Each tribe has different customs and norms. Even so, this diversity does not make the integrity of the nation fragmented. Instead, diversity unites to achieve the goal of a just and prosperous society.

    Tribal data in Indonesia itself was first produced through the 1930 Population Census (SP) by the Dutch colonial government. However, this data collection was halted during the New Order era due to a political taboo which saw that discussion of ethnicity was an effort that could threaten the integrity of the nation. It was only 70 years later that the ethnic data began to be collected again during the Reformation period by BPS through SP2000, followed by SP2010.

    At least, there are around 1,340 ethnic groups spread throughout Indonesia. Records compiled by BPS in 2010 stated that the Javanese are the largest ethnic group with a proportion of 40.05% of the total population in Indonesia. The rest are ethnic groups living outside Java, such as the Bugis (3.68%), Batak (2.04%), Balinese (1.88%), Acehnese (1.4%), and other ethnic groups. other.

    The Javanese people on the other hand do not only live on the island of Java, but there are also those outside Java while still maintaining their cultural values. Therefore, Javanese culture is considered large and very diverse from various sides.

    The majority of Javanese people are Muslim, although nowadays many adhere to other religions. The main economy of the people comes from agriculture. Many rural people work as farmers and cultivate the fields. In addition, many of them also work as artisans, for example printing bricks, making batik, weaving, and becoming carpenters. Meanwhile, the Javanese who live in coastal areas generally work as fishermen and sell them at fish auctions.

    In general, the majority of the Javanese region is inhabited by Javanese tribes, which are divided into several tribes or sub-tribes. Apart from the Javanese, other major tribes that inhabit this area are the Samin, Tengger, Osing, and Bawean tribes.

    In order to better understand the origins and customs of these tribes, let’s look at the following descriptions and explanations together.

     

    1. The Javanese

    Javanese society adapts many aspects of Indian culture, such as the epic Ramayana.

    (Photo: Gunawan Kartapranata )

    The Javanese are the largest ethnic group in Indonesia, originating from Central Java, East Java, the Special Region of Yogyakarta, Indramayu Regency, Cirebon Regency/City (West Java), and Serang-Cilegon Regency/City (Banten). In 2010, at least 40.22% of Indonesia’s population was ethnic Javanese. In addition, there are also Javanese who live in the countries of New Caledonia and Suriname, because during the Dutch colonial period these tribes were brought there as workers.

    Currently, the Javanese in Suriname are one of the largest tribes there and are known as the Javanese of Suriname. There are also large numbers of ethnic Javanese in most provinces of Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, Saudi Arabia and the Netherlands.

    The majority of the Javanese are Muslim, with some minorities Christian, Kejawen, Hindu, Buddhist and Confucian. Even so, Javanese civilization has been influenced by interactions between Kejawen and Hindu-Buddhist cultures for more than a thousand years. This influence is still evident in Javanese history, culture, traditions and art forms.

    The Javanese people still adhere to the Kejawen belief. Kejawen itself is a teaching adhered to by Javanese philosophers and is the main teaching in building manners or rules for a better life. Kejawen is a belief, not a religion. Kejawen is more in the form of art, culture, traditions, attitudes, rituals, and the philosophy of the Javanese people which cannot be separated from the spirituality of the Javanese people.

    This Kejawen school then developed along with the religion adhered to by its followers, so that it became known as Kejawen Islam, Kejawen Hinduism, Kejawen Buddhism, and Kejawen Christianity. Currently, the Kejawen belief is considered ancient by some people. However, there are still many people who carry out Kejawen traditions, ceremonies and rituals such as nyadran, mitoni, tedhak siten, wetonan , and others.

    Traditionally, the majority of Javanese work as farmers. Agriculture is very common because the area of ​​Java has fertile volcanic soil. The main agricultural commodity is rice. In 1997, it was estimated that Java produced 55% of Indonesia’s total crop. Most of the farmers work in small-scale rice fields, with a percentage of 42% of them working and cultivating directly without employing other people.

     

    2. The Samins

    Samin tribe in Blora.

    The Samin tribe is a group of people who adhere to the teachings of Saminism. This teaching comes from a figure named Samin Surosentiko who was born in 1859 in Ploso Kedhiren Village, Klopodhuwur, Randublatung, Blora. This teaching arose as a reaction against the Dutch colonial government which was arbitrary towards indigenous people.

    Their resistance was carried out not only physically, but also in the form of opposition to all regulations and obligations that the people had to carry out towards the Dutch colonial government at that time, including refusing to pay taxes.

    Samin people have a personality that is innocent and honest. That is, they are open to anyone, including people they don’t know. They consider everyone as brothers, so they always prioritize the attitude of togetherness. Everything that is done by society is never engineered. This is because honesty is one of the manifestations of the character of the Samin people from the teachings they adhere to.

    The Samin people really hold ” salat ” which means solahing ilat (movement of the tongue). The tongue must be maintained so that it continues to speak honest words and never hurt others. The tongue is the source of all problems. Don’t hurt others if you don’t want to be hurt, don’t lie to others if you don’t want to be lied to, and don’t harm others if you don’t want to be harmed.

    The Samin people generally communicate using plain Javanese or ngoko alus Javanese, which sometimes mixes with krama. Because of that, their conversation sounded a bit rough like the character of the East Javanese.

    The Samin people embody life with social solidarity. Currently, the Samin people use a trick or strategy called kumumi , which is to remain silent and not fight the government, but still passively criticize it. In short, in life the Samin people never refuse any form of assistance from the government, but they also never ask anyone for help.

    The presence of new technology is acknowledged to have helped them gain experience, especially in agricultural development and other development programs. The Samin community is currently experiencing a transition towards a modern society, which is manifested in the form of associative and dissociative interactions.

    The impression of the Samin people is always identified with isolation and backwardness. However, the presence of modern electronic devices, such as radios, televisions, gadgets, washing machines, motorcycles, tractors, rice grinding machines, has now become part of their daily lives.

    Some Samin people have even received education up to master’s degree and work as civil servants, police officers, health workers, midwives, and so on. The interesting thing about the current attitude of the Samin people is their persistence in their teachings, even though they have “opened up” to the outside world. They are still guided by the Saminis teachings, which are still upholding honesty, tolerance, togetherness, and mutual cooperation.

    3. The Tenggerese

    Melasti Ceremony performed by the Tengger tribe in Bromo.

    The Tengger tribe or often also called wong Brama is a tribe that inhabits the highlands around the Bromo-Tengger-Semeru Mountains area, East Java Province. The inhabitants of this tribe occupy parts of Pasuruan Regency, Lumajang Regency, Probolinggo Regency and Malang Regency.

    The environmental conditions of the Tenggerese who live at the foot of the mountain influence the people’s belief in the meaning of a mountain. For the Tengger tribe, Mount Bromo (local people call it Mount Brahma) is believed to be a sacred mountain. They believe that their ancestors are inside Mount Bromo, so many of the ceremonies they perform are part of ancestor worship which is performed at the foot of Mount Bromo.

    There are many meanings contained in the word “tengger”. Etymologically, tengger means standing straight and still without moving (Javanese: calm ). When associated with customs and beliefs, the meaning of “tengger” is tengering nobility (a sign that its citizens have nobility).

    According to legend, the origin of the Tengger tribe is closely related to the story of Rara Ateng and Jaka Seger. The name Tengger itself is taken from the names of the two, namely -teng from the ending Rara Anteng and -ger from the ending name Jaka Seger. The Tengger people believe that they are descended from both.

    The legend tells that this husband and wife are eight years old and have not yet been blessed with children. They meditated for six years and changed direction every year. Sang Hyang Widi Wasa then responded to their meditation.

    From the top of Mount Bromo, bursts of light emerged which penetrated the souls of Rara Ateng and Jaka Seger. There are pawisik (whispers) that say if they will be blessed with children, but the last child must be sacrificed in the crater of Mount Bromo.

     

    4. The Osing Tribe

    Three generations of Osing tribal women in Banyuwangi in the 1910s.

    (Photo: Tropenmuseum )

    The Osing tribe is a native of Banyuwangi who are also known as Laros (acronym for Lare Osing) or Wong Blambangan. They use the Osing language, which is still a sub-dialect of eastern Javanese and is related to the Javanese Arekan and Tengger languages.

    This tribe occupies several districts in the central and eastern parts of Banyuwangi Regency. The majority are in Songgon District, Rogojampi District, Blimbingsari District, Singojuruh District, Kabat District, Licin District, Giri District, Glagah District, and some are in Banyuwangi District, Kalipuro District and Sempu District which mingle with the Madurese and Balinese ethnic communities.

    The main arts of the tribe are Gandrung Banyuwangi, Patrol, Seblang, Angklung, Barong Dance, Kuntulan, Kendang Kempul, Janger, Jaranan, Jaran Kincak, Angklung Caruk, and Jedor.

     

    5. The Bawean Tribe

    A group of Bawean people in Singapore in 1901.

    (Photo: National Archives of Singapore )

    The Bawean tribe is also known as Boyan or Bhebien. This tribe was formed due to the mixing of Madurese, Malay, Javanese, Banjar, Bugis and Makassarese for hundreds of years on the island of Bawean. The Malay people of Malacca and Malaysia know this tribe better as Boyan than Bawean. In their view, boyan means “driver” and “gardener” ( kepbhun in the Bawean language), according to the livelihoods of some people from Bawean.

    The Bawean people are a small group of Javanese people who come from Bawean Island. This island is located in the Java Sea, which is between Kalimantan Island to the north and Java Island to the south. The island is located about 80 miles north of Surabaya and is part of the Gresik district. The island consists of two districts, namely Sangkapura District and Tambak District.

    According to joint research conducted by Muhammad Ihwanus Sholik and other researchers (2016) in a journal entitled Merantau As Culture (Exploration of the Social System of the Bawean Island Community) , the Bawean people migrate to meet economic needs. Residents of this tribe are said to often travel to various areas in search of work. They often travel to various regions in Indonesia and abroad, such as Singapore and Malaysia.

    The desire to wander in this tribe has been instilled since childhood. This habit seems to have become a culture that is inseparable from the life of the Bawean tribe. Tarmizi (2017) in the Maulud Tradition of the Bawean Tribe Community in Sungai Datuk Village, Kijang Kota Village, East Bintan District, Bintan Regency also adds that the culture of migrating has been inherent in a man from the Bawean tribe since the 19th century.

    The arrival of this tribe to Melaka is very difficult to ascertain because there is no strong historical evidence and documentation. The various opinions put forward cannot show timeliness. The first opinion says that someone named Tok Ayar came to Malacca in 1819. The second opinion says that the Bawean people came in 1824, around the time the British colonized Malacca.

    Based on the records of the Singapore Colony Government in 1849, there were at least 763 Bawean people in Malacca and the number continued to grow, while the Malaysian Bawean Association recorded 3,161 Bawean people spread across Kuala Lumpur, Johor Bahru, Melaka, Seremban and Ipoh in 1891.

    The third opinion says that the Bawean people were already in Melaka before 1900 and at that time there were already many Bawean people in Melaka. The Bawean people generally live in cities or areas close to cities, such as in Kampung Mata Kuching, Klebang Besar, Limbongan, Tengkera, and the area around the Melaka General Hospital. It is rare to find Baweans living in areas far from the city and their number in Malacca is estimated to not exceed a thousand.

    Apart from Melaka, the Bawean people are also scattered in the Klang Valley, such as in the Ampang, Gombak, Balakong and Shah Alam areas. They bought land and built houses in groups. At least, there are two big families of the Bawean people in Gelugor, Pulau Pinang. They use the Malay dialect of Pulau Pinang to speak with people who are not from Bawean.

    So, that’s a brief explanation of the Origins and Customs of the 5 Biggest Tribes in Java . The following are book recommendations from sinaumedia that Sinaumed’s can read to learn about tribes in Indonesia so they can fully understand them. Happy reading.

    Find other interesting things at www.sinaumedia.com . sinaumedia as #FriendsWithoutLimits will always present interesting articles and recommendations for the best books for Sinaumed’s.

    Author: Fandy Aprianto Rohman

    • 4 Complete Theories of the Origins of the Indonesian Nation’s Ancestors
    • List of Tribes in Indonesia and Their Social Institutions
    • Papuan Traditional Clothing: Types, Uniqueness, and Philosophy
    • Unique and Rarely Known Traditional Houses in Indonesia
    • Maluku Traditional Houses: Names, History, Types, Uniqueness, and Pictures
    • Papuan Traditional Houses: Types, Functions, Uniqueness, and Philosophy
  • Know the Meaning of Seeking Knowledge, Obligations, and Their Priorities

    The Meaning of Demanding Knowledge, Obligations, and Their Virtue – Knowledge is a key to all goodness and knowledge. Knowledge becomes a means to be able to carry out what Allah commands us to do. Faith will not be perfect and charity will not be perfect except with the primacy of a science. With knowledge Allah is worshiped, with it Allah’s rights are exercised, and with knowledge His religion is also spread.

    This is what makes the need for knowledge greater than the need for food and drink, because the survival of religion and the world depends on knowledge. Humans will need more knowledge than food and drink. Because food and drink are only needed two to three times a day, while knowledge is needed every time.

    Some of us might think that in law seeking religious knowledge is only a sunnah, which means that those who do it will receive a reward and there will be no sin for anyone who leaves it.

    Even though there are many conditions where in law seeking religious knowledge is obligatory for every Muslim (fardhu ‘ain) so that those who leave it are sinful.

    Definition of Demanding Knowledge

    Seeking knowledge has the meaning of an endeavor or an effort in learning a science, both worldly knowledge and knowledge of the hereafter with the aim that this knowledge can be beneficial for oneself and also for others.

    World knowledge serves to make it easier to live in the world, while knowledge of the afterlife itself is sought so that humans can have demands and not get lost in an evil. Because in humans the ultimate goal is the afterlife, and to be able to get the hereafter, of course, you need to study religion.

    From Abu Dzar radhiallahu anhu, Rasulullah shallallahu alaihi wa sallam said,

    “O Abu Dharr, in fact, when you leave in the morning to be able to learn one verse from the Book of Allah, it is better for you than you to pray one hundred cycles of prayer. And in fact, in going out in the morning to learn one chapter of a science, whether practicing it or not, it will be better for you than praying a thousand cycles of prayer.”

    Obligation to Seek Knowledge 

    There are not a few verses in the Qur’an and the hadith of the Prophet sallallaahu ‘alaihi wassalam which emphasize the obligation to study. Even in the position of a person who is studying knowledge is equated with a person who is engaged in jihad.

    Quoting in the Class X Islamic Religious Education (PAI) book, take a look at the first revelation that Allah Subhanahu wata’ala sent down to the Prophet Muhammad Salallahu ‘alaihi wassalam which means:

    “Read in (mentioning) the name of your Lord who has created. He is also the one who created humans from a clot of blood. Read, in the name of your Lord, the Most Honorable. Who teaches (man) with a pen. He taught man what he did not know” (Surah al-‘Alaq/96:1-5).

    In that verse, there are a number of words that reinforce the commandments in learning and seeking knowledge, namely ‘Read’, ‘Those who teach with a pen’, and ‘Teach what is not known’. Seeking knowledge will not be limited to men only, because women also have the same rights in studying.

    All genders have rights and obligations because they are both caliphs and representatives of Allah on earth, as well as being obedient servants.

    As a caliph, of course humans will need knowledge to be able to uphold the Shari’a of Allah Subhanahu wata’ala. Likewise, as a servant, you need adequate knowledge so that you can become a good and obedient servant (‘abid).

    It is impossible to become a caliph without sufficient knowledge to be able to manage and engineer life on this earth, so that one can carry out God’s laws.

    For example, to pray alone, one needs knowledge of finding the Qibla, then finding the right time when to perform the five daily prayers, as well as knowledge in building the right mosque, as well as building a good place for ablution, and so on.

    There is no limit to the place and time in the process of seeking knowledge, there is even an Arabic saying that says ‘Seek knowledge all the way to China’.

    Islam, of course, also teaches ‘Seeking knowledge begins from birth to the grave’, so learn from childhood until the end of your age. Do not feel ashamed in learning even though you are old.

    Law in Demanding Knowledge 

    What kind of knowledge should and must be learned by Muslims? Certainly not a science that is not useful for the life of the world and the hereafter. There is knowledge that is not obligatory to learn, even if it is illegal and sinful to learn it.

    For a science that is useful, then learning it will provide a reward consequence. The following are some of the laws demanding compulsory knowledge as reported on the kemdikbud.go.id page:

    Fardu kifayah

    This fardhu kifayah law applies to knowledge that is necessary among Muslims, so that not only non-Islamic people can master this knowledge. For example, such as medical science, falaq science, industry, linguistics, communication science, nuclear science, computer science, and others.

    Fardu ‘Ain

    This law will apply if the knowledge in question is forbidden to be abandoned by Muslims in all situations and conditions. For example, Islamic religious knowledge, knowledge of knowing Allah Subhanahu wata’ala with all His attributes, as well as knowledge of procedures for worship, as well as those related to obligations as a Muslim.

    Adab studying in Islam

    It means:

    “Learn the science of adab before learning a science”

    In the message, it can be seen that it is very important when studying a culture first before someone can study knowledge. The following are the manners that demand knowledge that we need to know:

    1. Lillahi ta’ala’s intention.

    When we want to seek knowledge, our main intention must be because of Allah. As in the word of Allah in surah Al Bayyinah verse 5:

    It means:

    “Even though they are not ordered except to worship Allah by purifying their obedience to Him while (carrying out) the straight religion, and so that they establish prayers as well as pay zakat; And that is the true religion.”

    1. Always pray when studying.

    Like the Prophet Muhammad who often prayed in seeking knowledge, as follows:

    It means:

    “O Allah, benefit from what You teach me, teach me things that are beneficial to me, and increase my knowledge.”

    1. Be serious about studying.

    When in studying we should be serious and always enthusiastic to be able to get useful knowledge. Demand knowledge as if you were never satisfied with all the knowledge you have, you should always wish to continue to increase your knowledge.

    Rasulullah shallallahu ‘alaihi wa sallam said, “There are two people who are greedy who are never satisfied: namely for people who are greedy for knowledge and are never satisfied with it and people who are greedy with the world are also never full with it.” (Narrated by Al-Bayhaqi)

    1. Stay away from immorality.

    It means:

    From Abu Hurairah, from the Prophet sallallaahu ‘alaihi wa sallam said, “A servant who makes a mistake, a black spot will be placed in his heart. If he leaves it and asks for forgiveness as well as repents, his heart will be cleansed. If he returns (to commit immorality), then the black dot will be added until it covers his heart. This is what is termed the name ‘ar raan’ which Allah mentions in His word (which means), ‘Absolutely not, actually what they always try to cover their hearts’.”

    So that we can get knowledge that is useful and full of blessings, so that we must stay away from immorality, because it is immorality that will make it difficult for our brains to be able to concentrate so that the knowledge we capture will be difficult to understand.

    1. Do not be arrogant when studying.

    If you want to get a useful knowledge, we should be humble. Do not feel arrogant when we are satisfied with all the knowledge we already have, as Imam Mujahid said below:

    It means:

    “Two people who do not learn science, namely shy people and arrogant people” (Narrated by Bukhari muallaq)

    1. Pay attention to the teacher when studying.

    It means:

    “And when the Quran is recited, then listen carefully, and pay attention quietly so that you will receive mercy.”

    Listening to the teachings of the teacher or someone who is teaching us knowledge becomes an adab in studying knowledge. Don’t talk or do other things that are completely unrelated to the flow of lessons delivered when studying, meaning we need to focus on listening and listening.

    Priority of Seeking Knowledge

    In the Qur’an itself, Allah SWT says “So know for Allah’s knowledge! That there is no AIlah (god who has the right to be worshiped properly) except Allah and ask forgiveness for all your sins …” (QS Muhammad: 19).

    Therefore, there are many advantages of seeking knowledge for everyone who is serious about doing it. Because in having very big and noble virtues, among them the virtue of seeking knowledge is

    1. Knowledge is the legacy of the Prophets

    Rasulullah SAW said: “And in fact the Prophets never bequeathed gold nor silver money, but for those who have passed down knowledge (ilm syar’i) whoever has taken over the inheritance then in fact he has taken part of it. a lot.” (Reported by Ahmad).

    This shows that the virtue of studying is higher than money and gold which are material in nature. Because, when someone has knowledge and teaches it, then in that case it will be a charity that continues to flow even when that person has passed away.

    2. Seeking knowledge is a way to heaven

    Heaven is a dream for every Muslim. In fact, it has also become a promise from Allah SWT for the many good deeds that many Muslims do. So, when Allah SWT makes this knowledge the main way to the path of heaven, then this shows the great priority in seeking knowledge.

    This has also got a syar’i basis, because based on a hadith when Rasulullah SAW said: “… Whoever follows a path in order to study knowledge, Allah will also make it easy for him to go to heaven…” (HR Ahmad).

    3. Allah SWT Will Elevate Degrees

    Related to the virtue of studying this one, in the Koran itself Allah SWT will say: “Allah raises the believers among you and those who are given knowledge by several degrees.” (Al-Mujjadi: 11).

    Regarding the interpretation or meaning in this verse, Imam Syaukani said: “And the meaning of this verse is that Allah will elevate those who believe from those who do not believe, and raise several degrees for those who have knowledge (and believe) from those who are people who just by faith. So whoever combines faith and knowledge, Allah will raise him several degrees over his faith, then Allah raises his rank over all his knowledge.

    4. Allah SWT wants to give good

    It is a virtue of seeking further knowledge, regarding this matter in a hadith Rasulullah SAW said: “Whoever Allah wants for him goodness, Allah will make him understand his religion.” (HR Bukhari and Muslim).

    Shaykh Abdul ‘Aziz bin Baz interpreted: “Understand (implied meaning) from this hadith that a person who does not understand his religion means that person is one of those people whose goodness is not desired by Allah and we ask Allah for protection from something like that.”

    5. Benefits that will continue to flow even after death

    Rasulullah SAW said: “When Adam’s children and grandchildren die, his deeds will be cut off except by three channels: sadaqah jariyah, useful knowledge and pious children who will always pray for him.” (HR Bukhari and Muslim).

    Who doesn’t want to continue to be able to get rewards even though he has died. This will be obtained by people who have been serious when studying. Because, this knowledge is not only beneficial for himself, but also has an effect on others.

    The priority in this knowledge should be because every Muslim is always enthusiastic and earnest in the journey of seeking knowledge.

    Shaykh Az Zarnuji also said that among the important things in studying knowledge that need to be considered is fil jiddi or sincerity. If something is done with sincerity, then Allah subhanahu wa ta’ala will give success in it. In addition to sincerity (al jiddu), which also needs to be accompanied by an attitude of sincerity which is then continuous (al muwazobah) and commitment (al muzallimah) to study. These three attitudes must continue to exist within a student and go hand in hand, you cannot just live one of them.

    It is obligatory for every student, who is serious, continuous, and committed, not stopping if his goals in studying knowledge can be achieved. As in the word of Allah QS. Maryam: 12 which means, “O Yahya, take the book firmly”, and in QS Al Ankabut: 69 which means, “And to those who struggle, to be able to seek our pleasure, surely We will show them the ways towards us”.

    Az Zarnuji said, whoever is looking for something and does it with seriousness, they will definitely get it. And whoever knocks on the door continuously, can definitely enter. He also said that according to his sincerity, someone will definitely be able to get what he hopes for.

    In the meaning of this seriousness, Az Zanurji explained that in the difficulties faced, a person will be able to finish in earnest, especially when the difficulties that have been faced during the learning process. Allah will be able to give help to someone if Allah wills. Difficulties can be resolved with sincerity to be a gift from Allah subhanahu wa ta’ala and in His power.

    Seriousness in learning and deepening knowledge is not only from a student, but in this earnestness also requires the sincerity of three (3) people, namely students (students), teachers, and parents. If students, teachers, and parents are serious, God willing, this will be successful, difficulties in studying, learning will be completed.

    Humans are commanded by God to learn and seek knowledge. It’s just that the quality of the human mind is with different capacities. Seriousness is the key. With such sincerity, something that is difficult will be made easy by Allah subhanahu wa ta’ala.

    Related Book & Article Recommendations:

  • Know the Loss & Impact of the Internet and Steps to Overcome It

    Impact of the Internet – The presence of the internet not only has many positive impacts, but also negative impacts, even though its use aims to make it easier for humans in all aspects of life.

    The internet is also the widest network in information technology systems which then allows devices around the world to be connected to each other.

    Because of the vastness of the internet network, this information technology also always has a positive impact as well as a negative impact on its users. The internet network can also be accessed by the public which then sends data using standard Internet Protocol (IP).

    This information itself is spread on the internet and can be accessed via the World Wide Web (www) in the form of text, video, music, photos, or whatever. In its operational system, the web is also served by browsers such as Chrome, Opera, Safari, Firefox, and so on.

    Quoting from The Guardian, Google also handles more than 40,000 searches per second and has 60 percent of the global browser market through Chrome. There are nearly two billion websites which then exist, most of which are not visited.

    Information that can be accessed via the internet is very large and wide. How to measure the amount of information on the internet itself is about five exabytes a day. This amount is also equivalent to 40,000 films lasting two hours per second.

    According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) website, the internet itself is defined as an electronic communication network which then connects computer networks and computer facilities. The connection between these two networks is organized around the world by telephone or satellite.

    Meanwhile, in the Class IX Kemdikbud Information and Communication Technology book it is stated that the internet is a network of millions of computers around the world, connected via the TCP/IP protocol.

    Initially, the internet as a computer network was formed by the United States Department of Defense in 1969 through the ARPA (Advanced Research Project Agency) project. Then, ARPA itself decided to conduct research on how to connect a number of computers so that they formed an organic network.

    According to the Class IX Information and Communication Technology book which was later published by the Ministry of National Education’s Bookkeeping Center in 2010 and written by Mashadi and Arif Dwi Armawan, this research program became known as ARPANet.

    They also linked several UNIX-based computers over long distances over telephone lines so that the computers could communicate with each other.

    UNIX is a computer operating system that started with the Multics project in 1965. Then, this project itself designed how the network would look like, reliability, and how much data or information would be transferred from one computer to another.

    The first network was then built by connecting four places, namely the University of California Santa Barbara (UCSB), University of Utah, University of California Los Angeles (UCLA), and Stanford Research Institute (SRI). Until 1972 the internet then has connected more than 20 computers. ARPANet itself is an internetworking backbone for educational institutions, research, industry, and contractors, especially those related to military networks.

    Negative Impact of the Internet

    1. Lack of face-to-face communication

    It sounds very ironic when the lack of face-to-face communication is cited as one of the negative effects of the Internet because the Internet is supposed to bring people closer too.

    But the reality is that somehow many people find it easier to communicate via the Internet than face-to-face.

    The ease of communication offered by the internet will also make you prefer discussions through chat applications and messages available on the internet. This will also affect your personal relationships with friends and family.

    Because somehow, the habit of liking and chatting online will separate you from real world life.

    2. Lack of creativity

    One of the important features of the Internet is that it is an unlimited source of information. This feature will also benefit users with quick access to the information they need later easily.

    However, this will also make you less creative because whether you realize it or not, the ease of getting all the information you need from the internet itself will increase plagiarism, which will lead to a lack of creativity.

    3. Cyberbullying

    Cyber ​​bullying is basically a term to describe bullying in using the Internet. The disadvantages alone can be considered as one of the most sinister negative effects of the Internet. Many people have become victims of cyber bullying.

    Internet users are also more vulnerable to becoming victims of bullying because the method of bullying on the internet is also safer and easier than physical bullying because there are almost no regulations or laws to control the problem of cyber bullying.

    Victims of cyberbullying may also feel humiliated or embarrassed by mean or bad comments and opinions. Negative effects will be worse in adolescents, especially in those who are in puberty with all the vulnerabilities and sensitivities they have.

    There are several cases of victims of cyber bullying that will make the victim go crazy and eventually commit suicide.

    4. Ignoring family and people around

    Excessive use of something then always creates side effects, and the Internet is no exception. When you will use the internet too much, you will unconsciously ignore your family and those closest to you.

    When you spend most of your time surfing the Internet, you also become insensitive to real life and the people around you, including your own family members. The original purpose of using the Internet is to open doors to new worlds, not to shut oneself off from real life.

    For most teenagers and millennials, the internet is also the only friend they can have, while family and close friends are replaced by hours of browsing the internet.

    This will also cause you to ignore your family and make you feel hesitant to talk or interact with the people around you.

    Negative Impact of Internet on Children

    Many benefits will be felt with advances in technology and with the internet. The functions of the internet in everyday life include facilitating and completing work, communicating with other people, or developing skills through various online training.

    However, you must be aware of the positive and negative impacts of the internet, especially for children who are not yet filtering information. Following are the negative impacts of the internet on children:

    1. Stretching social relationships

    Children who are then addicted to gadgets tend to spend a lot of time in the room and lack interaction with other people. If allowed to drag on, the child will then find it difficult to get along with school friends or with family.

    Even though with the positive impact of the internet then by making friends from cyberspace, direct social interaction in the real world is still very much needed for the growth and development of children.

    2. Tend to isolate themselves

    Along with the high amount of time spent with the device, the intensity of indoor activities continues to increase. Children will also become less concerned and responsive to the conditions around them. When you decide to buy a new gadget for your child, try to make rules that will protect their social life.

    3. Being a grumpy person

    When children have started to feel obsessed with gadgets, they will also overreact when their favorite electronic devices are kept away from them. They become irritable and often have tantrums.

    Before children experience this, it is very important to be able to set the duration and make rules regarding the use of gadgets.

    4. Got a bad influence

    On social media, children will also interact with people with various characters. Without supervision, children can get various bad effects from parties with malicious intent.

    In addition, shows that are not educational can also be the main cause of children having various bad habits, such as being happy to hit, shout, or being a rebellious child.

    Steps to Deal with Negative Internet Impacts

    How to prevent the negative impact of the internet? The amount of negative news related to internet use for children can then make parents worry when children spend more time with devices. In fact, these bad things will also be overcome by means of proper supervision.

    1. Teaches the importance of privacy

    There are still quite a lot of children who then do not understand the dangers of data misuse. So it is very important for parents to be able to teach the boundaries of privacy that can be shared in cyberspace.

    Prohibit children from including various personal information such as telephone numbers, emails, home addresses and school addresses, as well as passwords, or certain photos. Also explain the various possibilities that can occur if someone uses their personal information, such as the case of kidnapping in the school environment that occurs by relying on photos from social media.

    2. Applying restrictions on internet play

    Also provide a list of any sites that they cannot access while playing the internet, such as pornographic sites, online games full of violence, gambling sites, or making acquaintances with strangers without their parents’ knowledge. Don’t hesitate to also discuss with the child the sanctions that will be received if they violate these limits.

    3. Explain about cyber bullying

    Playing social media will be fun for children because they can make friends with anyone. However, you also need to explain that they still have to be kind in cyberspace friendships.

    Explain that in Indonesia there is an ITE Law that protects someone from bullying and will punish the perpetrator. Ask your child to be able to tell you a story when they were victims of cyber bullying. Establish a closer emotional connection with children so that they can be open to various problems they face.

    4. Take advantage of parental control features

    Also activate the parental control settings that are usually available on the device. This feature will assist parents in managing what sites children can display and watch. On search engines like Google, you can also activate safe search so that sites that are not child-friendly will be filtered out.

    However, you also still have to carry out periodic checks regarding children’s internet use to ensure that there are no harmful messages or inappropriate viewing that accidentally escapes the settings.

    5. Provide other activities

    Usually, children who are dependent on gadgets begin with no interesting activities that they can do. So to overcome this you can prepare various activities that children like. The busier the children are with their activities, the less time they need to surf in cyberspace.

    Internet Related Books

    1. Watch out!! Evil Internet Stalking Your Child

    This anxiety arises for parents who have children who are underage or teenagers at this time, because these negative sites and things can have a bad impact on them, especially if you can’t accompany your children all the time while they are using it. Internet.

    In addition, of course you want your child not to tamper with important files on your computer. There is one way to outsmart is to use Parental Control. You can use the tips and tricks the Caution! Evil Internet Stalking Your Child like:

    • Securing Your Important Data on Computer
    • Install the Most Reliable Anti virus
    • Web Browser Settings for Safe Use
    • Installing Some Security Apps

    2. Internet Business Classroom: Affiliate Marketing

    If you are still thinking about renting a shop or getting up early just to catch up on attendance, you should read this book to see other opportunities in doing business in modern times. This book will introduce you to the fastest growing internet affiliate business today.

    If you have physical or virtual products such as eBooks, videos, audio, software, scripts and the like, you can sell them by utilizing a global network throughout the world. Many networks are available for it.

    If you don’t have a product to sell, you can use the affiliate network to get a variety of potential products that can give you up to 80% profit, just by placing your banner in a potential place.

    Sometimes, you don’t even need to have a super busy website to do it. You just need a super precise strategy.

    3. Awesome! Become a Billionaire with the Internet

    The trick is to run an online business. This book describes the sundries of online business in full. You will be invited to realize the great opportunity to make exorbitant profits through online business, how to run it in a practical and easy way, as well as tips on dealing with various challenges in it.

    So you have to absorb as much knowledge from this book as you can before you get into the online business world. After that, make sure you pursue an online business in full totality. As time goes by, you will definitely reap big profits that you never imagined before. Good luck!

    Those are some of the positive and negative impacts of the internet that we need to be aware of. Sinaumed’s can read internet-related books that you can get at sinaumedia.com so you have #MoreWithReading information.

  • Know the History of the Origin of the Plate Dance and the Meaning of Each Movement

    Getting to Know the History of the Origin of the Platter Dance and the Meaning of Each
    Movement
    – ​​Do you know about plate dance? This time the author will explain
    the history of the dance to the meaning in each of its movements.
    As we know, Indonesia has
    many beautiful cultures that should be preserved.
    One of them is the dance culture.

    There are more than 17,000 islands spread across Indonesia and within the islands there are 34 provinces
    inhabited by various tribes.
    There are approximately 1,340 tribes spread across the islands in
    Indonesia.
    Each tribe must have its own customs, uniqueness and culture, such as regional
    songs, regional dances and many more.
    The existence of these diverse tribes is what makes
    Indonesia rich in culture.
    This cultural wealth must be maintained and preserved so that it is
    not lost and forgotten.

    Each region must have cultural performances that are held regularly, this is done so that the younger
    generation or today’s generation do not forget about their own identity and culture.
    They must
    know that their country is a country rich in culture.
    Therefore, they should be proud and learn
    about the culture in their area.

    They can do performances such as their regional dance performances. Regional dance
    performances are always the main attraction for a region.
    There are many types of regional
    dances in Indonesia, one of which is the typical dance of West Sumatra province, the plate dance.

    Origin of Plate Dance

    The plate dance is a traditional dance originating from Minangkabau, traditionally it can be said that the plate
    dance originates from Solok, West Sumatra

    Definition of Plate Dance

    The plate dance is a traditional dance originating from Minangkabau, traditionally it can be said that the
    plate dance originates from Solok, West Sumatra.
    This dance displays the action of dancing
    attractions using plates.
    The dancers will swing the plates in their palms in sync with the
    accompaniment music and move quickly and regularly without letting go or letting any plates fall.
    The plate dance movement is taken from the Minangkabau silat movement or commonly called
    silek.

    Plate dance was popularized by Huriah Adam. In modern times, the plate dance is usually used
    as a greeting to welcome honored guests or is also usually used for the opening of a traditional ceremony.
    The plate dance is very popular in Indonesia, along with other dances, such as the saman, jaipong,
    and pendet dances which are often used as dances to welcome distinguished guests at several events and are
    used as a means of promoting tourism and culture in Indonesia.

    History of Plate Dance

    As stated above, it is said that the traditional plate dance came from Solok, West Sumatra. We
    quote this history from the Ministry of Education and Culture that it is estimated that plate dance has
    existed since the 12th century.
    Very long isn’t it? In the past, Minangkabau
    people still believed in gods.
    At first, the plate dance was used as a dance for worship by the
    community to the Goddess of Rice every harvest season, the community did this as a thank you for the success
    of their harvest.

    The plate dance is also a form of traditional dance that is rich in high aesthetic values ​​and also has deep
    ancestral cultural values ​​so that dance can be a form of thanksgiving and a picture of the people’s deep
    gratitude to the gods who have fertilized and produced results. their harvest will not fail.

    The ritual is usually carried out by the local community by bringing several offerings, usually the offerings are
    brought in the form of food and then the offerings will be placed on a plate while taking steps with regular,
    synchronous and dynamic movements.

    However, since the arrival of Arab traders in Indonesia who brought Islam to Indonesia, the local people’s
    belief in this plate dance slowly began to change.
    Not only the public’s belief in the dance,
    but also the dance concept of this plate dance has also changed.
    Currently, plate dance is used
    as a medium of entertainment such as for weddings, traditional events or even performances to receive
    guests, as well as a means of education for the younger generation to get to know and learn about their
    culture.

    The plate dance has succeeded in breaking a world record, they danced the plate dance with more than 2,000
    dancers dancing it.
    Everyone with various types of professions participated in breaking the
    world record.

    Every movement contained in the plate dance has a different meaning. The plate dance dancers
    usually carry two plates placed on their palms.
    Then, the plates will be swayed to follow the
    dance movements which are getting faster and faster.

    Usually, at the end of the dance, the dancer will slam the plate on the floor until it breaks and scatters,
    then the dancer will continue to dance on the broken plate.
    It is said that these plates have
    been given a prayer so as not to hurt the feet of the dancers.

    A dance without music seems like something is missing, so that it is more lively. The Plate Dance is
    accompanied by typical musical instruments from West Sumatra, namely Saluang and Talempong.
    The
    combination of the typical music of West Sumatra with the agile movements of the dancers makes the plate
    dance even more amazing.

    The Meaning of Plate Dance Movement

    At least the plate dance has 20 movements performed by the dancers. The 20 movements have
    different meanings, here are the names and meanings of each plate dance movement:

    1. Pasambahan Movement

    This movement is a movement to start the dance performed by male dancers. The Pasambahan
    movement is interpreted as a form of gratitude to God and a form of request by the dancers to everyone
    watching not to disturb the dance.

    2. Singajuo Lalai Movement

    The movements of the negligent singanjuo are performed by female dancers, the movements created from this
    dance are gentle and graceful movements.
    This is because the movement of singajuo neglects to
    be interpreted to symbolize the atmosphere in the cool morning.

    3. Hoeing

    As can be seen from the name, this movement symbolizes the movement of the dancers when cultivating their fields
    in the plate dance.

    4. Afternoon Movement

    This movement is also taken from the activities of farmers in the fields, namely weeding.
    Weeding itself is an activity of cleaning the fields from weeds or weeds. The dancers
    also use these activities in plate dance movements.

    5. Throwing Garbage Movement

    This movement is a continuation of the farmer’s activities in the weeding movement, namely removing grass or
    trash.

    6. Sowing Movement

    Furthermore, the sowing movement is also taken from agricultural activities in the fields. The
    movement of sowing the plate dance is like sowing rice seeds to be planted.

    As explained earlier, there are 20 movements in the plate dance that are exhibited when performing the plate
    dance, then 14 movements, in addition to the six movements above in the plate dance, namely:

    • Fencing movement
    • The movement of removing the seed
    • Resentment movement
    • The movement of delivering prayers
    • Paddy mowing movement
    • Movement to take rice
    • Paddy paddy movement
    • Movement of aerating rice
    • Paddy threshing movement
    • The movement of pounding rice
    • Mutual cooperation movement
    • Rice winnowing movement
    • The movement of stepping on broken glass

    Properties used in the Plate Dance

    The interesting thing about the plate dance is, of course, its main property, which is the plate, but of course
    there are other properties that make the plate dance more attractive to many people, the following are the
    properties in the plate dance:

    1. Plate

    As the name suggests, the main property of this dance is definitely the plate. The plate is
    placed on top of the dancer’s pliers, each dancer carries two plates in his right and left hands.

    2. Musical Instruments

    Each dance must be accompanied by music, the musical instruments used are drums and are equipped with saluang and
    talempong, namely natural music made of metal.

    3. Resin

    Another property of plate dance is resin. Damar is used by giving a hole so that the tips of
    the middle fingers of the right and left hands can be inserted into the hole.

    Then,
    while dancing, damar is tapped on the plate according to the music.
    This was done to make
    the plate dance more lively.

    4. Costumes

    The final property is of course the costume, the ancient plate dance costume such as the pencak silat
    costume with black pants.
    However, to make it even more festive, the plate dance costumes are
    colorful.
    This special costume has the name baju kuning made of velvet or satin with floral
    motifs. The plate dance also uses a codek cloth similar to a sarong.

    Thus the article about plate dance. Starting from its history to the meaning in every
    movement.
    It is hoped that this article will make the reader aware of the plate dance movements
    which have a different meaning from the movements which are mostly taken from the activities of farmers in
    the fields, as well as the various properties that are added to enliven the plate dance.

    Characteristics of Plate Dance

    When talking about the culture that Indonesia has, it will never end. Including this one
    culture, namely the plate dance or piriang dance.
    Every culture and art in Indonesia must have
    its own characteristics.
    Where these characteristics will distinguish between one culture to
    another culture.

    As previously explained, the distinctive features of the plate dance are in the movements, costumes,
    clothing, and also the music used.
    So that you understand more about the characteristics of
    this dance dadi, let’s see the explanation below:

    1. Clothing

    Each dance in various regions has a distinctive dress or costume when the dance is performed.
    Well, the clothes on the plate dance are divided into two kinds. The first is clothing
    for female dancers and the second is clothing for male dancers.

    Below is the clothing or costumes worn by plate dancers.

    Male Dancer Clothing

    The costumes worn by male dancers have different characteristics from the clothing worn by female dancers.
    However, it still does not leave the characteristics of Minangkabau customs and culture.

    For male dancer costumes, usually wear clothes that have long sleeves or can be called Rang Mudo clothes.

    The clothes for male dancers are also equipped with accessories and gold lace decorations or commonly known
    as missia decorations.
    While the lower area of ​​​​clothes uses pants which are referred to as
    wave sizes.
    These pants are quite large in the middle.

    The color of the pants is also adjusted to the top clothes. So that it looks harmonious and
    similar.

    Not only that, male dancers also wear a number of additional accessories such as cawek waist and sisimpek.
    The waist cawek is a cloth that is shaped like a songket cloth and is tied at the waist.
    This accessory is from waist to knee and is decorated with tassels. During the
    performance, male dancers will wear head coverings.
    This headband or head covering is made of
    songket cloth which is formed into a triangular shape.

    Female Dancer Clothing

    Usually, the costume worn by female dancers is the clothes of the brackets. This shirt is a
    typical Minangkabau dress made of velvet and satin.
    Female dancers will also use decorations or
    accessories in the form of scarves made of songket cloth and placed on the left shoulder.

    Not only male dancers, female dancers also wear horn-shaped head coverings. This head cover is
    usually also known as tikuluak horns Balapak.
    This head cover is made of songket cloth.

    For additional decorations used in plate dance clothing, namely kaling gadang, earring, and tassel
    necklaces.
    Subang is a typical Minang earring worn by female dancers. So that the
    dancers will look more attractive, beautiful, and unique.

    2. Dishes As Main Media

    One characteristic of this dance is the use of plates as the main medium or property for dancing.
    The plates used in this dance have their own meaning or philosophy. In addition, there
    is an amazing thing about using this property, namely the plate that is brought for dancing never falls even
    though it is swung.

    Initially, the plates used as props in this dance used plates that came from China. The use of
    plates originating from China is not without reason.
    So, the plate dance uses dishes from China
    because these plates have their own aesthetics and are of good quality.

    3. Dancing on Broken Plates

    This is one of the characteristics of the plate dance that you may not know about. In the
    performance, usually the dancers will perform attractions by dancing on broken plates.
    This
    will generally be done at the end of the performance.
    The dancers will throw the plate on the
    floor until it breaks.
    Then, the dancers will walk and step on and dance on the broken
    plates.

    Surely you are wondering, are the dancers not injured? Well, this is the hallmark of
    Indonesian culture.
    There is always something amazing and beyond reason. So when
    the dancers step on and dance on broken glass.
    They won’t be hurt at all. Even
    their legs would look fine.

    4. Ring Clink

    In addition to using plates as the main medium in dancing. The dancers will also use the ring
    to make a ringing sound which is the hallmark of this dance.
    The sound produced from rings and
    plates will give a special impression.
    Where the tones and strains of music from rings, plates,
    and other music will blend together.

    5. Accompanied by Traditional Musical Instruments.

    In addition to using the tone of the ring and plate clink. This dance also uses traditional
    musical instruments as its accompaniment.
    Various musical instruments such as gongs, fiddle,
    saluang, tambourine, talempong, and many other musical instruments make the musical accompaniment sound more
    unique and have its own characteristics.

    Each musical instrument used to accompany the dance has its own function. For example, the
    gong serves as a guide for movement and determines the steps that need to be taken by the dancers.
    Then the tambourine instrument will give a lively impression and increase the enthusiasm of the
    dancers.
    Meanwhile, you can see saluang and talempong musical instruments in
    Minangkabau.

    Those are some explanations about the plate dance along with its history and characteristics of the dance.
    As good citizens, of course we must preserve all the culture that we have from ancient times.
    As the next generation of the nation, we must not neglect and forget the culture of our own
    country.

    Recommended Books & Articles Related to Plate
    Dance

  • Know the History and Characteristics of Magnets

    Get to Know the History and Characteristics of Magnets – Who has loved playing magnets
    since childhood?
    Or does Sinaumed’s like to be surprised to see a magnet stuck to the refrigerator
    at home?
    Why can a magnet attract metal?

    Can all types of metal be pulled? So that Sinaumed’s is no longer confused by seeing magnets that
    like to attract or push each other, consider the following explanation.

    History of Magnets

    Derived from the name of a region in ancient Greece, the terms magnet, magnetism, and magnetic appeared
    around the 600s BC.
    The word magnet itself is actually taken from the Greek “magnitis lithos”
    which means magnesian stone.

    In a region called Magnesia, the Greeks discovered a natural stone that strongly attracted iron.
    The object was then given the name magnetite according to where it was found.

    Until now the general public knows him as a magnet. After being observed, it turns out that
    the ability of magnetite or magnets is able to attract objects around it with magnetic poles.

    Since 4,500 years ago, the Chinese have used magnets in everyday life. The Chinese nation
    itself initially used magnets as a therapeutic tool for doing acupuncture.

    A biomagnetic inventor Michaell Faraday conducted research on magnetic healing. In addition,
    the Chinese used magnets as directions or compasses.

    Its use is relatively easy, at that time a compass was made by floating a magnetic needle on the surface of
    the water.
    Since then, the use of magnets as a direction guide has continued to grow to
    Europeans.

    Objects that are able to attract other objects around them with special properties are called magnets.
    Magnets can also be interpreted as any material that can attract iron metal. Each
    magnet certainly has magnetic properties.

    What is the property of magnetism? What is meant by magnetic properties is the magnetic force
    with its ability to attract other objects around it.
    Magnets as we know them can be made of
    iron, steel, or a mixture of other metals.

    Magnets that can attract certain objects are often known as sembrani iron. The two ends of the
    magnet have the strongest attraction and the center of the magnet has no magnetic attraction or is
    neutral.

    The two poles of such a strong magnet are called the positive pole and the negative pole. The
    north pole of a magnet will always face north of Earth and the south pole of a magnet will always face south
    of Earth.
    Hmm, why is that? It all happens because of the influence of the earth’s
    strong magnetic field.

    A leading English scientist discovered the earth’s magnetic field in 1600. The scientist put
    forward a theory that the earth affects all magnetic bodies as a giant bar magnet.

    Reporting from NASA, the earth’s core is in the form of a solid electromagnetic surrounded by a liquid core
    (liquid nickel and iron) that conducts electric current.
    Well, an electric current in the
    molten core will cause the Earth’s magnetic field to be strong.
    The magnetic field covers the
    entire earth and outer space around it.

    Illustration of a Magnet (source: m.tribunnews.com)

    How many forms of magnet do you know? There are irregular shapes of magnets and some that have
    been adjusted.
    Irregular magnets you can find in a mine. Meanwhile, customized
    magnets are magnets that are made according to the needs.

    Magnets come in various forms, namely bar magnets, horseshoe magnets, needle magnets, cylindrical magnets,
    and ring magnets.
    As the name implies, bar magnets are magnets that are shaped like rods,
    blocks, or small cubes.

    Magnets of this shape are often used for door locks on glass cabinets and wooden cabinets. In
    addition, Sinaumed’s can find magnets of this shape as covers for objects, such as gift boxes, pencil cases,
    and so on.

    Then the horseshoe magnet is a horseshoe-shaped magnet or a horse’s sole. This U-shaped magnet
    is useful for lifting magnetic objects.

    Furthermore, a needle magnet is a flat magnet, elongated, and tends to be sharp. Magnets of
    this shape are often used as compass directions.

    A cylindrical magnet will appear round and flat. Magnets of this shape are almost similar to
    bar magnets.
    Cylinder magnets are commonly used for glass cabinet door locks, wooden cabinets,
    pencil case covers, gift box covers, and so on.

    While the ring magnet has a circular shape with a hole in the middle. Magnets of this shape
    are often used in making loudspeakers or
    speakers on radios, cinemas and cell phones.

    In addition, ring magnets are also commonly used in electric motor engines. Despite being made
    in a variety of sizes, shapes, and strengths, magnets always have two poles.
    The existence of
    the two poles (north and south) is inseparable from the existence of a magnetic
    domain .

    Sinaumed’s must have often wondered, where do magnets actually come from? When viewed based on
    its origin, magnets are divided into natural magnets and artificial magnets.
    Let’s discuss them
    one by one.

    First, scientifically created natural magnets have had magnetic properties since they were discovered.
    This type of magnet is usually in the form of rocks that have permanent properties.

    When found, this naturally formed magnet already has the ability to attract objects around it.
    Second, artificial magnets are one of the man-made magnets.

    The ever-increasing need for magnets has driven the manufacture of magnets. Over time, humans
    began to be able to make artificial magnets.
    These magnets are made of strong magnetic
    materials such as steel and iron.

    Characteristics and Properties of Magnets

    Magnets of any shape and type will always exhibit the same properties. The overall nature of
    the magnet becomes a natural law that applies to all types of magnets.

    Magnets with all their properties have been widely used by humans in everyday life. Then, what
    are the properties of magnets?
    How is it implemented? Check out the following
    review to the end, OK?

    1. Can Attract Other Objects

    You must be very familiar with the nature of this one magnet. The first characteristic of a
    magnet is its ability to attract other objects around it.
    However, keep in mind that not all
    objects can be attracted by a magnet.

    Objects that can be attracted are only objects that have magnetic potential or are often known as magnetic
    objects.
    Whether or not an object is attracted by a magnet is classified into three types,
    namely ferromagnetic, paramagnetic, and diamagnetic.

    • Ferromagnetic

    Materials with ferromagnetic properties are strongly attracted by magnets, such as iron, steel, nickel and
    cobalt.
    If you have a ferromagnetic type of object close to a magnet, the magnet will attract
    it very strongly.

    • Paramagnetic

    Paramagnets are objects that have a weak magnetic attraction, such as aluminum, copper, tungsten, and platinum.

    • Diamagnetic

    Objects with diamagnetic properties cannot be attracted by a magnet at all, such as plastic, wood, and
    gold.
    Diamagnetic are objects that repel magnets despite being very close to such a strong
    magnet.

    Through the explanation above, Sinaumed’s can see that objects that can be attracted by magnets are objects
    with ferromagnetic (strong attraction) and paramagnetic (weak attraction) types.
    In everyday
    life the magnetic properties that can attract other objects have been widely applied, for example in lifting
    equipment and refrigerator doors that can be closed tightly.

    2. Always Point North and South

    The magnet known as celestial iron has a tendency to always point north and south. If Sinaumed’s
    freely hangs a magnet by a string, the magnet will point north and south.

    Why is that? As previously explained, the reason is none other than because magnets are
    directly related to the earth’s magnetism.
    As is known, the earth is seen as a magnet that has
    two poles with a force of attraction between the magnet and the poles of the earth.

    3. Always Have Two Poles

    The third property, magnets always have two poles, namely north and south. That’s where the
    magnetic force appears so strong.
    Whatever the shape or size of the magnet, these poles always
    exist in pairs and are inseparable.

    Even if it is cut into smaller pieces, the two poles will never disappear. If Sinaumed’s cuts a
    bar magnet in half, the magnet will form two new poles.

    Illustration of a Cut Magnet (source: physics.co.id)

    4. Common Name Poles Repel and
    Non-Name Poles Attract

    Another magnetic property is that common poles (north-north or south-south) will repel and unlike poles
    (north-south) will attract.
    The force of repulsion and attraction of the magnetic poles occurs
    because they are in a magnetic field.

    What is a magnetic field? The magnetic field is an area or room around a magnet that has a
    magnetic influence in the form of repulsion or attraction.
    The strength of the magnetic field
    is often indicated by lines of force leaving the north pole
    and lines of force entering the
    south
    pole .

    Illustration of Magnetic Repulsion (source: physics.co.id)

    Illustration of Magnetic Attraction (source: physics.co.id)

    If the two north poles are brought closer to each other, there will be a repulsive force because the
    lines of force will not enter the other north pole.
    Vice versa, if you replace it with a
    south pole (
    south) the line of force coming out of the north pole will go straight
    to the south pole.

    It can be said that a magnet consists of small magnets that line up from the north pole towards the south
    pole.
    Instead, the south pole will face the magnetic north pole.

    These small magnets are often referred to as elementary magnets. In its application, this
    magnetic property can be seen in maglev or
    magnetically levitated fast trains. The train will
    move by floating a few mm above the rail due to the repulsive force between the rail and the train
    base.

    5. The Biggest Magnetic Force is at the Two
    Poles

    The latter property, magnets have the greatest repulsion or attraction force at the two poles.
    Generally, the two poles are located at the ends of the magnet. The two poles are
    believed to hold the greatest magnetic force.

    Why so? Again, this is caused by the magnetic field lines of force leaving the north pole and
    entering the south pole.
    The other parts of the magnetic body still have a force, it’s just
    that the portion is smaller than the force that these two poles have.

    The following are the conclusion points from the properties of magnets.

    • Has the ability to attract other objects.
    • Always point north and south.
    • Always has two poles in pairs, namely north and south.
    • Common poles repel each other and unlike poles attract each other.
    • The greatest magnetic force is located at the two poles.

    Well, now Sinaumed’s understands the meaning of magnets and their properties , right?
    It turns out that magnets have an inseparable north pole and south pole. So, don’t
    be surprised if there is a tug-of-war or repulsion between the magnet and certain objects.

    Book & Article Recommendations

  • Know the Functions of Water for Humans, Animals and Plants

    Functions of Water for Humans, Animals and Plants – All plants, animals and humans also need water to survive. In other words, there is no life on earth that does not need water. Why is water so important? This is because more than 60% of our body weight consists of water. In fact, the body also uses water in all cells, organs, and tissues, to help regulate body temperature and in maintaining other body functions.

    Basically, our body will lose water through breathing, sweating, and digestion, it is very important to continue to rehydrate and replace water by drinking fluids and eating foods that contain water.

    To find out what the functions of water are for humans, animals and plants, you can refer to this article, Sinaumed’s.

    Functions of Water for Humans

    1. Water as a Forming Cell and Body Fluid

    Water is one of the main components of cells, besides fat. More or less there is about 70-85% water content in body cells, while fat then has a percentage of less than 10%. Not only being the main component of cells, but water can also be regarded as one of the main components of blood, which contains 82% water.

    So, this implies that the function of water is to help form various body fluids. In addition, the function of water also plays a role in the formation of gastric juices, hormones, enzymes, and other fluids in the body. In fact, water is also present in the muscles of the body and has a function in maintaining muscle tone, so that the muscles are able to contract.

    2. Water Regulates Body Temperature

    Water also has a very important role in regulating temperature in the body. One of the functions of water is to produce, absorb, and conduct heat to all parts of the body and then maintain a stable body temperature. Apart from playing a role in producing, absorbing, and delivering heat to the body, water also functions to cool the body temperature through the production of sweat.

    It should also be noted that most of the sweat that comes out of our bodies also consists of water and salt. Through the process of sweat production, it can be said that water in the body can cool the body temperature.

    Besides being able to produce sweat, the function of water will also help the process of cooling body temperature through evaporation from the surface of the skin. In fact, this evaporation can also be interpreted as excess heat coming out of the body. The two cooling processes in the body, including sweating and evaporation of water from the surface of the skin, cause the temperature to decrease. That way, body temperature becomes more stable.

    3. Water as a Solvent

    The next function of water for the body is as a solvent. That’s right, this water is believed to be able to dissolve various nutrients that enter the body, as well as help the digestive process of the food we will consume. Therefore, water can help produce saliva when food arrives in the mouth, then dissolves the liquid, and can lubricate food so that it can enter smoothly into the esophagus.

    Due to its nature as an inorganic substance, water can flow easily in the digestive process. This water can quickly pass through the small intestine where most of it is absorbed and then also functions as a component of mucus so that the remaining food substances enter the body which can then be excreted as feces. Apart from being a solvent, the function of this water also has a role as a reactant in biochemical reactions.

    Large molecules, such as polysaccharides, fats, and proteins, are then broken down into smaller molecules. From the process of breaking these molecules in dire need of water. This is because water is also a major component in blood, saliva, urine, and lymph, water which also plays an important role in dissolving minerals, vitamins, glucose, and other nutrients so that these substances can be delivered to every cell and function properly.

    4. Water As a Lubricant and Bearing

    The next function of water for the body is as a lubricant or it can form fluid in the joints. Because water has a large percentage in the body, this fluid can make it easier for joints to move, so that the body becomes easier to move. In addition, water can also reduce friction between one joint and another.

    For example, cartilage at the ends of long bones contains a lot of water which functions as a lubricant. When this bone contains enough water, the two joint surfaces can then shift smoothly and damage caused by friction is minimized.

    Conversely, if the cartilage does not get enough water, then there is an increased possibility of damage due to friction, which can cause pain in the joint area. The function of water is also known as a shock absorbing fluid cushion in body tissues such as the brain, eyes, amniotic sac in the uterus, and spinal cord.

    Meanwhile, as a cushion, the function of this water is to keep these organs from experiencing a lot of vibration so they can work properly.

    5. Water Protects Tissues, Spine, and Joints

    The benefits of water for life not only quench thirst and regulate body temperature, but water can also make the tissues in the body moist. Plus, water can keep the body hydrated and help it maintain optimal moisture levels in these sensitive areas, as well as in the blood, bones and brain. In addition, water will also help protect the spinal cord, and act as a lubricant and cushion for the joint areas.

    6. Water helps the body get rid of waste

    Adequate water intake allows the body to excrete waste through sweat, from urination, and during bowel movements. According to the National Kidney Foundation , the benefits of water for life, apart from helping the kidneys remove waste from the blood, are also to keep the blood vessels that will flow to the kidneys then open and filter it.

    As reported by the University of Rochester Medical Center. In fact, water is also very important in helping prevent constipation. However, as studies have noted, there is no evidence to suggest that increasing fluid intake will subsequently cure constipation.

    7. Water Prevents Dehydration

    According to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention , the body will lose fluids when you do strenuous exercise, sweat in hot weather, or contract an illness which will then cause vomiting or diarrhea. If you lose fluids for one of these reasons, it is very important for you to restore fluids properly, so you can avoid dehydration.

    The doctor may also advise you to drink more fluids so that it can help treat other health conditions, including bladder infections and urinary tract stones.

    Meanwhile, if you are pregnant or breastfeeding, you should consult with your doctor about fluid intake. This is necessary because the body will use more fluids than usual, especially if you are breastfeeding.

    Functions of Water for Animals

    After discussing the function of water for humans, the next discussion is the function of water for animals. The following is the function of water for animals.

    1. To Smooth Digestion

    The first function of water for animals is to facilitate animal digestion. As with humans, animals also need adequate fluid intake so that digestion runs smoothly. Therefore, when animals have difficulty getting clean water, they can get sick or even die.

    2. Maintain Body Temperature

    Apart from improving digestion, the next function of water for animals is to maintain body temperature. With the presence of water, animals can feel cold when they are in very hot air. For example, when the temperature is hot, the animal will soak in the water. In fact, water can maintain the body, so that animals avoid disease.

    3. Milk Production

    The next function of water for animals is to help the mother produce milk. That way the milk needs of the mother are still fulfilled.

    4. Drink

    It is common that the function of water for animals is to drink. By drinking enough water, animals can avoid dehydration. The amount of water needed by the animals themselves varies depending on the body weight of each animal.

    5. Water serves as a place to live

    For some animals, water serves as their natural habitat, such as fish, shrimp, clams, whales, and so on.

    6. Water Serves As A Cleaning Tool

    Water for animals also serves to cleanse the body. Like humans, animals also need water to clean their bodies. For example, in buffalo animals that clean the body by entering the water.

    Functions for Plants

    One of the living things that should not be forgotten is the plant. In fact, the plant itself needs water to survive. The following is the function of water for plants.

    1. For aquatic plants serves as one of the main components for the process of photosynthesis. In fact, you could say that water is a source of energy in the process of photosynthesis. There is a lot of energy which is then used in the process of photosynthesis, so that the need for water for plants becomes higher.
    2. Water functions for the formation of protoplasm.
    3. Water functions as a nutrient solvent when the process of entering minerals from the soil into plants which then distributes them to all parts of the plant body.
    4. Water also functions as a compound that is utilized for plant metabolic reaction processes.
    5. Water can work as a reactant that affects various reactions in metabolic processes.
    6. Water functions as a producer of mechanical energy during the process of enlargement and cell division.
    7. Water will maintain the turgidity of the cells and keep them in good condition.
    8. Water functions as a compound that can be used to regulate the mechanism of movement of opening or closing stomata in plants.
    9. Water functions to extend plant cells and also as a material for various plant growth and development activities.
    10. Water functions to help the process of respiration in plants.
    11. Water functions as a transport medium that can move the results of the photosynthesis process.
    12. Water is used as a medium in the process of biochemistry, because water is also an excellent solvent in biochemical processes.
    13. Water has a function to regulate the temperature in plants to remain stable, because it has high heat and can regulate heat in plants.

    Closing

    From all the explanations above, it can be said that water is very useful for the life of living things in this world. It’s hard to imagine what will happen when there is water again, surely it will be difficult for living things to live. With the presence of water, living things with one another can complement each other.

    Therefore, we should all keep our water clean. This must be done so that the life of every living creature can last longer. Not only that, with sufficient clean water, we humans can be healthier and definitely fresher.

    In fact, humans themselves need approximately 2 liters in one day. That way, the human body becomes cleaner and definitely healthier.

    This is an explanation of the function of water for humans, animals and plants. So, how many liters of water have you drunk today?

    Recommended Books Related to the Functions of Water for Humans, Animals and Plants

    To get a more complete insight into the function of water for humans, animals and plants as well as the science of water in general, let’s read the recommendations for the best books below.

    1. Come on, Get to Know Water Closer

    Did you know that March 22 is World Water Day? Precisely in 1992, in its 47th session in Rio Jeneiro, the UN has set this date as the world “Water Day”. This is done to remind us of how important water is as a source of life.

    Water is very necessary for the continuation of human life on planet earth. Humans cannot live without water. So do other creatures, such as animals and plants. Well, this book discusses water which is the source of life for living things.

    2. I’m a Great Boy: The Importance of Clean Water

    When Sani wants to take a shower, water doesn’t come out of the tap. Sani shouted for Father. Then, Father brought clean water for Sani to bathe. Mother also told me that the water that came out of the sink faucet was cloudy and smelled a bit. Is that cloudy and smelly water dangerous?

    The advantages of this book include: 1. The author has been in the world of early childhood for a long time 2. Tells stories and introduces education on the importance of clean water for eating, bathing and cooking activities. 3. Children will love the funny stories and interesting illustrations. 4. Packed with important facts and education for parents and teachers. Target consumers: 1. Children (Ages 4+) 2. Parents – Teachers.

    3. Harvesting Rainwater: A New Source of Drinking Water

    The idea to write this book was sparked when Indonesia was hit by many problems, especially those caused by heavy rains. Flash floods occur everywhere, but then give way to prolonged dry seasons, forest fires and drought.

    Communities find it difficult to obtain water, both for agriculture and for daily drinking water needs. Rainwater that falls abundantly for free is allowed to pass, even though this is a golden opportunity to be harvested. If all Indonesian people were willing to get used to using water and were more enthusiastic about harvesting rainwater and processing it for their daily needs, especially drinking water for the family, great benefits would certainly be obtained.

    4. Water Governance in Paris

    In 2010, Paris ended its 25-year water privatization contract and returned water management to the city government. This bold move that was initially viewed with skepticism by many parties turned out to be a success story that was used as a reference by other cities in the world. From a political decision taken by the Mayor to become a reality that went well,

    Paris has gone through major technical, economic, social and cultural transformations. This book traces back the steps taken by Paris to achieve the provision of water services that are accountable, affordable and accessible to all of its residents—which is also the aspiration of the Indonesian people.

    5. Water Philosophy

    As a human with the majority of his body composition being water, humans should return to the origins of the purpose for which humans were created. What are the properties of that water? How much compatibility is there between the water character and the human character? What is the ideal human character or attitude? How do you respond to the reduced composition of water in the body, as a person ages?

    This book aims to inspire readers to return to the khittah of the origins of human purpose. Balancing between body and mind, forgetting about weaknesses and focusing on strengths or talents. Next, try to utilize the abilities bestowed by the Creator to take care of the universe.

    Hopefully the presence of this book is useful. Enjoy! “This paper about water really needs to be widely read by the public. Water is a source of life that is not only very important, but also determines the continuity of existence of all living things on earth. Happy.” – Prof. Dr. H. Ahmad Syafii Maarif, teacher of the nation.

    Thus the discussion about the function of water for humans, animals, plants. Hopefully all the discussion above can be useful for you and it is hoped that you can participate in keeping the water clean.

    If you want to find a book about water, you can get it at sinaumedia.com. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

  • Know the Functions of Political Parties, Understanding and History of Political Parties

    Functions of Political Parties – The existence of political parties is something that cannot be avoided in a modern society with a complex structure. This is because political parties are considered to have the ability to channel complex societal political participation. The more complex a society is, the existence of political parties will be increasingly needed as a channel for aspirations and for channeling people’s political participation.

    In a book entitled Fundamentals of Political Science written by Miriam Budiarjo, she defines a political party as an organized group and its members have the same values, orientation and aspirations to achieve. The main purpose of political parties is to gain political power and to seize political positions.

    Then, what is meant by a political party? What is the function of political parties? To find out, Sinaumed’s can read this article to the end!

    Definition of Political Parties

    Political parties or commonly referred to as political parties are one of the components or organizations that have an orientation towards power. Therefore, political parties have a fairly important role in terms of politics in a country. Without political parties, the political system will not run well.

    The merits of the political system of a country can be determined from the performance of the political parties themselves. The political system itself can be interpreted as a mechanism of a set of functions, where all of these functions are attached to a political structure in order to implement and make policies that bind the people of a country. So, establishing a political party is one of the rights of Indonesian citizens.

    Definition of Political Parties According to Experts

    In order to better understand the meaning of political parties, here are the definitions of political parties explained by experts.

    1. Miriam Budiarjo

    According to Miriam Budiarjo, a political party is an organized group and its members have the same values, orientation and aspirations with the aim of being able to gain political power and win political positions. To achieve this goal, usually political parties will try to achieve it by constitutional means to implement their policies.

    2. Carl J. Friedrich

    Friedrich expressed the opinion that a political party is a group of people who are organized in a stable manner with the aim of seizing or maintaining control of the government for their party leaders. Based on the mastery obtained by a political party, it can provide party members with benefits that are both material and ideal.

    3. H. Soltou

    The definition of a political party according to H. Soltau is a group of citizens who are more or less organized and act as a political unit by utilizing the power to vote. This power aims to control the government and carry out public policies designed by the party.

    4. Sigmund Neumann

    Political parties according to Sigmund Neumann are organizations of political activists who seek to control government power and win support on the basis of competition against other groups that do not share the same understanding.

     

    The Purpose of Political Parties in Law

    In Law Number 31 of 2002 Concerning Political Parties there is a purpose for the formation of political parties listed in Article 6, which reads.

    Paragraph 1: The objectives of the general party are:

    • Realizing the national ideals of the Indonesian nation as referred to in the Preamble to the 1945 Constitution of the Republic of Indonesia;
    • Developing democratic life based on Pancasila by upholding people’s sovereignty in the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia; And
    • Realizing prosperity for all Indonesian people.

    Paragraph 2: The specific objective of political parties is to fight for their ideals in the life of society, nation and state.

    Paragraph 3: The goals of political parties as referred to in paragraphs (1) and (2) are realized constitutionally.

    From the political goals based on Law Number 31 of 2002 Article 6 Concerning Political Parties, it can be said that political parties themselves have general goals and specific goals. The general objective is to realize the ideals of the Indonesian nation in accordance with the 1945 Constitution, develop democratic life based on Pancasila, and realize prosperity for all Indonesian people.
    Meanwhile, the specific purpose of political parties is to fight for ideals in the life of society, nation and state.

     

    History of Political Parties

    In the beginning, political parties were born in countries in Western Europe because there was an idea that the people should play a role and determine in the political process. Therefore, government power in the world of politics will not be too dominant and will not forget to prioritize the interests of its people. In essence, at that time the people wanted the aspirations of the people to be heard by the authorities.

    Then, due to the influence of globalization, eventually Indonesia also co-founded political parties. The history of political parties in Indonesia is then divided into three periods, namely the Dutch colonial period, the Japanese occupation period and the period after the Proclamation of Independence. Here’s an explanation.

    1. The Dutch Colonial Period

    The Dutch colonial period is also known as the first period of the birth of political parties in Indonesia or at that time it was called the Dutch East Indies. The birth of political parties marked the presence of national awareness in society at that time.

    At that time, all organizations, both those with social goals such as Budi Utomo and Muhammadiyah or those based on religious and secular politics such as the PNI, Islamic Unions and Catholic Parties also played a role in the national movement so that Indonesia could achieve independence.

    The presence of political parties during the Dutch colonial period was a manifestation of national awareness to be able to achieve independence for the Indonesian nation. After the establishment of the People’s Council, this movement by several political parties was then continued within the People’s Council.

    Around 1939, there were several factions in the People’s Council, including the National Fraction led by M. Husni Thamrin, the Association of Bestuur Bumi Putera Employees (PPBB) under the leadership of Prawoto and the Indonesische Nationale Groep under the leadership of Muhammad Yamin .

    2. The Japanese Occupation Period

    The second period of political parties is the period of the Japanese occupation. At this time, all political party activities were banned and only Muslim groups were given the freedom to form parties, namely the Indonesian Muslim Syuro Council Party (Masyumi Party). This party is more active in the social field than the political field.

    3. The Post-Proclamation of Independence Period

    The third period is the period after the Proclamation of Independence, namely several months after the Proclamation of Independence. At this time, there was ample opportunity to establish political parties, so that other Indonesian political parties began to appear. Thus, Indonesia returns to the pattern of a system of many political parties.

    Elections in 1995 gave rise to four major political parties such as Masyumi, NU, PNI and PKI. Then, from 1950 to 1959, it is often referred to as the heyday of political parties. This is because political parties play an important role in the life of a state with a parliamentary system.

    Then, the multi-party system did not work properly. Political parties cannot carry out their functions properly, so that the cabinet falls up and down and is unable to carry out its work program. As a result, development does not run smoothly and well. Then, during the democratic period, parliamentary ended with the Decree of July 5, 1959 which represented the period of guided democracy.

    Then, after Indonesia’s independence, Indonesia also adopted a multi-party system, so many political parties began to form. Then, when entering the New Order era, namely around 1965 to 1998, political parties in Indonesia only numbered three parties.

    The three political parties are the United Development Party, Golongan Karya and the Indonesian Democratic Party. During the reform period, Indonesia then returned to adopting a multi-party system. Then, in 2012, the People’s Representative Council (DPR RI) revised Law Number 2 of 2008 which discussed political parties.

    The Functions of Existing Political Parties in Indonesia

    In accordance with the contents of the Preamble to the 1945 Constitution and the Body of the Constitution which explains that Indonesia uses a multi-party system, namely a system in which the election of the head of state or people’s representatives is through general elections followed by many political parties.

    This multi-party system is embraced by Indonesia, because of the diversity possessed by Indonesian society as a large archipelagic country. In it, there are various differences ranging from religion, race, ethnicity to social groups. Therefore, multi-party is embraced by Indonesia to be able to distribute racial ties or also known as primordial in Indonesia in one container.

    In the existing democratic system in Indonesia, the formation of political parties has several functions. Here’s an explanation.

    1. Parties as a Means of Political Communication

    A political party has several tasks and one of them is to channel a wide variety of people’s inspirations and opinions and regulate differences of opinion in society, so that these differences can be reduced.

    Community opinions that have been channeled will then be accommodated and put together in order to create a common goal. The process of combining opinions and inspiration is known as merging interests.

    On the other hand, political parties are the subject of discussion to disseminate a decision and policy from the government. Political parties also function as intermediaries between citizens and their governments. In this case, the intermediary acts as a listener for the government and a loudspeaker for the people.

    2. Parties as a Means of Political Socialization

    Political parties have a role as a means of political socialization. According to political science, political socialization is a process in which a person acquires an attitude and orientation towards political phenomena and usually applies in the community that lives in an area.

    In general, the process of socialization runs gradually from childhood to adulthood. In this case, a political party can be regarded as a means of political socialization. To control the government through victory with general elections, political parties must get the widest possible support.

    3. Parties as a Means of Political Recruitment

    Political parties have the function of finding and inviting people who have talent to participate in political party activities as party members or what is called political recruitment.

    That way, political parties will participate in expanding political participation. Through personal contact, persuasion and others, political parties also function to educate young cadres to be able to replace old cadres.

    4. Political Parties as Political Participation

    Political participation is an activity of ordinary citizens and will influence the process of making and implementing public policies and will also determine the implementation of government. Therefore, political parties have a role to increase political participation in an election.

    5. Parties as a Means of Managing Conflict

    In an atmosphere of democracy, competition and differences of opinion in society is a natural problem that occurs. If a conflict occurs, political parties must try to overcome the problem properly.

    Party System

    As additional information, in addition to the multi-party system adopted in Indonesia, the party system is divided into three, namely multi-party, single party and two-party.

    1. Single Party System

    The single party system has a non-competitive nature, because all groups must accept the party leadership and may not compete with that leader, competition in a single party system is considered a form of betrayal.

    2. Dual Party System

    Meanwhile, dual party is a political party system in which two parties are dominant in gaining voting rights. There are three conditions for this dual-party system to run smoothly, namely that society is homogeneous, society has a sufficiently strong consensus on socio-political principles and goals, and there is historical continuity.

    3. Multi-party system

    According to experts, the multi-party system adopted by Indonesia is considered the most effective party system, especially for representing the various wishes of the people.

     

     

    Political Infrastructure Elements

    The following will explain the elements of political infrastructure consisting of bureaucratic groups, mass groups and interest groups.

    1. Interest Groups

    Interest groups are groups that have the goal of fighting for interests and influencing political institutions, so that they will get profitable decisions while avoiding all decisions that can be detrimental.

    This interest group will not try to determine their representatives in the DPR, but will simply influence one or several parties within it or even government agencies or ministers who have authority, in order to obtain favorable decisions as expected.

    2. Bureaucratic Group

    The bureaucratic group is a group that has a role in the process of creating a general policy that has been taken from the bottom up or from the top down which has become a useful decision.

    An example is making SKCK, where the process for making it starts from the smallest level first, namely RT, then RW and continues to Kelurahan before finally SKCK is handed over to the Polsek or Polres.

    3. Mass Groups

    A mass group is a group of people who participate in a process of electing political leaders and participate directly or indirectly in the formation of a general policy which is the goal of forming a political party.

    An example of this mass group can be seen in the elite group. Elite group is an organized group and its members have the same ideals, orientation and values. The goal is to gain political power and seize political positions, usually this goal can be obtained by constitutional means.

    Usually, groups from the political elite have cadres in them. The group’s cadres will later be elected through the election of the general chairman of the party. To elect these cadres, all registered members have the right to vote on the cadres they wish to elect.

    This is an explanation of the functions of political parties, understanding, history and the party system adopted in Indonesia. If Sinaumed’s is interested in finding information and adding insight into political science, then Sinaumed’s can get books on politics at sinaumedia.com

    As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia always supports Sinaumed’s who want to add insight by reading books. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information. Don’t hesitate to buy books at sinaumedia.com because quality and original books are guaranteed!

    Author: Khansa

  • Know the Functions of 12 Cranial Nerves that Regulate Human Expression

    12 Cranial Nerves – Cranial nerves or also called Cranial Nerves in Latin are 12 pairs of nerves that exist in humans and stick out directly from the human brain. The 12 cranial nerves are different from the prominent spinal nerves in the human spine. Pairs of cranial nerves are marked by numbers according to the position of the nerves from front to back.

    The 12 cranial nerves are part of the peripheral nervous system arrangement which are attached to the central nervous system or SPP. These nerves are primarily connected to the structures of the human head and neck, such as the nose, eyes, ears, mouth and tongue. So that the 12 cranial nerves can regulate the abilities of the five human senses such as hearing, sight, smell and also expression.

    To find out more about the 12 cranial nerves, see the explanation to the end in this article!

    Definition of 12 Cranial Nerves

    According to a study published in 2019 in the journal Insight into Imaging, the human body is known to have 12 cranial nerves that function to control motor and sensory functions in the head and neck.

    The anatomy of the 12 cranial nerves is quite complex and their dysfunction can be caused by tumors, infections or traumatic injuries. To get a complete imaging picture of the 12 cranial nerves, Sinaumed’s can use Magnetic Resonance Imaging or MRI and Computed Tomography or CT procedures.

    The human brain consists of 12 cranial nerves that have names according to their function and structure. These nerves will help a person to taste, hear, smell, see and other abilities.

    Even these 12 cranial nerves can also help a person to make facial expressions such as winking, moving the tongue or smiling.

     

     

    What Are the 12 Cranial Nerves?

    Each part of the 12 cranial nerves has a roman numeral from I to XII. the numbering of the 12 cranial nerves has been adjusted according to the location of these nerves which are from the front to the back of the brain.

    The function of each nerve is to regulate sensory function as well as motor function. Sensory nerves have a relationship with the senses, for example the sense of hearing, the sense of smell and touch.

    Then the motor nerves function to control movement and function of muscles and glands. The following are the types of cranial nerves and the function of each nerve.

    1. Olfactory nerves

    The first part of the cranial nerve is the olfactory nerve. The olfactory nerve can send sensory information to the brain related to odors entering through the nose.

    When a person inhales aromatic molecules, the odor enters the olfactory epithelium. This can stimulate receptors that generate nerve impulses in the olfactory department. Then, signals will be sent to the brain related to memory and smell recognition.

    2. Optic nerve

    The second cranial nerve associated with vision is the optic nerve. Light will enter the eye and come into contact with the receptor. Information received by these receptors will be transmitted from the retina to the optic nerve.

    Then, impulses from the optic nerve will reach the visual cortex which is capable of processing information related to vision. The visual cortex is located at the back of the brain.

    3. Oculomotor nerve

    The third nerve from the cranial nerves is the oculomotor nerve which can help control the movement of the eye muscles. This third nerve is at the front of the midbrain and part of the brainstem.

    The oculomotor nerve has two distinct motor functions, such as muscle function and pupillary response. The following is an explanation of its functions.

    • The muscle function of the oculomotor nerve can provide motor function to four of the six muscles around the eye. This muscle will help the eye to be able to move and focus on the object it sees.
    • Pupillary response is the part that can help to control the size of the pupil that responds to light.

    4. Trochlear nerve

    The fourth of the 12 cranial nerves is the nerve that controls the superior oblique muscle, whose function is to move the eye. The trochlear nerve is the same as the oculomotor nerve, but the trochlear nerve originates from the back of the brain.

    With the fourth nerve, the strength of the oblique muscle will make the eye able to see in the desired direction.

    5. Trigeminal nerve

    The fifth nerve of the cranial nerve is the largest nerve compared to the other nerves. The trigeminal nerve has sensory functions as well as motor functions. The motor function of the trigeminal nerve is to help chew and clench teeth.

    This nerve has three arrangements, which are as follows.

    • Ophthalmic which functions to give sensation to various parts of the eye, including the mucosa in the nose, eyes including the cornea, eyelids to the forehead.
    • The upper jaw is the part that functions to communicate sensory information to the central part of the face, for example the upper cheeks, upper teeth, lower eyelids and nasal cavities.
    • The mandible is the part that can provide sensation to the lower third of the face, lower teeth and tongue.

    The most common and prone disorder of the trigeminal nerve is trigeminal neuralgia. This problem can cause intense pain and facial tics on the face. Facial tics are sudden movements that occur repeatedly and occur on the face, neck or head.

    6. Abducens nerve

    The sixth nerve is the part of the cranial nerves that controls the lateral rectus muscle. The lateral rectus is part of the extraocular muscles or the main muscles that move the eyeball.

    This muscle is involved in outward movement of the eye, such as when the eye moves sideways.

    The abducens nerve begins in the pons of the brainstem, then enters an area called Dorello’s canal, then passes through the cavernous sinus to finally the lateral rectus muscle in the bony orbit.

    7. Facial nerve

    The facial nerve is part of 12 cranial nerves consisting of 4 nuclei with different functions, which are as follows.

    • Muscle movements that function to produce facial expressions.
    • Movement of the lacrimal, submandibular and submaxillary glands.
    • Sensation in the outer ear
    • Sensations related to taste.

    One of the most common disorders of the facial nerve is Bell’s palsy. This disorder can cause paralysis on one side of the face and even loss of sensation.

    8. Vestibulocochlear nerve

    The eighth cranial nerve is related to one’s hearing and balance.

    There are two components of the function of this eighth nerve, namely as follows.

    • Can help the body to feel changes in the position of the head related to gravity in order to maintain balance.
    • The cochlear nerve in this eighth nerve can help hearing. The hair cells in the ear will vibrate in response to sound and determine the frequency as well as the amount of sound.

    9. Glossopharyngeal nerve

    The glossopharyngeal nerve is the fifth nerve which has a function related to the sense of taste and a person’s ability to swallow. Some of the motor as well as sensory functions of this nerve include the following.

    • Transmits sensory information from the sinuses to the back of the throat, the inner ear and the back of the tongue.
    • Gives taste to the back of the tongue.
    • Stimulates the movement of a muscle at the back of the throat called the stylopharyngeus.

    The ninth nerve is located in a part of the brainstem called the medulla oblongata. This section can also extend to the neck and throat area.

     

    10. Vagus nerve

    The tenth nerve section of the cranial nerves has sensory functions as well as motor functions, such as:

    • Able to communicate sensational information from the ear canal as well as parts of the throat.
    • Able to transmit sensory information from organs such as the chest and trunk, such as the heart and intestines.
    • Allows to control the motor muscles in the throat.
    • Stimulates the muscles of the organs in the chest and trunk, including those that move food through the digestive tract or peristalsis.
    • Gives a close taste to the root of the tongue.

    Of the 12 cranial nerves, the vagus nerve has the longest pathway. This nerve extends from the head in a part of the brainstem called the medulla to the abdomen.

    11. Accessory nerve

    Accessory nerves are part of the cranial nerves that control the muscles in the neck. This muscle is capable of flexing, rotating and extending the neck and shoulders.

    The accessory nerve is divided into two parts, namely the spine and the skull. The two parts of the accessory nerve briefly touch before part of the spinal nerve moves to supply the muscles in the neck, meanwhile, the cranial part follows the vagus nerve.

    12. Hypoglossal nerve

    The last cranial nerve is the hypoglossal nerve which functions to move most of the tongue muscles. This section starts from the medulla oblongata then moves down to the jaw until it reaches the tongue.

    If the hypoglasic nerve is disturbed, paralysis of the tongue can occur and most often occurs on one side.

    That’s 12 types of cranial nerves. When read carefully, it can be seen that the cranial nerves are nerves that are located near the brain and are divided into 12 pairs of nerves. The 12 nerves pass through the cranium, so these nerves are called cranial nerves.

    Cranial Nerve Function

    The cranial nerves are named according to the order from top to bottom and the main function of the cranial nerves is to regulate all the functions of the organs in the head. From awareness, communication function, chewing function to swallowing function.

    In general, the function of the cranial nerves can be divided into three types of functions, namely sensory, motor and autonomic. One of the functions of the cranial nerves is to allow a person to swallow as well as speak.

    1. Swallow

    When a person chews or drinks, the food and drink will pass posteriorly from the tongue, the muscles innervated by the Vagus or X nerve and the glasopharyngeal (IX) will push the food down and back towards the hypopharynx, then through the cricopharyngeal sphincter to the esophagus.

    The nasopharynx is covered by palatal muscles which are innervated by the fine and trigeminal nerves. While the eustachian tube will open. The laryngeal orifice narrows with elevation of all the laryngeal bones by all the muscles attached to the bones from above and the opening of the cricopharyngeal sphincter. The tongue muscles which are innervated by the hypoglossal nerve (XII) also have an important role in this process. Most of the pharyngeal muscles are innervated unidirectionally via the vagus nerve.

    2. Speak

    The process of real speech goes through various processes so that a complete sentence is formed. There are three speech processes, here are the explanations.

    a. Production of sound through a phonation

    During phonation, the vocal cords create a narrow slit which allows air to pass directly through to produce sounds such as those of a flute or an organ pipe. The muscles that move the vocal cords are innervated by the recurrent laryngeal nerve which is part of the vagus nerve.

    b. Making understandable sounds through an articulation

    The pharyngeal muscles (X) of the tongue, facial excretory muscles, mandibular and palatal movements all have a role to make meaningless sounds more understandable.

    c. pitches

    Pitch is modulated by contracting the cricothyroid muscle and relaxing the vocal cords. All movements of the vocal cords are controlled by the nucleus ambiguus via the superior and recurrent laryngeal nerves. Lesions in this nucleus can lead to swallowing and speech abnormalities commonly referred to as bulbar and pseudobulbar palsy.

    12 cranial nerves can be examined in several ways, for example the olfactory nerve can be examined by closing the patient’s eyes, then the patient is asked to distinguish between several odors. While the optic nerve can be examined through the snelend card and check the eyesight.

    The oculomotor nerve can be examined by rolling the eyeball, moving the conjunctiva, pupil reflex and inspecting the eyelids. The trochlear nerve can be examined by rolling the eyeball, moving the conjunctiva.

    The trigeminal nerve can be examined by moving the patient’s jaw throughout the jaw area or by closing the eyes or touching the forehead or cheek with cotton.

    The abducens nerve can be examined by rolling the eyeball, pupil reflex and inspecting the eyelids. The facial nerve can be examined by smiling, raising eyebrows and so on. The verstibulocochlear nerve can be examined with the Weber or Rinne test.

    The glossopharyngeal nerve can be differentiated by distinguishing sour and sweet tastes, the vagus nerve can be examined by touching the posterior pharynx, the accessory nerve is examined by moving the shoulder, finally the hypoglossal nerve can be tested by sticking out the tongue and moving the entire mouth area.

    That’s a review of the 12 cranial nerves along with their functions and how to do the test. Sinaumed’s can find out more about nerves or other parts of the body by reading books available at sinaumedia.com . sinaumedia always provides useful and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

    Author: Khansa

  • Know the function of the stigma in flowers and other floral organs

    Function of the stigma of the stigma – Hello friends , Sinaumed’s , surely many of you
    think that flowers are just decoration or a sweetener for plants.
    Even though flowers
    actually have a very important and vital function for the plant itself.
    It can be said that
    flowers are very important organs because flowers are one of the reproductive organs with the main
    function for the process of plant reproduction.

    A flower is said to be complete if its organs are complete. The organs normally present in
    perfect flowers are the corolla, petals, pistils, and even the stamens.
    Meanwhile, imperfect
    flowers usually do not have all four parts.

    Flowers that do not have one of these organs can interfere with the reproduction of the plant itself.
    Indeed, each flower organ has its own function. The following is a complete
    explanation of the function of the stigma and other organs in flowers!

    Definition of pistil head

    The stigma is one of the components of the pistil or female genitalia in flowers. In the
    flowers of the female genitalia in pollination, among others: stalk, pistil, stigma and ovary.

    According to the book Easy Ways to Face Final Exams 2007 Matrix Media Literata Team (2007), during
    pollination, pollen grains fall on the stigma.
    Pollination is followed by fertilization.
    Fertilization is the process of fusing sperm (male) with an egg (female). Pollen that
    falls on the stigma will form a tube through the stigma to reach the ovule.

    The result of this fertilization is a zygote or biological institution. The zygote and bladder
    will grow into seeds.
    The seeds that are planted will fall to the ground and grow roots or
    sprouts

    Flower Function

    The function of flowers is to attract pollinators to pollinate plants to help pollinate plants to produce
    seeds.
    Bright colors, strong scents and sweet nectar combine to attract birds, bees and other
    insects that transfer pollen from one flower to another.
    After pollination, the flowers turn
    into seeds.
    There are at least 4 functions of interest that you should know, namely:

    • The most important and vital function of flowers is as a means of reproduction.
    • The second function of flowers is to attract birds, insects and bees to the ground and
      pollinate them.
    • The function of the third flower is to accommodate or function as a place for the fusion of
      male and female gametes.
    • The fourth flower function is to produce seeds.

    Of course, in addition to these four functions of flowers, you can also add that humans can appreciate flowers
    for their beauty. The most important thing is that you humans don’t damage them and don’t prevent flowers from
    reproducing.

    In addition, the function of flowers as genetic reproduction can be broken down into 4, namely:

    1. Plant Reproductive Organs

    The function of the flower itself is to combine or combine the fusion of sperm or male gametes with ovum or
    female gametes.
    With this, seed production will be realized. The arrangement or
    arrangement of flowers in one stem can be referred to as flowering.
    The reproductive organs of
    flowers are called stamens and pistils.

    2. Attracts Polinators

    As we know there are animals whose main food is nectar. During this time, the flowers have
    nectar or a sweet liquid.
    If you use symbiosis, nectar will be taken as food, where pollination
    of flowers takes place.

    During pollination, pollen moves from the male flower head to the female stigma. Thus, the
    meeting of pollen and pistil will cause gamete lysis in plants.

    3. Producing Nectar or Flower Sarees

    Flowers always give honey. Nectar has a very high sugar content, which is why it is called the
    sweet floral liquid.
    This sweet liquid is produced when the plant is in flower.

    When the flowers bloom, that’s when the nectar-eating animals will be attracted to the flowers.
    The more animals that are attracted, the faster the pollination process.

    4. Beautiful Parts of Plants

    Not infrequently flowers become an integral part of plants. So that the flowers are always
    brightly colored and attractive shape.
    If the plant doesn’t flower, it may be less attractive
    to look at.
    Bright colors and varied shapes make flowers a very popular ornamental plant.
    So far, flowers are still preferred by many people to be planted as ornamental plants in their yard
    gardens.

    Pistil Head Function

    The stigma is the part that is at the very top of the pistil. The main function of the stigma
    is as a place to receive pollen during the pollination process.

    Function of the stigma in Pollination

    Any reproduction of flowering plants is always accompanied by pollination. Pollination is the
    process by which pollen reaches the pistil through the threads.
    Pollination is divided into
    three types of pollination, namely self-pollination, cross-pollination and cross-pollination.

    1. Self Pollination

    Self-pollination can only occur in flowering plants of the same type or in flowering plants of a different
    type, but always of the same type.
    Self-pollination can be observed in barley, long beans,
    sesame, rice, chickpeas and others.
    However, self-pollination has its drawbacks, namely the
    seeds obtained from this pollination cannot germinate.

    Self pollination is further divided into two categories: natural self pollination and artificial self
    pollination.
    Natural self-pollination is pollination that occurs when flowering plants have
    complete reproductive organs.

    Complete reproductive organs consist of stamens and pistils which are located inside the flower.
    In other words, flowering plants that do not have complete reproductive organs cannot
    self-pollinate naturally.

    Artificial self-pollination is the process of pollination through human intervention.
    Self-pollination assisted by human intervention is known as self-crossing or self-fertilization.
    The way pollination works, for example, humans collect the available pistils on the stamens and
    then the pollen is placed on the stigma of the same flowering plant.

    2 . Cross Pollination

    Having discussed self-pollination, we will now discuss cross-pollination. Cross pollination is
    the pollination of the stamens and pistils that occurs in two different plant species.

    An intermediate is needed during cross pollination. This intermediary aims to transport pollen
    from one flower to another.
    You can see cross-pollination mediators in insects, such as
    butterflies, wasps, hummingbirds, in the wind.

    These nectar-eating animals really need flowers as a food source because flowers contain nectar.
    As these animals forage on one flower and another, some of the pollen grains attach to the pistil
    and this is where cross pollination takes place.

    It is important to emphasize during cross pollination that not all flowers are valued by insects.
    In general, these insects only like striking flower colors and pungent odors. However,
    with butterflies it is different.
    Flowers also contain honey, butterflies love flowers.

    Meanwhile, pollination with the help or wind usually occurs in flowering plants without heads and flower petals,
    such as weeds.

    3. Pollination of the Bastar

    Pollination occurs when pollen from one flower lands on the stigma of another flower of the same but
    different type.
    Pollination is usually assisted by animals such as bees, beetles and
    butterflies or birds such as hummingbirds, starlings and sparrows, but some are assisted by wind, water and
    humans.

    Wind-assisted pollination occurs in flowers that have the following characteristics:

    • There are many of them and they gather to form groups
    • Dry pollen, numerous, small and light
    • Small crown or no crown
    • Large anther shape
    • Long stalks
    • The stigma is hairy and sticks out

    Functions of Other Flower Components

    1. Flower stalks

    The first part of the flower is the flower stalk. Flower stalks are located at the bottom of
    the flower.
    The flower stalk acts as a link between the flower and the branch. In
    addition to the connecting function, the flower stalk also has a function as a flower support.

    2. Flower Base

    The second part of the interest rate is the interest base. The base of the flower is located
    at the bottom of the flower, just above the stalk.
    The floral base serves as a place to fix the
    wreath.

    3. Petals

    The third part of the flower is the petals. Petals are located on the outside of the flower.
    The petals protect the petals while they are still buds and will open when the petals are in full
    bloom.

    Petals usually match the color and shape of the leaves. Each petal is called a calyx.
    In some flowers, besides the petals, additional petals grow or what is commonly known as
    epicalicia.

    4. Flower Crown

    The fourth part of the flower is the flower crown. The flower crown is located in the second
    layer and is adjacent to the flower petals.
    Flower crowns are used to attract insects and/or
    other animals to live, which will help pollinate.

    In addition to the main function of attracting insects and/or other animals for pollination, flower garlands have
    another function, which is to protect the genitals of flowers before pollination occurs.

    The corolla is the most beautiful and often brightly colored part of the flower. Flower crowns
    are also commonly referred to as floral ornaments.
    Each flower crown also has its own name,
    namely petal.

    5. Stamens (Male Genitals)

    The fifth part of the flower is the stamen. The stamens are usually in the center of the
    corolla.
    The main function of the stamens is as a means of reproduction (male genitalia) of
    plants.

    The stamens are divided into 3 parts, namely the anther, the anther and the connecting rod.
    The stamen is the filiform part which is usually round in cross section while the anther is the
    part of the stamen which is located at the end of the stamen.

    The function of the stamens can be divided into three parts, namely:

    a. Sari stalk

    The stamens are part of the stamens which have the function of making the anthers position high enough from
    the flower crown.
    The stamens are thread-like in cross section and generally round in
    shape.

    b. Head Sari

    The anther is the part of the stamen that functions as a reservoir for pollen. The location of
    the anther is above the anther stalk.
    The anthers inside have two juice compartments.
    Inside the pollen chamber there are pollen grains.

    Pollen is a male cell multiplication tool. This powder is attached to the anthers.
    This powder will also be carried by insects and other animals and will stick to other
    flowers.

    c. Sari Room Liaison

    The liaison of the sari chamber is the stem or stalk of the sari gang which has a function as a liaison between
    the two parts of the anther which are on the right and the left.

    6. Pistil (Female Genitals)

    The sixth part of the flower is the pistil. The pistil is usually located in the center of the
    flower.
    Pistils are the main function of reproductive (female) plants.

    Pistil also has its own parts, namely:

    a. Pistil Head

    stigma (stigma), the stigma is located at the very top of the pistil. The stigma is generally
    sticky because the stigma is a place for pollen to attach.

    b. Pistil stalk

    The pistil stalk is the part that connects the pistil to the ovary. Apart from functioning as
    a binder, the stalk also has a function as a force support so that it can stand upright, steady and stay in
    place.
    The pistil has a pollen tube which functions to support the fertilization process by
    providing an ovary.

    c. Ovary

    Will fruit or can also be referred to as ovary / ovary is one part of the pistil that rests on the base of
    the flower.
    The fruit will enlarge when the pollination process is complete. In
    the ovary, there is also a carpel/carpellum.
    Carpell/carpellum is a fruit leaf where each fruit
    leaf contains an ovule or what can also be called an ovule/ovulum.

    d. Seed

    Ovule also known as ovule, is the structural part of the seed plant, which protects and stores the ovum.
    The seeds will then develop into seeds after fertilization is complete. The ovule is easily visible
    in plants with open seeds and in flowering plants the ovule is covered with ovule.

    Flowers are also one of the plant organs that require nutrients for their survival. Therefore,
    in each flower you can find different transporters that serve as food for that flower.

    Things That Help the Generative Pollination
    Process

    There are several things that can affect plant pollination. These elements can come from
    natural activities or from other living organisms.
    The following are things that can help the
    success of plant pollination.

    1. Generative Reproduction with the Help of
    the Wind

    The process of pollination or the method of propagating plants with the help of the wind is often called
    anemogamy.
    The feature of this reproductive process is that it often occurs in plants that live
    in places where there is not too much water and tends to be arid.
    In addition, the pollen
    produced is usually dry and the crown size is relatively smaller.

    During this pollination, the wind moves the stem causing the stamen to fall onto the pistil and pollination
    occurs in the plant.
    Examples of plants that reproduce or pollinate are often assisted by the
    wind, namely grass and corn.

    2. Generative reproduction with the help of
    animals

    Reproduction or the process of pollination with the help of animals, can also be called zoidiogamy.
    The main characteristics of plants that reproduce in this way are that these plants usually produce
    nectar which is brightly colored and has an odor or fragrance that animals like.

    During this pollination, the plant will emit characteristics such as bright colors or attractive smells to
    attract animals.
    Then the animal will land causing the pollen to stick to the animal.
    The animals then latch on to other flowers and spread the sticky pollen onto their bodies for a
    smooth pollination process.

    An example of a plant that relies on breeding or pollination in this way is the rafflesia arnoldi flower.
    Rafflesia arnoldi flowers will emit a very pleasant smell, attracting flies to perch.
    The flies will then go to other Rafflesia Arnoldi flowers and fix the pollen from the previous
    flower, which will accelerate the pollination of the Rafflesia Arnoldi flower.

    3. Generative propagation with the help of
    water

    Generative reproduction can also occur using water, also known as irrigation. Vegetative tangs
    reproduce in this way, often with special traits, namely;
    The entire tree trunk is covered in
    water, the tree’s habitat is also in the water, the tree acts as a producer of food for the animals around
    it.

    This reproduction usually occurs in plants such as algae or seaweed. Pollination in algal
    plants occurs when water washes over the stamens and accidentally attaches them to the pistils of other
    algae.

    4. Generative Reproduction with Human
    Assistance

    In addition to pollination with the help of wind, animals and water, there are also breeding plants that
    develop only with human assistance.
    This process of human reproduction is also commonly
    referred to as anthropogamy.

    Examples of plants propagated by cloning include vanilla, salak and even orchids. In orchids,
    pollination with the help of humans is necessary because these plants have only one sex organ per flower.
    Therefore, the resumption of stamens with pistils requires human assistance.

  • Know the Forming Factors of Social Groups and Forms of Social Groups

    Social shaping factors – Humans have an instinct to live with other humans and form groups. That is, no human being can live without having a social group. In fact, by nature, humans have been members of social groups, families, since birth.

    The interactions built by humans in their development are not only limited to the family. We interact with individuals and other social groups to form systems within the most related social groups.

    At least, there are two main desires that drive humans to live in groups. First, humans always want to join with other humans around. Second, humans want to unite with the natural situation around them (Abdulsyani, 2012:103).

    Not only that, humans also tend to live in groups in order to facilitate work or have common interests. Every member in a social group works together to meet their needs, to get protection, to get a sense of security.

    Definition of Social Groups

    According to Soerjono Soekanto (2014: 88) as written in the book “Social Groups”, humans are creatures that have two desires from birth, namely to unite with other humans and unite with nature. Therefore, humans always live in groups and form social groups for the sake of survival.

    So dynamic is human life and its social groups according to the process of interaction that we establish in the social groups in which we live.

    There are a small part of our life needs that can be met only by our own abilities. Even so, most of the necessities of life must be cultivated jointly with other people. For this reason, humans are called social beings.

    As social beings, we interact with others, which results in the formation of various groups in society.

    Humans as social beings are part of society. We will form laws, compile rules of behavior, to work together in larger groups in social life. Social groups must also help each other in this development because human progress is based on our ability to work together.

    In social groups, humans also need affection, understanding, self-esteem, and recognition. Meanwhile, emotional responses like this can only be obtained when we relate and interact with other people in the order of social life.

    In essence, a social group as Soerjono Soekanto (2014: 102) calls a set or unit of people who live together because of the relationship between them. This relationship, among other things, involves mutual influence and awareness to help each other.

    Social Group Forming Factors

     

    From human beings, there are three factors behind us forming a group:

    1. There is a shared belief in the importance of grouping and purpose.
    2. The expectations of the members.
    3. The ideology that binds the members.

    Meanwhile, group formation or joining a person in a group is caused by similarities and closeness factors. Here are the details:

    1. Similarity Factor 

    The similarity factor among members means that it has become a habit when other people like to associate with other individuals who have similarities with themselves: whether it’s in terms of interests, beliefs, values, age, level of intelligence, to other personal characteristics.

    2. Proximity Factor

    Proximity factor, namely the proximity of the place of origin or place of residence. The closer geographic distance two people are, the more likely they are to see, talk, and socialize.

    So, physical proximity can increase opportunities for interaction and joint activities. This allows the formation of social groups. In fact, when someone travels and meets people from the same area, they will feel that they have an inner bond even though they didn’t know each other at first.

     

    Factors Driving Human Forming Social Groups

     

    There are a number of factors that encourage humans to form or join a social group. The following are the driving factors:

    1. The urge to sustain life

    By joining or forming social groups, we are indirectly trying to survive. This is due to the needs of human life that cannot possibly be fulfilled by living alone.

    Human relations will expand so that wherever you go you will always feel safe, with social groups.

    2. The urge to continue the descent

    All living things must have the same nature, namely to continue their descent. One can find each other’s partner through social groups. That way, this encouragement can be achieved.

    3. Encouragement to increase work efficiency and effectiveness

    As for what can be seen that currently humans are required to be able to do work effectively and efficiently in order to obtain maximum work results. The presence of social groups can increase both of these things.

    For example, work can be completed more quickly and the results can be better with the division of tasks.

    Social Group Functions

    One of the reasons individuals join groups is to benefit from the existence of certain groups. Social groups are formed so that their members can work together to meet the needs of life.

    Following are the functions of social groups according to sociologists and individuals:

    According to the Sociologist

    Social groups can provide benefits for individuals, organizations, and society. According to Darwin Cartwright and Alwin Zander, the following are the functions of social groups:

    1. Bridging and coordinating social gaps that arise in groups. Cooperation is carried out by members to overcome social inequalities through intensive interaction and communication.
    2. Provide important information to group members. Members who receive information must convey it to other members so that group cohesiveness can be maintained.
    3. Growing and developing the work of members so that other works that are beneficial to society can emerge.
    4. Disseminate the work of group members to the community so that it benefits others.
    5. Give satisfaction in the form of material or immaterial to group members.
    6. Create clear goals to meet the needs of members. This clear goal will encourage the performance of the group members.

    According to Individual

    When someone joins a group, he is expected to live within the rules of the group. The group will direct its members to become the expected person.

    At the same time, members will be given the opportunity to develop themselves according to their capacity. Through the group, someone is expected to be able to achieve the best quality.

    Not only that, another role of the group is to accommodate the aspirations of community members. The reason is, everyone needs a place to express their aspirations and the group is expected to make it happen.

    By Organization

    Basically, a group is a collection of individuals who are in an organization. Members in the organization also depend on each other in carrying out their performance in a structured manner.

    The function of a group can be positive or negative for the organization. Positively, social groups can enhance teamwork and group productivity in organizations. However, on the other hand, groups can have a negative impact if they limit the level of organizational productivity.

    According to Society

    For society, social groups have functions, both at simple and complex levels. This is because society consists of various forms of social groups. Community members can meet their needs with the existence of social groups.

    Simultaneously, an individual can join in more than one social group with different roles, statuses, and positions. In this case, the individual may experience role conflict or even become an adaptable person.

    Characteristics and Terms of Social Groups

    Not everyone who gathers physically can be called a group. According to the book “Social Groups”, sociologists formulate the existence of a number of characteristics and conditions that indicate the existence of groups in society.

    Apart from being understood by looking at the differences, we must also see the group through its internal structure as a whole system.

    Characteristic features

    Following are the characteristics of social groups according to Wila Hulky (2012: 99-100):

    1. At least two people
    2. Have intimate interaction and communication
    3. Group members influence each other
    4. The group is considered ended if the relationship in the minds of its members ends
    5. There is a transfer of culture from generation to generation
    6. Shared interests and interests form the color of the group
    7. The formation of groups can be based on various situations, namely situations that require humans to unite

    There are also other opinions related to the characteristics of social groups according to Muzafir Sherif (Santoso, 1999:48), namely as follows:

    1. There is the same drive or motive in each individual until there is social interaction with each other and agree on a common goal
    2. There are different reactions and skills between one individual and another as a result of social interaction
    3. Formation and affirmation of a clear group structure, consisting of roles and positions that develop by themselves in order to achieve goals
    4. The presence of norms that govern the relationship between members of the group

    Condition

    We often see crowds of people in various places in life, such as at bus stops or ticket queues. However, it was not a social group despite being a collection of humans. There are certain criteria that must be met for a group of people called a social group.

    The following are the requirements for social groups according to Soerjono Soekanto (2014: 99):

    1. There is awareness of every member of the group that he will be part of the group.
    2. There is a reciprocal relationship between one member and another
    3. The presence of certain similarities, such as background, fate, goals, or ideology which then creates a sense of solidarity among group members
    4. Rule, structured, and have a pattern
    5. Regeneration of social groups in order to maintain the sustainability of the group

    Multiple Membership in Social Groups

    Each individual must be part of a particular social group. Not only being a member of a group, we will also generally join other groups. For example, children have playgroups, both at school and at home.

    Various social groups continue to be created and increased in society because of the ease of formation and the process of joining. Each individual will not only be a member of one social group, but can also be part of another social group at will, such as in formal, informal, primary, secondary, and other groups.

    The term multiple membership in the book “Social Groups” denotes individuals who belong to more than one social group. This is triggered when we are faced with a situation when we have to join a social group, but our current social group cannot answer the problem at hand.

    For example, we have to work on assignments that are done in groups at school, so that the family group is not involved. Optionally, we can add to the group by forming or joining an existing group.

    Meanwhile, dual membership also has consequences related to our activity level. The reason is, membership can hinder or actually accelerate social processes if it can fulfill every role we have to carry out.

    Forms of Social Groups

     

    In the midst of social groups humans live, starting from the family, community, school, to the work environment. Humans also interact intensively in their social groups. The following are the forms of social groups according to the book “Social Groups”:

    1. Primary group

    Primary group is a type of social group that has relatively few members, more intimate social relations, is familial, and has intensive social interaction. So, the orientation built by the primary group is the social relations within it.

    2. Secondary Group

    There is also a secondary group which is a large group consisting of many people, the relationship between its members does not need to be based on personal recognition, and its nature is not very lasting. For this reason, the closeness of its members is not so close and only temporary.

    3. Formal Groups

    Groups that have strict rules and are created intentionally by their members to regulate relationships between people are called formal groups or formal groups . The relationship system in this group is functional. Its formation is done for the sake of achieving certain goals, so formal groups have a clear work system.

    4. Informal Groups

    Informal groups have personal, close, and intimate relationships based on the system of relationships they build. Not only that, this group also does not have a specific organizational structure. Unofficial nature, not bound by certain legal rules. The orientation in it aims for common interests and is based on shared experience.

    5. Reference Group

    The reference group according to Paul B. Horton (1993: 221) is a group that becomes a reference when making an assessment or a group whose assessment is the same as our group. This group is able to influence behavior, attitudes, and personality.

    6. Group Membership

    Group membership or membership group is a group in which there are individuals who join as members of the group physically. To determine group membership , the main measure is the process of interaction within the social group.

    7. In-Group Group

    Social dynamics in social groups must occur and this can have an impact on the level of group solidarity. Social dynamics in some cases can increase the solidarity of the group. For example, a feeling of kinship within a person can increase the closeness between group members, and this is one indicator of the formation of an in-group .

    In-group is a social group that is well identified by each member so that they consider the group as part of life.

    8. Out-Group Group

    The diversity of backgrounds that exist in Indonesia gives rise to very diverse social groups, for example groups based on religious backgrounds. Of course, every member of this social group is unlikely to join another religious group.

    Sinaumed’s, another group that we cannot join because we belong to another group, for example in terms of religion, is called an out-group . Richard T. Schaefer, an American sociologist, calls out-groups a social group whose position is outside the individual, or we are not members of that group.

    Conclusion 

    Social groups are of course very important, that’s why we also have to understand the factors that form social groups well. As social beings, we must belong to each other in groups and must learn from each other for closeness among group members and a better sense of solidarity.

    To increase your knowledge, read more and do literacy activities. Today, there are so many books related to sociology and various other knowledge that are worth studying.

    With sinaumedia.com , you can get the most up -to-date and high-quality books from the biggest online bookstore in Indonesia! To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

     

    Author: Sevilla Nouval Evanda

    Digital book reference (Accessed 15 Dec 22):

    • Social Groups